Owner’s manual
SEAT Toledo
6JA012720BL
Inglés
6JA012720BL (11.18)
SEAT Toledo Inglés (11.18)
SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand,
that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no
right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or
omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.
All rights on changes are reserved.
❀
This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.
© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.18
Vehicle identification data
Model:
Vehicle Registration:
Vehicle identification
number:
Date of vehicle registration
or vehicle delivery:
SEAT Official Service:
Service advisor:
Telephone:
Confirmation of receipt of documentation
and vehicle keys
The following items were delivered
with the vehicle:
YES NO
On-board documentation
First key
Second key
Correct working order of all keys was
checked
Location:
Date:
Signature of owner:
Introduction
Thank you f
or your trust choosing a SEAT v
e-
hicl
e.
With your new SEAT, you will be able to enjoy
a vehicle with state-of-the-art technology
and top quality features.
We recommend reading this Instruction Man-
ual carefully to learn more about your vehicle
so you can enjoy all its benefits in your daily
driving.
Information about handling is complemented
with instructions regarding the operation and
maintenance of the vehicle in order to ensure
its safety and maintain its value. Moreover, we
want to give you valuable advice and tips to
drive your vehicle efficiently and respecting
the environment.
We wish you safe and enjoyable motoring.
SEAT, S.A.
WARNING
Read and always observe safety infor-
mation concerning the passenger's
front airbag
›
››
page 75, Important in-
formation regarding the front passeng-
er's airbag.
About this manual
This manual describes the f
eat
ur
es of the ve-
hicle at the time of drafting this text. Some of
the features described below will be intro-
duced in the future or will only be available in
certain markets.
Some of the features described here are
not included in all the types or variations
of the model and they can be varied or
modified based on technical or marketing
requirements without it being considered
misleading advertising.
Some details on the drawings may vary from
its vehicle and must be interpreted as a
standard representation.
The direction indicators (left, right, forwards,
backwards) in this manual refer to the travel
direction of the vehicle unless otherwise sta-
ted.
The audiovisual material is only meant to
help the users better understand some fea-
tures of the car. It is not a replacement for the
instruction manual. Access the instruction
manual to see the complete information and
warnings.
The features marked with an asterisk
are included by default only in certain
versions of the model, supplied as op-
tional only for certain versions or only of-
fered in certain countries.
Trademarks are marked with ®. The ab-
sence of this symbol does not guarantee
that the term is not a trademark.
It indicates that the section continues on
the next page.
Important warnings on the page.
More in-depth content on the page.
General information on page indicated.
Emergency information on the page.
You can access the information in this manual
using:
●
Thematic table of contents that follows the
manual’s general chapter structure.
●
Visual table of contents that uses graphics
to indicate the pages containing “essential”
information, which is detailed in the corre-
sponding chapters.
●
Alphabetical index with many terms and
synonyms to help you find information.
WARNING
Texts after this symbol contain informa-
tion about safety and w
arn you about
possible accident or injury risks.
®
CAUTION
Texts after this symbol indicate possible
damage to the vehicl
e.
For the sake of the environment
Texts after this symbol contain informa-
tion about the protection of the envir
on-
ment.
Note
Texts after this symbol contain addition-
al information.
Printed Instruction Manual
The print
ed instruction manual cont
ains r
ele-
vant information about the use of the vehicle
and the Infotainment System.
The digital version of the manuals contains
more in-depth information.
Digital Version of the Infotainment
Syst
em Manual
Fig. 1 SEAT website
The digital version is available on SEAT's offi-
cial website
.
To view the digital version of the manual:
●
scan the QR code
›››
Fig. 1
●
OR enter the following address in the navi-
gator website:
http://www.seat.com/owners/your-
seat/manuals-offline.html
choose your v
ehicle and then “Infotainment”.
Related videos
Fig. 2 SEAT website
The operation of some of the vehicle's fea-
tures can be sho
wn as an instruction video:
●
scan the QR code
›››
Fig. 2
●
OR enter the following address in the navi-
gator website:
http://www.seat.com/owners/your-
seat/manuals-offline.html
choose your v
ehicle and then “Multimedia”.
Note
Video instructions are only available in
certain l
anguages.
Frequently Asked Ques-
tions
Before driving
How do you adjust the seat?
›››
page 14
How do you adjust the steering wheel?
›››
page 16
How do you adjust the exterior mirrors?
›››
page 15
How do you turn on the exterior lights?
›››
page 21
How does the automatic gearbox selector lever
work?
››
›
page 36
How do you refuel?
›
›
›
page 41
How do you activate the windscreen wipers and
windscreen washer system?
›››
page 23
Emergency situations
A warning lamp lights up or flashes. What does
this mean?
›››
page 34
Where are the first-aid kit and the warning trian-
gle in the vehicl
e?
›››
page 78
How do you open the bonnet?
›››
page 13
How do you perform a jump start?
›››
page 54
Where is the vehicle tool kit located?
›››
page 48
How do you repair a tyre with the anti-puncture
kit?
›››
page 47
How do you change a wheel?
›››
page 48
How do you change a fuse?
›››
page 45
How do you change a light?
›››
page 46
How do you tow a vehicle?
›››
page 52
Useful tips
How do you set the time?
›››
page 99
When should the vehicle inspection should be
performed?
››
›
page 33
What functions do the buttons/thumbwheels on
the steering wheel perform?
›
››
page 103
How do you drive in an economical and environ-
mentally-friendly way?
›
››
page 211
How do you check and top up the engine oil?
›››
page 42
How do you check and top up the engine cool-
ant?
›››
page 43
How do you top up the windscreen washer fluid?
›››
page 44
How do you check and top up the brake fluid?
›››
page 43
How do you check and adjust tyre pressure val-
ues?
›››
page 256
Vehicle washing tips
›››
page 265
Functions of interest
Easy Connect, CAR menu
›››
page 24
How does the START-STOP system work?
›››
page 215
What parking assistants are available?
›››
page 222
How does the rear assist work?
›››
page 227
How does tyre pressure monitoring work?
›››
page 260
How do you open the vehicle without a key
(K
eyl
ess Access)?
›
››
page 113
Interior lighting and ambient light
›››
page 126
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
The essential
s
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Interior view (left-hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Interior view (steering wheel on the
right) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
How it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Gearbox lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Fluid level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Action in the event of a puncture . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Emergency towing of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 52
How to jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . 56
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Advice about driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Correct position of the vehicle occu-
pants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
The whys and wherefores of seat belts . . . . . 63
How to properly adjust your seat belt . . . . . . 66
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Airbag safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Deactivating airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Transporting children safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Safety for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Self-help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Tyre repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Fuses and bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Changing the fog light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Changing the rear lights (on the side pan-
el) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Changing tail lights (on the rear lid) . . . . . . . . 92
Changing the side and number plate
bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
General instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Instruments and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . 98
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Multi-function steering wheel* . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Anti-theft alarm* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Controls for the windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Lights and visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Windscreen wipers and windscreen wash-
ers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Seats and head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Adjusting seats and head restraints . . . . . . . . . 131
Seat functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Transport and practical equipment . . . . . . 135
Practical equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Storing objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Roof rack* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Heating and air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Air conditioning (manual)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Climatronic* (automatic air condition-
ing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
5
Table of Contents
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Safety warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Overview of the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
General instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Full Link* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Vehicle Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Start and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Starting and stopping the engine . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Brakes and brake servo systems . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Braking and stability systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Gear-change indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Run-in and economical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Engine management and emission control
syst
em . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
13
Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Driver assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Start-Stop system* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Cruise control (CCS)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Emergency braking assistance system
(Front Assist)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Rear Assist “Rear View Camera”* . . . . . . . . . . 227
Fatigue detection (break recommenda-
tion)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Towing bracket device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Towing bracket device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Practical tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Accessories and modifications to the ve-
hicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Accessories and modifications to the vehi-
cle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Checking and refilling levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Window washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Tyre monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Winter service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Additional service offers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Information for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Information for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Information about the EU Directive
2014/53/EU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Information on fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Engine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Vehicle data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
6
The essentials
Interior view (left-hand drive)
1
›››
page 15
2
›››
page 21
3
›››
page 21
4
›››
page 34
5
›››
page 34
6
›››
page 23
7
›››
page 27
8
›››
page 22
9
›››
page 24
10
›››
page 17
11
›››
page 37
12
›››
page 20
13
›››
page 36
14
›››
page 14
15
›››
page 13
16
›››
page 45
17
›››
page 14
18
›››
page 14
19
›››
page 16
9
The essentials
Interior view (steering wheel on the right)
1
›››
page 21
2
›››
page 34
3
›››
page 22
4
›››
page 24
5
›››
page 23
6
›››
page 27
7
›››
page 34
8
›››
page 21
9
›››
page 15
10
›››
page 17
11
›››
page 37
12
›››
page 13
13
›››
page 36
14
›››
page 16
15
›››
page 14
16
›››
page 14
17
›››
page 20
18
›››
page 45
19
›››
page 14
10
The essentials
How it works
Unl
ocking and l
ocking
Doors
Fig. 3
Remote control key: keys.
Fig. 4
Centre console: central locking switch.
Locking and unlocking the vehicle using
the k
ey
●
L
ocking: pr
ess the button
›››
Fig. 3.
●
Unlocking: press the button
›››
Fig. 3.
●
Unlock rear lid: press the
›››
Fig. 3 button
until all the turn signals on the vehicle briefly
light up.
Locking and unlocking with the central
locking switch
●
Locking: press the button
›››
Fig. 4. The
warning lamp on the button will light up. None
of the doors can be opened from the outside.
The doors can be opened from the inside by
pulling the inside door handle.
●
Unlocking: press the button
›››
Fig. 4. The
warning lamp on the button will switch off.
›››
in Unlocking and locking the
vehicle on page 109
›››
page 108
›››
page 1
1,
›››
page 12
Unlocking or locking of driver door
Fig. 5
Driver door lever: hidden lock cylinder.
If the central locking system should fail to op-
er
at
e
, the driver door can still be locked and
unlocked by turning the key in the lock.
●
Unfold the vehicle key shaft.
●
Insert the key shaft into the lower opening in
the cover on the driver door handle
›››
Fig. 5
(arrow) then remove the cover upwards.
●
Insert the key blade into the lock cylinder to
unlock or lock the vehicle.
Special characteristics
●
The anti-theft alarm will remain active
when vehicles are unlocked. However, it is not
triggered
›››
page 110.
●
After the driver door is opened, you have 15
seconds to switch on the ignition. Once this
time has elapsed, the alarm is triggered.
»
11
The essentials
●
S
wit
ch the ignition on. The el
ectronic immo-
bilizer recognises a valid vehicle key and de-
activates the anti-theft alarm system.
Note
The anti-theft alarm is not activated when
the vehicle is l
ocked manually using the
key shaft
›››
page 110.
Locking manually
Fig. 6 Rear door: emergency lock.
On the front of a door with no lock cylinder
ther
e is an emer
gency l
ocking device that is
only visible when the door is open.
Locking
●
Remove the cap
A
›
›
›
Fig. 6.
●
Insert the key in the slot
B
and turn it in the
dir
ection of the arr
o
w until horizontal (on the
other direction on the right-hand door).
●
Replace the cap.
Once the door has been locked, it can no
longer be opened from the outside. The door
can be opened again from the inside by pull-
ing the door handle.
Rear lid
Fig. 7 Rear lid: opening from the outside.
●
Opening the rear lid: pull on the release lev-
er and lift it up
›
›
›
Fig. 7. The rear lid opens
automatically.
●
Close the rear lid: hold it by one of the han-
dles on the interior lining and close it by push-
ing gently.
›››
in Opening and closing on
page 118
›››
page 1
1
7
›
››
page 12
Manual release mechanism for the
rear lid
Fig. 8
Luggage compartment: access to man-
ual r
el
ease
.
The rear lid can be unlocked manually from
inside in the e
v
ent of an emer
gency.
●
Insert the key in the opening in the lining of
the rear lid and move the key in the direction
of the arrow until the lock is released.
12
The essentials
Bonnet
Fig. 9
Unlocking the bonnet.
Fig. 10 Locking the bonnet.
Opening the bonnet
The bonnet is r
el
eased fr
om inside the vehi-
cle.
Before opening the bonnet, make sure that
the windscreen wiper arms are in place
against the windscreen.
●
Open the door and pull the lever under the
dashboard
›››
Fig. 9
1
.
●
To lift the bonnet: press the release catch
under the bonnet up
w
ar
ds
2
. The arrester
hook under the bonnet is r
el
eased.
●
The bonnet can be opened. R
elease the
bonnet stay in the direction of the arrow
›››
Fig. 10
3
and secure it in the fixture de-
signed f
or this in the bonnet
4
.
Cl
osing the bonnet
●
Slightly lift the bonnet.
●
R
el
ease the bonnet stay and replace it in its
support.
●
At a height of approximately 30 cm let it fall
so it locks.
If the bonnet does not close, do not press
downwards. Open it again and let it fall as
mentioned above.
›››
in Working in the engine com-
partment on page 245
›››
page 2
44
13
The essentials
Controls for the windows*
Fig. 11
Detail of the driver door: controls for
the windo
ws.
●
Opening the window: press the button .
●
Closing the window: pull the button .
Butt
ons on the driv
er door
Windo
w on the front left door
Window on the front right door
Window on the rear left door
Window on the rear right door
Safety switch for deactivating the electric
window buttons in the rear doors.
›››
in Operation of the electric win-
dows on page 119
›››
page 1
19
1
2
3
4
5
Before driving
Manually adjusting the fr
ont seats
Fig. 12
Front seats: manual seat adjustment.
Forwards/backwards: pull the lever and
mo
v
e the seat.
R
aising/lowering: pull/push the lever.
Tilt backrest: pull the lever back.
›››
in Introduction on page 131
1
2
3
Adjusting the head restraints
Fig. 13
Front seat: adjusting the head restraint.
Grab the sides of the head restraints with
both hands and push up
w
ar
ds to the desired
position. To lower it, repeat the same action,
pressing the
1
button on the side.
›››
in Head restraints on page 132
›››
page 61,
›
››
page 132
14
The essentials
Adjustment of the seat belt
Fig. 14
Positioning and removing the seat belt
buckl
e
.
Fig. 15 Correct seat belt and head restraint
positions, viewed fr
om front and the side.
To adjust the seat belt around your shoulders,
adjust the height of the seats.
The shoul
der part of the seat belt shoul
d be
w
ell centred over it, never over the neck. The
seat belt lies flat and fits comfortably on the
upper part of the body.
The lap part of the seat belt lies across the
pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat
belt lies flat and fits comfortably on the pel-
vis.
›››
page 64
›››
page 66
Seat belt tensioners
During a collision, the seat belts on the front
seats are retr
acted automatically.
The tensioner can be triggered only once.
›››
in Maintenance and disposal of
belt tensioners on page 68
››
›
page 6
7
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
Fig. 16
Detail of the driver door: control for the
e
xt
erior mirr
or.
Adjusting the exterior mirrors: Turn the knob to
the corr
esponding position:
T
urning the knob t
o the desired position,
adjust the mirrors on the driver side (L,
»
L/R
15
The essentials
left) and the passenger side (R, right) to
the dir
ection desir
ed.
Depending on the equipment fitt
ed on
the vehicle, the mirrors may be heated
according to the outside temperature.
›››
in Exterior mirrors on page 130
›››
page 130
Adjusting the steering wheel
Fig. 17 Lever in the lower left side of the steer-
ing column.
Adjusting the position of the steering wheel:
pull the
›
›
›
Fig. 17
1
lever down, move the
st
eering wheel t
o the desir
ed position and lift
the lever back up until it locks.
›››
in Adjusting the steering wheel
position on page 59
Airbags
Fr
ont airbags
Fig. 18 Driver airbag in the steering wheel and
fr
ont passenger airbag in the dash panel
16
The essentials
Fig. 19
Airbag covers reacting when the front
airbags ar
e trigger
ed.
The front airbag for the driver is located in the
st
eering wheel
›
›
›
Fig. 18 and the front pas-
senger airbag is located in the dash panel
›››
Fig. 18 . Airbags are identified by the
word “AIRBAG”.
When the driver and front passenger airbags
are deployed, the covers remain attached to
the steering wheel and dashboard, respec-
tively
›››
Fig. 19.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the front
airbag system gives the driver and the front
passenger additional protection for the head
and chest in the event of a severe frontal col-
lision.
Their special design allows the controlled es-
cape of the propellant gas when an occu-
pant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, the
head and chest are protected by the airbag.
After the collision, the airbag deflates suffi-
ciently to allow visibility.
›››
in Front airbags on page 70
Deactivating the front passenger
fr
ont airbag
Fig. 20 Front passenger front airbag switch.
To deactivate the front passenger front
airbag:
●
Open the glove compartment on the front
passenger side
.
●
Insert the k
ey bl
ade into the slot provided in
the deactivation switch.
●
Approximately ¾ of the length of the key
blade remains inserted (the maximum).
●
Turn the key blade, changing its position to
. Do not force it. If you have difficulty, en-
sure that you have inserted the key as far as it
will go.
●
Finally, check the control lamp on the in-
strument panel where it shows
the following should appear .
›››
in Switch front passenger front
airbag on and off on page 73
›››
page 7
3
17
The essentials
Side airbags*
Fig. 21
Side airbag in driver's seat.
Fig. 22
Illustration of completely inflated side
airbag on l
eft side of v
ehicl
e.
The side airbags are located in the driver's
seat and fr
ont passenger seat backr
ests
›
››
Fig. 21. The locations are identified by the
text “AIRBAG” in the upper region of the
backrests.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the side air-
bag system provides additional protection for
the upper body in the event of a severe side
collision
›››
page 63, The whys and
wherefores of seat belts.
In a side collision, the side airbags reduce the
risk of injury to passengers to the areas of the
body facing the impact. In addition to the nor-
mal protection from the front seat belts, pas-
sengers are also held fast in the event of a
side collision, and this is how these airbags
provide maximum protection.
›››
in Side airbags* on page 71
Head-protection airbags*
Fig. 23 Location of head-protection airbags.
Fig. 24 Deployed head-protection airbags.
The head-protection airbags are located on
both sides in the int
erior abo
v
e the doors
›››
Fig. 23 and are identified with the text “AIR-
BAG”.
In conjunction with the seat belts, the head-
protection airbag system gives the vehicle
occupants additional protection for the head
and upper body in the event of a severe side
collision
›››
page 18.
›››
in Head-protection airbags* on
page 71
18
The essentials
Child seats
Impor
t
ant inf
ormation regarding
the front passenger's airbag
Fig. 25
Passenger side sun blind.
Fig. 26
On the rear frame of the passenger
side door: adhesiv
e in r
el
ation to the airbag.
A sticker with important information about the
passenger airbag is l
ocat
ed on the passeng-
er
's sun visor and/or on the passenger side
door frame.
›››
in Important information re-
garding the front passenger
's airbag
on page 75
›››
page 75
Possible ways to secure child seats
You can secure a child seat to the rear seat or
front passenger seat in the foll
owing ways:
●
Child seats in groups 0 to 3 can be secur
ed
with a seat belt.
●
Child seats for groups 0, 0+ and 1 can be
fastened without seat belts, using the “ISO-
FIX” and Top Tether* system, using the “ISO-
FIX” and Top Tether* securing rings
›››
page 20.
Weight
group
Seat locations
Fr
ont
passen-
ger
a)
Rear
out
er
R
ear
centr
e
Group 0
<10 kg
U
b)
U/L U
Gr
oup 0+
<13 kg
U
b)
U/L U
Gr
oup I
9-18 kg
U
b)
U/L
U
Weight
group
Seat locations
Fr
ont
passen-
ger
a)
Rear
out
er
R
ear
centr
e
Group II/III
15-36 kg
U
b)
U U
U: Suit
able for universal approved restraining sys-
tems for use in this age cat
egory (universal retention
systems are those fitted using the adult seat belt).
L: Suitable for retention systems using the “ISOFIX”
and Top Tether* anchors.
a)
Compliance with current national legislation and
the manuf
act
ur
er's instructions is required when using
or installing child seats.
b)
Move the front passenger seat as far back as possi-
ble, as high as possible and always disable the air-
bag.
The systems include the child restraint
system mounting with an upper retaining
strap (Top Tether) and lower anchoring
points on the seat.
›››
in Safety instructions on
page 76
19
The essentials
Securing child seats with “ISOFIX”
and T
op T
ether*
Fig. 27
ISOFIX securing rings.
Fig. 28 Top Tether* securing ring.
Child seats with the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether*
syst
em can be secur
ed quickly, easily and
saf
ely on the rear outer seats.
When removing or fitting the child seat,
please be sure to follow the manufacturer's
instructions.
●
Move the rear seat as far to the rear as it
will go.
●
Press the child seat onto the “ISOFIX” re-
taining rings until the child seat can be heard
to engage. If the child seat is equipped with
Top Tether* anchor points, secure it to the
correspondent ring. Observe the manufactur-
er's instructions.
●
Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensure
that it is secure.
Two “ISOFIX” retaining rings are fitted on both
outermost rear seats. In some vehicles, the
rings are secured to the seat frame and, in
others, they are secured to the rear floor. Ac-
cess to the “ISOFIX” rings is between the rear
seat backrest and the seat cushioning. The
Top Tether* rings are located at the rear of
the backrests of the rear seats (behind the
seat backrest or in the boot).
Child seats with the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether*
attachment system are available from Tech-
nical Services.
›››
in Safety instructions on
page 76
Starting the vehicle
Ignition l
ock
Fig. 29
Ignition key positions.
Turn on the ignition: place the key in the igni-
tion and st
art the engine
.
L
ocking and unlocking the steering wheel
●
Lock the steering wheel: remove the key
from the ignition and turn the wheel until it
locks. In vehicles with automatic transmission,
in order to remove the key, move the gear
shift to the P position. If necessary, press the
gear shift blocking key and release it.
●
Unlock the steering wheel: put the key into
the ignition and turn it at the same time as the
steering wheel in the direction indicated by
the arrow. If it is not possible to turn the steer-
ing wheel, it may be because it is locked.
20
The essentials
Turning on/switching off the ignition, glow
plugs r
eheating
●
T
urn on the ignition: t
urn the key to the
2
position.
●
Turn off the ignition: turn the key to the
1
position.
●
Diesel vehicles : the gl
o
w plugs r
eheat
when the ignition is switched on.
Starting the engine
●
Manual transmission: press the clutch ped-
al all the way down and move the gearbox
lever into neutral.
●
Automatic transmission: press the brake
pedal and move the selector lever to the P
position or into N.
●
Turn the key to the
3
position. The key au-
t
omatically r
et
urns to the
2
position. Do not
pr
ess the accel
er
ator.
Start-Stop system*
When you stop and release the clutch pedal,
the Start-Stop system* turns off the engine.
The ignition remains switched on.
›››
in Introduction on page 196
›››
page 196
Lights and visibility
Light s
wit
ch
Fig. 30 Instrument console: light panel.
Turn the switch to the required position
›
›
›
Fig. 30.
Sym-
bol
Ignition
switched off
Ignition is
s
witched on
Fog lights, dipped
beam and side
lights off.
Light off or daytime
driving light on.
The “Coming
home” and “Leav-
ing home” guide
lights may be
swit
ched on.
Automatic control of
dipped beam and
daytime running
light.
Side light on.
Dipped beam
headlight off
Dipped beam
s
witched on.
F
og lights: move the switch to the first po-
sition, fr
om positions
, or .
Rear fog light: move the switch complete-
ly from positions , or .
Turn on fog lights: push the switch or turn it to
the position.
›››
in Introduction on page 120
›››
page 120
Turn signal and main beam lever
Fig. 31 Turn signal and main beam lever.
More the lever to the required position:
Right t
urn light: right
-hand parking light
(ignition s
witched off).
»
1
21
The essentials
Left turn light: left-hand parking light (ig-
nition s
wit
ched off).
Main beam on: contr
ol lamp lit up on
the instrument panel.
Light flash: on with the lever pushed. Con-
trol lamp lit up.
Lever all the way down to switch it off.
›››
page 122
Hazard warning lights
Fig. 32
Dashboard: switch for hazard warning
lights.
Switched on, for example:
●
When approaching a traffic jam
●
In an emergency
●
The vehicle has broken down
2
3
4
●
When t
o
wing or being t
owed
›››
page 125
Interior lights
Fig. 33
Detail of headliner: variant 1
Fig. 34
Detail of headliner: variant 2
Knob Function
Switches interior lights off.
Switches interior lights on.
Switches door contact control on
(centr
al position).
The interior lights come on aut
omati-
cally when the vehicle is unlocked, a
door is opened or the key is removed
from the ignition.
The lights go off a few seconds after
all the doors are closed, the vehicle is
locked or the ignition is switched on.
Turning the reading light on and off
›››
page 126
22
The essentials
Windscreen wipers and window
wiper bl
ade
Fig. 35
Operating the windscreen wiper and
r
ear wiper
.
More the lever to the required position:
0
Windscreen wipers off.
1
Windscreen wipers interval wipe.
Using the control
››
›
Fig. 35
A
adjust
the int
erv
al (v
ehicles without rain sen-
sor), or the sensitivity of the rain sensor.
2
Slow wipe.
3
Continuous wipe.
4
Short wipe. Brief press, short clean.
Hol
d the l
e
ver down for more time to in-
crease the wipe frequency.
More the lever to the required position:
5
Automatic wipe. The windscreen wash-
er function is activated by pushing the
l
ever forwards, and simultaneously the
windscreen wipers start.
6
Interval wipe for rear window. The wiper
will wipe the window approximately ev-
ery six seconds.
7
The rear window wash function is acti-
vated by pr
essing the lever, and the
rear wiper starts simultaneously.
›››
in Introduction on page 128
›››
page 128
›››
page 56
23
The essentials
Easy Connect
Menu settings: Vehicle
Fig. 36 Easy Connect: Main menu. Fig. 37 Easy Connect: CAR menu.
The actual number of menus available and
the name of the v
arious options in these me-
nus will depend on the v
ehicl
e’s electronics
and equipment.
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
If the Infotainment System is off, switch it on.
●
Press the Infotainment button
and
then the Vehicle function butt
on
›
›
›
Fig. 36,
or, press the Infotainment button
to go to
the Vehicle menu
›
›
›
Fig. 37.
●
Press the SETTINGS function button to open
the Vehicle settings menu.
●
To select a function in the menu, press the
desired button.
When the function button check box is activa-
ted , the function is active.
Pressing the menu button
will always take
you t
o the l
ast menu used.
Any changes made using the settings menus
ar
e automatically saved on closing those
menus.
24
The essentials
Menu Submenu Possible setting Description
ESC system – Activation of the Electronic Stability Programme (ESC)
›››
page 201
Tyres
Tyre monitor system Tyre pressure storing (Calibration)
›››
page 260
Winter tyres
Activation and deactivation of the speed warning. Setting the speed warning
value
››
›
page 261
Lights
Light assist
Motorway function, turning-on time, automatic lights when raining, one-touch
signalling.
›››
page 120
Vehicle interior lighting Brightness of instrument panel and controls
›››
page 127
“Coming home/Leaving home”
function
Switch-on time of the “Coming home” and “Leaving home” functions
›››
page 124
Driver assistance
Front Assist (emergency brak-
ing assistance system)
Activation/deactiv
ation: Front Assist, advance warning, distance warning dis-
play
››
›
page 219
Fatigue detection Activation/deactivation
›››
page 230
Parking and ma-
noeuvring
Parking and manoeuvring set-
tings
Automatically activate front volume, front sound treble, rear volume, rear sound
treble
›››
page 227
Ambient lighting – Background lighting, switch-off, colour
›››
page 127
Mirrors and wind-
screen wipers
Rear view mirrors Activate/deactivate folding after parking
›››
page 130
Windscreen wipers Activate and deactivate automatic wipe in case of rain, wipe when reversing
›››
page 23
Opening and clos-
ing
Electric windows control Convenience open function, all, only driver
›››
page 119
Central locking Unlocking doors, automatic lock when driving, interior monitoring
›››
page 110
Instrument panel –
Current consumption, average consumption, convenience consumers, ECO
Advice, travelling time, distance travelled, average speed, digital speed dis-
play, speed warning, oil temperature, reset data “when setting off”, reset data
for “total calculation”
›››
page 28
Date and time – Time source, time, time zone, time format, date, date format
›››
page 100
»
25
The essentials
Menu Submenu Possible setting Description
Units – Distance, speed, temperature, volume, fuel consumption, pressure –
Service –
Chassis number, date of next SEAT service inspection, date of next oil change
service
›››
page 33
Factory settings
All Restore all settings
–
Individual Restore factory settings for lights, driver assistance, parking and manoeuvring
WARNING
Any distraction may lead to an accident,
with the risk of injury. Operating the Easy
Connect system whil
e driving could dis-
tract you from traffic.
26
The essentials
Driver information system
Intr
oduction
With the ignition switched on, it is possible to
read the differ
ent functions of the display by
scrolling through the menus.
In vehicles with multifunction steering wheel,
the multifunction display can only be operat-
ed with the steering wheel buttons.
The number of menus displayed on the in-
strument panel will vary according to the ve-
hicle electronics and equipment.
A specialised workshop will be able to pro-
gramme or modify additional functions, ac-
cording to the vehicle equipment. SEAT rec-
ommends visiting a SEAT Official Service.
Some menu options can only be read when
the vehicle is at a standstill.
As long as a priority 1 warning is displayed, it
will not be possible to read the menus
›››
page 32. Some warning messages can
be confirmed and made to disappear with
the windscreen wiper lever button or the mul-
tifunction steering wheel button.
The information system also provides the fol-
lowing information and displays (depending
on the vehicle's equipment):
Driving data
›››
page 28
■
Since start
■
Since refuelling
■
Long-t
erm
Assistance systems
›››
page 30
Navigation
›››
page 178
Audio
›››
page 171
Telephone
›››
page 189
Vehicle status
›››
page 31
WARNING
Any distraction may lead to an accident,
with the risk of injury.
●
Do not operate the instrument panel con-
trols when driving.
Operating the instrument panel
menus
Fig. 38 Windscreen wipers lever: control but-
t
ons.
Fig. 39 Right side of the multifunction steering
wheel: control butt
ons.
The driver information system is controlled
with the multifunction st
eering wheel butt
ons
›
››
Fig. 39 or with the windscreen wiper lever
›››
Fig. 38 (if the vehicle is not equipped with
multifunction steering wheel).
Enabling the main menu
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
If a message or vehicle pictogram appears,
press button
›››
Fig. 38
1
on the windscreen
wiper l
e
v
er or button
on the multifunction
st
eering wheel
›
›
›
Fig. 39.
●
If using the wiper lever: to display the main
screen or to return to the main menu from an-
other menu, hold down the rocker button
›››
Fig. 38
2
.
●
If handled with the multi-function steering
wheel: the main menu list will not be dis-
pl
ayed. T
o go fr
om point to point in the main
»
27
The essentials
menu, press button or several
times
›
›
›
Fig. 39.
Select a submenu
●
Press the rocker switch
›››
Fig. 38
2
on the
windscr
een wiper l
e
ver up or down or turn the
thumbwheel of the multifunction steering
wheel
›››
Fig. 39 until the desired option ap-
pears marked on the menu.
●
The selected option is displayed between
two horizontal lines. In addition, a triangle is
displayed on the right:
●
To consult the submenu option, press but-
ton
›››
Fig. 38
1
on the windscreen wiper
l
e
v
er or button
on the multifunction steer-
ing wheel
›
›
›
Fig. 39.
Making changes according to the menu
●
With the rocker switch on the windscreen
wiper lever or the thumbwheel of the multi-
function steering wheel, make the desired
changes. To increase or decrease the values
more quickly, turn the thumbwheel faster.
●
Mark or confirm the selection with button
›››
Fig. 38
1
on the windscreen wiper lever or
butt
on on the multifunction steering wheel
›
›
›
Fig. 39.
Selection menu
Menu Function
Driving
data
Information and possible configura-
tions of the multifunction display
(MFD)
›››
page 28.
Assis-
tance
systems
Information and possible configura-
tions of the driver assistance syst
ems
›››
page 30.
Naviga-
tion
Information of the enabled navigation
system: when a rout
e guidance is ac-
tivated, the turning arrows and prox-
imity bars are displayed. The appear-
ance is similar to the Easy Connect
system.
If route guidance is not activated, the
direction of travel (compass) and the
name of the street along which you
are driving are shown
›››
page 178.
Audio
Station display on the radio.
Track name on the CD
.
Track name in Media mode
›››
page 172.
Tele-
phone
Information and possible pre-instal-
lation settings for mobile phone
›››
page 189.
Lap tim-
er*
In a racing circuit, measurement and
memorisation of lap times by the ve-
hicle and comparison with previously
measured best times
›››
page 30.
Menu Function
Vehicle
status
Display of the current warning or in-
formation te
xts and other system
components, according to equip-
ment
›››
page 31.
Driving data
The multifunction display (MFA) shows differ-
ent values for the journey and the consump-
tion.
Changing betw
een display modes on the
MFD
●
In vehicles without multifunction steering
wheel: press the rock
er switch
on the
windscr
een wiper l
e
ver
›››
Fig. 38.
●
In vehicles with multi-function wheel: rotate
the thumbwheel
›››
Fig. 39.
Multifunction display memory
The multifunction display is equipped with
three memories that work automatically:
●
since start
●
since refuelling
●
total value.
On the screen display, you can read which
memory is currently displayed.
28
The essentials
Toggle between memories with the igni-
tion on and the memory displ
ayed
●
Pr
ess the button on the windscreen
wiper l
e
v
er or the
button of the multifunc-
tion st
eering wheel.
Menu Function
Since
start
Display and storage of the values for
the journey and the consumption
from when the ignition is swit
ched on
to when it is switched off.
If the journey is continued in less
than 2 hours after the ignition is
switched off, the new data is added
to the data already stored in the
memory. The memory will automati-
cally be deleted if the journey is in-
terrupted for more than 2 hours.
Since re-
fuelling
Display and storage of the values for
the journey and the consumption. By
refuelling, the memory will be erased
aut
omatically.
Long-term
The memory records the values for a
specific number of partial trips, up to
a tot
al of 19 hours and 59 minutes or
99 hours and 59 minutes, or 1999.9
km or 9999 km, depending on the
model of instrument panel. On
reaching either of these limits
a)
, the
memory is automatically erased and
starts to count from 0 again.
a)
It varies according to the instrument panel version.
Erasing a memory manually
●
Select the memory that you wish to erase.
●
Hold the
button of the multifunction
st
eering wheel or the
button of the multi-
function wheel pr
essed do
wn f
or about 2
seconds.
Personalising the displays
In the Easy Connect system you can adjust
which of the possible displays of the multi-
function display (MFD) can be shown on the
instrument panel display with the
button
and the SETTINGS function button
›
›
›
page 24.
Data summary
Menu Function
Current
fuel con-
sumption
The current fuel consumption dis-
play operat
es throughout the
journey, in litres/100 km; and with
the engine running and the vehi-
cle stopped, in litres/hour.
Average
fuel con-
sumption
After turning on the ignition, aver-
age fuel consumption in li-
tres/100 km will be displayed af
-
ter travelling about 100 metres.
Otherwise horizontal lines are
displayed. The value shown is up-
dated approximately every 5 sec-
onds.
ACT
®
*: Depending on the equip-
ment, number of active cylinders.
Menu Function
Operating
range
Approximate distance in km that
can still be travell
ed with the fuel
remaining in the tank, assuming
the same style of driving is main-
tained. This is calculated using
the current fuel consumption.
Travelling
time
This indicates the hours (h) and
minutes (min) since the ignition
was s
witched on.
Journey
Distance covered in km (m) after
switching on the ignition.
Average
speed
The av
erage speed will be shown
after a distance of about 100 me-
tr
es has been travelled. Other-
wise horizontal lines are dis-
played. The value shown is upda-
ted approximately every 5 sec-
onds.
Digital
display of
speed
Current speed displayed in digi-
tal format.
Speed warn-
ing at ---
km/h or Speed
warning at
--- mph
If the stored speed is exceeded
(between 30 - 250 km/h, or 19 -
155 mph), an audible warning is
given together with a visual warn-
ing.
Oil temper-
ature
Updated engine oil temperature
digital display
Coolant
temperature
gauge
Digital display of the current tem-
perature of the liquid coolant.
»
29
The essentials
Menu Function
Convenience
consumers
Information about the vehicle’s
main convenience consumers. It
is displayed by means of a con-
sumption indicat
or bar.
Eco tips Tips on how to save fuel.
Reset data
“when set-
ting off”
R
eset journey data when setting
off.
Reset data
for “total
calcula-
tion”
R
eset travel journey to zero.
Storing a speed with the speed warning
●
Select the display Speed warning at
--- km/h (--- mph)
●
Press the button
on the windscreen
wiper l
e
v
er or the button
on the multifunc-
tion st
eering wheel t
o st
ore the current speed
and activate the warning.
●
Activate: adjust to the desired speed within
5 seconds using the rocker switch
on the
windscr
een wiper l
e
ver or by turning the
thumbwheel on the multifunction steering
wheel. Next, press the button
or
again or wait several seconds. The speed is
st
or
ed and the w
arning activated.
●
Deactivate: press the button
or
The stored speed is deleted.
Assistance systems menu
Menu Function
Front As-
sist
Switching the monitoring system
on and off
›››
page 219.
Fatigue
detection*
Switching the fatigue detection on
or off (pause recommendation)
››
›
page 230.
Timer*
You can access the timer via the selection
menu
›
›
›
page 28.
It allows you to manually time lap times on a
racing circuit, memorise them and compare
them to the vehicle's previous best times.
The following menus can be displayed:
●
Stop
●
Lap
●
Pause
●
Partial time
●
Statistics
Change from one menu to another
●
Vehicles without multifunction steering
wheel: press the rocker switch
on the
windscr
een wiper l
e
ver.
●
Vehicles with multi-function wheel: press
the key
or .
Menu “Stop”
Start
The timer starts.
If there are e
xisting laps and they are
included in the statistics, it will begin
with the number of laps in question.
It is only possible to begin with a new
first lap if the statistics have been re-
set first in the Statistics menu.
Since
start
The timer begins when the vehicle
sets off.
If the vehicl
e is already moving, the
timer begins once the vehicle has
stopped.
Statis-
tics
The Statistics menu is displayed
on the screen.
Menu “Lap”
New lap
The timer of the current lap stops and
a new lap st
arts immediately. The
time for the lap you have just comple-
ted is included in the statistics.
Partial
time
For approx. 5 seconds a partial time
is displayed. The timer continues in
parall
el.
Stop
The current lap timer will be interrup-
ted. The lap does not end. The
Pause
menu is displayed.
30
The essentials
Menu “Pause”
Continue The interrupted timer continues.
New lap
A new timer starts. The halted lap
ends and is included in the statistics.
Interr.
lap
The timer of the current lap ends and
is cancelled. It is not included in the
statistics.
End
The curr
ent timer ends. The lap is in-
cluded in the statistics.
Menu “Partial time”
Partial
time
For approx. 5 seconds a partial time is
displayed. The timer continues in par-
all
el.
New lap
The timer of the current lap stops and
a new lap st
arts immediately. The
time for the lap you have just comple-
ted is included in the statistics.
Stop
The current lap timer will be interrup-
ted. The lap does not end. The
Pause
menu is displayed.
Menu “Statistics”
View of the latest lap times:
– total time
– best l
ap time
– worst lap time
– average lap duration
A maximum of 10 laps is possible, and
a total duration of 99 hours, 59 mi-
nutes and 59 seconds.
If one of the 2 limits is reached, you
will have to reset the statistics in order
to begin a new timer.
Back This returns to the previous menu.
Reset-
ting to
zero
All the memorised statistical data are
reset.
WARNING
Do your best to avoid handling the timer
while driving.
●
Only set the timer or consult statistics
when the v
ehicle is stationary.
●
While driving, do not handle the timer in
complicated driving situations.
Status display
Bonnet, r
ear lid and doors open
Fig. 40
A: bonnet open; B: rear lid open; C: left
fr
ont door open; D: right back door open (only
in 5-door v
ehicl
es).
When the ignition is switched on or when driv-
ing, the bonnet, r
ear lid or doors that ar
e
»
31
The essentials
open will be indicated on the instrument pan-
el displ
ay, and, as applicabl
e
, this will be indi-
cated audibly. The display may vary accord-
ing to the type of instrument panel fitted.
Illustra-
tion
Key to
›››
Fig. 40
A
Do not continue driving!
The bonnet is open or is not properly
closed
›
››
page 244.
B
Do not continue driving!
The rear lid is open or is not properly
cl
osed
›››
page 12.
C, D
Do not continue driving!
A vehicle door is open or is not pr
oper-
ly closed
›››
page 110.
›››
page 99
Warning and information messages
The system runs a check on certain compo-
nents and functions when the ignition is
s
wit
ched on and whil
e the vehicle is moving.
Faults in the operation are displayed on the
screen using red and yellow symbols and
messages on the instrument panel display
(
›››
page 34,
›››
page 34) and, in some ca-
ses, with audible warnings. The display may
vary according to the type of instrument pan-
el fitted.
Priority 1 warning (red symbols)
Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audible
warnings.
Stop the vehicle! It is dangerous
›››
in Control
and warning lamps on page 103!
Check the function that is faulty and repair it. If nec-
essary, request assistance from specialised person-
nel.
Priority 2 warning (yellow symbols)
Symbol flashing or lit; partly combined with audible
warnings.
A fault
y function, or fluids which are below the cor-
rect levels may cause damage to the vehicle!
›››
in
Control and warning l
amps on page 103
Check the faulty function as soon as possible. If nec-
essary, request assistance from specialised person-
nel.
Informative text
Information relating to different vehicle processes.
Saving tips
Tips on how to save fuel will be displayed in
conditions that incr
ease fuel consumption.
F
oll
ow them to reduce consumption. The indi-
cations appear automatically only with the
efficiency programme. After a time, the tips
will disappear automatically.
If you wish to hide a saving tip immediately
after it appears, press any button on the
windscreen wiper lever*/multifunction steer-
ing wheel*.
Note
●
If you hide a saving tip, it will reappear af
-
ter you switch the ignition on again.
●
The saving tips do not appear in all situa-
tions, but rather with a large separation of
time.
Speed warning device
The speed warning device warns the driver
when they hav
e e
x
ceeded the pre-set speed
limit by 3 km/h (2 mph). An audible warning
signal sounds, and the warning lamp and
the driver message Speed limit excee-
ded! will be displayed simultaneously on the
instrument panel. The warning lamp
switches off after reducing speed below the
stored maximum limit.
Speed warning programming is recommen-
ded if you wish to be reminded of a maximum
speed, such as when travelling in a country
with different speed limits or for a maximum
speed for winter tyres.
The warning limit can be set from 30 to 250
km/h (19 to 155 mph)
›››
page 30. The adjust-
ment is made at 5 km/h (3 mph) intervals.
32
The essentials
Note
●
Please bear in mind that, ev
en with the
speed warning function, it is still important
to keep an eye on the vehicle speed with
the speedometer and to observe the legal
speed limits.
●
The speed limit warning function in the
version for some countries warns you at a
speed of 120 km/h (75 mph). This is a facto-
ry-set speed limit.
Service intervals
Fig. 41
Instrument panel
The service interval indication appears on the
instrument panel displ
ay
›
›
›
Fig. 41
1
.
SEAT distinguishes between services with en-
gine oil change (e
.g. Oil change service) and
services
without
engine oil change (e.g. In-
spection).
In vehicles with Services established by
time or mileage, the service intervals are al-
ready pre-defined.
In vehicles with LongLife Service, the inter-
vals are determined individually. Thanks to
technological progress, maintenance work
has been greatly reduced. Because of the
technology used by SEAT, with this service
you only need to change the oil when the ve-
hicle so requires. To calculate this variation
(max. 2 years), the vehicle's conditions of use
and individual driving styles are considered.
The advance warning first appears 20 days
before the date established for the corre-
sponding service. The kilometres (miles) re-
maining until the next service are always
rounded up to the nearest 100 km (miles) and
the time is given in complete days. The cur-
rent service message cannot be viewed until
500 km after the last service. Prior to this, on-
ly lines are visible on the display.
Inspection reminder
When the Service date is approaching, when
the ignition is switched on a Service remind-
er is displayed.
Vehicles without text messages, a spanner
symbol is displayed on the instrument
panel and a figure given in km.
The kilometres indicated are the maximum
number of kilometres that can be travelled
until the next service. After a few seconds, the
display mode changes. A clock symbol ap-
pears and the number of days until the next
service is due.
Vehicles with text messages, Service in
--- km (miles) or --- days is displayed
on the instrument panel.
Service due
When the service date is due, an audible
warning is given when the ignition is switched
on and the spanner displayed on the screen
flashes for a few seconds .
Vehicles with text messages, Service in
--- km or --- days is displayed on the in-
strument panel.
Check a service warning
With the ignition switched on, the engine off
and the vehicle at a standstill, the current
service notification can be read:
Press and hold the button 0.0/SET
for more
than 5 seconds t
o consult the service mes-
sage
›
›
›
Fig. 41
2
.
»
33
The essentials
When the service dat
e has passed
, a minus
sign is displ
ayed in front of the number of kilo-
metres or days.
Vehicles with text messages: Service since
--- km or --- days ago will be shown on
the display.
Resetting service interval display
If the service was not carried out by a SEAT
dealership, the display can be reset as fol-
lows:
●
Switch off the ignition, press and hold the
button 0.0/SET
›
›
›
Fig. 41
2
.
●
Switch ignition back on.
●
Release the button 0.
0/SET
and press it
again f
or the ne
xt 20 seconds.
Note
●
The service message disappears after a
fe
w seconds, when the engine is started or
when OK/RESET
is pressed on the wind-
screen wiper le
ver, or OK
on the multifunc-
tion steering wheel.
●
In vehicl
es with the LongLife system in
which the battery has been disconnected
for a long period of time, it is not possible to
calculate the date of the next service.
Therefore the service interval display may
not be correct. In this case, bear in mind the
maximum service intervals permitted
›››
page 262.
Cruise control
Oper
ating the cruise contr
ol sys-
t
em (CCS)*
Fig. 42
Left of the steering column: CCS
s
wit
ch and contr
ols.
●
Switching on the CCS: Move switch
›
›
›
Fig. 42
1
to
. The syst
em is on. If no
speed has been pr
ogrammed, the system will
not control it.
●
Activate the CCS: Press button
›››
Fig. 42
2
in the ar
ea. The curr
ent speed is
memorised and contr
olled.
●
Temporarily switching off the CCS: Move
switch
›››
Fig. 42
1
to
or push the
br
ak
e. The cruise control system is switched
off temporarily.
●
Reactivating the CCS: Press button
›››
Fig. 42
2
in . The memorised speed is
sav
ed and contr
oll
ed again.
●
Increasing stored speed during CCS regu-
lation: press button
2
in
. The vehicle
accel
er
ates until the new stored speed.
●
Reducing stored speed during CCS regula-
tion: press button
2
in t
o lower the
speed by 1 km/h (
1 mph). Speed is r
educed
until reaching the new stored speed.
●
Switching off the CCS: Move switch
›››
Fig. 42
1
to
. The system is disconnec-
t
ed and the memorised speed is deleted.
›››
in Cruise control operation on
page 218
›››
page 2
1
7
Warning lamps
Contr
ol and w
arning l
amps
Red warning lamps
Notification central lamp: additional infor-
mation on the instrument panel display
Parking br
ake on
›››
page 200.
Fault in the brake system
›
›
›
page 200.
Fault in the steering system
›
›
›
page 209.
Driver or passenger has not fastened seat
belt
›››
page 63.
34
The essentials
Yellow warning lamps
Notification central lamp: additional infor-
mation on the instrument panel display
Front br
ake pads worn
›››
page 200.
Fault in ESC or disconnection caused by
the system; OR
ESC or ASR in operation
›››
page 201.
ASR manually deactivated
›››
page 201.
Fault in the ABS
›››
page 201.
Rear fog light switched on
›››
page 120.
Fault in the emission control system
›
›
›
page 213.
Pre-heating of the diesel engine; OR fault
in the management of the diesel engine
›››
page 213.
Fault in the petrol engine management
›››
page 213.
Particulate filter blocked
›››
page 213.
Fault in the steering system
›››
page 209.
Tyre monitor system
›››
page 260.
Fuel tank almost empty
›››
page 102.
Fault in airbag system and seat belt ten-
sioners
›››
page 73.
Front passenger front airbag is disa-
bled
›››
page 73.
Fault in the lighting of the vehicle
›››
page 120.
Windshield cleaning fluid too low
›››
page 128.
Low engine oil level
›››
page 247.
Fault in the gearbox
›››
page 207.
Other warning lamps
Turn lights or emergency lights on
›››
page 120.
Trailer turn signals
›››
page 120.
Press the foot brake
›
›
›
page 204.
Cruise control
›
›
›
page 217.
Main beam on or flasher on
›
›
›
page 120.
Door(s), rear lid or bonnet open or not
properly closed
›
››
page 31.
Engine cooling fluid
›››
page 248.
Engine oil pressure
›››
page 247.
Fault in the battery
›››
page 253.
Electronic immobiliser active
›››
page 197.
Service interval display
›››
page 33.
Mobile telephone is connected via Blue-
tooth
®
››
›
page 189.
Mobile telephone battery charge status
›››
page 189.
Risk of freezing
›››
page 100.
Start-Stop system activated
›
›
›
page 215.
Start-Stop system unavailable
›››
page 215.
Low consumption driving status
›››
page 100.
›››
in Control and warning lamps
on page 103
›››
page 103
35
The essentials
Gearbox lever
Manual gearbo
x
Fig. 43
Gear shift pattern of a 5 or 6-speed
manual gearbo
x.
The position of the gears is indicated on the
gearbo
x l
e
ver
›››
Fig. 43.
●
Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot
right down.
●
Move the gearbox lever to the required po-
sition.
●
Release the clutch.
Selecting reverse gear
●
Press the clutch pedal and keep your foot
right down.
●
With the gearbox lever in neutral, push it
downwards, move it to the left as far as it will
go and then forwards to select reverse
›››
Fig. 43
R
.
●
Release the clutch.
›››
in Changing gears on page 203
›››
page 203
Automatic gearbox*
Fig. 44
Automatic transmission: selector lever
positions.
Parking lock
R
e
v
erse gear
Neutral (idling)
Drive (forward)
Sports program: drive (forward)
P
R
N
D
S
Tiptronic mode: pull the lever forwards
(+) to go up a gear or backwards (–) to
go down a gear.
›››
in Basic information on
page 204
›››
page 203
›››
page 36
Manual release of the selector lev-
er
Fig. 45 Manual release of the selector lever.
If there is a fault in the power system to the
el
ectr
onic sel
ector lever lock system (flat
battery, blown fuse) or the system itself is
faulty, the selector lever cannot be moved
from position P in the normal manner, which
prevents the vehicle from being moved. The
+/–
36
The essentials
selector lever must be unlocked using the
manual r
el
ease
.
●
Apply the handbrake.
●
Pull gently on both sides at the front of the
selector lever cover.
●
Also loosen the cover at the rear.
●
Press the yellow plastic part with your fin-
ger in the direction indicated by the arrow
›››
Fig. 45.
●
Press the interlock button on the selector
lever knob at the same time and move the se-
lector lever to position N (if the selector lever
is moved back to position P, it will lock again).
Air conditioning
How does Climatronic* work?
Fig. 46 In the centre console: Climatronic control
panel.
Buttons/controls
Int
erior t
emper
ature setting
Display
Selected interior temperature
Degrees Centigrade or Fahrenheit
1
2
3
Automatic air conditioning mode
Defr
ost or demist windscr
een
Air fl
ow direction
Air recirculation
Cooling on/off
4
5
6
7
8
Selected blower speed
Butt
ons/contr
ol
s
Set blower speed
Interior temperature sensor
Defrost or demist windscreen
»
9
10
11
12
37
The essentials
Automatic mode
Air distribution t
o windo
ws
Air distribution t
o upper body
Air distribution to footwells
13
14
15
16
Air recirculation
Cooling on/off
17
18
›››
in General notes on page 146
›››
page 151
How does the manual air conditioning* work?
Fig. 47 In the centre console: manual air con-
ditioning control panel.
Temperature
Blow
er
Air distribution
– Air distribution towards the wind-
screen in order to demist or defrost.
– Air distribution to upper body.
– Air distribution to footwell.
– Air distribution to the windscreen and
the footwell.
Air recirculation
A
B
C
1
A/C: Switching the cooling system on
2
Basic positions
Control position Button
Air vents 4
A B C 1 2
Windscreen and side window
defrost or demist
Full right 3 or 4
Switched off
Switched on automati-
cally
a)
Open and direct towards the
side window
Mild heating
Required tempera-
ture
2 or 3
/
Do not s
witch on Do not switch on Opening
Cool as quickly as possible
Anti-clockwise as
far as it will go
Briefly 4, then 2
or 3
It is swit
ched on
automatically
b)
Switched on Opening
38
The essentials
Basic positions
Control position Button
Air vents 4
A B C 1 2
Optimum cooling
Required tempera-
ture
1 or 2
Do not switch on Switched on
Open and direct towards the
roof
Fresh air mode - blower
Anti-clockwise as
far as it will go
Requir
ed posi-
tion
Do not switch on Switched off Opening
a)
The lamp in button
2
lights up, even if not all of the conditions for cooling system operations are met. Cooling is indicated as available once all of the conditions are met
›››
page 149, Manual operation.
b)
In certain conditions, air recirculation mode can switch on automatically
›››
page 150, a lamp illuminates in the button.
›››
in General notes on page 146
›››
page 149
How does the heating and the fresh air system work?
Fig. 48 Centre console: heating system and
fresh air control
s.
Temperature
Bl
o
w
er
Air distribution
– Air distribution towards the wind-
screen in order to demist or defrost.
– Air distribution to upper body.
– Air distribution to footwell.
– Air distribution to the windscreen and
the footwell.
Air recirculation
»
A
B
C
1
39
The essentials
Basic positions
Control position
Button
1 Air vents 4
A B C
Windscreen and side window
defrost or demist
Full right 3 or 4
Switched off
Open and direct towards
the side window
Mild heating Required temperature 2 or 3
/
Do not switch on Opening
Fresh air mode - blower
Anti-clockwise as far as it
will go
Required position
Do not switch on Opening
›››
in General notes on page 146
›››
page 148
40
The essentials
Fluid level control
Filling capacities
Capacities
Fuel tank
55 litres, of which 7 litres
act as reserve.
Windscreen washer
fluid container in ver
-
sion without headlight
washer
3.5 litres
Windscreen washer
fluid container in ver
-
sions with headlight
washer
5.4 litres
Fuel
Fig. 49
Rear part of the vehicle, right side: tank
lid/t
ank lid with unscr
e
wed cap.
The flap that covers the tank cap is unlocked
and l
ock
ed aut
omatically using the central
locking.
Opening the fuel tank cap
●
Press the fuel tank flap in the direction of
the arrow
1
›
›
›
Fig. 49 A and open it in the
direction of the arrow
2
.
●
Unscr
e
w the cap by t
urning it to the left.
●
Rest it on the upper part of the fuel tank
flap
›››
Fig. 49 B.
Closing the fuel tank cap
●
Unscrew the cap by turning it to the right as
far as it will go.
●
Close the lid.
›››
in Refuelling on page 242
›››
page 2
41
41
The essentials
Oil
Fig. 50
Engine oil dipstick.
Fig. 51
In the engine compartment: Engine oil
fill
er cap
.
The level is measured using the dipstick loca-
t
ed in the engine compartment
›
›
›
page 246.
The oil indicator must be between zones
A
and
C
. It can never go above zone
A
.
●
Z
one
A
: do not add oil.
●
Zone
B
: you can add oil but keep the level
in that z
one
.
●
Z
one
C
: add oil until zone
B
.
T
opping up engine oil
●
Unscr
e
w cap from engine oil filler opening
›››
Fig. 51.
●
Add oil slowly.
●
At the same time, check the level to ensure
you do not add too much.
●
When the oil level reaches at least zone
B
,
unscr
e
w the engine oil fill
er cap carefully.
Engine oil additives
No type of additive should be mixed with the
engine oil. The deterioration caused by these
additives is not covered by the warranty.
Engine oil specifications
Diesel engines
Engine type
Type of
Service
Specifica-
tion
With particulate
filter (DPF)
a)
Set Service
and Flexibl
e
Service Inter-
vals
VW 507 00
a)
Only use recommended oils, otherwise you may
damage the engine
.
If the engine oil l
e
vel is too low
You can get information about the correct en-
gine oil for your vehicle in your specialised
shop. If you have to change your engine oil,
use this oil.
If the recommended engine oil is not availa-
ble, in the event of an emergency you can
change the oil once with a maximum of 0.5 L
of the next oil until the next oil change:
Petrol engines: standard VW 504 00,
VW 502 00, VW 508 00, ACEA C3 or
API SN.
Diesel engines: standard VW 507 00,
VW 505 01, ACEA C3 or API CK-4.
Have the oil changed by a specialised work-
shop.
Using engine oil that is compliant with the VW
504 00 standard instead of VW 508 00
could increase consumption and the vehicle’s
CO
2
emissions.
Recommended by SEAT
SEAT recommends using original SEAT oil to
guarantee high SEAT engine performance.
›››
page 2
47
–
–
42
The essentials
Coolant
Fig. 52
Engine compartment: coolant expan-
sion t
ank cap
.
The coolant tank is located in the engine
compartment
›
›
›
page 246.
When the engine is cold, replace the coolant
when the level is below .
Coolant specifications
The engine cooling system is supplied from
the factory with a specially treated mixture of
water and at least 40 % of the additive G13
(TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixture gives the
necessary frost protection down to -25°C
(-13°F) and protects the light alloy parts of
the engine cooling system against corrosion.
It also prevents scaling and considerably rai-
ses the boiling point of the coolant.
To protect the cooling system, the percent-
age of additive must always be at least 40 %,
even in warm climates where anti-freeze pro-
tection is not required.
If for weather reasons further protection is
necessary, the proportion of additive may be
increased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise an-
tifreeze protection will diminish and this will
worsen cooling.
When the coolant is topped up, use a mixture
of distilled water and at least 40 % of the
G13 or G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G) additive
(both are purple) to obtain optimal anti-cor-
rosion protection. The mixture of G13 with G12
plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or G11 (green-
blue) engine coolants will significantly re-
duce anti-corrosion protection and should
therefore be avoided.
›››
in Topping up the coolant level
on page 250
›››
page 2
4
8
Brake fluid
Fig. 53
Engine compartment: brake fluid reser-
v
oir cap
.
The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en-
gine compartment
›
›
›
page 246.
The level should be between the and
marks. If it is below , please visit a Technical
Service.
›››
in Checking brake fluid level on
page 250
›››
page 250
43
The essentials
Windscreen washer
Fig. 54
In the engine compartment: cap of the
windscr
een w
asher t
ank.
The windscreen washer reservoir is located in
the engine compartment
›
›
›
page 246.
To top up, mix water with a product recom-
mended by SEAT.
In cold temperatures, add anti-freeze.
›››
page 251
Battery
The battery is located in the engine compart-
ment
›
›
›
page 246. It does not require
maintenance. It is checked as part of the In-
spection Service.
›››
in Introduction on page 252
›››
page 251
44
The essentials
Emergencies
Fuses
Fuse l
ocation
Fig. 55
On the dashboard on the driver side:
lid of the fuse bo
x.
Fig. 56
In the engine compartment: lid of the
fuse bo
x.
Underneath the instrument panel
●
Carefully tilt the cover in the direction indi-
cat
ed by the arr
o
w and remove it
›››
Fig. 55.
●
After changing the fuse, replace the cover
on the dash panel in the direction opposite
that is indicated by the arrow so that the cov-
er tabs fit into the slots on the dash panel.
Subsequently, press down on the cover to
close.
In the engine compartment
Press the locking tabs to release the fuse box
cover
›››
Fig. 56.
Identifying fuses situated below the dash
panel by colours
Colour Amp rating
Black 1
Purple 3
Light brown 5
Brown 7.5
Red 10
Blue 15
Yellow 20
White or transparent 25
Green 30
Orange 40
›››
in Introduction on page 83
›››
page 83
Replacing a blown fuse
Fig. 57
Image of a blown fuse.
Preparation
●
Switch off the ignition, lights and all electri-
cal equipment.
●
Open the corresponding fuse box
›
›
›
page 84.
Identifying a blown fuse
A fuse is blown if its metal strip is ruptured
›››
Fig. 57.
Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it has blown.
»
45
The essentials
To replace a fuse
●
Remove the fuse.
●
Replace the blown fuse by one with an
id
entical
amper
age rating (same colour and
markings) and identical size.
●
Replace the cover again or close the fuse
box lid.
Bulbs
Bulbs (12 V)
Full-LED headlights are designed to last the
lif
etime of the car and cannot be r
epl
aced. If
the headlight becomes damaged, go to a
specialised workshop.
Below, the light source used for all functions is
broken down.
Halogen headlights. Type
Daytime running light/side
light
P21W SLL
Dipped beam headlights H7 LL
Main beam headlights H7 LL
Turn signal PY21W
Full-LED main head-
lights
Type
No bulbs may be replaced. All functions are with
LEDs
Front fog light Type
Fog/cornering lights* H8
Rear bulb light Type
Brake light/tail light P21/5W
Side lights
P21/5W (side panel)
R5W (rear lid)
Turn signal P
Y21W
Retro fog light P21W
Reverse lights P21W
LED rear lights Type
Turn signal PY21W
Retro fog light P21W
Reverse lights P21W
The remaining functions work with LEDs
›››
page 86
Action in the event of a punc-
t
ur
e
What t
o do first
●
Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface and
in a safe place as f
ar away from traffic as
possible.
●
Apply the handbrake.
●
Switch on the hazard warning lights.
●
Manual transmission: select the 1st gear.
●
Aut
omatic transmission: Move the selector
lever to position P.
●
If you are towing a trailer, unhitch it from
your vehicle.
●
Have the vehicle tool kit*
›››
page 78
and the spare wheel
›››
page 259 ready.
●
Observe the applicable legislation for each
country (reflective vest, warning triangles,
etc.).
●
All occupants should leave the vehicle and
wait in a safe place (for instance behind the
roadside crash barrier).
WARNING
●
Always observ
e the above steps and pro-
tect yourself and other road users.
●
If you change the wheel on a slope, block
the wheel on the opposite side of the car
46
The essentials
with a stone or similar to prevent the vehi-
cle from mo
ving.
Repairing a tyre with the anti-punc-
ture kit
Fig. 58
Standard display: contents of the anti-
punct
ur
e kit.
The anti-puncture kit is located under the
fl
oor panel in the luggage compartment.
Sealing the t
yr
e
●
Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Use
the
›››
Fig. 58
1
tool to remove the insert.
Pl
ace it on a cl
ean surf
ace.
●
Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously
›››
Fig. 58
10
.
●
Scr
e
w the infl
ator tube
›››
Fig. 58
3
into
the seal
ant bottl
e
. The bottle's seal will break
automatically.
●
Remove the lid from the filling tube
›››
Fig. 58
3
and screw the open end of the
t
ube int
o the t
yre valve.
●
With the tyre sealant bottle upside down, fill
the tyre with the contents of the sealant bot-
tle.
●
Remove the bottle from the valve.
●
Place the insert back into the tyre valve us-
ing the tool
›››
Fig. 58
1
.
Infl
ating the t
yr
e
●
Screw the compressor tyre inflator tube
›››
Fig. 58
5
into the tyre valve.
●
Check that the air bleed screw is closed
›
›
›
Fig. 58
7
.
●
Start the engine and leave it running.
●
Insert the connector
›
›
›
Fig. 58
9
into the
v
ehicl
e's 12-v
olt socket
›››
page 138.
●
Turn the air compressor on with the
ON/OFF switch
›››
Fig. 58
8
.
●
Keep the air compressor running until it rea-
ches 2.
0 t
o 2.5 bar (29-36 psi/200-250 kP
a).
A maximum of 8 minutes.
●
Disconnect the air compressor.
●
If it does not reach the pressure indicated,
unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve.
●
Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant is
distributed throughout the tyre.
●
Screw the compressor tyre inflator into the
valve.
●
Repeat the inflation process.
●
If the indicated pressure still cannot be
reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stop
and request assistance from an authorised
technician.
●
Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrew
the tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve.
●
When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and
2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding
80 km/h (50 mph).
●
Attach the sticker
›››
Fig. 58
2
to the in-
strument clust
er
, within the driv
er's visual
field.
●
Check the pressure again after 10 minutes
›››
page 81.
›››
in TMS Anti-puncture kit (Tyre
Mobility System)* on page 80
›››
page 7
9
47
The essentials
Changing a wheel
V
ehicl
e t
ool kit*
Fig. 59
Vehicle tool kit.
The vehicle tool kit and the jack are stored in
a bo
x on the spar
e wheel or in the spar
e
wheel well. There is also enough space for
the towing bracket ball coupling. The box is
strapped to the spare wheel with tape.
The vehicle tool kit includes the following
parts (depending on equipment):
Screwdriver
Adapter for anti-theft wheel bolts
Towline anchorage
Wire hook for removing hub caps
Jack
Box spanner for wheel bolts
1
2
3
4
5
6
Clip for wheel bolt cover
Spar
e set of bulbs
Bef
or
e stowing the jack again, screw down
the arm as far as it will go.
›››
in What to do first on page 46
›››
page 7
8
Wheel cover
Fig. 60
Remove the wheel cover.
Removing
●
Place the hook from the vehicle tool kit* on
the r
einf
or
ced edge of the wheel trim.
●
Insert the box spanner through the hook,
supporting it on the tyre and remove the
wheel trim.
7
8
Fitting
●
Press the wheel trim onto the wheel at the
cut out designed f
or the v
al
ve.
●
Press the wheel trim on both sides in the di-
rection of the valve so that it fits correctly in
place around all the perimeter.
CAUTION
●
Press down by hand, do not hit the wheel
trim! Knocking it sharply, par
ticularly at
points where the wheel trim has not yet
been inserted, could result in damage to
the wheel trim guiding and centring ele-
ments.
●
Before fitting the trim on a steel wheel at-
tached with an anti-theft wheel bolt, make
sure the bolt is in the hole in the valve area
›››
page 49, Anti-theft wheel bolts*.
●
Where trim is fitted at a later date, ensure
enough air inflow is guaranteed in order to
cool the brake system.
48
The essentials
Wheel bolt caps
Fig. 61
Pull off the wheel bolt cap.
Removing
●
Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools) over the
cap until it clicks int
o pl
ace
›
››
Fig. 61.
●
Remove the cap with the plastic clip.
Fitting
●
Insert the caps as far as they will go over
the wheel bolts.
The wheel bolt caps are stored in a box on
the spare wheel or in the spare wheel well.
Anti-theft wheel bolts*
Fig. 62
Anti-theft wheel bolt with adapter.
Anti-theft wheel bolts (one bolt per wheel)
can only be l
oosened or tight
ened using a
f
actory-supplied adapter.
●
Pull off the hub cap or bolt cover.
●
Insert the adapter
B
›
›
›
Fig. 62 with its
toothed side as far as it will go on the interior
toothing of the anti-theft wheel bolt
A
so
that only the out
er he
x
agonal is protruding.
●
Fit the box spanner as far as it will go over
adapter
B
.
●
Loosen or firmly tighten the wheel bolt
›
›
›
page 49.
●
After removing the adapter, replace the hub
cap or the anti-theft wheel bolt cover.
●
Check the tightening torque as soon as
possible with a torque wrench.
Note down the code number stamped on the
front of the adapter or of the anti-theft wheel
bolt. You will need this number to obtain a
spare adapter from the SEAT original acces-
sories programme.
You should always have a wheel bolt adapter
as part of your vehicle tools.
Loosening and tightening wheel
bolts
Fig. 63
Tyre change: slacken the wheel bolts.
»
49
The essentials
Loosening wheel bolts
●
Insert the box spanner onto the wheel bolt
as f
ar as it will go
1)
.
●
Grip the end of the bo
x spanner and t
urn
the wheel bolt about one turn anti-clockwise
›››
Fig. 63.
Tightening wheel bolts
●
Insert the box spanner onto the wheel bolt
as far as it will go
1)
.
●
Grip the box spanner as close to the end as
possible and tighten the bolt firmly by turning
clockwise.
WARNING
The wheel bolts should only be loosened
slightly (about one turn) befor
e raising the
vehicle with the jack. Risk of accident!
Raising the vehicle
Fig. 64
Wheel change: support points of the
jack
.
Fig. 65
Fitting the jack.
●
Place the jack* (vehicle tools) on firm
gr
ound. If necessary use a l
ar
ge, strong
board or similar support. If the surface is slip-
pery (for example tiles) place the jack on a
rubber mat or similar to prevent it from slip-
ping
›››
.
1)
The corresponding adapter is required to un-
screw or tight
en the anti-theft wheel bolts
›››
page 49.
50
The essentials
●
Find the support point on the strut (sunk
en
ar
ea) cl
osest to the wheel to be changed
›››
Fig. 64.
●
Turn the jack*, located below the strut sup-
port point, to raise it until the tab is below the
housing provided
›››
Fig. 65 .
●
Align the jack* so that the tab “grips” onto
the housing provided on the strut and the mo-
bile base is resting on the ground
›››
Fig. 65
. The base plate 2 should fall vertically with
respect to the support point.
●
Continue turning the jack* until the wheel is
slightly lifted off the ground.
WARNING
●
Make sure that the jack* r
emains stable.
If the surface is slippery or soft, the jack*
could slip or sink, respectively, with the re-
sultant risk of injury.
●
Only raise the vehicle with the jack* sup-
plied by the manufacturer. Other jacks,
even those approved for other SEAT mod-
els could slip, with the consequent risk of
injury.
●
Only mount the jack* on the support
points designed for this purpose on the
strut, and always align the jack correctly. If
you do not, the jack* could slip as it does
not have an adequate grip on the vehicle:
risk of injury!
●
The height of the parked vehicle can
change as a result of variations in tempera-
ture and loading.
CAUTION
The vehicle must not be raised on the
crossbar. Only pl
ace the jack* on the
points designed for this purpose on the
strut. Otherwise, the vehicle may be dam-
aged.
Removing and fitting a wheel
Change the wheel after loosening the wheel
bolts and raising the vehicl
e with the jack.
Taking off the wheel
●
Unscrew the wheel bolts using the box
spanner and place them on a clean surf
ace.
●
Take off the wheel.
Putting on the spare wheel
When fitting tyres with a compulsory rotation
direction, observe the instructions in
›››
page 51.
●
Mount the wheel.
●
Screw on the wheel bolts in position and
tighten them loosely with a box spanner.
●
Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack*.
●
Tighten the wheel bolts in diagonal pairs
using the wheel brace.
The wheel bolts should be clean and turn
easily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspect
the wheel condition and hub mounting surfa-
ces. These surfaces must be clean before fit-
ting the wheel.
Tyres with compulsory direction of
rotation
A directional tread pattern can be identified
by the arrows on the side
wall that point in the
direction of rotation. Always observe the di-
rection of rotation indicated when fitting the
wheel to guarantee optimum properties of
this type of tyres with regard to grip, noises,
wear and aquaplaning.
If it is absolutely necessary to fit the spare
tyre* against the direction of rotation, drive
with care as this means the tyre does not of-
fer optimum driving properties. This is of par-
ticular importance when the road surface is
wet.
Replace the punctured tyre as soon as possi-
ble and restore the obligatory and correct di-
rection of rotation of all tyres.
Subsequent work
●
Alloy wheels: r
epl
ace the wheel bolt caps.
●
Pl
ate wheels: replace the wheel hubcap
›››
page 48.
»
51
The essentials
●
R
et
urn all t
ools to their proper storing loca-
tion.
●
If the replaced wheel does not fit in the
spare wheel housing, store it safely in the lug-
gage compartment
›››
page 141.
●
Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun-
ted tyre as soon as possible.
●
In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indica-
tor, adjust the pressure and store it in memory
›››
page 260.
●
Have the tightening torque of the wheel
bolts checked as soon as possible with a tor-
que wrench (it should be 120 Nm). Meanwhile,
drive carefully.
●
Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly as
possible.
Snow chains
Use
Snow chains should only be used on the front
wheel
s.
In wint
er r
oad conditions, snow chains not on-
ly help to improve grip but also improve the
braking capacity.
For technical reasons snow chains may only
be used on tyres with the following wheel
rim/tyre combinations.
Rim size Rim offset Tyre size
5J x 14
a)
35 mm 175/70
6J x 15
b)
38 mm 185/60
6J x 15
b)
38 mm 195/55
a)
Only use snow chains with fine-pitch links and lock
no greater than
9 mm.
b)
Only use snow chains with fine-pitch links and lock
no greater than 13 mm.
Remove the wheel trims before fitting snow
chains.
CAUTION
Chains must be removed when roads are
free of snow
. Otherwise they will impair
handling, damage the tyres and wear out
very quickly.
Emergency towing of the ve-
hicl
e
T
o
wing
Fig. 66
Right side of the front bumper: towline
anchor
age scr
e
wed in.
52
The essentials
Fig. 67 Right side of the rear bumper: towline
anchorage.
Towline anchorages
●
Attach the bar or rope to the towline an-
chor
ages.
It is l
ocat
ed with the vehicle's tools
›››
page 78.
●
Screw the front towline anchorage into the
screw connection
›››
Fig. 66 and tighten it
with the wheel brace.
The rear towline anchorage is under the rear
bumper, on the right
›››
Fig. 67.
Tow rope or tow bar
The tow bar offers increased safety and a
lower risk of damage.
The tow rope is recommended when there is
no tow bar. It must be elastic so that it does
not damage the vehicle.
Notes for the driver of the towing vehicle
●
The tow rope must be taut before you drive
off.
●
Release the clutch very carefully when
starting the vehicle (manual gearbox), or ac-
celerate gently (automatic gearbox).
Driving style
Towing requires some experience, especially
when using a tow rope. Both drivers should
realise how difficult it is to tow a vehicle. Inex-
perienced drivers should not attempt to tow.
Do not pull too hard with the towing vehicle
and take care to avoid jerking the tow rope.
When towing on an unpaved road, there is al-
ways a risk of overloading and damaging the
anchorage points.
The towline anchorages are located under
the floor panel in the luggage compartment.
Switch on the ignition so that the turn signals,
windscreen wipers and windscreen washer
can work. Ensure that the steering wheel is
unlocked and moves freely.
Place the gear lever in neutral on vehicles
with a manual gearbox. With an automatic
gearbox, place the lever in N.
To brake, press the brake pedal firmly. The
brake servo does not work when the engine is
switched off.
The power steering only works when the igni-
tion is switched on and the vehicle is moving,
provided that the battery is sufficiently
charged. Otherwise, it will need more force.
Ensure that the tow rope remains taut at all
times.
›››
page 81
Tow-starting
If the engine will not start, first try starting it
using the batt
ery of another v
ehicl
e
›››
page 54. You should only attempt to tow-
start a vehicle if charging the battery does
not work. This is done by leveraging wheel
movement.
When tow-starting a vehicle with a petrol en-
gine, do not tow it more than a short dis-
tance, otherwise unburned fuel can enter the
catalytic converter.
●
Engage 2nd or 3rd gear before moving off.
●
Press the clutch and hold the pedal down.
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
Once both vehicles are moving, release the
clutch.
●
As soon as the engine has started, press the
clutch and move the gear lever to neutral.
53
The essentials
How to jump start
Jump l
eads
The jump lead must have a sufficient wire
cross section.
If the engine fail
s to start because of a dis-
charged battery, the battery can be connec-
ted to the battery of another vehicle to start
the engine.
Both batteries need to have nominal voltage
of 12 V. The capacity (Ah) of the back-up bat-
tery should not be notably less than the
drained battery.
Jump leads must comply with standard DIN
72553 (see cable manufacturer's instruc-
tions). The wire cross section must be at least
25 mm
2
for petrol engines and at least
35 mm
2
for diesel engines.
Jump leads
Positive cable – usually red
Negative cable – usually black
WARNING
●
A flat battery can al
so freeze at tempera-
tures slightly below 0°C (+32°F). Do not at-
tempt to start the vehicle with a frozen bat-
tery. Risk of explosion!
●
Please note the saf
ety warnings referring
to working in the engine compartment
›››
page 244.
●
The non-insulated parts of the battery
clamps must not be allowed to touch. Addi-
tionally, the jump lead attached to the pos-
itive battery terminal must not touch metal
parts of the vehicle. Risk of short circuit!
●
Do not connect the negative lead to the
negative terminal of the discharged bat-
tery. In the event of sparks when starting
the engine, the explosive gas given off by
the battery could catch fire.
●
Position the jump leads in such a way
that they cannot come into contact with
any moving parts in the engine compart-
ment.
●
Do not bend over the battery. Risk of acid
burns!
●
The screw plugs on the battery cells must
be screwed in firmly.
●
Keep sources of fire (flames, lit ciga-
rettes, etc.) away from the battery) - Dan-
ger of explosion!
●
Never use the jump leads on batteries in
which the electrolyte level is too low. Risk
of explosion and acid burns.
Note
●
The vehicles must not t
ouch each other,
as electricity could flow as soon as the
positive terminals are connected.
●
The discharged battery must be pr
operly
connected to the vehicle electrical system.
●
The jump leads should be checked in a
specialist vehicle battery shop.
How to jump start: description
Fig. 68
Diagram of connections for vehicles
without St
art St
op syst
em
Fig. 69
Diagram of connections for vehicles
with St
art St
op syst
em
54
The essentials
Jump lead terminal connections
S
wit
ch off the ignition of both v
ehicles
›››
.
Connect one end of the r
ed
jump l
ead to
the positive
+
terminal of the vehicle
with the fl
at batt
ery
A
›
›
›
Fig. 68.
Connect the other end of the red jump
lead to the positive terminal
+
in the ve-
hicl
e pr
o
viding assistance
B
.
In v
ehicl
es without a St
art-Stop system:
connect one end of the black jump lead
to the negative terminal
–
of the vehicle
pr
o
viding the curr
ent
B
›
›
›
Fig. 68.
In vehicles with a Start-stop system:
connect one end of the black jump lead
X
to a suitable ground terminal, to a sol-
id piece of met
al in the engine bl
ock
, or
to the engine block itself
›››
Fig. 69.
Connect the other end of the black jump
lead
X
to a solid metal component bol-
t
ed t
o the engine bl
ock or to the engine
block itself of the vehicle with the flat
battery. Do not connect it to a point near
the battery
A
.
P
osition the l
eads in such a w
ay that
they cannot come into contact with any
moving parts in the engine compart-
ment.
1.
2.
3.
4a.
4b.
5.
6.
Starting
Start the engine of the vehicle with the
boosting battery and let it run at idling
speed.
Start the engine of the vehicle with the
flat battery and wait for 2 or 3 minutes
until the engine is running.
Removing the jump leads
Before you remove the jump leads,
switch off the dipped beam headlights if
they are switched on.
Turn on the heater blower and heated
rear window in the vehicle with the flat
battery. This helps minimise voltage
peaks which are generated when the
leads are disconnected.
When the engine is running, disconnect
the leads in reverse order to the details
given above.
Make sure the battery clamps have sufficient
metal-to-metal contact with the battery ter-
minals.
If the engine fails to start after about 10 sec-
onds, switch off the starter and try again after
about 1 minute.
WARNING
●
Please note the saf
ety warnings referring
to working in the engine compartment
›››
page 244.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
●
The battery pro
viding assistance must
have the same voltage as the flat battery
(12V) and approximately the same capaci-
ty (see imprint on battery). Failure to com-
ply could result in an explosion.
●
Never use jump leads when one of the
batteries is frozen. Danger of explosion!
Even after the battery has thawed, battery
acid could leak and cause chemical burns.
If a battery freezes, it should be replaced.
●
Keep sparks, flames and lighted ciga-
rettes away from batteries, danger of ex-
plosion. Failure to comply could result in an
explosion.
●
Observe the instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the jump leads.
●
Do not connect the negative cable from
the other vehicle directly to the negative
terminal of the flat battery. The gas emit-
ted from the battery could be ignited by
sparks. Danger of explosion.
●
Never attach the negative cable to fuel
system components or the brake lines in
the other vehicle.
●
The non-insulated parts of the battery
clamps must not be allowed to touch. The
jump lead attached to the positive battery
terminal must not touch metal parts of the
vehicle, this can cause a short circuit.
●
Position the leads in such a way that they
cannot come into contact with any moving
parts in the engine compartment.
»
55
The essentials
●
Do not lean on the batteries. This coul
d
result in chemical burns.
Note
The vehicles must not touch each other,
otherwise el
ectricity coul
d flow as soon as
the positive terminals are connected.
Changing the windscreen
wiper blades
Changing the wiper blades
Fig. 70 Windscreen wiper blades.
Set the windscreen wiper arms to the service
position bef
or
e changing the bl
ades.
Service position
●
Close the bonnet.
●
Switch the ignition on and off.
●
Press the lever to position
4
›››
Fig. 140
›
›
›
page 129, the wind-
screen wiper arms are set to the service posi-
tion.
Taking off the wiper blade
●
Lift the windscreen wiper arm away from
the glass moving the blade slightly in the di-
rection of the arm – arrow
A
›
›
›
Fig. 70.
●
Hold the top of the windscreen wiper arm
with one hand.
●
Unlock the catch
1
with the other hand
and r
emo
v
e the blade in the direction of ar-
row
B
.
Fitting the wiper bl
ade
●
Slide the bl
ade fully until it clicks int
o posi-
tion.
●
Check that the wiper is correctly secured.
●
Fold the windscreen wiper arm back down
onto the glass.
●
Switch the ignition on and press the lever to
position
4
›
›
›
Fig. 140
›››
page 129,
the windscreen wiper arms are set to the ba-
sic position.
Changing the rear window wiper
blade*
Fig. 71
Rear window wiper blade.
Taking off the wiper blade
●
Lift the rear window wiper arm away from
the gl
ass mo
ving the bl
ade slightly in the di-
rection of the arm – arrow
A
›
›
›
Fig. 71.
●
Hold the top of the rear window wiper arm
with one hand.
●
Unlock the catch
1
with the other hand
and r
emo
v
e the blade in the direction of ar-
row
B
.
Fitting the wiper bl
ade
●
Slide the bl
ade fully until it clicks int
o posi-
tion.
●
Check that the wiper is correctly secured.
●
Fold the rear window wiper arm back down
onto the glass.
56
Safe driving
Safety
Saf
e driving
Advice about driving
Saf
et
y first!
This chapter contains important information,
tips, suggestions and warnings that you
should r
ead and consider for both your own
safety and for your passengers' safety.
WARNING
●
This manual contains import
ant informa-
tion about the operation of the vehicle,
both for the driver and the passengers. The
other sections of the on-board documenta-
tion also contain further information that
you should be aware of for your own safety
and for the safety of your passengers.
●
Ensure that the on-board documentation
is kept in the vehicle at all times. This is es-
pecially important when lending or selling
the vehicle to another person.
Before setting off
For your own safety and the safety of your
passengers, al
w
ays not
e the following points
before every trip:
–
Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turn
signals are working properly.
–
Check tyre pressure.
–
Ensure that all windows provide a clear and
good view of the surroundings.
–
Make sure all luggage is secured
›››
page 141.
–
Make sure that no objects can interfere with
the pedals.
–
Adjust front seat, head restraint and mirrors
properly according to your size.
–
Ensure that the passengers in the rear seats
always have the head restraints in the in-
use position
›››
page 62.
–
Instruct passengers to adjust the head re-
straints according to their height.
–
Protect children with appropriate child
seats and properly applied seat belts
›››
page 75.
–
Assume the correct sitting position. Instruct
your passengers also to assume a proper
sitting position
›››
page 58.
–
Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct your
passengers also to fasten their seat belts
properly
›››
page 63.
Factors influencing safety
As a driver, you are responsible for yourself
and your passengers. When your concentra-
tion or driving safet
y is affected by any cir-
cumstance, you endanger yourself as well as
others on the road
›››
, for this reason:
–
Always pay attention to traffic and do not
get distracted by passengers or t
elephone
calls.
–
Never drive when your driving ability is im-
paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs).
–
Observe traffic laws and speed limits.
–
Always reduce your speed as appropriate
for road, tr
affic and weather conditions.
–
When travelling long distances, take breaks
regularly - at least every two hours.
–
If possible, avoid driving when you are tired
or stressed.
WARNING
When driving safety is impaired during a
trip, the risk of injury and accidents increa-
ses.
Safety equipment
Never put your safety or the safety of your
passengers in danger
. In the e
v
ent of an acci-
dent, the safety equipment may reduce the
»
57
Safety
risk of injury. The following points cover part
of the saf
et
y equipment in your SEAT:
●
thr
ee-point seat belts,
●
belt tension limiters for the front and rear
side seats,
●
Belt tensioners for the front seats,
●
Belt height adjustment for the front seats
●
front airbags,
●
side airbags in the front seat backrests,
●
side airbags in the rear seat backrests*,
●
head-protection airbags,
●
active front head restraints*,
●
“ISOFIX” anchor points for child seats in the
rear side seats with the “ISOFIX” system,
●
height-adjustable front head restraints,
●
rear head restraints with in-use position and
non-use position,
●
adjustable steering column.
The safety equipment mentioned above
works together to provide you and your pas-
sengers with the best possible protection in
the event of an accident. However, these
safety systems can only be effective if you
and your passengers are sitting in a correct
position and use this equipment properly.
Safety is everyone's business!
Correct position of the vehi-
cle occupants
Correct sitting position for the driv-
er
Fig. 72
The proper distance between driver
and st
eering wheel
.
Fig. 73
Correct head restraint position for the
driv
er
.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of
injury in the e
v
ent of an accident, w
e recom-
mend the following adjustments for the driver:
–
Adjust the steering wheel so that there is a
distance of at least 25 cm between the
steering wheel and the centre of your chest
›››
Fig. 72.
–
Move the driver's seat forwards or back-
wards so that you are able to press the ac-
celerator, brake and clutch pedals to the
floor with your knees still slightly angled
›››
.
–
Ensure that you can reach the highest point
of the st
eering wheel.
–
Adjust the head r
estr
aint so that its upper
edge is at the same level as the top of your
head, or as close as possible to the same
level as the top of your head
›››
Fig. 73.
–
Move the seat backrest to an upright posi-
tion so that your back rests completely
against it.
–
Fasten your seat belt securely
›››
page 63.
–
Keep both feet in the footwell so that you
have the vehicle under control at all times.
Adjustment of the driver's seat
›››
page 14.
58
Safe driving
WARNING
●
An incorrect sitting position of the driver
can l
ead to severe injuries.
●
Adjust the driver's seat so that there is at
least 25 cm distance between the centre of
the chest and the centre of the steering
wheel
›››
Fig. 72. If you are sitting closer
than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot pro-
tect you properly.
●
If your physical constitution prevents you
from maintaining the minimum distance of
25 cm, contact a specialised workshop.
The workshop will help you decide if spe-
cial specific modifications are necessary.
●
When driving, always hold the steering
wheel with both hands on the outside of the
ring at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock posi-
tions. This reduces the risk of injury when
the driver airbag is triggered.
●
Never hold the steering wheel at the 12
o'clock position, or in any other manner
(e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In
such cases, if the airbag is triggered, you
may sustain injuries to the arms, hands and
head.
●
To reduce the risk of injury to the driver
during sudden braking manoeuvres or an
accident, never drive with the backrest til-
ted far back! The airbag system and seat
belts can only provide optimal protection
when the backrest is in an upright position
and the driver is wearing his or her seat belt
correctly.
●
Adjust the head restraint pr
operly to ach-
ieve optimal protection.
Adjusting the steering wheel posi-
tion
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 16.
WARNING
●
Ne
v
er adjust the position of the st
eering
wheel when the vehicle is moving, as this
could cause an accident.
●
Move the lever up firmly so the steering
wheel position does not accidentally
change during driving. risk of accident!
●
Make sure you are capable of reaching
and firmly holding the upper part of the
steering wheel: risk of accident!
●
If you adjust the steering wheel so that it
points towards your face, the driver airbag
will not protect you properly in the event of
an accident. Make sure that the steering
wheel points towards your chest.
Correct position for the front pas-
senger
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of
injury in the e
v
ent of an accident, w
e recom-
mend the following adjustments for the front
passenger:
–
Move the front passenger seat back as far
as possible
›››
.
–
Move the seat backrest to an upright posi-
tion so that your back r
ests compl
et
ely
against it.
–
Adjust the head restraint so that its upper
edge is at the same level as the top of your
head, or as close as possible to the same
level as the top of your head
›››
page 61.
–
Always keep both feet in the footwell in
front of the front passenger seat.
–
Fasten your seat belt securely
›››
page 63.
It is possible to deactivate the front passen-
ger airbag in exceptional circumstances
›››
page 72.
Adjusting the front passenger seat
›››
page 14.
WARNING
●
An incorrect sitting position of the front
passenger can l
ead to severe injuries.
●
Adjust the front passenger seat so that
there is at least 25 cm between your chest
and the dash panel. If you are sitting closer
than 25 cm, the airbag system cannot pro-
tect you properly.
»
59
Safety
●
If your physical constitution pre
vents you
from maintaining the minimum distance of
25 cm, contact a specialised workshop.
The workshop will help you decide if spe-
cial specific modifications are necessary.
●
Always keep your feet in the footwell
when the vehicle is moving; never rest them
on the dash panel, out the window or on the
seat. An incorrect sitting position exposes
you to an increased risk of injury in case of
a sudden braking or an accident. If the air-
bag is triggered, you could sustain severe
injuries due to an incorrect sitting position.
●
To reduce the risk of injury to the front
passenger in events such as sudden brak-
ing manoeuvres or an accident, never trav-
el with the backrest tilted far back! The air-
bag system and seat belts can only pro-
vide optimal protection when the backrest
is in an upright position and the front pas-
senger is wearing his or her seat belt prop-
erly. The further the seat backrests are til-
ted to the rear, the greater the risk of injury
due to incorrect positioning of the belt web
or to the incorrect sitting position!
●
Adjust the head restraint correctly in or-
der to achieve maximum protection.
Correct sitting position for rear
seat passengers
To reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
sudden br
aking manoeuvr
e or an accident,
passengers on the r
ear seat bench must con-
sider the following:
–
Sit up straight.
–
Adjust the head restraint to the correct po-
sition
›››
page 62.
–
Always keep both feet in the footwell in
front of the rear seat.
–
Fasten your seat belt securely
›››
page 63.
–
Use an appropriate child restraint system
when you take children in the vehicle
›››
page 75.
WARNING
●
If the passengers in the rear seats are not
sitting pr
operly, they could sustain severe
injuries.
●
Adjust the head restraint correctly in or-
der to achieve maximum protection.
●
Seat belts can only provide optimal pro-
tection when seat backrests are in an up-
right position and the vehicle occupants
are wearing their seat belts correctly. If
passengers In the rear seats are not sitting
in an upright position, the risk of injury due
to incorrect positioning of the seat belt in-
creases.
Examples of incorrect sitting posi-
tions
Seat belts can provide optimal protection on-
ly when the belt webs are pr
operly posi-
tioned. Incorrect sitting positions substantially
reduce the protective function of seat belts
and increase the risk of injury due to incorrect
seat belt position. As the driver, you are re-
sponsible for all passengers, especially chil-
dren.
–
Never allow anyone to assume an incorrect
sitting position in the vehicle whil
e travelling
›››
.
The f
oll
o
wing list contains examples of sitting
positions that could be dangerous for all ve-
hicle occupants. The list is not complete, but
we would like to make you aware of this issue.
Therefore, whenever the vehicle is in mo-
tion:
●
Never stand in the vehicle.
●
Never stand on the seats.
●
Never kneel on the seats.
●
Never tilt your seat backrest far to the rear.
●
Never lean against the dash panel.
●
Never lie on the rear bench.
●
Never sit on the front edge of a seat.
●
Never sit sideways.
●
Never lean out of a window.
60
Safe driving
●
Ne
v
er put your f
eet out of a window.
●
Never put your feet on the dash panel.
●
Never put your feet on the surface of a seat.
●
Do not allow anyone to travel in the foot-
well.
●
Never travel without wearing the seat belt.
●
Do not allow anyone to travel in the lug-
gage compartment.
WARNING
●
Any incorrect sitting position increases
the risk of se
vere injuries.
●
Sitting in an incorrect position exposes
the vehicle occupants to severe injuries if
airbags are triggered, by striking a vehicle
occupant who has assumed an incorrect
sitting position.
●
Before the vehicle moves, assume the
proper sitting position and maintain it
throughout the trip. Before every trip, in-
struct your passengers to sit properly and
to stay in this position during the trip
›››
page 58, Correct position of the vehicle
occupants.
Correct adjustment of front head
r
estr
aints
Fig. 74
Correctly adjusted head restraint as
vie
w
ed fr
om the front and the side.
Properly adjusted head restraints are an im-
port
ant part of passenger pr
ot
ection and can
reduce the risk of injuries in most accident sit-
uations.
–
Adjust the head restraint so that its upper
edge is, as far as possible, at the same level
as the top of your head, or at the very least,
at eye level
›››
Fig. 74.
Adjusting the head restraints
›››
page 132
Active head restraints*
Vehicle occupants are pressed into their
seats during a rear end collision. The resulting
body pressure on the seat backrest activates
the active head restraint* on the front seat,
which moves rapidly forwards and upwards
at the same time. This movement reduces the
distance between the occupant's head and
the head restraint, thus reducing the risk of in-
juries such as whiplash.
WARNING
●
Trav
elling with the head restraints re-
moved or improperly adjusted increases
the risk of severe injuries. An improper ad-
justment of the head restraints may cause
death in an accident and increase the risk
of suffering injuries during abrupt braking
actions or unexpected manoeuvres.
●
The head restraints must always be ad-
justed according to the height of the pas-
senger.
Note
The active head restraints* could also be
triggered if a vehicl
e occupant applies a
high level of pressure to the seat backrest
(e.g. by “falling” back into the seat when
entering the vehicle) or if pressure is ap-
plied to a front seat head restraint from the
rear. This accidental activation is, however,
not dangerous, as the active head re-
straints will return to the original position
immediately and are thus once again
ready.
61
Safety
Correct adjustment of rear head
r
estr
aints
Fig. 75
Head restraints in the correct position.
Properly adjusted head restraints are an im-
port
ant part of passenger pr
ot
ection and can
reduce the risk of injuries in most accident sit-
uations.
Rear outer seat head restraints
–
The rear outer seat head restraints have 4
positions.
–
Three positions for use
›››
Fig. 75. In these
positions, the head restraints are used nor-
mally, and along with the rear seat belts,
protect passengers in the rear seats.
–
And one position for non-use.
–
To fit the head restraints in position for use,
pull on the edges with both hands in the di-
rection of the arrow.
Centre rear head restraint*
–
The centre head restraint only has two po-
sitions, in-use (head restraint up) and non-
use (head restraint down).
WARNING
●
Under no circumstances shoul
d the rear
passengers travel while the head restraints
are in the non-use position.
●
Do not swap the centre rear head re-
straint with either of the outer seat rear
head restraints. Risk of injury in case of an
accident!
CAUTION
Note the instructions on the adjustment of
the head restraints
›
››
page 132.
Pedal area
P
edal
s
–
Ensure that you can always press the ac-
cel
er
at
or, brake and clutch pedals unim-
paired to the floor.
–
Ensure that the pedals can return unim-
paired to their initial positions.
–
Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas-
tened during the trip and do not obstruct
the pedals
›››
.
Only use floor mats which leave the pedals
cl
ear and which ar
e secur
ed to prevent them
from slipping. You can obtain suitable floor
mats from a specialised dealership. Fasten-
ers* for floor mats are fitted in the footwells.
If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must be
pressed down thoroughly in order to stop the
vehicle.
Wear suitable footwear
Always wear shoes which support your feet
properly and give you a good feeling for the
pedals.
WARNING
●
If the pedals are obstruct
ed, an accident
may occur. Risk of serious injuries.
●
Never lay or fit floor mats or other floor
coverings over the original floor mats. This
would reduce the pedal area and could ob-
struct the pedals. Risk of accident.
●
Never place objects in the driver footwell.
An object could move into the pedal area
and impair pedal operation. In the event of
a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre,
you will not be able to operate the brake,
clutch or accelerator pedal. Risk of acci-
dent!
62
Seat belts
Seat belts
The whys and wher
ef
or
es of
seat belts
Number of seats
Your vehicle has five seats, tw
o in the front
and three in the rear. Each seat is equipped
with a three-point seat belt.
In some versions, your vehicle is approved
only for four seats. Two front seats and two
rear seats.
WARNING
●
Never tr
ansport more than the permitted
amount of people in your vehicle.
●
Every vehicle occupant must properly
fasten and wear the seat belt belonging to
his or her seat. Children must be protected
with an appropriate child restraint system.
Seat belt control lamp*
It lights up red
Driver or passenger has not fastened seat belt.
The control lamp illuminates to remind the
driv
er t
o f
asten his seat belt.
Before starting the vehicle:
●
Fasten your seat belt securely.
●
Instruct your passengers to fasten their
seat belts properly before driving off.
●
Protect children by using a child seat ac-
cording to the child's height and weight.
When starting to drive, if the vehicle's speed
surpasses approx. 25 km/h (15 mph) and the
seat belts are not fastened or are unfastened
during the drive, a warning sound will be
heard for a few seconds. The warning light
will also flash .
The lamp goes out when the driver and
passenger seat belts are fastened with the
ignition switched on.
The protective function of seat
belts
Fig. 76
Drivers with properly worn seat belts
will not be thr
o
wn f
orward in the event of sud-
den braking.
Properly worn seat belts hold the occupants
in the pr
oper position. They al
so help pr
event
uncontrolled movements that may result in
serious injury and reduce the risk of being
thrown out of the vehicle in case of an acci-
dent.
Vehicle occupants wearing their seat belts
correctly benefit greatly from the ability of
the belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition,
the front part of your vehicle and other pas-
sive safety features (such as the airbag sys-
tem) are designed to absorb the kinetic ener-
gy released in a collision. Taken together, all
these features reduce the releasing kinetic
energy and consequently, the risk of injury.
This is why it is so important to fasten seat
»
63
Safety
belts before every trip, even when "just driving
ar
ound the corner
".
Ensur
e that your passengers wear their seat
belts as well. Accident statistics have shown
that wearing seat belts is an effective means
of substantially reducing the risk of injury and
improving the chances of survival when in-
volved in a serious accident. Furthermore,
properly worn seat belts improve the protec-
tion provided by airbags in the event of an
accident. For this reason, wearing a seat belt
is required by law in most countries.
Although your vehicle is equipped with air-
bags, the seat belts must be fastened and
worn. The front airbags, for example, are only
triggered in some cases of head-on collision.
The front airbags will not be triggered during
minor frontal or side collisions, rear-end colli-
sions, rollovers or accidents in which the air-
bag trigger threshold value in the control unit
is not exceeded.
Therefore, you should always wear your seat
belt and ensure that all vehicle occupants
have fastened their seat belts properly before
you drive off!
Important safety instructions for
the use of seat belts
–
Always wear the seat belt as described in
this section.
–
Ensur
e that the seat belts can be f
ast
ened
at all times and are not damaged.
WARNING
●
If seat belts are worn incorr
ectly or not at
all, the risk of severe injuries increases. The
optimal protection from seat belts can be
achieved only if you use them properly.
●
Fasten your seat belt before every trip -
even when driving in town. Other vehicle
occupants must also wear the seat belts at
all times, otherwise they run the risk of be-
ing injured.
●
The seat belt cannot offer its full protec-
tion if the seat belt is not positioned cor-
rectly.
●
Never allow two passengers (even chil-
dren) to share the same seat belt.
●
Always keep both feet in the footwell in
front of your seat as long as the vehicle is in
motion.
●
Never unbuckle a seat belt while the ve-
hicle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.
●
The seat belt must never be twisted while
it is being worn.
●
The seat belt should never lie on hard or
fragile objects (such as glasses or pens,
etc.) because this can cause injuries.
●
Do not allow the seat belt to be damaged
or jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.
●
Never wear the seat belt under the arm or
in any other incorrect position.
●
Bulky and unfast
ened clothing (such as
an overcoat over a sweater) impairs the
proper fit and function of the seat belts, re-
ducing their capacity to protect.
●
The slot in the seat belt buckle must not
be blocked with paper or other objects, as
this can prevent the latch plate from en-
gaging securely.
●
Never use seat belt clips, fastening rings
or similar items to alter the position of the
belt webbing.
●
Frayed or torn seat belts or damage to
the connections, belt retractors or parts of
the buckle could cause severe injuries in
the event of an accident. Therefore, you
must check the condition of all seat belts
at regular intervals.
●
Seat belts which have been worn in an
accident and have been stretched must be
replaced by a specialised workshop. Re-
newal may be necessary even if there is no
apparent damage. The belt anchorage
should also be checked.
●
Do not attempt to repair a damaged seat
belt yourself. The seat belts must not be re-
moved or modified in any way.
●
The belts must be kept clean, otherwise
the retractors may not work properly
›››
page 268.
64
Seat belts
Head-on collisions and the laws of
physics
Fig. 77
A driver not wearing a seat belt is
thr
o
wn f
orward violently.
Fig. 78
The unbelted passenger in the rear
seat is thr
o
wn f
orward violently, hitting the driv-
er wearing a seat belt
The effects of the laws of physics in the case
of a head-on collision ar
e easy t
o e
xplain: the
moment a vehicle starts moving, a type of en-
ergy called “kinetic energy” starts acting on
both the vehicle and its passengers.
The amount of “kinetic energy” depends on
the speed of the vehicle and on the weight of
the vehicle and of its passengers. The higher
the speed and the greater the weight, the
more energy there is to be “absorbed” in an
accident.
The most significant factor, however, is the
speed of the vehicle. If the speed doubles
from 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph),
for example, the corresponding kinetic ener-
gy is multiplied by four.
Because the vehicle occupants in our exam-
ple are not restrained by seat belts, in the
event of crashing against a wall, all of the oc-
cupants' kinetic energy will be absorbed
solely by said impact.
Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to
50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bod-
ies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne
(1000 kg). At greater speed these forces are
even higher.
Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts are
not “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-on
collision, they will move forward at the same
speed their vehicle was travelling just before
the impact. This example applies not only to
head-on collisions, but to all accidents and
collisions.
Even at low speeds the forces acting on the
body in a collision are so great that it is not
possible to brace oneself with one's hands. In
a frontal collision, unbelted passengers are
thrown forward and will make violent contact
with the steering wheel, dash panel, wind-
screen or whatever else is in the way
›››
Fig. 77.
It is also important for rear passengers to
wear seat belts properly, as they could other-
wise be thrown forward violently through the
vehicle interior in an accident. Passengers in
the rear seats who do not use seat belts en-
danger not only themselves but also the front
occupants
›››
Fig. 78.
65
Safety
How to properly adjust your
seat belt
F
ast
ening and unf
astening the seat
belt
Fig. 79 Positioning and removing the seat belt
buckl
e
.
Fig. 80 Placing the seat belt in the shoulder
and pel
vis ar
ea f
or pregnant women.
Fasten your seat belt
The seat belt cannot off
er its full pr
ot
ection if
the seat belt is not positioned correctly.
●
Adjust the seat and head restraint correct-
ly.
●
To fasten the belt, take hold of the latch
plate and pull it slowly across your chest and
lap.
●
Insert the latch plate into the buckle for the
appropriate seat and push it down until it is
securely locked with an audible click
›››
Fig. 79 A.
●
Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate is
securely engaged in the buckle.
The seat belts are equipped with an auto-
matic retractor on the shoulder strap. Full
freedom of movement is permitted when the
shoulder belt is pulled slowly. However, dur-
ing sudden braking, during travel in steep
areas or bends and during acceleration, the
automatic retractor on the shoulder belt is
locked.
The automatic belt retractors on the front
seats are fitted with seat belt tensioners
›››
page 67.
Seat belt release
●
Press the red button on the belt buckle
›››
Fig. 79 B. The latch plate is released and
springs out
›››
.
●
Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls
up easily and the trim is not damaged.
P
ositioning seat belts
Seat belts off
er their maximum pr
otection on-
ly when they are properly positioned.
The following features are available to adjust
the seat belt in the shoulder region:
●
belt height adjustment for the front seats.
●
front seat height adjustment*.
WARNING
●
The seat belts offer best prot
ection only
when the backrests are in an upright posi-
tion and the seat belts have been fastened
properly.
66
Seat belts
●
Never put the l
atch plate in the buckle of
another seat. If you do this, the seat belt
will not protect you properly and the risk of
injury is increased.
●
Never unbuckle a seat belt while the ve-
hicle is in motion. If you do, you increase
the risk of sustaining severe or fatal injuries.
●
An incorrectly worn seat belt can cause
severe injuries in the event of an accident.
●
The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie
on the centre of the shoulder, never across
the neck. The seat belt must lie flat and fit
comfortably on the torso
●
The lap part of the seat belt must lie
across the pelvis, never across the stom-
ach. The seat belt must lie flat and fit com-
fortably on the pelvis Pull the belt tight if
necessary to take up any slack.
●
For pregnant women, the lap part of the
seat belt must lie as low as possible over
the pelvis, never across the stomach, and
always lie flat so that no pressure is exer-
ted on the abdomen
›››
Fig. 80.
●
Always engage the retractor lock when
you are securing a child seat in group 0, 0+
or 1
›››
page 75.
●
Read and observe the warnings
›››
page 64.
Belt height adjustment
Fig. 81
Location of the belt height adjuster.
The seat belt adjuster for the front seats can
be used t
o adjust the pr
oper belt position at
the shoul
der.
–
Press the upper part of the shoulder belt
guide and hold it in this position
›››
Fig. 81.
–
Move the shoulder belt guide up or down
until you have adjusted the seat belt
›››
page 66.
–
After adjusting, pull the shoulder belt sharp-
ly to check that the catch on the shoulder
belt guide is engaged securely.
Seat belt tensioners
How the seat belt tensioner works
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 15.
The seat belts for the occupants in the front
seats are equipped with belt tensioners. Sen-
sors will trigger the belt tensioners only dur-
ing severe head-on, lateral and rear-end col-
lisions and only if the seat belt is worn. This
retracts and tightens the seat belts, reducing
the forward motion of the occupants.
The belt tensioners will not be triggered in the
event of minor collisions, if the vehicle over-
turns, or in accidents where no major forces
act on the vehicle.
Note
●
If the seat belt tensioners are trigger
ed, a
fine dust is produced. This is normal and it
is not an indication of fire in the vehicle.
●
The relevant safety requirements must be
observed when the vehicle or components
of the system are scrapped. Specialised
workshops are familiar with these regula-
tions, which are also available to you.
67
Safety
Maintenance and disposal of belt
t
ensioners
The belt tensioners are components of the
seat belts that are install
ed in the seats of
your vehicle. If you work on the belt tension-
ers or remove and install parts of the system
when performing other repair work, the seat
belt may be damaged. The consequence
may be that, in the event of an accident, the
belt tensioners function incorrectly or may
not function at all.
So that the effectiveness of the seat belt ten-
sioner is not reduced and that removed parts
do not cause any injuries or environmental
pollution, regulations, which are known to the
specialised workshops, must be observed.
WARNING
●
Improper use or repairs not carried out by
qualified mechanics incr
ease the risk of se-
vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensioners
may fail to trigger or may trigger in the
wrong circumstances.
●
Never attempt to repair, adjust, remove or
install parts of the belt tensioners or seat
belts.
●
The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and au-
tomatic retractor cannot be repaired.
●
Any work on the belt tensioners and seat
belts, including the removal and refitting of
system parts in conjunction with other re-
pair work, must be performed by a special-
ised workshop only.
●
The belt tensioners will only pr
ovide pro-
tection for one accident and must be
changed if they have been activated.
Airbag system
Brief intr
oduction
Why is it so impor
t
ant to wear a
seat belt and to sit correctly?
For the inflating airbags to achieve the best
protection, the seat belt must al
ways be worn
properly and the correct sitting position must
be assumed.
The airbag system is not a substitute for seat
belts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle's
overall passive safety system. Please bear in
mind that the airbag system can only work
effectively when the vehicle occupants are
wearing their seat belts correctly and have
adjusted the head restraints properly. There-
fore, it is most important to wear the seat
belts at all times, not only because this is re-
quired by law in most countries, but also for
your safety
›››
page 63, The whys and
wherefores of seat belts.
The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, so
if you are not properly seated when the air-
bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju-
ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicle
occupants assume a correct sitting position
while travelling.
Sharp braking before an accident may cause
a passenger not wearing a seat belt to be
68
Airbag system
thrown forward into the area of the deploying
airbag. In this case
, the infl
ating airbag may
inflict critical or f
atal injuries on the occupant.
This also applies to children.
Always maintain the greatest possible dis-
tance between yourself and the front airbag.
This way, the front airbags can completely
deploy when triggered, providing their maxi-
mum protection.
The most important factors for triggering the
airbag are the type of accident, the angle of
impact and the vehicle speed.
Whether or not the airbags are triggered de-
pends primarily on the vehicle deceleration
rate resulting from the collision and detected
by the control unit. If the vehicle deceleration
occurring during the collision and measured
by the control unit remains below the speci-
fied reference values, the front, side and/or
curtain airbags will not be triggered. Take into
account that the visible damage in a vehicle
involved in an accident, no matter how seri-
ous, is not a determining factor for the air-
bags to have been triggered.
WARNING
●
Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or as-
suming an incorr
ect sitting position can
lead to critical or fatal injuries.
●
All vehicle occupants, including children,
who are not properly belted can sustain
critical or fatal injuries if the airbag is trig-
gered. Children up to 12 years old should
always tr
avel on the rear seat. Never trans-
port children in the vehicle if they are not
restrained or the restraint system is not ap-
propriate for their age, size or weight.
●
If you are not wearing a seat belt, or if
you lean forward or to the side while travel-
ling or assume an incorrect sitting position,
there is a substantially increased risk of in-
jury. This increased risk of injury will be fur-
ther increased if you are struck by an inflat-
ing airbag.
●
To reduce the risk of injury from an inflat-
ing airbag, always wear the seat belt prop-
erly
›››
page 63.
●
Always adjust the front seats properly.
Description of airbag system
The airbag system mainly comprises (as
per v
ehicl
e equipment):
●
an el
ectronic control and monitoring sys-
tem (control unit)
●
frontal airbags for driver and passenger,
●
side airbags,
●
curtain airbags,
●
a control lamp on the dash panel
›››
page 73.
●
key-operated switch for front passenger
airbag,
●
a control lamp for disabling/enabling the
front passenger airbag.
The airbag system operation is monitored
electronically. The airbag control lamp will il-
luminate for a few seconds every time the ig-
nition is switched on (self-diagnosis).
There is a fault in the system if the control
lamp :
●
does not light up when the ignition is
switched on
›››
page 73,
●
turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition is
switched on,
●
turns off and then lights up again after the
ignition is switched on,
●
illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is
moving.
The airbag system is not triggered if:
●
the ignition is switched off
●
there is a minor frontal collision
●
there is a minor side collision
●
there is a rear-end collision
●
the vehicle turns over.
WARNING
●
The seat belts and airbags can only pro-
vide maximum prot
ection if the occupants
are seated correctly
›››
page 58, Correct
position of the vehicle occupants.
»
69
Safety
●
If a fault has occurred in the airbag sys-
t
em, have the system checked immediately
by a specialised workshop. Otherwise, dur-
ing a frontal collision the system might not
trigger correctly or may fail to trigger at all.
Airbag activation
The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, within
thousandths of a second, to pro
vide addition-
al protection in the event of an accident. A
fine dust may develop when the airbag de-
ploys. This is normal and it is not an indication
of fire in the vehicle.
The airbag system is only ready to function
when the ignition is on.
In special accidents instances, several air-
bags may activate at the same time.
In the event of minor head-on and side colli-
sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll-
over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate.
Activation factors
The conditions that lead to the airbag system
activating in each situation cannot be gener-
alised. Some factors play an important role,
such as the properties of the object the vehi-
cle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehicle
speed, etc.
Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti-
vation.
The control unit analyses the collision tr
ajec-
tory and activates the respective restraint
system.
If the deceleration rate is below the prede-
fined reference value in the control unit the
airbags will not be triggered, even though the
accident may cause extensive damage to the
car.
The following airbags are triggered in seri-
ous head-on collisions:
●
Driver airbag.
●
Front passenger front airbag
The following airbags are triggered in seri-
ous side-on collisions:
●
Front side airbag on the side of the acci-
dent.
●
Rear side airbag on the side of the acci-
dent.
●
Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac-
cident.
In an accident with airbag activation:
●
the interior lights switch on (if the interior
light switch is in the courtesy light position);
●
the hazard warning lights switch on;
●
all doors are unlocked;
●
the fuel supply to the engine is cut.
Airbag safety instructions
Front airbags
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 16.
WARNING
●
The deployment space between the fr
ont
passengers and the airbags must not in
any case be occupied by other passenger,
pets and objects.
●
The airbags provide protection for just
one accident; replace them once they have
deployed.
●
It is also important not to attach any ob-
jects such as cup holders or telephone
mountings to the surfaces covering the air-
bag units.
●
Do not attempt to modify components of
the airbag system in any way.
●
When driving, always hold the steering
wheel with both hands on the outside part
at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions.
Never hold the steering wheel at the 12
o'clock position, or in any other manner
(e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). In
such cases, if the airbag is triggered, you
may sustain injuries to the arms, hands and
head.
70
Airbag system
Side airbags*
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 18.
WARNING
●
If you do not wear a seat belt, if you lean
f
orward, or are not seated correctly while
the vehicle is in motion, you are at a greater
risk of injury if the side airbag system is
triggered in an accident.
●
In order for the side airbags to provide
their maximum protection, the prescribed
sitting position must always be maintained
with seat belts fastened while travelling.
●
Occupants of the outer seats must never
carry any objects or pets in the deploy-
ment space between them and the airbags,
or allow children or other passengers to
travel in this position. It is also important
not to attach any accessories (such as cup
holders) to the doors. This would impair the
protection offered by the side airbags.
●
The built-in coat hooks should be used
only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave
any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the
pockets.
●
Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks,
must not be exerted upon the backrest bol-
ster because the system may be damaged.
In this case, the side airbags would not be
triggered.
●
Under no circumstances should protec-
tive covers be fitted over seats with side
airbags unless the covers have been ap-
prov
ed for use in your vehicle. Because the
airbag deploys from the side of the back-
rest, the use of conventional seat covers
would obstruct the side airbag, seriously
reducing the airbag's effectiveness.
●
Any damage to the original seat uphols-
tery or around the seams of the side airbag
units must be repaired immediately by a
specialised workshop.
●
The airbags provide protection for just
one accident; replace them once they have
deployed.
●
Any work on the side airbag system or re-
moval and installation of the airbag com-
ponents for other repairs (such as removal
of the front seat) should only be performed
by a specialised workshop. Otherwise,
faults may occur during the airbag system
operation.
●
Do not attempt to modify components of
the airbag system in any way.
●
The side and head airbags are managed
through sensors located in the interior of
the front doors. To ensure the correct oper-
ation of the side and curtain (head) airbags
neither the doors nor the door panels
should be modified in any way (e.g. fitting
loudspeakers). If the front door is dam-
aged, the airbag system may not work cor-
rectly. All work carried out on the front door
must be done in a specialised workshop.
●
In a side-on collision the side airbags will
not work if the sensors do not correctly
measure the pressure increase on the inte-
rior of the doors, due to air escaping
through the ar
eas with holes or openings in
the door panel.
●
Never drive the vehicle if the interior pan-
els have been removed.
●
Never drive if the interior door panels
have been removed or if the panels have
not been correctly fitted.
●
Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeak-
ers in the door panels have been removed,
unless the holes left by the loudspeakers
have been closed properly.
●
Always check that the openings are
closed or covered if loudspeakers or other
equipment are fitted inside the door pan-
els.
●
Any work carried out to the doors should
be made in an authorised specialised work-
shop.
Head-protection airbags*
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 18.
WARNING
●
In order for the head-pr
otection airbags
to provide their maximum protection, the
prescribed sitting position must always be
maintained with seat belts fastened while
travelling.
»
71
Safety
●
For safet
y reasons, the curtain airbag
must be disabled in those vehicles fitted
with a screen dividing the interior of the ve-
hicle. See your technical service to make
this adjustment.
●
There must be no other persons, animals
or objects between the occupants of the
rear seats and the deployment space of
the head-protection airbags so that the
head-protection airbag can deploy without
restriction and provide the greatest possi-
ble protection. Therefore, sun blinds which
have not been expressly approved for use
in your vehicle may not be attached to the
side windows
●
The built-in coat hooks should be used
only for lightweight clothing. Do not leave
any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the
pockets. Please, do not hang the clothes on
coat hangers.
●
The airbags provide protection for just
one accident; replace them once they have
deployed.
●
Any work on the head-protection airbag
system or removal and installation of the
airbag components for other repairs (such
as removal of the roof lining) should only
be performed by a specialised workshop.
Otherwise, faults may occur during the air-
bag system operation.
●
Do not attempt to modify components of
the airbag system in any way.
●
The side and head airbags are managed
through sensors located in the interior of
the front doors. To ensure the correct oper-
ation of the side and curtain airbags nei-
ther the doors nor the door panel
s should
be modified in any way (e.g. fitting loud-
speakers). If the front door is damaged, the
airbag system may not work correctly. All
work carried out on the front door must be
done in a specialised workshop.
Deactivating airbags
Introduction
The disabling of airbags is only carried out
in cer
t
ain cases, i.e
. if:
●
a child seat is required in the front passen-
ger seat with the child facing in the opposite
direction to the direction of travel (in some
countries, due to divergent legal require-
ments, facing in the direction of travel)
›››
page 76;
●
despite the driver's seat being in the correct
position, a minimum distance of 25 cm can-
not be maintained between the centre of the
steering wheel and the driver's torso,
●
installation of special devices is required in
the steering wheel area due to a physical dis-
ability,
●
if you have special seats installed (e.g. an
orthopaedic seat without side airbags).
The front passenger front airbag can be disa-
bled using the switch
›››
page 73.
We recommend that you contact an author-
ised SEAT dealer for the disabling of other air-
bags.
Airbag system control
The airbag system availability is controlled
electronically, regardless of whether an air-
bag is disabled.
If an airbag was disabled using a diagnos-
tics system:
●
the airbag system warning lamp illumi-
nates after switching on the ignition for about
4 seconds, and then flashes for about 12 sec-
onds.
If the airbag has been disabled with the
airbag switch on the side of the dash pan-
el:
●
the airbag control lamp will illuminate for
about 4 seconds after the ignition is switched
on,
●
the airbag is disabled, signalled with the
warning lamp which lights up with the
word placed in the cen-
tre part of the dash panel
›››
Fig. 82
3
.
Note
●
Follo
w the current legislation in your
country regarding the disabling of airbags.
72
Airbag system
●
At your authorised SEAT dealer you can
find information on which v
ehicle airbags
can be disabled.
Switch front passenger front air-
bag on and off
Fig. 82 Front passenger front airbag
s
wit
ch/w
arning lamp for disabling the front
passenger airbag.
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 17.
The switch disables only the front passenger
front airbag.
Switching on the airbag
–
Switch the ignition off.
–
Open the passenger side storage compart-
ment.
–
Insert the key into the slot of the switch for
deactivating the front passenger airbag
›››
Fig. 82. About 3/4 of the key should en-
ter, as far as it will go.
–
Then turn the key gently to the position.
Do not force it if you feel resistance, and
make sure you have inserted the key fully.
–
Close the passenger side storage compart-
ment.
–
Check, with the ignition switched on, that
the control lamp does not illuminate,
with the words in the
centre of the dash panel.
Control lamp with the word
(front passenger airbag disabled)
If the front passenger front airbag is disa-
bled, after switching on the ignition, the con-
trol lamp will illuminate for several seconds,
then it will switch off for about 1 s and then
switch on again.
If the control lamp is flashing, there is a fault
in the disabling of the airbag system
›››
.
Pl
ease go immediat
ely t
o an Official Serv-
ice.
WARNING
●
The driver of the vehicl
e is responsible for
disabling or switching on the airbag.
●
Always switch off the ignition before dis-
abling the front passenger airbag! Failure
to do so could result in a fault in the airbag
disabling system.
●
Never leave the key in the airbag disa-
bling switch as it could get damaged or en-
able or disable the airbag during driving.
●
If the (airbag disabled) control
lamp flashes, the front passenger front air-
bag will not trigger in the event of an acci-
dent! Have the system immediately
checked by an Official Service.
Airbag and seat belt tensioner con-
tr
ol l
amp
It lights up on the combi-instru-
ment
Fault in airbag system and seat belt tensioners.
Have the system check
ed immediately by a special-
ised workshop.
»
73
Safety
It lights up on the dash panel
Front passenger front airbag disabled.
Check whether the airbag should remain disabled
The control lamp monitors all airbags and
seat belt tensioners in the vehicl
e, including
control units and wiring connections.
Monitoring of airbag and belt tensioner
system
Both the airbag and belt tensioner systems
operation is constantly monitored electroni-
cally. Each time the ignition is switched on,
the control lamp illuminates for several
seconds (self-diagnosis) and the instrument
panel display* shows AIRBAG/TENSIONER.
The system must be checked when the
control lamp :
●
does not light up when the ignition is
switched on,
●
t
urns off after 4 seconds after the ignition is
switched on,
●
turns off and then lights up again after the
ignition is switched on,
●
illuminates or flashes while the vehicle is
moving.
In the event of a malfunction, the warning
lamp stays on continuously. In addition, de-
pending on the malfunction, a fault message
appears on the instrument panel display for
approximately 10 seconds and a short audi-
ble warning is given. In this event, you should
have a specialised workshop check the sys-
tem immediately.
The airbag system availability is controlled
electronically, regardless of whether an air-
bag is disabled.
If the front airbag, side airbag, head pro-
tection airbag or the belt tensioner are
disabled using the diagnostics system:
●
After switching on the ignition, the warn-
ing lamp illuminates for about 4 seconds and
flashes for another 12 seconds.
The informative display indicates:
Airbag/belt tensioner disabled!
If the front passenger airbag has been dis-
abled with the airbag switch located in the
storage compartment side:
●
When the ignition is turned on, the warn-
ing lamp illuminates for about 4 seconds.
●
The airbag is disabled, signalled with the
warning lamp which lights up with the
word placed in the cen-
tre part of the dash panel
›››
Fig. 82
›››
page 73.
WARNING
●
If there is a malfunction, the airbag and
belt tensioner syst
em cannot properly per-
form its protective function.
●
If a malfunction occurs, have the system
check
ed immediately by a specialised
workshop. Otherwise, in the event of an ac-
cident, the airbag system and belt tension-
ers may not be triggered, or may not be
triggered correctly.
74
Transporting children safely
Transporting children
saf
ely
Saf
et
y for children
Introduction
For safety reasons, as we have learned from
accident statistics, we r
ecommend that chil-
dren under 12 years of age travel in the rear
seats. Depending on their age, height and
weight, children travelling in rear seats must
use a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea-
sons, the child seat should be installed in the
rear seat, behind the front passenger seat or
in the centre back seat.
The physical laws involved and the forces
acting in a collision apply also to children
›››
page 65. But unlike adults, children do not
have fully developed muscle and bone struc-
tures. This means that children are subject to
a greater risk of injury.
To reduce the risk of injuries, children must al-
ways use special child restraint systems
when travelling in the vehicle.
We recommend the use of child safety prod-
ucts from the SEAT Original Accessories Pro-
gramme, which includes systems for all ages
made by “Peke” (not for all countries).
These systems have been especially de-
signed and approv
ed, complying with the
ECE-R44. regulation.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and
observe any statutory requirements when in-
stalling and using child seats. Always read
and note
›››
page 75.
We recommend you always carry the manu-
facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to-
gether with the on-board documentation.
Important information regarding
the front passenger's airbag
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 19.
Read and always observe the safety informa-
tion included in the following chapters:
●
Safety distance with respect to the passen-
ger airbag
›››
page 68, Why is it so impor-
tant to wear a seat belt and to sit correct-
ly?.
●
Objects between the passenger and the
passenger side airbag
›››
in Front airbags
on page 70.
The passenger side fr
ont airbag, when ena-
bl
ed, is a serious risk f
or a child that is facing
backward since the airbag can strike the seat
with such force that it can cause serious or
fatal injuries. Children up to 12 years old
should always travel on the rear seat.
Therefore we strongly recommend you to
transport children on the rear seats. This is
the safest location in the vehicle. Alternative-
ly, the front passenger airbag can be disa-
bled with a key-operated switch
›››
page 72.
When transporting children, use a child seat
suitable for the age and size of each child
›››
page 75.
WARNING
●
If a child seat is secured t
o the front pas-
senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain-
ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of an
accident increases.
●
An inflating front passenger airbag can
strike the rear-facing child seat and project
it with great force against the door, the roof
or the backrest.
●
Never install a child seat facing back-
wards on the front passenger seat unless
the front passenger front airbag has been
disabled. Risk of potentially fatal injuries to
the child! However, if it is necessary, in ex-
ceptional cases, to transport a child in the
front passenger seat, the front passenger
front airbag must always be disabled
›››
page 72. If the front passenger seat has
a height adjustment option, move it to the
highest position.
●
For those vehicles that do not include a
key lock switch to deactivate the airbag,
»
75
Safety
the vehicle must be taken to a technical
service.
●
All vehicl
e occupants, especially chil-
dren, must assume the proper sitting posi-
tion and be properly belted in while travel-
ling.
●
Never hold children or babies on your lap,
this can result in potentially fatal injuries to
the child!
●
Never allow a child to be transported in a
vehicle without being properly secured, or
to stand up or kneel on a seat while travel-
ling. In an accident, the child could be flung
through the vehicle, causing possibly fatal
injuries to themselves and to the other vehi-
cle occupants.
●
If children assume an improper sitting po-
sition when the vehicle is moving, they ex-
pose themselves to greater risk of injury in
the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre
or in an accident. This is particularly impor-
tant if the child is travelling on the front
passenger seat and the airbag system is
triggered in an accident; as this could
cause serious injury or even death.
●
A suitable child seat can protect your
child!
●
Never leave a child alone in the child seat
or inside the vehicle because depending on
the season, very high temperatures may be
reached inside a parked vehicle, which
could be fatal.
●
Children who ar
e less than 1.5 metres tall
must not wear a normal seat belt without a
child seat, as this could cause injuries to
the abdominal and neck areas during a
sudden braking manoeuvre or in an acci-
dent.
●
Only one child may occupy a child seat
›››
page 76, Child seats.
Child seats
Safety instructions
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 19.
WARNING
●
When travelling, chil
dren must be se-
cured in the vehicle with a restraint system
suitable for age, weight and size.
●
Read and always observe information
and warnings concerning the use of child
seats
›››
page 75.
WARNING
●
The retaining rings ar
e designed only for
use with “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* system
child seats.
●
Never secure other child seats that do
not have the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether* sys-
tem, or retaining belts or objects to the fas-
tening rings - this can result in potentially
fatal injuries t
o the child.
●
Ensure that the child seat is secured cor-
rectly using the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether*
securing rings.
Categorisation of child seats into
groups
Use only child seats that are officially ap-
prov
ed and suitable for the child.
Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE-
R 44. ECE-R stands for: European Economic
Commission.
The child seats are grouped into 5 catego-
ries:
Group 0 Up to 10 kg (up to around 9
months)
Group 0+ Up to 13 kg (up to around 18
months)
Group 1 from 9 to 18 kg (up to approx. 4
years old)
Group 2 from 15 to 25 kg (up to approx. 7
years old)
Group 3 from 22 to 36 kg (up to approx. 7
years old)
76
Transporting children safely
Child seats that have been tested and ap-
pr
o
v
ed under the ECE R44 standard bear the
test mark on the seat (the letter E in a circle
with the test number below it).
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and
observe any statutory requirements when in-
stalling and using child seats.
We recommend you to always include the
manufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual
together with the on-board documentation.
SEAT recommends you use child seats from
the Original Accessories Catalogue. These
child seats have been designed and tested
for use in SEAT vehicles. You can find the right
child seat for your model and age group at
SEAT dealers.
WARNING
Read and always observe information and
warnings concerning the use of child seats
›
››
page 75.
77
Emergencies
Emergencies
Self
-help
Emer
gency equipment
First
-aid kit and warning triangle*
Fig. 83 Location of the warning triangle.
The warning triangle, measuring max.
436 x 45 x 32 mm, can be secur
ed t
o the lin-
ing on the r
ear of the luggage compartment
with rubber straps
›››
Fig. 83.
WARNING
The first-aid kit and fire extinguisher must
be properly secured so that they ar
e not
catapulted through the vehicle during driv-
ing and braking manoeuvres or in the event
of an accident. Risk of injury.
Note
●
Observe the expiry dat
e of the contents
of the first aid kit.
●
We recommend you use the first-aid kit
and the warning triangle from the SEAT
Original Accessories programme available
in authorised SEAT dealers.
Fire extinguisher*
Read the instructions given on the fire ex-
tinguisher car
efully.
The fir
e e
xtinguisher must be checked once a
year by an authorised person (take the appli-
cable legal regulations into account).
WARNING
The fire extinguisher must be properly se-
cured so that it is not catapult
ed through
the vehicle, causing injuries, during driving
and braking manoeuvres or in the event of
an accident.
Note
●
The fire extinguisher must comply with l
o-
cal legal requirements.
●
Observe the expiry date of the fire extin-
guisher. The fire extinguisher may not work
properly if used after the expiry date.
Vehicle tool kit*
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 48
WARNING
●
The factory-supplied jack is only de-
signed f
or changing wheels on this model
of vehicle. On no account attempt to use it
for lighting heavier vehicles or other loads.
Risk of injury!
●
Make sure that the vehicle tools are stor-
ed properly in the luggage compartment.
Note
●
Make sure the bo
x always remains strap-
ped to the spare wheel with tape.
●
The jack does not generally require any
maintenance. If required, it should be
greased using universal type grease.
Changing a wheel
Intr
oduction
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 48
78
Self-help
WARNING
●
If you have a punctur
e in moving traffic,
switch on the hazard warning lights and
place the warning triangle at the obliga-
tory distance. Observe applicable local le-
gal regulations. This is for your own safety
and that of other drivers.
●
If you have a flat tyre, stop the vehicle as
far away as possible from moving traffic.
Stop on flat, solid ground.
●
If you have to change the tyre on a gradi-
ent, block the wheel opposite the wheel
being changed by placing a stone or simi-
lar object under it to prevent the vehicle
from rolling away unexpectedly.
●
If the vehicle has been fitted with tyres or
alloys that are different to those fitted in
manufacture, the instructions
›››
page 258,
New tyres or wheels must be followed.
●
Always raise the vehicle with the doors
closed.
●
Never place parts of your body, e.g. arms
and legs, underneath the vehicle when it is
supported only by the jack.
●
Secure the base of the jack with suitable
supports so that it cannot slip. The jack
could slide if the ground below it is soft and
slippery and the vehicle could slip off it.
Therefore, place the jack on a firm surface
or use a large, stable base. On a slippery
surface, e.g. tile, use a non-slip base such
as a rubber mat.
●
Never st
art the engine when the vehicle is
jacked. Risk of injury.
●
The jack should only be used in the cor-
rect jacking points.
CAUTION
●
The pr
escribed tightening t
orque for
wheel bolts on steel and alloy wheels is
120 Nm.
●
If the anti-theft wheel bolt is overly tight-
ened, this could damage the bolt and the
adapter.
Note
●
The set of anti-theft wheel bolts or the
adapter are av
ailable from authorised
SEAT dealers.
●
Please observe the relevant local legal
regulations when changing the wheel.
Wheel bolts
The wheel bolts ar
e mat
ched t
o the rims.
When installing different wheels, e.g. to fit
light alloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres,
it is important to use the correct wheel bolts
with the right length and correctly shaped
bolt heads. This is essential for a secure fit of
the wheels and for proper operation of the
brake system.
Note
●
Never gr
ease or oil the wheel bolts!
●
If the wheel bolt is very tight, it may be
possible to loosen it by pushing down the
end of the box spanner carefully with your
foot. Hold on to the vehicle for support and
take care not to slip.
●
If you notice that the wheel bolts are rus-
ty and difficult to turn when changing a
wheel, they must be replaced before hav-
ing the tightening torque checked.
Tyre repairs
T
MS Anti-punct
ur
e kit (Tyre Mobili-
ty System)*
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 47
The Tyre Mobility System is stored in a box
under the carpet in the boot.
Using the Tyre Mobility System you can relia-
bly seal tyres damaged by foreign bodies,
provided that cuts or punctures are no larger
than approx. 4 mm in diameter. Do not re-
move the foreign bodies, e.g. bolts or nails,
from the tyre!
The tyre must be repaired immediately.
»
79
Emergencies
The repair made using the Tyre Mobility Sys-
t
em
under no cir
cumstances replaces per-
manent tyre repair and should only be used
to drive to the nearest official service.
The Tyre Mobility System kit shall not be
used:
●
If the wheel rim has been damaged,
●
when the outside temperature is below
-20°C (-4°F),
●
on slashes or punctures larger than 4 mm,
●
if the sidewall of the wheel has been dam-
aged,
●
If you have been driving with very low tyre
pressure or a completely flat tyre
●
If the best-before date on the air can has
expired
WARNING
Using the tyre mobility system can be dan-
gerous, especially when filling the tyr
e at
the roadside. Please observe the following
rules to minimise the risk of injury:
●
Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-
ble. Park it at a safe distance from sur-
rounding traffic to fill the tyre.
●
Ensure the ground on which you park is
flat and solid.
●
All passengers and particularly children
must keep a safe distance from the work
area.
●
Turn on the hazar
d warning lights to warn
other road users.
●
Use the tyre mobility system only if you
are familiar with the necessary procedures.
Otherwise, you should seek professional
assistance.
●
The tyre mobility set is intended for tem-
porary emergency use only until you can
reach the nearest specialised workshop.
●
Replace the repaired tyre with the tyre
mobility set as soon as possible.
●
The sealant is a health hazard and must
be cleaned immediately if it comes into
contact with the skin.
●
Always keep the tyre mobility set out of
the reach of small children.
●
Always stop the engine, apply the hand-
brake lever firmly and engage gear if using
a manual gearbox, in order to reduce the
risk of vehicle involuntary movement.
WARNING
A tyre filled with sealant does not have the
same performance proper
ties as a conven-
tional tyre.
●
Never drive faster than 80 km/h
(50 mph).
●
Avoid heavy acceleration, hard braking
and fast cornering.
●
Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximum
speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then check
the tyre.
For the sake of the environment
Dispose of used or expired sealant observ-
ing any legal requir
ements.
Note
●
A new bottle of seal
ant can be purchased
at SEAT dealerships.
●
Take into account the separate instruc-
tion manual of the tyre mobility set* manu-
facturer.
Components of the tyre mobility
set*
Fig. 84 Standard display: contents of the anti-
punct
ur
e kit.
The anti-puncture kit is located underneath
the fl
oor co
v
ering in the luggage
80
Self-help
compartment. It includes the following com-
ponents
›
›
›
Fig. 84:
Tyre valve remover
A sticker to be adhered to the instrument
cluster, within the driver's visual field, to
remind that the maximum advisable
speed “max. 80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph”
Filler tube with cap
Air compressor
Tube for inflating tyres
Warning provided by tyre pressure moni-
toring system (it can also be integrated in
the compressor).
Air bleed screw (in its place, the compres-
sor may have a button).
ON/OFF switch
12 volt connector
Bottle of sealant
Spare tyre valve
The valve insert remover
1
has a gap at
the l
o
w
er end for a valve insert. The valve in-
sert can only be screwed or unscrewed in this
way. This also applies to its replacement part
11
.
WARNING
When inflating the wheel, the air compres-
sor and the inflator t
ube may become hot.
●
Protect hands and skin from hot parts.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
●
Do not place the hot fle
xible inflator tube
or hot air compressor on flammable mate-
rial.
●
Allow them to cool before storing the de-
vice.
●
If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to at
least 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre is
too badly damaged. The sealant is not in a
good condition to seal the tyre. Do not con-
tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance.
CAUTION
Switch off the air compressor after a maxi-
mum of 8 oper
ational minutes t
o avoid
overheating! Before switching on the air
compressor again, let it cool for several mi-
nutes.
Check after 10 minutes of driving
Screw the inflator tube
›
›
›
Fig. 84
5
again
and check the pr
essur
e on the gauge
6
.
1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kP
a) and l
o
wer:
●
Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot be
sealed sufficiently with the tyre mobility set.
●
You should obtain professional assistance
›››
.
1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kPa) and higher:
●
Set the tyre pressure to the correct value
again.
●
Carefully resume your journey until you
r
each the near
est specialised w
orkshop with-
out exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph).
●
Have the damaged tyre replaced.
WARNING
Driving with an unsealed tyre is dangerous
and can cause accidents and serious in-
jury.
●
Do not continue driving if the tyre pres-
sure is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and l
ower.
●
Seek specialist assistance.
Towing the vehicle
Intr
oduction
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 52.
Vehicles with manual gearbox can be towed
using a towbar or towrope. They can also be
towed with either the front or rear wheels lif-
ted off the road.
Vehicles with automatic gearbox can be tow-
ed using a towbar or towrope. They can also
be towed with the front wheels lifted off the
»
81
Emergencies
road. If the vehicle is towed with the rear
wheel
s lift
ed off the r
oad the automatic gear-
box will be damaged!
Maximum towing speed is 50 km/h (31 mph).
CAUTION
●
Do not tow-st
art the engine. Risk of en-
gine damage! In vehicles with a catalytic
converter, fuel that has not been burned
could reach the catalytic converter and
catch fire in it. This could damage and de-
stroy the catalytic converter. You may use
the battery from another vehicle to help
you start your engine
›››
page 54.
●
If, due to a fault, there is no oil in the gear-
box, the car may only be towed with the
driven wheels lifted clear of the road and
transported on a special vehicle transport-
er or trailer.
●
If normal towing is not possible or if the
vehicle is to be towed for further than 50
km, the vehicle must be transported on a
special vehicle transporter or trailer.
●
The towrope should be slightly elastic to
reduce the load on both vehicles during
towing. It is advisable to use a towrope
made of synthetic fibre or similar material
only.
●
Do not pull too hard with the towing vehi-
cle and always take care to avoid jerking
the towrope. When towing on a loose sur-
face there is always a risk of overloading
and damaging the anchorage points.
●
Attach the to
wrope or towbar only to the
towline anchorages or to the removable
towing bracket
›››
page 232, or
›››
page 82.
Note
●
W
e recommend you use the t
owrope or
towbar available in the SEAT Original Ac-
cessories programme from authorised
SEAT dealers.
●
Towing a vehicle requires a certain de-
gree of practical skill. Both drivers should
be familiar with the technique required for
towing. Inexperienced drivers should not
attempt to tow away another vehicle or to
have their vehicle towed.
●
Note the legal regulations concerning
towing, particularly those regarding the
signalling of the towed and towing vehicle.
●
The towrope must not be twisted, as un-
der certain circumstances this could un-
screw the front towline anchorage.
Anchoring the front tow line
Fig. 85
Front bumper: towline anchorage cov-
er/fitting.
Fitting and detaching the cover
–
Press on the left of the cover as indicated
by the arr
o
w
›
››
Fig. 85
.
–
Pull on the cover to remove it from the front
bumper.
–
To refit the cover after unscrewing the tow-
line anchorage, fit the cover and press
82
Fuses and bulbs
down on its right-hand side. The cover must
be secur
ely engaged.
Fitting and det
aching the t
owline anchor-
age
–
Screw in the towline anchorage anti-clock-
wise by hand as far as it will go
›››
Fig. 85
.
To tighten the towline anchorage, we recom-
mend using the box spanner, the towing eye
from another vehicle or a similar object that
can be inserted through the anchorage.
–
Unscrew the towline anchorage by turning
it clockwise.
CAUTION
The towline anchorage must be screwed in
as far as it will go. Otherwise ther
e is a risk
of the screw connection shearing off during
towing or tow-starting!
Fuses and bulbs
Fuses
Intr
oduction
Due to the constant updating of vehicles, fuse
assignments based on equipment and the
use of the same fuse for various el
ectrical
components, it is not possible to provide an
up-to-date summary of the fuse positions for
the electrical components at the time this
manual was printed. For detailed information
about the fuse positions, please consult a
technical service.
In general, a fuse can be assigned to various
electrical components. Likewise, an electrical
component can be protected by several
fuses.
Only replace fuses when the cause of the
problem has been solved. If a newly inserted
fuse blows after a short time, you must have
the electrical system checked by a special-
ised workshop as soon as possible.
Additional information and warnings:
●
Working in the engine compartment
›››
page 244.
WARNING
The high voltages in the electrical system
can give serious electrical shocks, causing
burns and e
ven death!
●
Never touch the electrical wiring of the
ignition system.
●
Take care not to cause short circuits in
the electrical system.
WARNING
Using unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses or
bridging a current circuit without fuses can
cause a fir
e and serious injury.
●
Never use a fuse with a higher value. Only
replace fuses with a fuse of the same am-
perage (same colour and markings) and
size.
●
Never repair a fuse.
●
Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, sta-
ple or similar.
CAUTION
●
To pre
vent damage to the vehicle's elec-
tric system, before replacing a fuse always
turn off the ignition, the lights and all elec-
trical elements and remove the key from
the ignition.
●
If you replace a fuse with higher-rating
fuse, you could cause damage to another
part of the electrical system.
»
83
Emergencies
●
Protect the fuse bo
xes when open to pre-
vent the entry of dust or humidity as they
can damage the electrical system.
●
Always carefully remove the fuse box
covers and refit them correctly to avoid
problems with your vehicle.
Note
●
One component may hav
e more than one
fuse
.
●
Several components may run on a single
fuse.
●
In the vehicle, there are more fuses than
those indicated in this chapter. These
should only be changed by a specialised
workshop.
●
Positions not containing a fuse do not ap-
pear in the following tables.
●
Some of the equipment listed in the ta-
bles below pertain only to certain versions
of the model or are optional extras.
●
Please note that the above lists, while
correct at the time of printing, are subject
to change.
Fuses in the dash panel
Fig. 86
Diagram of the fuse box to the
l
eft/right of the st
eering wheel
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 45
Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same
amperage (same colour and markings) and
size.
Fuse placement
No. Consumer
1 Left light
2
Central locking, windscreen wipers, with Key-
less Access
3 Ignition system relay
4 Right light
5 Electric windows - Driver
6 Central control unit - Interior lights
No. Consumer
7 Horn
8 Towing bracket - Left light
9
Controls on steering column (without Keyless
Access only), engine control unit (without
Keyl
ess Access only), automatic gearbox
control unit (without Keyless Access only),
automatic gearbox lever (without Keyless Ac-
cess only), ESP control unit (without Keyless
Access only), trailer hook control unit (without
Keyless Access only), electric power steering
(without Keyless Access only)
10 Rear left window
11 Headlight washer unit
12 Radio and navigation display
13 Preparation as taxi
14
Control lever under steering wheel, light
switch, tr
action locking with ignition key (au-
tomatic transmission), headlight flasher,
SmartGate control device, rain/light sensor,
rear camera
15
Air conditioning system control unit, automat-
ic gearbox selector lever, diagnostics con-
nection
16 Instrument panel
17 Alarm sensor, horn
22
Windscreen washer system (without Keyless
Access)
23 Heated front seats
84
Fuses and bulbs
No. Consumer
24
Air conditioning fan, heating, control unit for
air conditioning, heating
26 Front seat heating switch.
27 Rear window wiper
29 Airbag
30
Electric windows, reversing light switch, air
conditioning control unit, Park Assist contr
ol
unit, exterior mirror, power supply for middle
button bar, power supply for the side button
bar, interior mirror
31
Fuel pump, radiator fan control unit, cruise
contr
ol
, r
elay coil for the windscreen and rear
window washer system, switch for the lights
32
Diagnostics socket, headlight range regula-
tor, control lever under the steering wheel,
ambient lighting regulator
33 Ignition relay coil, clutch pedal switch
34 Heatable washer jets of windscreen washer
36 USB charging socket
37 Radar
39 Additional electric heating
41 Rear window heater
42 Electric windows - passenger
43 Towing bracket - Connector contact
No. Consumer
44
12 V connection in the interior, 12 V connection
in the boot
45 Rear right window
46
Windshield and front window washing sys-
tem, control l
ever under the steering wheel
47 Towing bracket - Connector contact
48 Towing bracket - Right hand light
49 Fuel pump control unit
50 Radio
51 Heat for exterior mirrors
52 Keyless Access
53 Steering lock (Keyless Access)
54 ABS/ESC control unit
56 Diagnosis
59 Full LED
Fuses in the engine compartment
Fig. 87
In the engine compartment: lid of the
fuse bo
x - V
ariant 1
»
85
Emergencies
Fig. 88
In the engine compartment: lid of the
fuse bo
x - V
ariant 2
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 45
Only replace fuses with a fuse of the same
amperage (same colour and markings) and
size.
Opening the fuse box
●
Open the bonnet
›››
page 244.
●
Press lid locking clip upwards in the direc-
tion of the arrow
1
›
›
›
Fig. 87 or
›››
Fig. 88.
●
Open the cover in the direction indicated
by the arrow
2
.
●
Remove the plastic clip from the lid of the
fuse bo
x.
●
R
epl
ace the appropriate fuse.
●
Place the plastic clip back in its original po-
sition.
●
Place the lid on the fuse box and press until
you hear it click into place.
Fuse placement
No. Consumer
1 Radiator fan
2 Control unit for the glow system
3 ABS/ESC control unit
4 Additional electric heat - Circuit 2
5 Additional electric heat - Circuit 3
6 Automatic gearbox
7 Engine control unit
8 Front windscreen wipers
9 Central control unit, battery data module
10 ABS/ESC control unit
12 Engine components
13 Brake pedal switch
No. Consumer
14
Engine components, fuel coil relay, radiator
fan, coolant pump
15
Engine control unit
16 Starter motor
17 Engine control unit
18
Engine components, additional electric heat
relay coil
s
19 Lambda probe
20
Control devices for the glow system, heating
of the sump f
an
Changing bulbs
Intr
oduction
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 46.
Depending on how equipped the vehicle is,
there are different sets of headlights and tail
lights:
●
Halogen main headlights (double head-
light).
●
Full-LED main headlights*.
●
Rear bulb light.
●
LED rear light*.
86
Fuses and bulbs
Full-LED headlight system*
Full
-LED headlights handl
e all light functions
(daylight, side light, t
urn signal, dipped beam
and route light) with light emitting diodes
(LEDs) as a light source.
Full-LED headlights are designed to last the
lifetime of the car and light bulbs cannot be
replaced. In case of headlight failure, go to an
authorised workshop to have it replaced.
Double headlight bulb change
Changing bulbs requires a certain degree of
practical skill. If in doubt, we recommend you
have defective bulbs changed by a special-
ised service or, in case of an emergency, seek
professional assistance.
●
Switch off the ignition and all of the lights
before changing a bulb.
●
Do not touch the glass part of the bulb with
your bare hands. The fingerprints left on the
glass will vaporise as a result of the heat gen-
erated by the bulb, reducing bulb life and
causing condensation on the reflector sur-
face, thus reducing effectiveness.
●
A bulb must only be replaced by one of the
same type. The type is indicated on the bulb,
either on the glass part or on the base.
●
There is a storage area for the bulb box in
the spare wheel well or below the carpet in
the luggage compartment.
WARNING
●
Take par
ticular care when working on
components in the engine compartment if
the engine is warm. Risk of burns.
●
Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. The
glass can break when you touch the bulb,
causing injury.
●
When changing bulbs, please take care
not to injure yourself on sharp parts in the
headlight housing.
CAUTION
●
Remov
e the ignition key before working
on the electric system. Otherwise, a short
circuit could occur.
●
Switch off the lights and the parking light
before changing a bulb.
For the sake of the environment
Please ask your specialist retailer how to
dispose of used bulbs in the proper manner.
Note
●
Depending on weather conditions (cold
or w
et), the front lights, the fog lights, the
rear lights and the turn signals may be tem-
porarily misted. This has no influence on
the useful life of the lighting system. By
switching on the lights, the area through
which the beam of light is projected will
quickly be demisted. However, the edges
may continue to be misted.
●
Pl
ease check at regular intervals that all
lighting (especially the exterior lighting) on
your vehicle is functioning properly. This is
not only in the interest of your own safety,
but also that of all other road users.
●
Before changing a bulb, make sure you
have the correct new bulb.
●
Do not touch the glass part of the bulb
with your bare hands, use a cloth or paper
towel instead. Otherwise, the fingerprints
left on the glass will vaporise as a result of
the heat generated by the bulb, they will be
deposited on the reflector and damage its
surface.
Double headlight bulbs
Fig. 89
Main headlight bulbs.
Installation position of double headlight bulbs
»
87
Emergencies
Side lights
Main beam headlights
Dipped beam headlights
T
urn signal lights
Daylight
Changing side light bulbs
Fig. 90 Changing side light bulbs.
–
Raise the bonnet.
–
Remove the protective cover
›
›
›
Fig. 90.
–
Remove the bulb holder
›››
Fig. 90
1
by
pulling it outw
ar
ds.
–
R
emove the bulb by pulling it out and fit the
new one.
–
Installation involves all of the above steps in
reverse sequence.
A
B
C
D
E
–
Fit the pr
ot
ectiv
e cover. Make sure that the
cover fits correctly on the housing during
operation.
–
Check whether the new bulb is working.
Changing main beam headlight
bulb
Fig. 91
Changing main beam headlight bulbs.
–
Raise the bonnet.
–
Remove the protective cover.
–
Remove connector
›
›
›
Fig. 91
1
by pulling
outw
ar
d.
–
Extr
act the bulb and fit the replacement so
that it fits correctly into the recess on the
reflector.
–
Installation involves all of the above steps in
reverse sequence.
–
Fit the protective cover. Make sure that the
cover fits correctly on the housing during
operation.
–
Check whether the new bulb is working.
Changing dipped beam light bulbs
Fig. 92
Changing dipped beam headlight
bulbs:
Fig. 93
Changing dipped beam headlight
bulbs.ar
ch trim.
88
Fuses and bulbs
–
T
urn the wheel f
or access t
o the wheel
housing cover and remove the cover
›››
Fig. 92.
–
Remove the protective cover from the
headlight
›››
Fig. 93.
–
Remove connector
›››
Fig. 93
1
by pulling
outw
ar
d.
–
Unclip the r
etainer spring
›››
Fig. 93
2
pressing clockwise and inwards.
–
Extract the bulb and fit the replacement so
that the lug on the base fits int
o the r
ecess
on the r
eflector.
–
Fit the connector.
–
Fit the protective cover. Make sure that the
cover fits correctly on the housing during
operation.
–
Replace the wheel housing cover.
–
Check whether the new bulb is working.
Changing turn signal bulbs
Fig. 94
Changing turn signal bulbs.
–
Raise the bonnet.
–
Turn the bulb holder
›
›
›
Fig. 94
1
anti-
cl
ockwise and r
emo
ve it.
–
Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb
holder and turning it anti-clockwise at the
same time.
–
Fit the replacement bulb in the bulb holder
and turn clockwise as far as it will go.
–
Check whether the new bulb is working.
Changing daytime driving light
bulbs
Fig. 95
Changing daytime driving light bulbs.
–
Raise the bonnet.
–
Turn the bulb holder
›
›
›
Fig. 95
1
anti-
cl
ockwise and r
emo
ve it.
–
Remove the bulb by pressing on the bulb
holder and turning it anti-clockwise at the
same time.
–
Fit the replacement bulb in the bulb holder
and turn clockwise as far as it will go.
–
Check whether the new bulb is working.
89
Emergencies
Changing the fog light bulbs
Fr
ont f
og light bulb
Fig. 96
Fog light: remove the grille
Fig. 97 Fog light: detach the bulb holder
–
Remove the bolt
›
›
›
Fig. 96
1
from the fog
light grill
e with a scr
e
wdriver.
–
Subsequently, remove the clips located on
the edge of the grill with gentle leverage.
–
Remove the 3 bolts
2
.
–
Remove the metal clip situated on the up-
per part of the f
og light by pulling aw
ay
fr
om the vehicle
3
and extract the fog
light.
–
Remove connector
›
›
›
Fig. 97
1
from the
bulb
.
–
T
urn the bulb hol
der
›››
Fig. 97
2
to the left
and pull.
–
R
emo
v
e the bulb by pressing on the bulb
holder and turning it counter-clockwise at
the same time.
–
Installation involves all of the above steps in
reverse sequence.
–
Check that the bulb works properly.
Changing the rear lights (on
the side panel)
Removing the rear light
1)
Fig. 98
Remove the rear light unit from side
panel
.
1)
In the case of LED rear lights of the side panel
only the turn signal lamp can be changed. The il
-
lustrations in the manual correspond to the bulb
version and do not correspond exactly to the LED
version.
90
Fuses and bulbs
Check which of the bulbs is defective.
–
Open the luggage compartment to access
the r
ainduct ar
ea.
–
T
ake the screwdriver or a Torx 20 key (T20)
from the vehicle tool kit and loosen (turning
anti-clockwise) and remove the two retain-
ing screws that secure the front of the light
›››
Fig. 98
1
, taking care not to lose them.
–
Pull the rear light unit backward (
›
›
›
Fig. 98
2
) to remove the light from its housing.
Removing the bulb holder
Fig. 99
Light connector at the rear of the rear
light unit.
Fig. 100 Retaining screws on reverse side of
rear light unit.
–
Disconnect the light connector
A
›››
Fig. 99 by mo
ving its side l
e
vers (arrows)
and pulling the connector outwards.
–
Place the light on a level, horizontal surface
on top of a soft cloth so as not to scratch
the outer glass.
–
Unscrew the four retaining screws from the
bulb holder anti-clockwise using a screw-
driver or a Torx 20 key (T20) from the vehi-
cle tool kit
›››
Fig. 100. Take care not to lose
the bulb holder retaining screws.
Changing bulbs
Fig. 101
Position of the bulbs in the bulb holder
The bulbs are secured with a bayonet fasten-
er
. The t
abl
e below gives an overview of the
bulb positions.
–
Lightly press the defective bulb into the
bulb holder, then turn it anti-clockwise and
remove it.
–
Fit the new bulb, pressing it into the bulb
holder and turn it clockwise as far as it will
go.
–
Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints from
the glass part of the bulb.
–
Check that the new bulb works properly.
–
Replace the bulb holder.
–
Screw in the bulb holder using the four
screws, turning them clockwise.
»
91
Emergencies
Position of the bulbs
›››
Fig. 101 Bulb function
A
Turn signals: PY21W NA LL
B
Side lights-brake lights: P21/5W
C
Position: P21/5W
Note
Check the condition of the seal. If dam-
aged, a replacement can be acquired from
an Official Service.
Fitting the rear light
Fig. 102
Fit the tail light unit.
Fig. 103 Fit the tail light unit.
–
Make sure the connector is correctly in
pl
ace
.
–
Pr
ess the rear light unit backwards (driving
direction) by fitting the fastenings into the
rubber mountings
›››
Fig. 102
A
.
–
Take the screwdriver or a Torx 20 key (T20)
fr
om the v
ehicl
e tool kit and tighten (turning
clockwise
›››
Fig. 103) the two retaining
screws that secure the front of the light.
Changing tail lights (on the
rear lid)
Removing the bulb holder
1)
Fig. 104
Remove the cover from the rear lid.
1)
For rear-lid LED rear lights, only the reverse and
retro f
og bulb can be replaced. The illustrations in
the manual correspond to the bulb version and
do not correspond exactly to the LED version.
92
Fuses and bulbs
Fig. 105
Remove the bulb holder.
The rear lid must be open to change the
bulbs.
Y
ou can access the bulb hol
der f
or the inner
tail lights through the inside of the rear lid.
–
Check which of the bulbs is defective.
–
Open the cover to access the lights, turning
it by hand in the direction indicated by the
arrows.
–
Access the lights by disconnecting the con-
nector
1
›
›
›
Fig. 105 and unscrewing
the bulb holder
›››
Fig. 105 . Take care not
to lose the bulb holder retaining screw.
–
Change the bulbs
›››
page 93.
Changing bulbs
Fig. 106
Position of the bulbs in the bulb hold-
er
The bulbs are secured with a bayonet fasten-
er
. The t
abl
e below gives an overview of the
bulbs
›››
table on page 93.
–
Lightly press the defective bulb into the
bulb holder, then turn it anti-clockwise and
remove it.
–
Fit the new bulb, pressing it into the bulb
holder and turn it clockwise as far as it will
go.
–
Use a cloth to remove any fingerprints from
the glass part of the bulb.
–
Check that the new bulb works properly.
–
Re-install the bulb holder
›››
page 93.
–
Screw in the bulb holder.
Position of the bulbs
›››
Fig. 106 Bulb function
A
Reversing lights: P21W
B
Side lights: R5W LL
C
Fog lights: P21W
Note
One of the two sides may not be fitted with
a fog light, depending on the country and
type of driving. In this case
, the hole for the
light is covered.
Fitting the bulb-holder
–
Position the bulb holder on the tail light and
align it so that it is secur
ely seat
ed.
–
Scr
ew in the bulb holder using the corre-
sponding screw.
–
Make sure the connector is correctly in
place.
–
Close the inner trim cover.
»
93
Emergencies
Note
Check the condition of the seal. If dam-
aged, a replacement can be acquir
ed from
an Official Service.
Changing the side and num-
ber plate bulbs
Side t
urn signals
Fig. 107 Turn signal integrated in the rear view
mirr
or
The side turn signals are LEDS and are inte-
gr
at
ed in the e
xterior mirrors.
In case of failure, go to an authorised work-
shop to have them replaced.
Changing the bulb on the number
plate
Fig. 108
Removing number plate light
Fig. 109 Changing the bulb.
Removing the bulb holder
●
Unscrew the screws to remove the bulb
›
›
›
Fig. 108.
●
Remove the bulb, moving it in the direction
of the arrow and outwards
›››
Fig. 109.
●
Installation involves all of the above steps in
reverse sequence.
Note
Depending on how equipped the vehicle is,
the number plate lights may be LEDs. LEDs
hav
e an estimated life that exceeds than
that of the car. If a light with LEDs fails, go
to an authorised workshop for replace-
ment.
94
Operation
Fig. 110 Interior.
96
Controls and displays
Operation
Contr
ol
s and displ
ays
General instrument panel
Electric window controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Control for adjusting electric exteri-
or mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . 130
Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Multifunction switch lever:
–
Turn signals, headlights, parking
lights, headlight fl
asher . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
–
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Steering wheel:
–
With horn
–
With the driver front airbag . . . . . . . . 16
–
With controls for audio, navigation
system and telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
General instrument panel: Instru-
ments and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Multifunction switch lever:
–
Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
–
Windscreen wipers and wind-
screen washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Depending on the equipment:
–
Audio system
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
–
Navigation syst
em
Haz
ar
d warning lights switch . . . . . . . . 125
Control lamp for deactivated front
passenger airbag in centre con-
sole. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Front passenger airbag switch . . . . . . 73
Depending on the equipment, glove
compartment with: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
–
CD player* and/or SD card* . . . . . 175
Front passenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Headlight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Lever for unlocking the bonnet . . . . . . 13
Fuse compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Steering column adjustment lev-
er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
USB/AUX-IN input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Depending on the equipment:
–
Gear lever (manual gearbox) . . . . . 203
–
Selector lever (automatic gear-
box) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Depending on the equipment:
–
Drink holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
–
Ashtray holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Storage space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Depending on the equipment, con-
trols for:
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
–
Driv
er heat
ed seat
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
–
Park assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
–
Central lock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
–
Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
–
Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
–
Front passenger heated seat . . . . . 132
Depending on the equipment:
–
Heating controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
–
Air conditioning controls . . . . . . . . . . . 149
–
Climatronic control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Note
The location of the controls of right-hand
drive cars differs slightly fr
om the location
shown here
›››
Fig. 110. However, the sym-
bols correspond to the respective controls.
26
97
Operation
Instruments and warning lamps
Instruments
Vie
w of instrument panel
Fig. 111
Instrument panel, on dash panel.
Details of the instruments
›
›
›
Fig. 111:
Revolution counter (with the engine run-
ning, in hundreds of revolutions per mi-
nute).
The beginning of the red zone of the rev
counter indicates the maximum speed in
any gear after running-in and with the en-
gine hot. However, it is advisable to
1
change up a gear or move the selector
l
e
v
er to D (or lift your foot off the acceler-
ator) before the needle reaches the red
zone
›››
.
Engine cool
ant t
emper
ature display
›››
page 247
Displays on the screen.
2
3
Adjuster button and display
›
›
›
page 101.
Speedometer.
Fuel gauge
›››
page 102.
WARNING
Any distraction may lead to an accident,
with the risk of injury.
4
5
6
98
Instruments and warning lamps
●
Do not operate the instrument panel con-
tr
ols when driving.
CAUTION
●
T
o pre
vent damage to the engine, the rev
counter needle should only remain in the
red zone for a short period of time.
●
When the engine is cold, avoid high revs
and heavy acceleration and do not make
the engine work hard.
For the sake of the environment
Changing up a gear in time reduces fuel
consumption and noise.
Revolution counter
The rev counter indicates the number of en-
gine r
e
v
olutions per minute
›››
Fig. 111
1
.
T
ogether with the gear
-change indicat
or, the
rev counter offers you the possibility of using
the engine of your vehicle at a suitable
speed.
The start of the red zone on the dial indicates
the maximum engine speed which may be
used briefly when the engine is warm and af-
ter it has been run in properly. Before reach-
ing this range, you should change to a higher
gear for vehicles with a manual gearbox or
for automatic gearboxes put the selector lev-
er in “D” or take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
We recommend that you avoid high revs and
that you follow the recommendations on the
gear-change indicator. Consult the addition-
al information in
›››
page 208.
CAUTION
Never allow the rev counter needle
1
›››
Fig. 111
to go into the red zone on the
scale for more than a very brief period, oth-
erwise there is a risk of engine damage.
For the sake of the environment
Changing up a gear early will help you to
save fuel and minimise emissions and en-
gine noise.
Indications on the display
A variety of information can be viewed on the
instrument panel displ
ay
›
›
›
Fig. 111
3
de-
pending on the v
ehicl
e equipment:
●
Bonnet, r
ear lid and doors open
›››
page 31.
●
Information and warning texts.
●
Mileage.
●
Time.
●
Navigation instructions.
●
Outside temperature.
●
Compass.
●
Shift lever position
›››
page 205.
●
Recommended gear (manual gearbox)
›››
page 208.
●
Multifunction display (MFD) and menus with
different setting options
›››
page 27.
●
Service interval display
›››
page 33.
●
Second speed display
›››
page 100.
●
Speed warning function
›››
page 32.
●
Start-Stop system status display
›››
page 215.
●
Low consumption driving status
›››
page 100
●
Identifying letters on engine (LDM)
›››
page 100.
Distance travelled
The odometer registers the total distance
travelled by the car.
The odometer (trip) shows the distance
travelled since the last odometer reset. The
last digit of the trip recorder indicates distan-
ces of 100 metres or one tenths of a mile.
●
Briefly press the button
›››
Fig. 111
4
to re-
set the trip r
ecor
der t
o 0.
●
Keep the button
4
pressed for about 3
seconds and the pr
e
vious v
alue will be dis-
played.
»
99
Operation
Time
●
To set the time, keep the button
›
›
›
Fig. 111
4
pressed for more than 3 seconds to select
the hour or minut
e displ
ay.
●
T
o continue setting the time, press the up-
per or lower part of the button
4
. Hold but-
t
on do
wn t
o scroll through the numbers
quickly.
●
Press the button
4
again in order to finish
setting the time
.
The time can al
so be set on the Easy Con-
nect syst
em using the
button and the
function butt
on
SETTINGS > Date and
time
›
››
page 24.
Compass
With the ignition on and the navigation sys-
tem on, the cardinal point corresponding to
the direction of travel of the vehicle is dis-
played on the instrument panel.
Selector lever position
The selected gear is displayed on the side of
the selector lever and on the instrument pan-
el display. In positions D and S, and with the
Tiptronic, the corresponding gear is also dis-
played.
Outside temperature display
If the outside temperature is lower than ap-
proximately +4°C (+39°F), the “ice crystal
symbol” on the outside temperature dis-
play also lights up. This symbol remains lit un-
til the outside temperature exceeds +6°C
(+43°F)
›››
.
When the v
ehicl
e is st
ationary, when the aux-
iliary heater is switched on or when driving at
very low speeds, the outside temperature in-
dicated may be higher than the actual tem-
perature due to the heat produced by the en-
gine.
The margin of measurement ranges from
-45°C (-49°F) to +76°C (+169°F).
Recommended gear (manual gearbox)
The recommended gear in order to save fuel
is displayed on the instrument panel while
you are driving
›››
page 208.
Second speed display (mph or km/h)
In addition to the speedometer, the speed
can also be displayed in a different unit of
measurement (in miles or in km per hour).
This option cannot be deactivated in models
destined for countries in which the second
speed must always be visible.
The second speed display can be adjusted in
the Easy Connect system by means of the
button and the function button SETTINGS
> Units
›
›
›
page 24.
Speed warning
When the speed setting is exceeded, this will
be indicated on the instrument panel display.
This is very useful, for example when using
winter tyres that are not designed for driving
at the maximum speed of the vehicle
›››
page 32.
The speed warning settings can be adjusted
in the Easy Connect system by means of the
button and the function button SETTINGS
> Driver Assistance
›
›
›
page 24.
Start-Stop operating display
Updated information relating to the status is
displayed on the instrument panel
›››
page 215.
Low consumption driving status *
Depending on the equipment, when driving,
the display appears on the instrument
panel when the vehicle is in low consumption
status.
Identifying letters on engine (LDM)
Hold the button
›››
Fig. 111
4
down for more
than 15 seconds t
o displ
ay the identifying l
et-
ters of the vehicle engine (LDM). To do this,
the ignition must be switched on and the en-
gine switched off.
100
Instruments and warning lamps
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
›››
in Con-
trol and warning l
amps on page 103.
WARNING
Even though outside temperatures are
above fr
eezing, some roads and bridges
may be icy.
●
At outside temperatures above +4°C
(+39°F), even when the “ice crystal sym-
bol” is not visible, there may still be patch-
es of ice on the road.
●
The outside temperature sensor takes a
guideline measurement.
Note
●
Different v
ersions of the instrument panel
are available and therefore the versions
and instructions on the display may vary. In
the case of displays without warning or in-
formation texts, faults are indicated exclu-
sively by the warning lamps.
●
Depending on the equipment, some set-
tings and instructions can also be carried
out in the Easy Connect system.
●
When several warnings are active at the
same time, the symbols are shown succes-
sively for a few seconds and will stay on
until the fault is rectified.
Odometer
Fig. 112
Instrument panel: odometer and reset
butt
on.
The distance covered is displayed in “kilome-
tr
es” or mil
es “m”. It is possibl
e to change the
measurement units (kilometres “km”/miles
“m”) in the radio/Easy Connect*
›››
page 24.
Odometer/trip recorder
The odometer shows the total distance cov-
ered by the vehicle.
The trip recorder shows the distance that has
been travelled since it was last reset. It is used
to measure short trips. The last digit of the trip
recorder indicates distances of 100 metres or
tenths of a mile.
The trip recorder can be set to zero by press-
ing 0.0/SET
›
›
›
Fig. 112.
Fault display
If there is a fault in the instrument panel, the
letters DEF will appear in the trip recorder dis-
play. Have the fault repaired immediately, as
far as is possible.
Coolant temperature gauge
Fig. 113
Instrument panel: coolant tempera-
t
ur
e gauge
For vehicles with no coolant temperature
gauge
, a contr
ol l
amp appears when the
coolant temperatures is high
›››
page 248.
Please note
›››
.
The cool
ant t
emper
ature gauge only works
when the ignition is switched on
›››
Fig. 113. In
order to avoid engine damage, please read
the following notes for the different tempera-
ture ranges.
»
101
Operation
A
– Cold zone
If only the diodes in the l
o
w
er part of the
scale light up, this indicates that the engine
has not yet reached operating temperature.
Avoid high revs and heavy acceleration and
do not make the engine work hard.
B
- Normal temperature
If in normal oper
ations, the diodes light up un-
til the centr
al z
one, it means that the engine
has reached operating temperature. At high
outside temperatures and when making the
engine work hard, the diodes may continue
lighting up and reach the upper zone. This is
no cause for concern, provided the control
lamp does not light up on the instrument
panel digital display.
C
– Heat range
When the LEDs light up in the upper ar
ea of
the displ
ay and the contr
ol lamp appears
on the instrument panel display, the coolant
temperature is too high
›››
page 248.
CAUTION
●
To ensure a l
ong useful life for the engine,
avoid high revs, driving at high speed and
making the engine work hard for approxi-
mately the first 15 minutes when the engine
is cold. The phase until the engine is warm
also depends on the outside temperature. If
necessary, use the engine oil temperature*
›››
page 247 as a guide.
●
Additional lights and other accessories in
front of the air inlet r
educe the cooling ef-
fect of the coolant. At high outside temper-
atures and high engine loads, there is a risk
of the engine overheating.
●
The front spoiler also ensures proper dis-
tribution of the cooling air when the vehicle
is moving. If the spoiler is damaged this can
reduce the cooling effect, which could
cause the engine to overheat. Seek spe-
cialist assistance.
Fuel level gauge
Fig. 114 Fuel gauge.
Control lamp
It lights up, and in addition, the
low
er diode lights up in red
The fuel reserve level has been reached.
When the fuel lev
el is very low, the lower diode flash-
es in red.
The fuel gauge
›››
Fig. 114 operates only
when the ignition is switched on.
The fuel tank has a capacity of approx. 55 li-
tres. When the needle reaches the fuel re-
serve area there are only approximately 7 li-
tres left in the tank. In the general instrument
panel a warning signal lights up and an
audible signal sounds.
The informative display indicates:
Refuel! Fuel range…km...(miles)
CAUTION
Never completely empty the tank! An irreg-
ularity in the fuel supply syst
em can cause
irregularities when the engine is running.
Unburned fuel can reach the exhaust gas
system, which can cause deterioration of
the catalytic converter.
Note
●
Some vehicles come fitt
ed with the fuel
gauge on the general instrument panel.
102
Instruments and warning lamps
●
The message on the display swit
ches off
only after refuelling and carrying out a
short journey.
Control lamps
Control and warning l
amps
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 34.
The control and warning lamps are indicators
of warnings,
›››
, faults
›
›
›
or certain func-
tions. Some contr
ol and w
arning l
amps come
on when the ignition is switched on, and
switch off when the engine starts running, or
while driving.
Depending on the model, additional text
messages may be viewed on the instrument
panel display. These may be purely informa-
tive or they may be advising of the need for
action
›››
page 98.
Depending upon the equipment fitted in the
vehicle, instead of a warning lamp, some-
times a symbol may be displayed on the in-
strument panel.
When certain control and warning lamps are
lit, an audible warning is also heard.
WARNING
If the warning lamps and messages are ig-
nored, the vehicl
e may stall in traffic, or
may cause accidents and severe injuries.
●
Never ignore the warning lamps or text
messages.
●
Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-
ble.
●
Park the vehicle away from traffic and
ensure that there are no highly flammable
materials under the vehicle that could
come into contact with the exhaust system
(e.g. dry grass, fuel).
●
A faulty vehicle represents a risk of acci-
dent for the driver and for other road users.
If necessary, switch on the hazard warning
lamps and put out the warning triangle to
advise other drivers.
●
Before opening the bonnet, switch off the
engine and allow it to cool.
●
In any vehicle, the engine compartment is
a hazardous area and could cause severe
injuries
›››
page 244.
CAUTION
Failure to heed the control lamps and text
messages when they appear may result in
faults in the v
ehicle.
Multi-function steering
wheel*
Gener
al inf
ormation
The steering wheel includes a multifunction
module from wher
e it is possible to control
the audio, telephone and radio/navigation
functions without needing to distract the driv-
er.
There are two versions of the multifunction
module:
●
Voice-controlled audio, phone and navi-
gation version: f
or controlling the audio
functions available (radio, audio CD, MP3,
iPod
®1)
, USB
1 )
, SD
1 )
) and Bluetooth system
from the steering wheel.
●
Voice-controlled audio, phone and navi-
gation version: for controlling the audio
functions available (radio, audio CD, MP3,
iPod
®1 )
, USB
1 )
, SD
1 )
) and Bluetooth system
from the steering wheel.
1)
Depending on the vehicle equipment.
103
Operation
Operating the audio, telephone and navigation system with voice control
Fig. 115 Controls on the steering wheel.
Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone
a)
Navigation
a)
A
Turn
Turn volume up/down. You do
not need to be in audio mode
(radio).
Turn volume up/down. You do
not need to be in audio mode
(media).
Turn volume up/down. You do
not need to be in audio mode
(media).
Turn volume up/down. You do
not need to be in telephone
mode.
Turn announcement volume
up/down. You do not need t
o
be in navigation mode but
there has to be an announce-
ment active when you adjust
the volume.
A
Press
Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute incoming call.
Mute the current navigation
announcement.
B
a)
Activate/deactivate voice control.
This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, assist
ants, vehicle status, travel data). When the system is in telephone mode this button’s
function is deactivated during the ongoing call, and without Radio/Media functionality (except AUX).
C
/
D
Search for the previous/next
station
b)
.
Short press:
Switch t
o the
previous/next song.
Hold down: Fast rewind/for-
ward
c)
.
No function
– There is no active call: Ra-
dio/Media functionality (ex-
cept AUX)
– Active call: no function
No function for the other
modes (navigation, assis-
tants, vehicle status, travel
data).
E
/
F
a)
Change instrument panel menu.
This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, assist
ants, vehicle status, travel data).
104
Instruments and warning lamps
Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone
a)
Navigation
a)
G
Coloured instrument panel: change to the pre
vious menu.
Monochrome Instrument panel: switch to the previous function.
H
Turn
Coloured instrument panel:
List of stations avail
able (on-
ly if the instrument panel is in
audio menu).
Coloured instrument panel:
next track (only if the instru-
ment panel is in audio menu).
No function
– There is no active call: List
of last calls.
– Activ
e call: access the call
options list (call on hold,
hang up, mute microphone,
private number, etc.).
– Active route: access the
view to halt guidance t
o des-
tination.
– No active route: list of previ-
ous destinations.
H
Press
Acts on the instrument panel or confirms the instrument panel menu option depending on the menu option.
a)
According to the vehicle's equipment package.
b)
This action can be performed when you are listening to the radio; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.
c)
These actions can be performed when you are listening to media; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.
105
Operation
Operating the audio, telephone and navigation system with voice control
Fig. 116 Controls on the steering wheel.
Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone
a)
Navigation
a)
A
Turn
Turn volume up/down. You do
not need to be in audio mode
(radio).
Turn volume up/down. You do
not need to be in audio mode
(media).
Turn volume up/down. You do
not need to be in audio mode
(media).
Turn volume up/down. You do
not need to be in telephone
mode.
Turn announcement volume
up/down. You do not need t
o
be in navigation mode but
there has to be an announce-
ment active when you adjust
the volume.
A
Press
Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute volume. Mute incoming call.
Mute the current navigation
announcement.
B
a)
– Incoming call: pick up (short press), re
ject (long press).
– Ongoing call: hang up (short press).
– No incoming/ongoing call: open phone menu (short press), repeat last ongoing call (long press).
These functions can be carried out on any mode (audio, media, navigations, assistants, vehicle status, travel data).
C
/
D
Search for the previous/next
station
b)
.
Short press:
Switch t
o the
previous/next song.
Hold down: Fast rewind/for-
ward
c)
.
No function
– There is no active call: Ra-
dio/Media functionality (ex-
cept AUX)
– Active call: no function
No function for the other
modes (navigation, assis-
tants, vehicle status, travel
data).
E
/
F
a)
Change instrument panel menu.
This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, assist
ants, vehicle status, travel data).
106
Instruments and warning lamps
Button Radio Media (except AUX) AUX Telephone
a)
Navigation
a)
G
Cycles through the audio source: FM/AM – CD – SD - USB - AUX - BT Audio (only those that are available).
This function can be used from any mode (audio, media, navigation, assist
ants, vehicle status, travel data).
H
Turn
Coloured instrument panel:
List of stations avail
able (on-
ly if the instrument panel is in
audio menu).
Coloured instrument panel:
next track (only if the instru-
ment panel is in audio menu).
No function
– There is no active call: List
of last calls.
– Activ
e call: access the call
options list (call on hold,
hang up, mute microphone,
private number, etc.).
– Active route: access the
view to halt guidance t
o des-
tination.
– No active route: list of previ-
ous destinations.
H
Press
Acts on the instrument panel or confirms the instrument panel menu option depending on the menu option.
a)
According to the vehicle's equipment package.
b)
This action can be performed when you are listening to the radio; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.
c)
These actions can be performed when you are listening to media; there is no need to be in audio-radio mode.
107
Operation
Opening and closing
R
emot
e contr
ol
General notes
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 11
The remote control key can
●
Lock and unlock the vehicle
●
Unlock or open the rear lid.
The remote contr
ol transmitter and the bat-
teries are integrated in the key. The receiver is
inside the vehicle. The remote control key has
a maximum range of 30 metres. The range is
reduced as the batteries start to lose power.
The key includes a foldaway part that can be
used to manually lock or unlock the vehicle
and to start the engine.
If a lost key is replaced or the receiver is re-
paired or changed, the remote control key
must be adapted by an authorised SEAT
dealer. Only then can the remote control key
be used again.
Note
●
The remote contr
ol is automatically de-
activated when the ignition is switched on.
●
The remote contr
ol function may be tem-
porarily limited by interference from other
transmitters near the vehicle that operate
on the same frequency (e.g. mobile phone,
television transmitter).
●
If the central locking system or the anti-
theft alarm only responds to the remote
control at a distance of less than 3 metres,
then the battery must be replaced
›››
page 110.
●
If the driver door is open, the vehicle can-
not be locked using the remote control.
Unlocking and locking the vehicle
Fig. 117
Remote control key
Unlocking the vehicle
–
Press button
1
.
Locking the vehicle
–
Press button
2
.
Deactiv
ating the Saf
e l
ock
–
Press button
2
twice in 2 seconds. Further
inf
ormation
›
›
›
page 110.
Unlocking the rear lid
–
Press button
3
. Further information
›
›
›
page 117.
Unfolding the key shaft
–
Press button
4
.
F
ol
ding the k
ey shaft
–
Press button
4
and fold the key shaft back
t
o its original position.
The t
urn signal
s will flash twice when the ve-
hicle is unlocked. If the vehicle is unlocked us-
ing button
1
and none of the doors or the
r
ear lid is opened in the f
oll
owing 30 seconds,
the vehicle will automatically relock and the
Safe lock or the anti-theft alarm will be acti-
vated. This function prevents the vehicle from
being unlocked by mistake.
Locking indication
The turn signals will flash if the vehicle has
been correctly locked.
108
Opening and closing
Should any of the doors or the rear lid remain
open when the v
ehicl
e is l
ocked, the turn sig-
nals will only flash when they are closed.
WARNING
Do not leave people or animals in vehicles
locked fr
om outside with the Safe lock acti-
vated: the doors and windows cannot then
be opened from the inside. Doors locked in
this manner could delay assistance in an
emergency. Risk of death!
Note
●
Only use the remote contr
ol when the
doors and the rear lid are locked and the
vehicle is within sight.
●
Do not press the lock button on the re-
mote control before inserting the key in the
ignition, otherwise the vehicle could be
locked by mistake. Should this occur, press
the unlock button on the remote control.
Remote control synchronisation
If the vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked
using the r
emot
e contr
ol, the key code may
not match that of the control unit. This can
occur when the remote control buttons are
frequently pressed outside the range of the
system or if the remote control battery has
been replaced.
In this case, it must be synchronised as fol-
lows:
●
Press any key on the remote control key.
●
Open the door using the key within the next
minute.
Keys
General notes
Fig. 118
Key with remote control/Key without
r
emot
e contr
ol.
Two keys are always supplied with the vehi-
cl
e
. Depending on the model v
ersion, your
car may include keys without remote control
›››
Fig. 118 or with remote control
›››
Fig. 118 .
WARNING
●
Never l
eave the key inside whenever you
leave the vehicle - even if only for a mo-
ment. This is particularly important if chil-
dren are to remain in the vehicle. Children
might start the engine or some other elec-
trical component, e.g. electric windows.
Risk of injury!
●
Wait until the vehicle has completely
stopped before taking the key out of the ig-
nition. Otherwise the steering wheel may
lock suddenly. Risk of accident!
CAUTION
●
Each key contains el
ectronic compo-
nents and must, therefore, be protected
from dampness and strong vibrations.
●
Keep the grooves in the key shaft clean.
Any dirt (fibre from clothing, dust, etc.) has
a negative impact on locks, ignition, etc.
Note
Should a key be lost, request a duplicate
key from an Authorised SEAT deal
er.
109
Operation
Replacing the battery in the remote
contr
ol k
ey
Fig. 119
Vehicle key: opening the battery com-
partment.
Fig. 120
Vehicle key: removing the battery.
SEAT recommends you ask a specialised
w
orkshop t
o r
eplace the battery.
The battery is located to the rear of the vehi-
cle key, under a cover.
Changing the battery
●
Unfold the vehicle key shaft.
●
Remove the cover from the back of the ve-
hicle key
›››
Fig. 119 in the direction of the ar-
row
›››
.
●
Extract the battery from the compartment
using a suit
abl
e thin ob
ject
›››
Fig. 120.
●
Place the new battery in the compartment
as shown
›››
Fig. 120, pressing in the opposite
direction to that shown by the arrow
›››
.
●
Fit the cover as shown
›
›
›
Fig. 119, pressing
it onto the vehicle key casing in the opposite
direction to that shown by the arrow until it
clicks into place.
CAUTION
●
If the battery is not changed correctly,
the v
ehicle key may be damaged.
●
Use of unsuitable batteries may damage
the vehicle key. For this reason, always re-
place the dead battery with another of the
same voltage, size and specifications.
●
When fitting the battery, check that the
polarity is correct.
For the sake of the environment
Please dispose of your used batteries cor-
rectly and with respect f
or the environ-
ment.
Note
If it is not possible to unlock or lock the ve-
hicle with the remot
e control key once the
battery has been replaced, it will need to
be re-synchronised
›››
page 109.
Central locking system
Gener
al not
es
All of the doors, the r
ear lid and the fuel cap
fl
ap
1)
will unl
ock at the same time when the
central locking system is used.
Warning lamp on the driver door
Once the doors are locked, the warning lamp
will flash quickly for 2 seconds and then at a
slower rate.
If the vehicle is locked with Safe lock engag-
ed
›››
page 112, the warning lamp on the
1)
Valid for vehicles with a keyless fuel tank cap.
110
Opening and closing
driver door will flash quickly for 2 seconds be-
f
or
e s
witching off for 30 seconds and then
flashing at a slower rate.
If the warning lamp flashes quickly for 2 sec-
onds and then remains switched on before
flashing at a slower rate after 30 seconds,
there is a fault in the interior monitor and tow-
away protection system
›››
page 117. Go to a
technical service.
WARNING
●
Locking from the outside car
elessly or
without good visibility may lead to bruising,
particularly in the case of children.
●
When locking a vehicle, never leave chil-
dren unaccompanied inside, as from the
outside it will be difficult to provide assis-
tance if required.
●
Having the doors locked prevents intrud-
ers from getting in, for example when stop-
ped at a traffic light.
Individualised settings
Unlocking single doors
This optional function unl
ocks the driv
er door
only. The other doors r
emain locked and are
only unlocked when the next command is giv-
en (unlock).
Automatic unlock and lock
The doors and the rear lid are locked auto-
matically when the vehicle reaches a speed
of about 15 km/h (9 mph).
The doors unlock automatically when the key
is removed from the ignition. Additionally, the
driver or front passenger can unlock the
doors by pressing the
›››
page 113 central
lock button or by pulling the front door han-
dle.
WARNING
Locking the doors prevents intruders from
getting into the car, e
.g. while waiting at in-
tersections. However, it can also delay as-
sistance in the event of an accident. Risk of
death!
Note
●
Activation of the single door setting can
be r
equested at your SEAT dealer.
●
In the event of an accident in which the
airbags deploy, the doors will be automati-
cally unlocked for easier access and assis-
tance.
●
If the central locking system should fail to
work at any time, only the driver door can
be locked or unlocked using the key
›››
page 112. All other doors and the rear lid
can be operated manually.
–
Manual release
›
››
page 12.
–
Manual release mechanism for the rear
lid
›››
page 12.
Unlocking with key
Fig. 121 Key positions during vehicle locking
and unl
ocking.
–
Turn the key in the driver door in the forward
driving dir
ection t
o its unl
ock position
A
›››
Fig. 12
1
.
–
Pull the handl
e and open the door.
●
All doors (driver door only on vehicles with
anti-theft alarm) are unlocked.
●
The rear lid is unlocked.
●
The fuel tank flap is unlocked
1)
.
»
1)
Valid for vehicles with a keyless fuel tank cap.
111
Operation
●
The court
esy lights s
wit
ch on.
●
The Safe lock is deactivated.
●
The driver door warning lamp stops flash-
ing (on vehicles not equipped with an anti-
theft system)
›››
page 116.
Note
If the vehicle is equipped with an anti-theft
alarm system, you hav
e 15 seconds from
the time the door is opened to insert the
key in the ignition and start the vehicle. If,
during these 15 seconds, the vehicle is not
started, the alarm is triggered.
Locking with key
–
Turn the key in the driver door lock cylinder
in the r
e
v
erse direction to its lock position
B
›
›
›
Fig. 121.
●
The doors, the rear lid and the fuel tank
flap
1)
will be locked.
●
The courtesy lights switch off.
●
The Safe lock is immediately activated.
●
Warning lamp on the driver door starts to
flash.
Note
The vehicle doors cannot be locked if the
driver door is open.
Safe Lock
The central locking system is equipped with a
Safe lock
. If the vehicle is closed from out-
side, the door locks will automatically lock.
The warning lamp on the driver door will flash
quickly for about 2 seconds and then at a
slower rate. It is not possible to open any of
the doors from the inside or outside using the
handle. This limits the possibility of intruders
getting into the vehicle.
The Safe lock can be deactivated by press-
ing the lock button twice in less than 2 sec-
onds.
If Safe lock is out of service, the control lamp
on the driver door will flash quickly for about
2 seconds before switching off for 30 sec-
onds and then flashing at a slower rate.
The Safe lock is re-activated on unlocking
and locking the vehicle again.
If the vehicle is locked and the Safe lock is
deactivated, the vehicle can be opened from
inside by pulling on the door handle.
WARNING
Do not leave people or animals in locked
vehicles with Saf
e lock activated: the doors
and windows cannot then be opened from
the inside. Doors locked in this manner
could delay assistance in an emergency.
Risk of death!
Note
●
The anti-theft alarm swit
ches on auto-
matically when the vehicle is locked, even
if the Safe lock is deactivated. The Vehicle
interior monitoring, however, is not activa-
ted.
●
Given that the Safe function will be acti-
vated on locking the vehicle, CHECK DEAD-
LOCK will be shown on the general instru-
ment panel display. On vehicles equipped
with an informative display, Caution SAFE!
On-board documentation!
1)
Valid for vehicles with a keyless fuel tank cap.
112
Opening and closing
Central locking button
Fig. 122
Central lock button.
If the vehicle has not been locked from out-
side
, it is possibl
e t
o lock and unlock the
doors from inside by pressing the
›››
Fig. 122
button, even without the key in the ignition.
Locking of all doors, the boot lid and the
fuel tank flap
1)
–
Press the button
›››
Fig. 122. The warning
lamp on the button will light up.
Unlocking of all doors, the boot lid and the
fuel tank cap
1)
–
Press the button
›››
Fig. 122. The warning
lamp on the button will switch off.
If the vehicle has been locked using the cen-
tral lock button.
●
The rear lid cannot be unlocked from the
outside (security measure, e.g. when stopped
at an intersection).
●
The doors can be unlocked individually by
pulling the handle.
●
The vehicle doors cannot be locked if any
of the doors are open.
●
In the event of an accident in which the air-
bags activate, doors locked from the inside
will be automatically unlocked for easier ac-
cess and assistance.
WARNING
The central locking system remains opera-
tive when the ignition is swit
ched off. Never
leave children unattended in the vehicle, as
doors locked from the inside delay assis-
tance in an emergency. Risk of sustaining
fatal injuries!
Note
The handles and the central lock buttons
will not work if the Safe l
ock
›››
page 112 is
activated.
Unlocking and locking the vehicle
with K
eyl
ess Access
Fig. 123
Keyless Access locking and ignition
syst
em: nearby ar
eas.
Fig. 124
Locking and ignition system without
K
eyl
ess Access: sensor surf
ace
A
for unlock-
ing inside the door handl
e and sensor surf
ace
B
for locking on the exterior of the handle.
»
1)
Valid for vehicles with a keyless fuel tank cap.
113
Operation
Keyless Access is a key-free locking and igni-
tion syst
em t
o unl
ock and lock the vehicle
without actively using its key. For this, all that
is required is to have a valid vehicle key near
›››
Fig. 123 the vehicle and one of the sensor
surfaces on the door handles to be touched
›››
Fig. 124.
General information
If a valid key is in the proximity of the car
›››
Fig. 123, the Keyless Access locking and
starting system gives the key entry as soon as
one of the sensor surfaces on the door han-
dles is touched or the push button on the
boot hatch is operated. The following fea-
tures are then available without having to use
the vehicle key actively:
●
Keyless-Entry: unlocking of the vehicle with
the handles on the four doors or the button
located on the boot hatch.
●
Keyless-Go: engine ignition and driving. For
this to occur, there has to be a valid key inside
the vehicle and the ignition push button
needs to be pressed
›››
page 197..
●
Keyless-Exit: unlocking of the vehicle with
one of the four door handle.
The central locking and locking systems op-
erate in the same way as a normal locking
and unlocking system. Only the controls
change.
Unlocking the vehicle is confirmed with a
double flash of the indicator lights; locking by
a single flash.
The vehicle will lock again after a few sec-
onds if you unlock the vehicle but fail to open
any door or boot hatch.
Unlocking and opening the doors (Key-
less-Entry)
●
Grip the door handle. In doing this, the sen-
sor surface
›››
Fig. 124
A
(arrow) on the han-
dl
e is t
ouched and the v
ehicle unlocks.
●
Open the door.
In vehicles without safety system “Safe”:
closing and locking the doors (Keyless-Ex-
it)
●
Switch the ignition off.
●
Close the driver's door.
●
Touch (once) the sensor surface
B
(arrow)
on the door handl
e
. The door that is used
must be cl
osed.
In vehicles with safety system “Safe”:
closing and locking the doors (Keyless-Ex-
it)
●
Switch the ignition off.
●
Close the driver's door.
●
Touch (once) the sensor surface
B
(arrow)
on the door handl
e
. The v
ehicle locks with the
“Safe” security system
›››
page 112. The door
that is used must be closed.
●
Touch (twice) the sensor surface
B
(arrow)
on the door handl
e t
o l
ock the vehicle without
the “Safe” security system
›››
page 112.
Unlocking and locking the boot hatch
When the vehicle is locked, the hatch auto-
matically unlocks on opening if
›››
Fig. 123
there is a valid vehicle key in the proximity.
Open or close the hatch normally
›››
page 117.
After closing, the hatch locks automatically.
In the following instances, the rear lid does
not lock automatically after closing:
●
If the entire vehicle is unlocked.
●
If the key used last is inside the vehicle. All
vehicle indicator lights flash four times. The
vehicle will lock again after a few seconds if
no door or boot hatch are opened.
Locking the vehicle with a second key
If there is a vehicle key inside the vehicle and
it is locked from the outside with a second ve-
hicle key, the key inside the vehicle is blocked
for engine ignition
›››
page 196. In order to
enable engine ignition, the button on the
key inside the vehicle needs to be pressed
›››
page 108.
114
Opening and closing
Automatically disabling sensors
If the v
ehicl
e is not l
ocked or unlocked for a
long period of time, the proximity sensor on
the passenger door is automatically disa-
bled.
If one of the sensor surfaces on the door han-
dles is often activated in an unusual manner
with the vehicle locked (e.g. by the branches
of a bush rubbing against it), all proximity
sensors are disabled for a time. If this only
happens with the exterior sensor on the driv-
er's door, only this sensor is disabled.
Sensors will again be enabled:
●
After a time.
●
OR: if the vehicle is unlocked with the but-
ton on the key.
●
OR: if the boot is opened.
Keyless Access temporary disconnection
function*
You can deactivate the vehicle's Keyless Ac-
cess unlocking for a locking and unlocking
cycle.
●
Move the gear lever to position P (if the ve-
hicle has automatic gearbox), since other-
wise the vehicle cannot be locked.
●
Close the door.
●
Push the central locking button on the re-
mote control and touch the locking sensor
surface
›››
Fig. 124
B
on the driver door han-
dle once within the following 5 seconds. Do
not gr
ab the handl
e or the v
ehicle will not
lock. Deactivation is also possible if the vehi-
cle is locked through the driver’s door lock.
●
To check that the function has been deacti-
vated, wait at least 10 seconds, grip and pull
on the door handle. The door should not
open.
The next time the door can only be unlocked
via the remote control or the lock cylinder.
The next time the door is locked/unlocked,
Keyless Access will be active again.
Convenience functions
To close all electric windows, the sliding roof
and electric tilting panoramic roof with the
convenience feature, keep your finger on
the lock sensor surface
B
located on the ex-
t
erior part of the driv
er or passenger door
handl
e for a few seconds until the windows
and roof close.
The doors opened by touching the sensor
surface of the door handle depend on the
settings that have been activated in the Easy
Connect system with the
button and the
SETTINGS and Opening and cl
osing
function
butt
ons.
CAUTION
The sensor surfaces on the door handles
could engage if hit with a wat
er jet or high
pressure steam if there is a valid vehicle
key in the proximity. If at least one of the
windows is open and the sensor surface
B
on one of the handles is activated continu-
ously, all windows will close
. If the water jet
or steam is briefly moved away from the
sensor surface
A
on one of the handles
and then pointed at it again, all the win-
dows will pr
obably open
›››
page 115, Con-
venience functions.
Note
●
If the v
ehicle batt
ery has little or no
charge, or the vehicle key battery is almost
or entirely out of charge, you will probably
not be able to lock or unlock the vehicle
with the Keyless Access system. The vehi-
cle can be unlocked or locked manually
›››
page 11.
●
If there is no valid key inside the vehicle
or the system fails to detect one, a warning
will display on the dash panel screen. This
could happen if any other radio frequency
signal interferes with the key signal (e.g.
from a mobile device accessory) or if the
key is covered by another object (e.g. an
aluminium case).
●
If the sensors are very dirty, e.g. have a
layer of salt, the correct functioning of the
sensors on the door handles may be affec-
ted. If this is the case, wash the vehicle
›››
page 265.
●
If the vehicle is equipped with an auto-
matic gearbox, it may only be locked in the
gear stick is in position P.
»
115
Operation
●
To impro
ve the safety of your vehicle, the
remote control of the system is equipped
with a position sensor. If this remote control
does not detect movement for a certain
length of time, the system will conclude
that the vehicle cannot be opened (e.g. on
a night table) so it will be disabled.
Child-proof locking
Fig. 125
Activating the childproof lock.
The childproof lock prevents the rear doors
fr
om being opened fr
om the inside
. Doors can
only be opened from the outside.
The childproof lock is activated and deacti-
vated using the ignition key.
Activating the childproof lock
–
Turn the slot in the direction of the arrow
›››
Fig. 125 (in the other direction on the
right-hand door).
Deactivating the childproof lock
–
Turn the slot in the opposite direction of the
arrow (in the other direction on the right-
hand door).
Anti-theft alarm*
General notes
The anti-theft alarm system increases vehicle
protection fr
om intruders. The system will ini-
tiate acoustic and optical warning signals
when your vehicle is tried to be forced.
Activating the alarm system
The anti-theft alarm switches on automati-
cally when the vehicle is locked using the re-
mote control key or inserting the key in the
driver door. The alarm is activated around 30
seconds after the vehicle is locked.
Deactivating the alarm system
The anti-theft alarm system is deactivated
when the remote control unlock button is
pressed. If the vehicle is not opened within 30
seconds after emitting the radio frequency
signal, the system will be reactivated.
If the vehicle is unlocked using by inserting
the key in the driver door, the ignition must be
switched on within 15 seconds. This deacti-
vates the alarm system. If, during these 15
seconds, the vehicle is not st
arted, the
alarm is triggered.
When does the system trigger an alarm?
The following areas of the vehicle are moni-
tored:
●
Bonnet
●
rear lid;
●
Doors
●
Ignition
●
Tilt angle
›››
page 117, Vehicle interior
monitoring and anti-tow system
●
The interior
›››
page 117, Vehicle interior
monitoring and anti-tow system
●
Drop in voltage in the car systems
●
The factory-fitted towing bracket
The alarm is triggered immediately if one of
the battery cables is disconnected while the
alarm system is active.
How to turn OFF the alarm
To deactivate the alarm, press the unlock but-
ton on the remote control key or switch on the
ignition.
Note
●
The alarm horn pow
er supply has a 5-
year useful life. Contact an Official Service
for more detailed information.
116
Opening and closing
●
To make sur
e that the anti-theft alarm is
fully operative when leaving the vehicle,
check that all the doors and windows are
closed.
●
Remote control and receiver unit coding
means that the remote control cannot be
used on other vehicles.
Vehicle interior monitoring and an-
ti-tow syst
em
The Vehicle interior monitoring system is acti-
v
at
ed if mo
vements are detected in the interi-
or of the vehicle.
Switching off the vehicle interior monitor-
ing and tow-away protection*
When the vehicle is locked, the alarm will be
triggered if movements are detected in the in-
terior (e.g. by animals) or if the vehicle's incli-
nation is changed (e.g. during transport). You
can prevent the alarm from being triggered
accidentally by switching off the vehicle inte-
rior monitoring and/or tow-away protection.
●
To switch off the interior monitoring and
tow-away protection, switch off the ignition
and, using the Infotainment system, select: In-
fotainment button
/ and then the SET-
TINGS > Opening and closing > Cen-
tral locking > Vehicle interior mon-
itoring butt
on.
●
When the vehicl
e is l
ocked now, the vehicle
interior monitoring and the tow-away protec-
tion are switched off until the next time the
door is opened.
If the anti-theft security system (Safe)*
›››
page 112 is switched off, the vehicle interi-
or monitoring and the tow-away protection
are automatically switched off.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
›››
in Gen-
eral notes on page 1
11.
Note
●
The vehicle int
erior monitoring system
and the tow-away protection system must
be deactivated if there is a danger of the
alarm being triggered due to movements
by children or animals in the interior when
being transported (e.g. by boat or by train)
or towed.
●
The effectiveness of the Vehicle interior
monitoring system is reduced if the specta-
cle case is left open. Always close the stor-
age compartment before locking the vehi-
cle to ensure that this monitoring system
operates correctly.
Rear lid
Opening and cl
osing
Fig. 126
Rear lid: opening from the outside.
Fig. 127
Close-up of the inside trim of the rear
lid: space f
or pulling.
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 12
»
117
Operation
The rear lid opening system operates electri-
cally. It is activ
at
ed by using the handl
e on
the boot lid.
This system may or may not be operative, de-
pending on the situation of the vehicle.
If the rear lid is locked then it cannot be
opened, however if it is unlocked then the
opening system is operative and the rear lid
may be opened.
To lock/unlock, press the button or the
button on the remote control key.
A warning appears on the instrument panel
display if the boot lid is open or not properly
closed.* An audible warning is also given if
the boot lid is opened while the vehicle is
moving faster than 6 km/h (4 mph)*.
WARNING
●
Always cl
ose the rear lid properly. Risk of
accident or injury.
●
Do not close the rear lid by pushing it
down with your hand on the rear window.
The glass could smash. Risk of injury!
●
Ensure the rear lid is locked after closing
it. If not, it may open unexpectedly while
driving.
●
Never allow children to play in or around
the vehicle. A locked vehicle can be subjec-
ted to extremely high and low tempera-
tures, depending on the time of year, thus
causing serious injuries/illness. It could
even have fatal consequences. Close and
lock both the rear lid and all the other
doors when you are not using the vehicl
e.
●
Closing the rear lid without observing
and ensuring it is clear could cause serious
injury to you and to third parties. Make sure
that no one is in the path of the rear lid.
●
Never drive with the rear lid open or half-
closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into
the interior of the vehicle. Danger of poi-
soning!
●
If you only open the rear lid, do not leave
the key inside. The vehicle will not be
opened if the key is left inside.
Note
●
Once the rear lid is closed, its l
ock is en-
gaged and the alarm system is activated.
Only valid if the vehicle has been locked
before the rear lid is closed.
●
The release catch located at the top of
the registration plate recess is deactivated
on accelerating or at speeds of over 5
km/h (3 mph). The catch is reactivated
when the vehicle comes to a standstill and
a door is opened.
Rear lid automatic locking
Where the vehicle has been locked by press-
ing the butt
on on the r
emot
e control with
the rear lid open, the rear lid will lock auto-
matically when closed.
The automatic rear lid locking time extension
function can be activated. When this function
is activated and once the rear lid has been
unlocked by pressing the button on the
remote control key
›››
page 108, the boot lid
can be re-opened for a certain length of time.
Where required, the automatic boot lid lock-
ing time extension function can be activated
or deactivated at a SEAT Authorised Service,
which will provide all of the necessary infor-
mation.
Before the vehicle locks automatically, there
is a risk of intruders getting into the vehicle.
Therefore, we recommend you always lock
the vehicle by pressing the button on the
remote control or by using the key without re-
mote control
›››
page 112.
118
Opening and closing
Controls for the windows
Oper
ation of the el
ectric windo
ws
Fig. 128 Detail of the driver door: controls for
the windo
ws.
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 14
The electric window opening and closing
system only works when the ignition is switch-
ed on.
Opening
–
Press gently on the respective button on
the door to open the window. The process
will stop when the button is released.
–
The driver door window can also be auto-
matically opened by pressing the button as
far as it will go (fully open). Press the button
again to immediately stop it.
Closing
–
Press the respective button gently to close
the window. The process will stop when the
button is released.
Safety button
Press the safety button
›››
Fig. 128
5
to de-
activ
at
e the contr
ols on the rear doors. Press-
ing the safety button
5
again will reactivate
the contr
ol
s on the r
ear doors.
If the rear door controls are deactivated, the
warning lamp on the safety button
5
will
light up
.
WARNING
●
When locking the vehicl
e from the out-
side, make sure that nobody is inside the
vehicle, as the windows cannot be opened
from the inside in an emergency.
●
For safety reasons, use the safety button
5
that deactivates the window switches
on the rear doors when childr
en are travel-
ling in the rear seats.
CAUTION
●
Keep the windows cl
ean to ensure the
system operates correctly.
●
Defrost
›››
page 269 any frozen windows
before using the electric windows. Other-
wise you run the risk of damaging the elec-
tric window riser mechanism.
●
Always mak
e sure all of the windows are
closed on leaving the locked vehicle.
Note
●
The v
ehicle heating and v
entilation sys-
tem should be used to ventilate the interior
while driving. Leaving the windows open
could allow dust and other dirt to enter the
vehicle and cause unpleasant noises at
certain speeds.
●
Do not leave the side windows open at
high speeds, as this will overly increase
fuel consumption.
Note
The electric window opening mechanism is
equipped with a thermostat swit
ch. This
may overheat if the window is opened and
closed repeatedly. This causes the window
to lock temporarily. Once the thermostat
switch has cooled down, the window can
be operated once again.
Roll-back function on the electric
windo
ws
The electric windows are equipped with a
r
oll
-back syst
em that reduces risk of injury
when closing windows.
»
119
Operation
If an obstacle is present, the closing mecha-
nism will st
op and the windo
w will r
oll back a
few centimetres.
If an obstacle prevents closing for the next 10
seconds, the closing mechanism will once
again stop and the window will roll back an-
other few centimetres.
If in the next 10 seconds you attempt to close
the window after it has rolled back the sec-
ond time, only the closing mechanism will be
stopped even if the obstacle is still present.
The roll-back function is still connected.
The roll-back function will only be disconnec-
ted if you once again attempt to close the
window in the following 10 seconds. In this
case, the window will close at full force.
If you wait for a further 10 seconds, the roll-
back function will be once again connected.
Lights and visibility
Lights
Intr
oduction
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 21
The location of the controls of right-hand
drive cars differs slightly from the location
shown here
›››
Fig. 129
›››
page 121. Howev-
er, the symbols indicating the respective po-
sitions of the controls remain the same.
WARNING
Never drive with only the side lights on! The
side lights are not bright enough to illumi-
nat
e the road ahead and to ensure that
other road users are able to see you. Al-
ways use your dipped beam headlights if it
is dark or if visibility is poor.
CAUTION
●
Use the lights in line with local law
.
●
However, drivers always remain responsi-
ble for correctly adjusting and using the
lights.
Note
●
An audible warning will be hear
d when
the light control is set to and you remove
the ignition key and open the door. Once
the driver door is closed (ignition off), the
audibl
e warning will stop, whereas the side
lights will remain on to light up the station-
ary vehicle in case this is necessary.
●
Depending on weather conditions (cold
or wet), the lights may mist up temporarily
on the inside. This is particularly the case in
the event of a difference in temperature
between the inside and in front of the light.
By switching on the lights, the area through
which the beam of light is projected will
quickly be demisted, although the edges
may remain misted. The real lights and turn
signals can mist up. This has no influence
on the useful life of the lighting system.
Control lamps
It lights up
Rear fog light switched on
›››
page 124.
It lights up
Front fog lights* switched on
›››
page 124.
It lights up
Left or right turn signal.
The control lamp fl
ashes twice as fast when a turn
signal is faulty
›››
page 122.
120
Lights and visibility
It lights up
Main beam on or flasher on
›››
page 122.
It lights up
Bulb failure
›››
page 86
For example, the information display indicates:
Check front right dipped headlight!
Several warning and control lamps light up
for a fe
w seconds when the ignition is switch-
ed on, signalling that the function is being
verified. They will switch off after a few sec-
onds.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
›››
in Con-
trol and warning l
amps on page 103.
Note
The rear side lights and number plate light
contain sev
eral bulbs. The control lamp
lights up only when there is a fault in all the
number plate bulbs or side light bulbs (of a
combined tail light). Therefore it is advisa-
ble to regularly check the bulb operation.
Side light and dipped beam head-
light
Fig. 129
Instrument panel: light panel.
Switching the side lights on
–
Turn the light switch
›
›
›
Fig. 129 to position
.
Switching on dipped beam
–
Turn the light switch
›››
Fig. 129 to position
.
Switching off lights (except daytime driv-
ing lights)
–
Turn the light switch
›››
Fig. 129 to position
0.
Headlight range control
Fig. 130
Instrument panel: light range control.
–
Turn the control
›
›
›
Fig. 130 to set the lights
to the required setting.
Positions
The control positions roughly correspond to
the following vehicle load conditions.
Two front occupants, luggage compart-
ment empty.
All seats occupied, luggage compart-
ment empty.
All seats occupied, luggage compart-
ment fully loaded.
Driver only, luggage compartment fully
loaded.
CAUTION
Always adjust the range of the lights so
that:
»
-
1
2
3
121
Operation
●
your vehicle does not dazzl
e others, par-
ticularly oncoming traffic;
●
the range of the headlights is sufficient
for safe driving.
Note
Make sure you set the range of the main
lights when the dipped beam headlights
ar
e swit
ched on.
Daytime running lights
Daytime running lights are signalling devices
f
or impr
o
ving road safety. The lights are built
into the headlights and come on each time
the ignition is turned on if the light switch is in
position or
›››
Fig. 129. It is automatical-
ly switched off when the side lights are turned
on.
Switching the daytime driving lights on
●
Remove the key from the ignition, move the
turn signal lever upward (right turn signal),
press it back to flash position and hold it
there.
●
Insert the key and switch on the ignition,
holding it in this position for 3 seconds. Then,
switch off the ignition. The daytime running
light is now activated and the corresponding
lights can come on.
Switching the daytime running light off
●
Remove the key from the ignition, press the
turn signal lever down (left turn signal), press
it back to flash position and hold it here.
●
Insert the key and switch on the ignition,
holding it in this position for 3 seconds. Then,
switch off the ignition. The daytime running
light is now deactivated and the correspond-
ing lights cannot come on.
OR: activate and deactivate the daytime
lights using the Easy Connect system
›››
page 24.
Automatic control of the dipped beam in
combination with the daytime running
lights
If the dipped beam control and the daytime
running lights are activated at the same time,
the dipped beams and the instrument panel
lighting will automatically come on as re-
quired (e.g. when entering a tunnel) and the
daytime running lights will switch off. When
the automatic dipped beam control switches
off the dipped beams (e.g. when coming out
of a tunnel), the daytime running lights come
back on.
WARNING
On vehicles with rear lights with bulbs,
when activating the daytime running light
the rear lights ar
e not switched on. A vehi-
cle which does not have the rear lights on
may not be visible to other drivers in the
darkness, in the case of heavy rain or in
conditions of poor visibility.
Note
Please observe any relevant legal require-
ments which may apply in your country.
Turn signal and main beam head-
lights l
e
v
er
Fig. 131 Turn signal and main beam lever.
The turn signal and main beam lever also op-
er
at
es the parking lights and the headlight
fl
asher.
Right and left-hand turn signal
●
Move the lever
›››
Fig. 131 up
1
or down
2
.
●
Keep the lever held down at the point of re-
sist
ance f
or the t
urn signals to flash for as
122
Lights and visibility
long as you hold the lever, e.g. when chang-
ing l
anes.
Conv
enience t
urn signals
For the convenience turn signals, move the
lever as far as possible upwards or down-
wards and release the lever. The turn signal
will flash three times.
The convenience turn signals are activated
and deactivated in the Easy Connect system
via the
button and the SETTINGS function
butt
on
›
›
›
page 24.
In vehicles that do not have the correspond-
ing menu, this function can be deactivated in
a specialised workshop.
Main beams
●
Switch on the dipped beam
›››
page 121.
●
Press the lever
›››
Fig. 131 forward in the di-
rection indicated by arrow
3
.
●
Pull the lever back to its original position in
the dir
ection indicat
ed by arr
ow
4
to switch
the main beam off
.
Headlight fl
asher
●
Pull the lever
›››
Fig. 131 towards the steer-
ing wheel (point of resistance) in the direction
indicated by arrow
4
.
P
arking lights
●
Instructions f
or use
›
››
page 125.
CAUTION
Never use the main beam headlights or the
headlight flasher if they could dazzl
e other
drivers.
Note
●
If the convenience turn signal
s are oper-
ating (three flashes) and the other conven-
ience turn signals are switched on, the ac-
tive part stops flashing and only flashes
once in the new part selected.
●
The turn signals only work when the igni-
tion is switched on. The corresponding
warning lamp or flashes in the general
instrument panel.
●
The turn signals switch off automatically
when the steering wheel is returned to the
straight-ahead position.
●
If a turn signal bulb is defective, the con-
trol lamp flashes at double speed.
Automatic dipped beam control
*
The automatic dipped beam control is merely
int
ended as an aid and is not abl
e t
o recog-
nise all driving situations.
When the light switch is in position , the
vehicle lights and the instrument panel and
switch lighting switch on and off automatical-
ly in the following situations
›››
in Daytime
running lights on page 122:
Automatic switch-
ing on
Automatic switch-
ing off
The photo sensor de-
tects darkness
, for exam-
ple, when driving through
a tunnel.
When adequate lighting
is detected.
The rain sensor detects
rain and activat
es the
windscreen wipers.
When the windscreen
wipers have been inac-
tive for a few minutes.
WARNING
If the road is not well lit and other road
users cannot see the vehicle w
ell enough
or at all, accidents may occur.
●
The automatic dipped beam control
() only switches on the dipped beam
when there are no changes in brightness,
and not, for example when it is foggy.
123
Operation
Fog lights*
Fig. 132
Instrument panel: light panel.
Switching on front fog lights
–
First turn the light switch
›
›
›
Fig. 132 to posi-
tion , or .
–
Pull on the light switch to position
1
.
The w
arning l
amp lights up on the gener
al
instrument panel if the front fog lights are
switched on.
Fog lights with cornering light func-
tion
3 Not availabl
e on vehicles equipped with full-
LED headlights and bulb fog lights.
The cornering light function is an additional
function to the dipped beam headlights to
improve lighting of the side of the road when
taking a sharp turn at low speed.
The cornering light function works when the
dipped beam headlights are alr
eady on and
it is enabled when driving at speeds below
approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).
Forward gear
●
If the steering wheel is turned to the right or
the right-hand turn signal switched on, the
right-hand fog lamp is gradually switched on.
●
If the steering wheel is turned to the left or
the left-hand turn signal switched on, the left-
hand fog lamp is gradually switched on.
●
After the turn, the cornering light function is
gradually switched off.
Reverse gear
●
When engaging the reverse gear, both fog
lights turn on.
Rear fog light
Switching on the rear fog light
–
First turn the light switch
›
›
›
Fig. 132
›››
page 124 to position , or .
–
Pull on the light switch to position
2
.
If the v
ehicl
e is not equipped with fr
ont fog
lights
›››
page 124, the rear fog light is switch-
ed on by turning the switch to position or
and pulling it to position
2
. This type of
s
wit
ch only has one position.
The
›››
page 103 warning lamp lights up
on the general instrument panel if the rear
fog lights are switched on.
If you are towing a trailer or caravan equip-
ped with a rear fog light on a vehicle with a
factory-fitted towing bracket or one instal-
led using parts from the original SEAT
parts catalogue, only the rear fog light on
the trailer or caravan will light up.
Function “Coming Home”/“Leaving
Home”*
This function makes it possible, under poor
visibilit
y conditions, t
o aut
omatically turn on
the lights for a brief period of time after the
vehicle has been parked or when approach-
ing the vehicle.
The function is automatically turned on if
the following conditions are met:
●
The light switch is in position
›››
page 123.
●
The visibility around the vehicle is reduced.
●
The ignition is switched off.
To turn on this function, switch on the head-
light flasher prior to exiting the vehicle.
124
Lights and visibility
The light is adjusted according to the data re-
cor
ded by the light sensor that is inst
all
ed be-
tween the windscreen and the inside rear
view mirror.
The function automatically turns on the side
lights and headlights, the lighting for the en-
try area on the exterior mirrors and the num-
ber plate light.
“Coming Home” function
The light is automatically switched on when
the driver door is opened (for 60 seconds af-
ter the ignition is switched off).
The light is switched off when all the doors
and the rear lid are closed.
If a door or the rear lid remains open, the light
will switch off after 60 seconds.
“Leaving Home” function
The light is automatically switched on when
the vehicle is unlocked using the remote con-
trol.
The light is switched off after 10 seconds or
when the vehicle is locked.
Hazard warning lights switch
Fig. 133
Instrument panel: switch for hazard
w
arning lights.
–
Press the button
›
›
›
Fig. 133 to switch the
hazard warning lights on or off.
The warning lamps on the instrument panel
and the warning lamp on the switch will flash
at the same time as the turn signals when the
hazard warning lights are switched on. The
hazard warning lights also work when the ig-
nition is switched off.
The hazard warning lights come on automati-
cally in the event of an accident in which an
airbag is triggered.
Note
Switch on the hazard warning lights to warn
other road users, for e
xample:
●
When reaching the tail end of a traffic
jam
●
if the vehicle has a t
echnical fault or you
are involved in an emergency situation.
Parking lights*
Parking lights
–
Switch the ignition off.
–
Move the turn signal lever
›››
Fig. 131
›››
page 122 up or down to turn on the right
or left-hand parking lights respectively.
Parking light on both sides
–
Turn the light switch
›››
Fig. 129
›››
page 121 to position and engage the
steering lock.
Note
●
The parking lights can only be activa-
ted with the ignition disconnect
ed.
●
The parking light will not come on auto-
matically after switching off the ignition if
the left- or right-hand turn signal is left on.
Driving abroad
The light beam of the dipped beam lights is
asymmetric: the side of the r
oad on which
you ar
e driving is lit mor
e intensely.
»
125
Operation
When a car that is manufactured in a country
that driv
es on the right tr
av
els to a country
that drives on the left (or vice versa), it is nor-
mally necessary to cover part of the head-
light bulbs with stickers or to change the ad-
justment of the headlights to avoid dazzling
other drivers.
In such cases, the regulations specify certain
light values that must be complied with for
designated points of the light distribution. This
is known as “Tourist light”.
The light distribution of the halogen and full-
LED headlights allows the specific “tourist
light” values to be met without the need for
stickers or changes in the settings.
Note
“Tourist light” is only allowed temporarily. If
you are planning a l
ong stay in a country
that drives on the other side, you should
take the vehicle to an Authorised Technical
Service to change the headlights.
Interior lights
Int
erior lighting
Fig. 134
Interior lighting – version 1.
Fig. 135
Interior lighting – version 2.
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 22
Where the courtesy light is on (switch
A
›››
Fig. 134 in position ), the light will come
on if:
●
the vehicle is unlocked,
●
one of the doors is opened,
●
The key is removed from the ignition
When the court
esy light is on (s
wit
ch
A
in
position ), the light will s
wit
ch off if:
●
the v
ehicle is locked,
●
the ignition is switched on,
●
30 seconds after all of the doors have been
closed
If a door is left open or if switch
A
is in the
position, the int
erior lighting s
wit
ches off after
about 10 minutes to prevent the battery from
running flat.
Rear interior light
Fig. 136
Rear interior light.
126
Lights and visibility
Press the button
›
›
›
Fig. 136 to switch the
lighting on or off.
Interior lights / ambient light*
The lighting of the central console area, the
door handles, the stor
age pockets in the front
doors and the footwell area will switch on
fully when the doors are opened and will de-
crease in intensity while driving with the dip-
ped beam headlights on.
Depending on the version, a logo is back-lit
on the front passenger's side of the dash
panel. This light comes on when the dipped
beam is activated.
The intensity of the ambient light* can be ad-
justed using the menu Easy Connect >
Lighting settings > Vehicle interior
lighting
›››
page 24.
Glove box light
The light will come on automatically when
the gl
o
v
e compartment is opened. The light
will go out when the glove compartment is
closed.
Luggage compartment light
The light switches on automatically when the
boot is open and switches off aut
omatically
10 minutes after the boot lid has been
opened.
Visibility
Heated rear window
Fig. 137
Heated rear window switch.
–
Switch the heated rear window on or off by
pr
essing the butt
on
›
››
Fig. 137, the warn-
ing lamp in the button will come on or go off
respectively.
The heated rear window only works when the
engine is running.
After approximately 7 minutes, the heating
device of the rear window switches off auto-
matically.
For the sake of the environment
The heated rear window should be switch-
ed off as soon as the glass is demisted. By
saving el
ectrical power you can also save
fuel
›››
page 211.
Note
In the event of a drop in voltage in the on-
board systems, the heat
ed rear window
switches off automatically to ensure
enough power to control the engine
›››
page 255, Automatic disconnection of
electrical equipment.
127
Operation
Sun visors
Fig. 138
Driver's sun visor.
Fig. 139
Front passenger's sun visor.
The sun visors for the driver and the front pas-
senger can be pull
ed out of their centr
al sup-
ports and t
urned towards the doors in the di-
rection of arrow
1
›
›
›
Fig. 138 and
2
›››
Fig. 139 r
espectiv
ely.
The strip
A
is to store small objects such as
not
epaper
, et
c.
The front passenger sun visor includes a vani-
ty mirror
B
with a cover. The cover is opened
by sliding it in the dir
ection indicat
ed by ar
-
row
3
›
›
›
Fig. 139.
WARNING
Do not turn sun visors with attached ob-
jects such as ball-pens, etc. t
oward the
head protection airbag triggering zone on
the side windows. The head airbags could
cause lesions to the passengers when acti-
vating.
Windscreen wipers and
windscr
een w
ashers
Contr
ol lamp
It lights up
Windscreen wiper level too low.
Top up the windscreen wiper r
eservoir as soon as
possible
›››
page 251.
Several warning and control lamps light up
f
or a f
e
w seconds when the ignition is switch-
ed on, signalling that the function is being
verified. They will switch off after a few sec-
onds.
Introduction
The windscreen wipers and windscreen
washers only work when the ignition is
s
witched on.
The speed of the automatic wipe in case of
rain is automatically adjusted according to
the intensity of the rainfall.
The rear window is wiped once if the wind-
screen wipers are switched on and reverse
gear is engaged.
Fill the windscreen washer fluid
›››
page 251.
WARNING
●
Make sure the bl
ades
›››
page 56 are
in perfect condition for good visibility and
safe driving.
●
In cold conditions, you should not use the
wash/wipe system unless you have
warmed the windscreen with the heating
and ventilation system. The windscreen
washer fluid could otherwise freeze on the
windscreen and obscure your view of the
road.
CAUTION
●
During winter, al
ways check that the
windscreen wiper blades are not frozen to
the glass before each trip or before switch-
ing on the ignition. If you switch on the
windscreen wipers when the wiper blades
128
Lights and visibility
are frozen to the glass, this could damage
both the wiper blades and the wiper motor
.
●
If the ignition is switched off when the
windscreen wipers are on, they will start
operating in the same mode when the igni-
tion is switched back on. The wiper blades
may be frozen to the glass at low tempera-
tures when the ignition is switched off.
●
Carefully separate the frozen wipers
from the windscreen or rear window.
●
Remove snow and ice from the wipers be-
fore starting your journey.
●
Careless handling could lead to the wip-
er arms damaging the windscreen.
●
For safety reasons, the wiper blades
should be changed once or twice a year.
They can be purchased at a SEAT Author-
ised Service.
●
The ignition cannot be switched on while
the windscreen wiper arms are in a raised
position. Otherwise, the windscreen wipers
would return to their original position and
could damage the paintwork on the bon-
net.
Note
Keep the wipers clean. The wipers can be
soiled with remains of w
ax solutions from
car washes
›››
page 265.
●
On vehicles equipped with windscreen
washer jets, these are heated once the en-
gine is running.
Operating windscreen wipers and
w
ashers
Fig. 140
Window wiper lever.
Short wipe
–
Give the windscreen a brief wipe by mo
v-
ing the l
e
ver down to position
4
›››
Fig. 140.
Int
ermitt
ent wipers/aut
omatic wipe with
rain sensor*
–
Push the lever up to position
1
›
›
›
Fig. 140.
–
With switch
A
, adjust the wipe interval or
r
ain sensor sensitivit
y.
S
witch
A
has 4 positions.
The r
ain sensor* is part of the int
ermitt
ent
wipe function.
The rain sensor* controls the frequency of
the windscreen wiper intervals, depending on
the amount of rain.
Slow wipe
–
Push the lever up to position
2
›
›
›
Fig. 140.
Continuous wipe
–
Push the lever up to position
3
›
›
›
Fig. 140.
Automatic windscreen wash and wipe
–
Pull the lever towards the steering wheel,
position
5
›
›
›
Fig. 140, and the windscreen
washer and wipers are switched on.
–
Release the lever. The washer will stop and
the windscreen wipers will keep running for
1-3 wipes (depending on the windscreen
washer operating time).
Rear window wiper*
–
Press the lever forward to position
6
›››
Fig. 140 and the r
ear windo
w wiper will
run e
very 6 seconds.
Automatic rear window wash and wipe*
–
Press the lever fully forward to position
7
›››
Fig. 140 and the r
ear windo
w wiper and
w
asher switch on at the same time.
–
Release the lever. The rear window washer
will stop and the rear window wipers will
keep running for 1-3 wipes (depending on
the jet operating time). When released,
the lever remains in position
6
.
»
129
Operation
Switching off the wipers
–
Move the lever to position
0
›
›
›
Fig. 140.
WARNING
The rain sensor may not detect enough rain
to swit
ch on the wipers.
●
If necessary, switch on the wipers man-
ually when water on the windscreen ob-
structs visibility.
Note
Do not put stickers on the windscreen in
front of the rain sensor*. This may cause
sensor disruption or f
aults.
Headlight washers*
The headlight washers operate briefly if the
dipped headlights or headlights ar
e on and
the l
e
ver is moved to position
5
›
›
›
Fig. 140.
The headlight washer system also operates
every 10 windscreen wash cycles.
Clean off stubborn dirt (insects, etc.) from the
headlights at regular intervals, for instance
when filling the fuel tank. Please observe the
following indications
›››
page 265.
To ensure the system works properly in winter,
keep the nozzle holders free of snow and re-
move any ice with a de-icer spray.
CAUTION
Never pull on the nozzle holders. Risk of
damage to the system!
Mirrors
Rear view mirr
or with manual anti-
dazzle device
Basic settings
–
Push the lever at the bottom of the mirror
f
orw
ar
d.
Rear vision mirror anti-dazzle setting
–
Pull the lever at the bottom of the mirror to-
wards you.
Exterior mirrors
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 15
Before beginning any journey, adjust the rear
view mirrors for a good rear visibility.
WARNING
●
Convex (wide-angl
e) rear vision mirrors
give a larger field of vision. However, they
make objects appear smaller and further
away than they really are. For this reason,
you should not rely on these r
ear vision mir-
rors for judging the distance of vehicle be-
hind.
●
If possible, use the interior rear vision mir-
ror to estimate distances to vehicles behind
you.
Note
●
Ext
erior mirrors ar
e only heated when the
engine is running.
●
Do not touch the exterior mirrors when
the heating system is running.
●
If the electrical adjustment should ever
fail to operate, the rear vision mirrors can
be adjusted by hand by pressing the edge
of the mirror glass.
●
Visit the technical service in the event of
a fault in the electrical rear vision mirror
adjustment system.
130
Seats and head restraints
Seats and head restraints
Adjusting seats and head r
e-
str
aints
Intr
oduction
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 14
Set the driver seat in such a way that the
pedals can be fully depressed with your legs
slightly bent.
Set the driver seat backrest so that you can
reach the upper point of the steering wheel
with your arms slightly bent.
The correct seat position is very important
for:
●
reaching all of the controls safely and
quickly,
●
a relaxed posture that will not produce fati-
gue,
●
maximum prot
ection from the seat belts
and airbag system
WARNING
●
Adjust the driver seat only when the vehi-
cl
e is stationary. Risk of accident!
●
Be careful when adjusting the front seats!
Car
eless and uncontrolled adjustment can
cause injuries.
●
The backrests must not be reclined too
far back while driving. This could limit the
effect of the seat belts and the airbag sys-
tem. Risk of injury!
●
Never transport more than the permitted
amount of people in your vehicle.
●
Every occupant in the vehicle must prop-
erly fasten and wear the seat belt belong-
ing to his or her seat. Children must be pro-
tected with an appropriate child restraint
system
›››
page 75, Transporting children
safely.
●
The front seats, head restraints and seat
belts must always be adjusted to the size of
the vehicle occupant to provide you and
your passengers with the greatest possible
protection.
●
Your feet should remain in the footwell
while the vehicle is moving; never rest them
on the dash panel, on the window or on the
seat! This also applies to passengers. An
incorrect sitting position exposes you to an
increased risk of injury in case of a sudden
braking or an accident. If the airbag is trig-
gered, you could sustain severe injuries due
to an incorrect sitting position!
●
It is important for the driver and front
passenger to keep a distance of at least
25 cm from the steering wheel and dash
panel. Failure to respect the minimum dis-
tance means that the airbag will not pro-
tect you. Risk of fat
al injury if triggered!
●
Objects must not be placed in the foot-
well, as they could move to the area of the
pedals in the event of a braking manoeuvre
or change of direction. This would prevent
the clutch, brake or accelerator from being
pressed.
●
Do not place any items on the front pas-
senger seat other than those allowed (e.g.
child seat). Risk of accident!
Note
After a certain time, the backrest angle ad-
justment mechanism may gain a certain
amount of pl
ay.
131
Operation
Head restraints
Fig. 141
Front headrest: adjusting or removing.
Fig. 142
Rear centre head restraint: release
point.
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 14
Head restraints cannot be moved up or down
or removed on sports seats.
Fitting and removing head restraints on
front seats
–
Push the head restraint up as far as it will
go.
–
Press catch
1
›
›
›
Fig. 141 and remove the
head restraint.
–
To refit, insert the head restraint into the
holes in the backrest, pushing it down until it
engages.
Fitting and removing head restraints on
rear seats
To remove the head restraint, the corre-
sponding backrest must be partially folded
forward.
–
Unlock the backrest
›››
page 134
–
Move the head restraint upwards until it ar-
rives to the top.
–
Press button
1
›
›
›
Fig. 142, while simulta-
neously pressing on the security hole
2
›››
Fig. 14
2
with a fl
at screwdriver a maxi-
mum of 5 mm wide, and remove the head
restraint.
–
To refit, insert the head restraint into the
holes in the backrest, pushing it down until it
engages.
For maximum head restraint protection, ad-
just the head restraint so that its upper edge
is at the same level as the top of your head.
The head restraint must be adjusted in line
with the height of users. Correct adjustment
of the head restraint, together with the seat
belts, ensure effective passenger protection
›››
page 58.
WARNING
●
Badly adjusted head restr
aints increase
the risk of injuries in the event of an acci-
dent.
●
Never drive with the head restraints re-
moved. Risk of injuries!
●
If the seats are in use, never drive with the
rear head restraints in their out-of-use po-
sition.
Seat functions
Heat
ed fr
ont seats*
Fig. 143 Heated front seats.
132
Seats and head restraints
The cushion and backrest of the front seats
can be heat
ed el
ectrically.
Pr
ess the or button
›››
Fig. 143 to switch
on and adjust the heated front seats.
Press once to connect the heating at maxi-
mum force.
Press the button again to reduce the force of
the heating and switch it off. The force is indi-
cated by the number of warning lamps lit on
the button.
WARNING
Do not use the heated seat if your percep-
tion of pain and/or temperat
ure or that of
your passenger is limited, e.g. due to medi-
cation, paralysis or chronic illness (e.g. dia-
betes). It could cause burns on the back,
buttocks and legs that are difficult to heal.
If you still want to use the heated seat, take
frequent breaks on long journeys so that
the body can recover from the trip. Ask your
doctor about your particular situation.
CAUTION
●
To avoid damaging the heating el
ements,
do not kneel on the seat or apply sharp
pressure at a single point to the seat cush-
ion or backrest.
●
Do not use the heated seats if nobody is
sitting on them or if there are items attach-
ed to or lying on them, such as a child seat
or a bag, etc. The seat heating elements
could have a f
ault.
●
Do not clean the seats with anything
damp
›››
page 268.
Note
●
Only connect the heat
ed seats when the
engine is running. This pro
vides considera-
ble savings on the battery capacity.
●
In the event of a drop in voltage in the on-
board systems, the heated seats switch off
automatically to ensure enough power to
control the engine
›››
page 255, Automatic
disconnection of electrical equipment.
Armrest on front seats with inner
st
or
age*
Fig. 144 Armrest/Opening and closing the
st
or
age compartment.
Adjusting armrest height
–
Lift the armrest as far as it will go and then
f
ol
d it do
wnward.
»
133
Operation
–
R
aise the armr
est until it engages in one of
the 5 positions.
Opening st
orage compartment
–
Press the button located on the front of the
armrest
›››
Fig. 144 - .
–
Lift the storage compartment lid
›››
Fig. 144
- .
Armrest on rear seats
Fig. 145
Rear side seats: armrest.
The armrest can be folded away for greater
comf
ort using the handl
e
›
››
Fig. 145.
Folding down the backrest
Fig. 146
Unlocking the backrest.
Folding
–
Before folding the rear seats, adjust the po-
sition of the fr
ont seats so that the r
ear
seats ar
e not damaged. When the front
seats are adjusted to the rear position, their
head restraints should be removed before
folding the backrests on the rear seats.
Store the removed head restraints in such a
way that they cannot be soiled or dam-
aged.
–
Insert the seat belt latch plate into hole
A
›››
Fig. 146 l
ocat
ed on the corr
esponding
side of the vehicle – safety position.
–
Press the lock button
B
to unlock the back-
r
est and f
ol
d it forward.
Returning to the initial position
–
Where the head restraint has been re-
moved, insert it into the backrest when par-
tially raised.
–
Push the backrest backwards to its original
position until the lock button engages –
check that it is locked by pulling on the
backrest
›››
.
–
Make sure the red protruding part
C
is not
visibl
e
.
WARNING
●
Once the backrests have been lift
ed, the
seat belts and their buckles must be in their
initial position – ready for use.
●
The backrests must be safely locked to
ensure any items in the boot cannot move
around the interior of the vehicle in the
event of a sudden braking manoeuvre. Risk
of injuries!
134
Transport and practical equipment
●
Make sure the r
ear backrests are correct-
ly locked. Only then will the three-point au-
tomatic seat belt on the rear central seat
work correctly.
CAUTION
Take care when handling the rear backr-
ests so as not t
o damage the seat belts.
The seat belt must nev
er be left behind the
lifted backrest.
Transport and practical
equipment
Pr
actical equipment
P
assenger side st
orage compart-
ment
Fig. 147 Instrument panel: passenger side
gl
o
v
e compartment.
Fig. 148 Storage compartment: cooling con-
trol.
Opening and closing passenger side glove
compar
tment
–
Pull the cat
ch on the lid in the dir
ection indi-
cated by the arrow
›››
Fig. 147 and open
the lid.
–
Close the lid and push it until it engages.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the CD
player is located in the glove compartment.
Separate operating instructions are enclosed
for this equipment in the corresponding In-
struction Manual.
Glove compartment cooling*
Open or close the air outlet by turning the
thumbwheel
›››
Fig. 148.
If the air outlet is open and the air condition-
ing is on, the cooled air will be released into
the glove compartment.
»
135
Operation
If the air outlet is open and the air condition-
ing is off
, out
door air (not conditioned) will be
r
eleased into the glove compartment.
The air outlet should be closed if the air con-
ditioning is being used in heating mode or
where glove compartment cooling is not in
use.
WARNING
●
For safet
y reasons, all storage compart-
ments must be closed while the vehicle is
moving.
●
Never place any objects on the instru-
ment panel. These objects could be flown
around the interior while the vehicle is mov-
ing (on accelerating or turning) and dis-
tract you. Risk of accident!
●
Make sure objects remain in the centre
console or other compartments while the
vehicle is moving. Otherwise, this could
prevent you from braking, changing gear or
accelerating. Risk of accident!
Note
The glove compartment can hold a bottle
no larger than 1 litr
e.
Storage compartment for reflec-
tiv
e v
est
Fig. 149
Driver's seat: storage compartment.
There is a compartment below the driver seat
›
›
›
Fig. 149 to store the reflective vests.
WARNING
The compartment is solely designed to
store the r
eflective vest and no other ob-
jects. Objects falling out of the storage
compartment could limit or prevent use of
the pedals.
CAUTION
The compartment is solely designed to
store the r
eflective vest and no other ob-
jects, since there is a risk of damaging the
storage compartment.
Storage pocket under the front
seats
There is a storage pocket on the rear part of
the backrest of the front seats.
These pock
ets are designed to hold maps,
magazines, etc.
WARNING
Do not place heavy objects in the pockets.
Risk of injury!
CAUTION
Do not place overly large objects in the
pockets (e.g. bottl
es) or objects with sharp
edges. Risk of damage to the pockets and
the upholstery.
136
Transport and practical equipment
Drink holder in the centre console
Fig. 150
Centre console: drinks holder.
Front drink holder in the centre console
R
ear drink hol
der in the centr
e console
WARNING
●
Do not put hot drinks in the drink holders.
They could spill whil
e the vehicle is moving.
Risk of scalding!
●
Do not use cups or glasses made of frag-
ile materials (e.g. glass or china). These
A
B
could cause injury in the event of an acci-
dent.
CAUTION
Avoid putting open drinks containers in the
drink hol
der while the v
ehicle is moving.
They could spill (e.g. on braking) and cause
damage to the electrical equipment or the
seat covers.
Drink holder in rear seat armrest
Fig. 151
Rear seats armrest: drink holder.
Two drinks can be placed in the drink holder.
Use the det
achabl
e parts
A
and
B
›››
Fig. 151 t
o change the siz
e of the hol
es.
–
Remove part
A
or
B
in the direction indi-
cat
ed by the arr
o
w and replace in the re-
quired position in the drink holder.
Cigarette lighter*
Fig. 152
Centre console: lighter.
The cigarette lighter is located at the front of
the centr
e consol
e
›
››
Fig. 152.
Using the cigarette lighter
–
Press the cigarette lighter knob
›››
Fig. 152.
–
Wait for the lighter to spring out.
–
Pull out the cigarette lighter and light the
cigarette on the glowing coil immediately.
–
Put the cigarette lighter back in its socket.
WARNING
●
Take car
e when using the cigarette light-
er! Carelessness or negligence when using
the cigarette lighter can cause burns and
serious injuries.
●
The cigarette lighter also works when the
ignition is off and when the ignition key is
»
137
Operation
removed. Therefore, never leave children
unsupervised in the vehicle
.
Note
●
The 12 V po
wer sock
et of the cigarette
lighter can also be used as a power source
for electrical appliances
›››
page 138,
Power sockets.
●
Additional information
›››
page 240, Ac-
cessories and modifications to the vehicle.
Ashtrays*
Fig. 153
Centre console: front ashtray/rear
ashtr
ay.
Removing the ashtray
–
Pull the ashtray
›
›
›
Fig. 153 upwards to re-
move.
Inserting the ashtray
–
Push the ashtray down.
WARNING
Never put flammable materials in the ash-
tray. Risk of fire!
CAUTION
Never hold onto the ashtray by the lid when
removing it. Risk of br
eaking the lid.
Power sockets
Fig. 154 Centre console: 12 V power socket.
12 volt socket
The 12 V po
w
er sock
et is located at the front
of the centre console
›››
Fig. 154.
Using the power socket:
●
Open the cover or remove the cigarette
lighter concealing the socket.
●
Insert the plug of the electrical appliance
into the socket.
138
Transport and practical equipment
5 V power sockets (USB)*
The 5 V po
w
er sock
ets are located at the rear
of the console, between the front seats, fac-
ing the rear seat occupants.
They are USB ports to which only devices and
accessories that use this type of charging
can be connected.
They are not intended for file playback.
The maximum power of these sockets is 2 A.
WARNING
●
Improper use of the sockets or el
ectrical
appliances can cause a fire and lead to
burns and other serious injuries.
●
Never leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle. The 12 V power socket is also func-
tional when the ignition is switched off and
the key is removed.
●
Should the connected appliance over-
heat, immediately switch it off and discon-
nect it from the socket.
CAUTION
●
The 12 V power sock
et can only be used
to power appliances with a power rating of
up to 120 watts.
●
Never exceed the maximum permitted
power, as this could cause damage to the
vehicle electrical installation.
●
With the engine switched off
, however,
the vehicle battery will drain. Risk of dis-
charging the battery!
●
Only use suitable plugs so as not to dam-
age the power socket.
●
Only use appliances that have been tes-
ted for electromagnetic compatibility in
compliance with current regulations.
●
Before switching the ignition on or off, un-
plug the appliances from the power socket
to protect them from any damage caused
by fluctuations in voltage.
●
Follow the instructions for use of connec-
ted appliances!
Multimedia compartment
Fig. 155
Front centre console: multimedia
compartment.
The multimedia compartment is in the stor-
age compartment of the fr
ont centr
e consol
e
›››
Fig. 155.
The compartment can be used to hold mo-
bile phones, mp3 players or similar devices.
WARNING
Never use the multimedia compartment as
an ashtray or to st
ore flammable materials.
Risk of fire!
Storage compartment for glasses*
Fig. 156
Close-up of roof panel: storage com-
partment f
or gl
asses.
–
Press the compartment lid and it will drop
do
wn
›
›
›
Fig. 156.
WARNING
This compartment must only remain open
when removing or r
eplacing glasses.
»
139
Operation
CAUTION
●
Do not place heat-sensitiv
e objects in the
compartment as they could be damaged.
●
The side compartment supports a maxi-
mum load of 0.25 kg.
Coat hooks*
The coat hooks are located on the B-pillars
and on the handles on the interior lining
abo
ve each rear door.
WARNING
●
Make sure that any it
ems of clothing
hanging from the coat hooks do not ob-
struct your view to the rear.
●
Only use the coat hooks for light items of
clothing and make sure that there are no
heavy or sharp objects in the pockets.
●
Do not use clothes hangers to hang up
the clothing, as this could interfere with the
function of the head-protection airbags.
CAUTION
The side hooks support a maximum load of
2 kg.
Compartments in the centre con-
sol
e
Fig. 157
Centre console: storage compart-
ment.
Open storage compartment in centre con-
sol
e
›
›
›
Fig. 157.
Storage compartment in front door
Fig. 158 Storage compartment in door trim.
There is a bottle carrier in part
B
›
›
›
Fig. 158
of the storage compartment in the front door.
WARNING
Only use part
A
›››
Fig. 158 of the compart-
ment in the front door to store objects that
do not protrude from it so as not obstruct
the deployment area of the side airbags.
Storage compartment in the lug-
gage compartment*
Fig. 159 Boot: storage compartment.
The lid from the side storage compartment
can be r
emo
v
ed to increase the size of the
boot.
–
Hold onto the top of the lid and pull it out in
the direction indicated by the arrow
›››
Fig. 159.
140
Transport and practical equipment
CAUTION
●
The compartments are designed t
o hold
small objects with a total weight of 1.5 kg.
●
Make sure you do not damage the stor-
age compartment or the boot trim when
using the compartment.
Storing objects
Loading the luggage compartment
All luggage and other loose objects must be
saf
ely secur
ed in the luggage compartment.
Unsecur
ed objects which shift back and forth
could impair the driving safety or driving
characteristics of the vehicle by shifting the
centre of gravity.
–
Distribute the load evenly in the luggage
compartment.
–
Place heavy objects as far forward as pos-
sible in the luggage compartment.
–
Place the heavy objects first.
–
Secure heavy objects to the fitted fastening
rings
›››
page 141.
WARNING
●
Loose luggage and other objects in the
luggage compar
tment could cause serious
injuries.
●
Always st
ow objects in the luggage com-
partment and secure them on the fastening
rings.
●
Use suitable straps to secure heavy ob-
jects.
●
During sudden manoeuvres or accidents,
loose objects can be thrown forward, injur-
ing vehicle occupants or passers-by. This
increased risk of injury will be further in-
creased if a loose object is struck by an in-
flating airbag. If this happens, objects may
shoot outward like a missile. Risk of fatal in-
jury.
●
Please note that the centre of gravity
may shift when transporting heavy objects;
this may affect vehicle handling and lead
to an accident. Therefore, it is essential to
adjust your speed and driving style ac-
cordingly, to avoid accidents.
●
Never exceed the allowed axle weights or
allowed maximum weight. If said weights
are exceeded, the driving characteristics of
the vehicle may change, leading to acci-
dents, injuries and damage to the vehicle.
●
Never leave your vehicle unattended, es-
pecially when the rear lid is open. Children
could climb into the luggage compartment,
closing the door behind them; they will be
trapped and run the risk of death.
●
Never allow children to play in or around
the vehicle. Close and lock all the doors
and the rear lid when you leave the vehicle.
Before you lock the vehicle, make sure that
there are no adults or children in the vehi-
cle.
Note
●
Air cir
culation in the v
ehicle helps reduce
fogging of the windows. Used air escapes
through ventilation slits in the side trim of
the luggage compartment. Ensure that the
ventilation slots are never covered.
●
Straps for securing the load to the fas-
tening rings are commercially available
from accessory shops.
Fastening rings*
There can be four fastening rings in the lug-
gage compartment f
or f
ast
ening luggage
and other objects.
–
Always use suitable and undamaged straps
to secure luggage and other objects to the
fastening rings
›››
in Loading the lug-
gage compar
tment on page 141
.
–
Pull up the f
astening rings to attach the
straps.
During a collision or an accident, even small
and light objects can build up so much ener-
gy that they can cause very severe injuries.
The amount of kinetic “energy” depends on
the speed of the vehicle and the weight of the
»
141
Operation
object. The most significant factor, however,
is the speed of the v
ehicl
e
.
Example: An object weighing 4.5 kg is lying
unsecured in the vehicle. During a frontal col-
lision at a speed of 50 km/h (31 mph), this ob-
ject generates a force corresponding to 20
times its weight. That means that the effective
weight of the object increases to approxi-
mately 90 kg. You can imagine the severity of
the injuries which might be sustained if this
“object” strikes an occupant as it flies through
the interior of the vehicle. This increased risk
of injury will be further increased if a loose
object is struck by an inflating airbag.
WARNING
●
If pieces of baggage or other objects are
secur
ed to the fastening rings with inappro-
priate or damaged retaining cords, injuries
could result in the event of braking ma-
noeuvres or accidents.
●
Never secure a child seat on the fasten-
ing rings.
Luggage compartment
Intr
oduction
Please observe the following points to ensure
the v
ehicl
e handl
es well at all times:
–
Distribute the load as evenly as possible.
–
Place heavy objects as far forward in the
luggage compartment as possible.
–
Secure luggage using the fastening rings or
retaining net
›››
page 143.
During an accident, even small and light ob-
jects can have so much kinetic energy that
they can cause very severe injuries. The
amount of kinetic energy depends on the
speed of the vehicle and the weight of the
object. However, the speed of the vehicle is
the most important factor.
Example: an unsecured object weighing 4.5
kg produces energy corresponding to 20
times its weight in a frontal collision at 50
km/h (31 mph). This means that its weight
reaches around 90 kg. You can imagine the
severity of the injuries that might be sustained
if this “projectile” strikes an occupant as it
flies through the vehicle interior.
WARNING
●
Store ob
jects in the luggage compart-
ment and secure to the fastening points.
●
In an accident or sudden manoeuvre,
loose objects in the interior can be flung
forward and possibly injure vehicle occu-
pants or others. This risk is even greater if
the flying objects hit a triggering airbag. In
this case, any rebounding objects could in-
jure vehicle occupants. Risk of fatal inju-
ries!
●
Take int
o account that transporting
heavy objects changes the centre of gravi-
ty that could also cause changes in vehicle
handling. Risk of accident! Therefore, al-
ways adjust your speed and driving style to
suit these circumstances.
●
Securing the load to the rings using un-
suitable or damaged straps could lead to
injuries in the event of an accident or sud-
den braking manoeuvre. Secure suitable
straps safely to the rings to ensure this
does not happen.
●
Position the load so it cannot move for-
ward during a sudden braking manoeuvre.
Risk of injuries!
●
If transporting sharp or dangerous ob-
jects in the space provided when the rear
seats are folded, ensure the safety of the
occupant of the remaining rear seat
›››
page 60.
●
If the rear seat located alongside a fol-
ded seat is occupied, ensure safety, for ex-
ample, by placing the load so that it stops
the seat from folding backward in the event
of being hit from behind.
●
Never drive with the rear lid open or half-
closed, exhaust gases may penetrate into
the interior of the vehicle. Danger of poi-
soning!
●
Never exceed the allowed axle loads or
allowed maximum weight. Risk of accident!
●
Never transport passengers in the lug-
gage compartment!
142
Transport and practical equipment
CAUTION
Make sure sharp objects stored in the boot
cannot not damage the rear window heat
-
ing filaments.
Note
Tyre pressure must be adapted to suit the
load
››
›
page 256, Service life of tyres.
Category N1 vehicles
Category N1 vehicles with no protection grille
must use a r
et
aining set compliant with
St
andard EN 12195 (1 – 4) to secure the load.
Retaining elements*
Fig. 160 Boot: retaining elements.
The following retaining elements are fitted in
the boot
›
›
›
Fig. 160:
Rings to secure the load and the retaining
nets.
Rings used solely for the retaining nets.
CAUTION
The rings support a maximum load of 3.5 kN
(350 kg).
Note
The front ring
B
is below the folding back-
rest of the rear seats
›
››
Fig. 160.
Hook*
Fig. 161 Boot: hook.
There are hooks on both sides of the boot to
secur
e light it
ems of luggage such as bags,
et
c.
›››
Fig. 161
A
B
CAUTION
The side hooks support a maximum load of
7.5 kg.
Retaining nets*
Fig. 162
Retaining nets.
Fig. 163
Retaining nets.
Example of securing retaining nets
›
›
›
Fig. 162
and
›››
Fig. 163.
»
143
Operation
Sideways bag
Gr
ound net
L
engthw
ays bag
WARNING
Do not exceed the maximum load that the
nets can support. Heavy objects cannot be
saf
ely secured. Risk of injury!
CAUTION
●
The retaining nets suppor
t a maximum
load of 1.5 kg.
●
Do not place any item with sharp edges
in the net. Risk of damaging the net!
Luggage compartment shelf
Fig. 164
Remove the shelf.
A
B
C
Fig. 165 Remove the shelf.
The shelf can be removed if a large load is to
be tr
ansport
ed.
R
emoving the shelf
–
Remove the straps from the shelf
1
›››
Fig. 164.
–
Remove the shelf from its housing
2
by
knocking it gently fr
om underneath be-
tw
een the supports.
Fitting the shelf
–
Pl
ace the shelf on the side supports on the
trim.
–
Adjust the shelf supports
3
›
›
›
Fig. 165 to fit
the supports
2
in the trim.
–
Fit into place by knocking the top of the
shelf gently betw
een the supports.
–
Att
ach the str
aps
1
to the tray.
WARNING
Do not place objects on the rear shelf that
could endanger the vehicl
e occupants in
case of a sudden braking manoeuvre or an
accident.
CAUTION
●
The rear shelf supports a maximum l
oad
of 1 kg.
●
If handled incorrectly, the rear shelf
could bend when closing the rear lid, and
become damaged or damage the trim. Fol-
low the instructions below:
–
The shelf supports
3
›››
Fig. 165 must
be securely in place in the trim sup-
ports
2
.
–
The size of the load must not e
xceed
the height of the shelf.
–
When open, the shelf must not be bent
against the shelf seal.
–
There must be no objects in the space
between the open shelf and the back-
rest of the rear seat.
Note
The shelf will lift when the rear lid is
opened.
144
Transport and practical equipment
Roof rack*
Intr
oduction
WARNING
●
The load on the roof carrier must be
pr
operly secured. Risk of accident!
●
Always secure the load using retaining
straps that are in good condition.
●
Distribute the load evenly.
●
When transporting heavy or large ob-
jects on the roof, any change in normal ve-
hicle behaviour due to a change in the cen-
tre of gravity or increased wind resistance
must be taken into account. Risk of acci-
dent! For this reason, speed and driving
style must be adjusted for the situation.
●
Avoid sudden manoeuvres and braking.
●
Adjust your driving style to suit visibility,
the weather and road and traffic condi-
tions.
●
Never exceed the allowed axle loads or
allowed maximum weight. Risk of accident!
CAUTION
●
Only use SEAT-authorised roof carriers.
●
Where r
oof carriers from other systems
are used or where they are not fitted prop-
erly, any damage caused to the vehicle will
not be covered by the warranty. Therefore,
carefully follow the Instruction Manual for
installation of the r
oof carrier.
●
Remember that the rear lid must not hit
the roof load.
●
The total height of the vehicle increases
according to the roof load. Compare the
height of the vehicle with the heights of
bridges or other underpasses, for example,
the height of the garage door.
●
Do not forget to remove the roof carrier
before entering an automatic carwash.
●
Take into account that the load must not
damage the aerial located on the roof.
For the sake of the environment
If aerodynamic resistance increases, fuel
consumption will also increase
.
Attachment points
Fig. 166
Basic roof carrier attachment points.
Location of the basic roof carrier attachment
points
›
›
›
Fig. 166:
Rear attachment points
Front attachment points
Install and remove following the instructions
given.
»
A
B
145
Operation
CAUTION
Follow the instructions given in the manual.
Roof load
The maximum permissible roof load (includ-
ing the support system) of 75 k
g and the total
authorised weight of the vehicle must not be
exceeded.
It will not be possible to carry the full maxi-
mum load if the roof carrier you are using is
rated for a load which is less than this figure.
In this case, you can only load the roof carrier
to the maximum load permitted in your instal-
lation manual.
Air conditioning
Heating and air conditioning
Gener
al not
es
The power of the heating depends on the
temperat
ure of the coolant. Therefore, maxi-
mum power is only obtained when the engine
has reached operating temperature.
The temperature and humidity of the air in-
side the vehicle decrease when the cooling
system is turned on. This therefore increases
the comfort of all vehicle occupants when
outside temperatures and humidity are high. It
also helps prevent the windows from misting
over during cold periods of the year.
The air recirculation system can be switched
on temporarily to increase the cooling effect.
Keep the air intake slots in front of the wind-
screen clear of ice, snow or leaves to ensure
unimpaired heating and cooling.
When the air conditioning is on, condensa-
tion can drip from the evaporator in the air
cooling system and form a pool underneath
the vehicle. This is normal and does not indi-
cate a leak!
WARNING
●
All windows must be clear of ice
, snow
and condensation for driving safety. There-
fore, make sure you familiarise yourself
with the correct use of heating and ventil
a-
tion, window demisting and defrosting and
cooling.
●
Never use the air recirculation system for
too long, as it prevents fresh air from enter-
ing the vehicle and used air can cause
tiredness, reduce your attention span and
cause the windows to mist over. This in-
creases the risk of an accident. Switch off
the air recirculation system as soon as the
windows begin to mist over.
WARNING
Do not switch off Climatronic for longer
than necessary.
●
Switch Climatronic back on as soon as
the windows begin to mist o
ver.
Note
●
Used air escapes through ventil
ation
slots in the rear of the luggage compart-
ment.
●
Smoking is not recommended while the
air recirculation system is in use, as the
smoke drawn from the interior of the vehi-
cle settles in the evaporator of the air con-
ditioning system. This causes a persistent,
unpleasant smell while the system is run-
ning that is time-consuming and expensive
(evaporator replacement) to eliminate.
146
Air conditioning
●
To guarant
ee proper operation, never
cover the air outlets in the luggage com-
partment.
Economic use of the air-condition-
ing system
When the air conditioning is switched on, the
compressor consumes engine pow
er and has
influence on fuel consumption.
If the vehicle interior has overheated due to
excessive solar radiation, it is best to open the
windows or doors to allow the hot air to es-
cape.
While in motion, the air conditioning should
not be switched on if the windo
ws are open.
If the interior temperature can be reached
without switching on the air conditioning, the
fresh air mode should be used.
For the sake of the environment
Saving fuel reduces emissions.
Faults
If the air conditioning does not work at out-
side t
emper
at
ures above +5°C (+41°F) then
the system is faulty. This may be due to one
of the following reasons:
●
One of the fuses has blown. Check the fuse
and replace if necessary
›››
page 83.
●
The air conditioning compressor has
switched off temporarily because of in-
creased engine coolant temperature
›››
page 101.
If you cannot repair the fault yourself or
where cooling power continues to drop,
switch off the system. Contact a specialised
service.
Air vents
Fig. 167
Air vents.
»
147
Operation
Opening air vents 3 and 4
–
Turn the vertical circular control upwards.
Cl
osing air v
ents 3 and 4
–
T
urn the vertical circular control down-
wards.
Changing the direction of air delivery from
air vents 3 and 4
–
The air circulation height can be varied by
changing the position of the sliding adjuster
upwards or downwards
›››
Fig. 167.
–
The air circulation direction can be varied
by changing the position of the sliding ad-
juster to the right or to the left.
The flow of air from the vents is controlled us-
ing control
C
›
›
›
Fig. 168. Vents 3
›››
Fig. 167
and 4 can be opened and closed individual-
ly.
Depending on the position of the adjusters
and on the weather, open vents can provide
air which is either heated, unheated or
cooled.
Heating and fresh air
Operation
Fig. 168
Heating: controls.
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 39
Temperature selection
–
Turn rotary control
A
›
›
›
Fig. 168 clockwise
to increase the temperature.
–
Turn rotary control
A
anti-clockwise to re-
duce the t
emper
at
ure.
Blower selection
–
Turn rotary control
B
›
›
›
Fig. 168 to position
1 to 4 to switch the blower on.
–
Turn rotary control
B
to position 0 to switch
the bl
o
w
er off.
–
Press button
1
›
›
›
in Air recirculation
on page 149 t
o cl
ose the fr
esh air vent.
Air distribution selection
–
Turn rotary control
C
›
›
›
Fig. 168 to select
the air vents
›››
page 147, Air vents you
wish to activate.
All controls, except control
B
›
›
›
Fig. 168,
can be set to any intermediate position.
Leave the blower activated at all times to
prevent the windows from misting over.
Note
If the system is set so that all of the air is
used to defrost the windo
ws, no air is sup-
plied to the footwell area. This could limit
heating comfort.
Air recirculation
Air recirculation prevents unpleasant smells,
e
.g. when passing thr
ough a t
unnel or in
queuing traffic, from entering the interior.
If the rotary switch
C
›
›
›
Fig. 168 is in the
thaw position, the recirculation flap will al-
ways be open (button light off).
If the rotary switch
C
is switched from any
position t
o the thaw position, r
ecir
culation will
be automatically deactivated.
148
Air conditioning
Connecting the recirculation
In any position of r
ot
ary s
witch
C
except
thaw
:
●
Pr
ess butt
on
1
›
›
›
Fig. 168, the switch's
lamp will light up, indicating that air recircula-
tion inside the vehicle has been activated.
Disconnecting the recirculation
In any position of rotary switch
C
except
thaw
:
●
Pr
ess butt
on
1
again and the button's
l
amp will go off
, indicating that air r
ecircula-
tion from the outside has been activated.
In the thaw position of rotary switch
C
, the
entry of air int
o the v
ehicl
e interior is always
from the outside.
WARNING
Read and observe the safety warnings
›››
in General notes on page 146.
Air conditioning (manual)*
Manual oper
ation
Fig. 169
Air conditioning: controls.
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 38
The air cooling system only works if button
2
›
›
›
Fig. 169 is pressed and under the
following conditions:
●
The engine is running,
●
The outside temperature is above +2°C
(+36°F),
●
The blower control is in position 1–4.
When the cooling system is on and under
certain conditions, air can be blown from the
vents at a temperature of approximately
+5°C (+41°F). In the event of prolonged, irreg-
ular distribution of the air flow from the outlets
and significant differences in temperature,
e.g. on leaving the vehicle, sensitive people
may catch cold.
Temperature selection
●
Turn rotary control
A
›
›
›
Fig. 169 clockwise
to increase the temperature.
●
Turn rotary control
A
anti-clockwise to re-
duce the t
emper
at
ure.
Blower selection
●
Turn rotary control
B
›
›
›
Fig. 169 to position
1 to 4 to switch the blower on.
●
Turn rotary control
B
to position 0 to switch
the bl
o
w
er off.
●
Press button
1
›
›
›
page 150, Air recir-
culation to close the fresh air vent.
Air distribution selection
●
Turn rotary control
C
›
›
›
Fig. 169 to select
the air vents
›››
page 147 you wish to acti-
vate.
Switching cooling on and off
●
Press button
2
›
›
›
Fig. 169 and the
lamp in the button will illuminate.
●
Press button
2
again and the light in
the butt
on will s
wit
ch off.
»
149
Operation
Coldest setting
●
On turning the control
A
to the coldest set-
ting (blue indicat
or), butt
ons
1
and
2
light up
.
●
The r
ecir
culation function is activated auto-
matically in order to cool faster.
Note
●
A visit to the specialised service once a
year is recommended t
o clean the air con-
ditioning system.
●
If the air distribution is directed towards
the windows, all, of the heating power is
used to defrost the windscreen. No warm
air is directed to the footwell area. This
could limit heating comfort.
●
The AC button lamp will illuminate af-
ter the system has been switched on, even
if not all of the cooling system's operating
conditions are met. Cooling is indicated as
available once all of the conditions are met
›››
page 149, Manual operation.
Air recirculation
Air recirculation prevents unpleasant smells,
e.g. when passing through a t
unnel or in
queuing traffic, from entering the interior.
If the rotary switch
C
›››
Fig. 169 is in the
thaw position, the recirculation flap will al-
ways be open (button light off).
If the rotary switch
C
is switched from any
position t
o the thaw position, r
ecir
culation will
be automatically deactivated.
Connecting the recirculation
In any position of rotary switch
C
except
thaw
:
●
Press butt
on
1
›
›
›
Fig. 169, the switch's
lamp will light up, indicating that air recircula-
tion inside the vehicle has been activated.
Disconnecting the recirculation
In any position of rotary switch
C
except
thaw
:
●
Pr
ess butt
on
1
again and the button's
l
amp will go off
, indicating that air r
ecircula-
tion from the outside has been activated.
In the thaw position of rotary switch
C
, the
entry of air int
o the v
ehicl
e interior is always
from the outside.
WARNING
Read and observe the safety warnings
›››
in General notes on page 146.
150
Air conditioning
Climatronic* (automatic air conditioning)
Gener
al not
es
Fig. 170
Climatronic: controls.
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 37
Climatronic automatically maintains a com-
fortable temperature. To do so, it automati-
cally regulates the supplied air temperature
and the blower and air distribution levels. The
system also allows for the effect of sunlight,
so there is no need for manual adjustment. It
also has a humidity sensor that helps to auto-
matically demist the windscreen.
Automatic operations
›››
page 152 guaran-
tee maximum comfort any time of year.
Climatronic description
Cooling only works if the following conditions
are met:
●
The engine is running
●
the outside temperature is above +2°C
(+36°F);
●
›››
Fig. 170
18
turned on.
St
ar
ting the Climatr
onic
The corresponding function will be switched
on when a button is pressed, turning on the
air conditioning if it was switched off, with the
exception of button
17
(recirculation).
Switching off the Climatronic
●
Turn control
10
to the left until the segments
of column
9
›
›
›
Fig. 170 switch off.
●
After 1 second has elapsed, turn the control
again to switch off the display.
In order to ensure engines subject to heavy
loads are cooled, the air conditioning com-
pressor is switched off in the event of high
coolant temperatures.
Recommended setting for all seasons of
the year
●
Set the required temperature. We recom-
mend +22°C (+72°F).
»
151
Operation
●
Pr
ess the butt
on
13
›
›
›
Fig. 170.
●
Adjust vents 3 and 4
›››
page 147 so that
the air flow is directed slightly upwards.
Change between degrees Centigrade and
degrees Fahrenheit
Keep the and
›››
Fig. 170 buttons held
down for 2 seconds at the same time. The
data is displayed on the screen in the units
required.
Note
●
A visit to the specialised service once a
year is recommended t
o clean the Clima-
tronic system.
●
The interior temperature sensor
11
›››
Fig. 170 is at the bott
om. Do not cover it
with stickers or the like, as this could have a
negative effect on Climatronic operations.
Automatic mode
Automatic mode is used to maintain a con-
st
ant t
emper
ature and demist the windows
inside the vehicle.
Switching on automatic mode
●
Set a interior temperature between +16°C
(+64°F) and +29°C (+84°F).
●
Adjust vents 3
›››
page 147 and 4 so that
the air flow is directed slightly upwards.
●
Press the button
13
›
›
›
Fig. 170, and
AUTO is displayed on the screen.
Automatic mode is switched off by pressing
the air distribution buttons or increasing or
decreasing the blower speed. However, the
temperature remains regulated.
Adjusting the temperature
●
When you switch on the ignition, control
1
›››
Fig. 1
70
can be used t
o set the required in-
terior temperature.
It is possible to select interior temperatures
from +16°C (+64°F) to +29°C (+84°F). In this
range the temperature is regulated automati-
cally. If a temperature below +16°C (+64°F) is
selected, “LO” is displayed on the screen. If a
temperature above +29°C (+84°F) is selec-
ted, “HI” is displayed on the screen. At both
extremes, Climatronic works at maximum
cooling or heating power, respectively. The
temperature is not regulated.
In the event of prolonged, irregular distribu-
tion of the air flow from the outlets (particu-
larly the footwells) and significant differences
in temperature, e.g. on leaving the vehicle,
sensitive people may catch cold.
Air recirculation
Air recirculation prevents unpleasant smells,
e.g. when passing through a t
unnel or in
queuing traffic, from entering the interior.
Switching on air recirculation mode
●
Press the button
17
›››
Fig. 170 and the
symbol is displayed on the screen.
Switching off air recirculation mode
●
Press the button
17
›
›
›
Fig. 170 and the
symbol disappears from the screen.
WARNING
Read and observe the safety warnings
›››
in General notes on page 146.
Note
If air recirculation mode remains on for 15
minutes, the
symbol will start to flash on
the screen to indicate prolonged air recir-
culation. If air recirculation is not switched
off, the symbol will continue to flash for
about 5 minutes.
Blower selection
Climatronic automatically regulates blower
speed accor
ding t
o the int
erior temperature.
152
Air conditioning
It is possible, however, to set the blower
speed t
o suit r
equir
ements.
●
Turn control
10
›
›
›
Fig. 170 counter-clock-
wise (to lower the speed) or clockwise (to in-
crease the speed).
Climatronic will switch off when the blower
switches off.
WARNING
Read and observe the safety warnings
›››
in General notes on page 146.
Windscreen defrost
Switching on windscreen defrosting
●
Press the button
12
›
›
›
Fig. 170.
Switching off windscreen defrosting
●
Press the button
12
›
›
›
Fig. 170 sever-
al times or press the button.
The temperature is regulated automatically.
The air output is increased from vents 1
›››
page 147 and 2.
153
Infotainment System
Infotainment System
Intr
oduction
Saf
et
y warnings
Infotainment system safety in-
structions
Travelling on today's roads requires the driv-
er's full attention at all times.
Only oper
ate the infotainment system and its
various functions when the traffic situation
really permits this.
WARNING
●
Before st
arting the trip, you should famili-
arise yourself with the different infotain-
ment system functions.
●
High audio volume may represent a dan-
ger to you and to others.
●
Adjust the volume in a way that you can
distinguish surrounding noise, for example,
horns and sirens, etc.
●
Changes to the Infotainment system set-
tings should be made when the car is stop-
ped, or by a passenger.
WARNING
Distracting the driver in any way can lead
to an accident and cause injuries. Operat
-
ing the Infotainment system can distract
your attention from the traffic.
●
Always drive carefully and responsibly.
●
Select volume settings that allow you to
easily hear signals from outside the vehicle
at all times (e.g. emergency services sirens
and horns).
●
Hearing may be impaired if using too high
a volume setting, even if only for short peri-
ods of time.
WARNING
The volume level may suddenly change
when you switch audio sour
ce or connect a
new audio source.
●
Lower the base volume before connect-
ing or switching audio sources.
WARNING
The driving recommendations and traffic
indications shown on the navigation system
may diff
er from the current traffic situation.
●
Traffic signs and traffic regulations have
priority over the recommendations and dis-
plays provided by the navigation system.
●
Adjust your vehicle speed and driving
style to suit visibility, weather, road and
traffic conditions.
WARNING
Connecting, inserting or removing a data
medium while driving can distract your at
-
tention from the traffic and cause an acci-
dent.
WARNING
Connecting leads for external devices may
obstruct the driver.
●
Arr
ange the connecting leads so that
they do not obstruct the driver.
WARNING
External devices that are loose or not prop-
erly secured could mo
ve around the pas-
senger compartment during a sudden driv-
ing or braking manoeuvre or an accident
and cause damage or injury.
●
Never place or fit external devices to the
doors, windscreen, steering wheel, dash
panel, the backs of the seats, on top of or
near the area marked “AIRBAG” or between
these areas and the occupants. External
devices can cause serious injury in an acci-
dent, especially when the airbags inflate.
WARNING
The armrest may obstruct the driver's arm
movements, which coul
d cause an acci-
dent and severe injuries.
154
Introduction
●
Always k
eep the armrest closed while the
vehicle is in motion.
WARNING
Opening a CD player's housing can lead to
injuries fr
om invisible l
aser radiation.
●
Have CD players repaired only by a
qualified workshop.
CAUTION
The Infotainment system can be damaged
by the incorr
ect inser
tion of a dat
a storage
device or the insertion of an incompatible
data storage device.
●
When inserting a data storage device,
make sure it is correctly positioned.
●
Applying force may irreparably damage
the memory card slot locking mechanism.
●
Only use compatible memory cards.
●
When inserting and removing CDs, al-
ways hold them at right angles to the front
of the CD drive without tilting so as not to
scratch them.
●
If a CD is inserted while another is al-
ready in the unit or being ejected, the CD
drive may be irreparably damaged. Always
wait until the data medium is completely
ejected.
CAUTION
Any foreign objects stuck to a data storage
device and non-round media may damage
the CD pl
ayer.
●
Only clean, standard 12-cm CDs should
be used.
–
Do not affix stickers or other items to
the data medium. Stickers may peel off
and damage the drive.
–
Do not use printable data media. Prin-
ted labels and coverings may peel off
and damage the CD drive.
–
Do not insert 8-cm “single” CDs or ir-
regularly shaped CDs.
–
Do not insert DVD-Plus discs, Dual
Discs or Flip Discs, as these are thicker
than normal CDs.
CAUTION
The vehicle loudspeakers may be dam-
aged if the volume is too high or the sound
is dist
orted.
Note
For the proper functioning of the Infotain-
ment system it is import
ant that the date
and time set in the vehicle are correct.
155
Infotainment System
Overview of the unit
Media Syst
em T
ouch / Media Syst
em Colour
Fig. 171
Overview of the controls (this configura-
tion depends on the v
ersion).
Radio Mode (change of band frequency
›
›
›
page 171
Touchscreen
›››
page 159
Telephone mode* / TP Settings
›››
page 189
Media mode (audio sources)
›››
page 172
1
2
3
4
Volume and sound settings
V
ehicl
e settings
›
››
page 24,
›››
page 188
Selecting the main menu
›››
page 158
Volume. Off/on
›››
page 158
Slot for memory cards
›››
page 175
5
6
7
8
9
Settings button (search and selection)
›
›
›
page 158
10
156
Introduction
Media System Plus / Navi System
Fig. 172
Overview of the controls (this configura-
tion depends on the v
ersion).
Radio Mode (change of band frequency
›
›
›
page 171
Touchscreen
›››
page 159
Navigation Mode
›››
page 178
Media mode (audio sources)
›››
page 172
Phone Mode
›››
page 189
Voice control
Full Link
›››
page 163
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Vehicle settings
›
›
›
page 24,
›››
page 188
Selecting the main menu
›››
page 158
Volume. Off/on
›››
page 158
Proximity sensor
›››
page 162
Settings button (search and selection)
›››
page 158
8
9
10
11
12
157
Infotainment System
General instructions for use
Intr
oduction
Fig. 173 Related video
If the setup is changed, this may change the
displ
ay on the scr
een and in some cases, the
Inf
otainment system may behave in a manner
different to that described in this manual.
Note
●
Lightly pressing the buttons or briefly
pr
essing the touchscreen is sufficient to
operate the Infotainment system.
●
Not all listed function buttons and func-
tions described may be available due to
the device software used in your market.
The equipment is not faulty if a function
button is missing from the screen.
●
Due to country-specific legislation, cer-
tain functions may not be available on the
screen when the vehicle is travelling above
a certain speed.
●
Using a mobile telephone in the vehicle
may cause noise from the vehicle loud-
speakers.
●
Restrictions on the use of devices using
Bluet
ooth
®
technology may apply in some
countries. For further information, contact
the local authorities.
●
On some vehicles with ParkPilot, the vol-
ume of the audio source is automatically
lowered when reverse gear is selected. The
volume can be lowered in the menu Sound
> Volume.
Diagram of the menus
The Infotainment system touchscreen can be
used t
o sel
ect the diff
erent main menus.
Press the Infotainment button
to open
the menus summary.
The displ
ay of the t
ouchscr
een's main menu
can be switched between “grid” and “carou-
sel” via the Settings > Display menu.
Infotainment rotary/push knobs
Rotary/push knobs
The l
eft
-hand r
otary knob is the volume
control or the on/off button.
The right-hand rotary knob is the setup but-
ton.
Infotainment buttons
The buttons on the unit are shown in this
manual with the word “infotainment button”
and their function within a rectangle, for ex-
ample, the infotainment button
.
The Inf
ot
ainment butt
ons are used by press-
ing them or pressing and holding.
Switching on and off
To manually switch the Infotainment system
on and off
, briefly
pr
ess the left rotary knob .
When switching on, the system starts-up with
the last set volume, provided that this does
not exceed the preset maximum start-up vol-
ume. Select Sound > Volume.
The unit will switch off automatically when
the key is removed from the ignition or when
the on/off button is pressed (depending on
the equipment fitted or the vehicle). If the In-
fotainment system is switched on again, it will
switch off automatically after approximately
30 minutes (switch-off delay).
Note
●
The Infotainment syst
em is a part of the
vehicle. It cannot be used in any other vehi-
cle.
●
If the battery has been disconnected, the
ignition must be activated before switching
on the Infotainment system.
158
Introduction
Changing the basic volume
Increasing or decreasing the volume or
muting the sound
Raise the volume
: turn the volume control
clockwise or move the left thumbwheel on
the multifunction steering wheel upward .
Lower the volume: turn the volume control
clockwise or move the left thumbwheel on
the multifunction steering wheel downward
.
Changes in volume are indicated by a vol-
ume bar on the screen. The volume can be
controlled using the steering wheel controls.
In this case, the changes in volume are dis-
played on the instrument panel by a volume
bar.
It is possible to preset certain volume settings
and adjustments. Select Sound > Volume.
Muting the Infotainment system sound
●
Turn the volume control anti-clockwise
until it displays
.
Muting the Infotainment system sound stops
the media source that is playing The screen
displays .
Note
If the base volume has been considerably
increased to pl
ay a certain audio source,
lower the volume again before switching to
another audio source.
Handling the function buttons and
display instructions
Fig. 174
View of some of the function buttons
on the scr
een.
Fig. 175 Sound setup menu
The Infotainment system comes equipped
with a t
ouchscr
een.
Activ
e areas of the screen that call up a cer-
tain function are called “function buttons”.
These buttons are operated by briefly press-
ing the screen or by pressing and holding.
The function buttons appear in the instruc-
tions with the label “function button” and a
button symbol inside a rectangle
.
Function butt
ons st
art functions or open sub-
menus. The curr
ently selected menu is dis-
played in the title bar
›››
Fig. 174
A
of the
submenus.
Inactiv
e (gr
ey) function butt
ons cannot be se-
lected.
Increase or decrease the size of the im-
ages displayed on the screen
The size of the navigation map image
›››
page 178 and, for example, photos when
viewing images
›››
page 172 can be en-
larged or reduced. To do so, enlarge or re-
duce the image displayed by moving two fin-
gers.
»
159
Infotainment System
Overview of screen and function buttons
Display and function buttons: operation
and effect
A
The title bar shows the selected menu
and, where applicable
, other function
buttons.
B
Press it to open another menu.
C
The scroll bar is shown on the right and its
size depends on the entries in the list.
Mov
e the bar on the screen by pressing
lightly and without lifting the finger, see
›››
page 160, Opening list entries and
searching in lists.
D
Movable cursor: Move the cursor ar
ound
the screen by pressing lightly and without
lifting the finger.
OR: To move the cursor to a particular po-
sition, press that spot on the screen.
Fixed crosshair: Press the up, down, left
and right arrows to move the sound ac-
cording to preference. The cursor
D
will
move
.
OR: Press the central button to centre the
ster
eo sound in the centre of the passen-
ger compartment
Press it on some lists to move up a level,
one by one.
BACK
Press to return from the submenus one at
a time t
o the main menu or to undo the
entries made.
Display and function buttons: operation
and effect
When pressed, a pop-up windo
w opens
(options window) which displays other
set
up options.
/
Some functions or messages are accom-
panied by a check box and are activ
ated
or deactivated by pressing said
check box.
OK Press to confirm an entry or a selection.
×
Press to close a pop-up window or an in-
put windo
w.
/
Pr
ess them to change the setup adjust-
ments one at a time
.
Mo
v
e the slider around the screen by
pressing it lightly and without lifting your
finger.
Opening list entries and searching
in lists
Fig. 176
Entries on a setup menu list.
The entries on a list can be activated by
pr
essing them on the scr
een dir
ectly or by us-
ing the adjustment button.
Mark list entries using the setup button
and open them
●
Turn the setup button to mark the entries on
the list with a rectangle one by one and con-
tinue searching the list in this manner.
●
Press the setup button to activate the
marked entry on the list.
Search lists (scrolling the screen)
The scroll bar is shown on the right and its
size depends on the entries in the list
›››
Fig. 176
1
.
160
Introduction
●
Briefly pr
ess
the scr
een above or below the
scroll marker.
●
OR: Place a finger over the scroll marker
and without lifting it, move it around the
screen. Lift your finger off the screen when
you reach the desired position.
●
OR: Place your finger in the centre of the
screen and without lifting it, move it around
the screen. Lift your finger off the screen
when you reach the desired position.
Input masks with on-screen keypad
Fig. 177
Input window with on-screen keypad.
Input windows with on-screen keypad are
used f
or functions such as ent
ering an entry
name
, selecting a destination address or en-
tering a search term for searching long lists.
The function buttons listed below are not
available in all countries or for all topics.
Subsequent chapters only explain those
functions that differ from those in the screen
shown in the figure.
The input line with cursor is located in the top
bar of the screen. All inputs are displayed
here.
Input windows for “free text input”
In the input masks for open text, you may en-
ter letters, numbers and special characters in
any combination.
Input windows for selecting a saved entry
(e.g. selection of a destination address)
It is only possible to select a sequence of let-
ters, numbers and special characters that
matches a stored entry.
Suggestions for matching destinations ap-
pear depending on the characters entered in
the input line
›››
Fig. 177
4
. In the case of
compound names, it is necessary t
o ent
er a
space
.
If there are fewer than 99 selectable entries,
the number of remaining entries is displayed
after the input line
3
. Pressing this function
butt
on displ
ays these r
emaining entries in a
list.
Overview of the function buttons
Function icon and text: operation and ef-
fect
Lett
ers and
digits
Press them to copy them into the input
line.
1
Zip code
a)
: Press this button to enter a
zip code in the Navigation mode.
123 : Press this button to open the
number and special character input
scr
een.
ABC
: Press this button to go back to
the letter input scr
een.
2
Press to change the keypad to anoth-
er language. K
eypad languages can
be selected from the menu System
settings > Language.
3
Displays the number and opens the
list of remaining select
able entries
that match the entered text.
4
Hold and press to display a pop-up
window with the special charact
ers
based on said letter. Press the desired
character to enter it. Some special
characters can be written out instead
(e.g. “AE” for “Ä”).
Press to enter a space.
Press to delete characters in the input
line from right to l
eft.
Press and hold to delete several char-
acters.
»
161
Infotainment System
Function icon and text: operation and ef-
fect
BACK Press t
o close the input window.
a)
Depends on the market and unit in question.
Proximity sensors
3 Valid for: Media System Plus/Navi System
The Infot
ainment system is equipped with an
integrated proximity sensor
›››
Fig. 172
11
.
The image on the scr
een changes fr
om dis-
pl
ay mode to automatic operation when your
hand moves toward it. In operation mode, the
function buttons are automatically highligh-
ted to facilitate their use.
Additional information and display
options
The displays appearing on the screen may
v
ary depending on the settings, and may dif
-
f
er from those described here.
The status bar on the screen can display, for
example, the current time and outside tem-
perature.
All displays can be viewed only after com-
pletely restarting the Infotainment system.
Initial configuration wizard
Fig. 178
Initial configuration wizard
The initial configuration wizard will help you
t
o set up your Inf
ot
ainment system the first
time you switch it on.
Every time you switch on the Infotainment
system, the initial setup screen will appear
›››
Fig. 178 if any parameters have not been
set or if the NEVER function button has not
been pressed.
Function button: function
CLOSE
Closes the Configuration Wizard, and
the main menu or last mode in which
you used the Infot
ainment system will
appear. The next time you switch on
the system, the Configuration Wizard
will start up again.
Function button: function
NEVER
Disables the possibility of changing
the settings of the Infotainment sys-
t
em. If you want to perform the initial
system setup, you must enter via Sys-
tem setup and select Configura-
tion Wizard.
START Starts up the Configuration Wizard.
A
Press to configure the time and date (if
it has a navigation system it will be
configured aut
omatically with the
GPS).
B
Press to search and store to memory
the radio stations that hav
e the best
reception at that moment on all avail-
able bands (AM, FM and DAB).
C
Press to link your mobile telephone to
the Infotainment syst
em.
D
a)
Press to select your home address us-
ing your current position or by man-
ually entering an addr
ess.
PREVIOUS
NEXT
To go to the previous or next parameter
to set.
When a parameter has been set, the
only way to reset it is from the main
menu, clicking on it, and not using the
Previous/Next buttons.
When setting any parameter, a confir-
mation mark will appear on it .
162
Connectivity
Function button: function
FINISH
Once one or more settings have been
applied, click on this in the main menu
of the wizard t
o confirm and finalize
the settings.
If there are any parameters you have
not set, the next time you connect the
Infotainment system, the Initial Config-
uration Wizard will start up.
a)
Only valid for Navi System.
Connectivity
Dat
a tr
ansf
er
This communication can allow data to be
read and/or written.
Fr
om the SETTINGS menu > Data transfer
for SEAT apps, there is a checkbox to acti-
vate/deactivate the function and a dropdown
menu called Operation via apps which
controls the level of interaction between the
apps and the system.
Full Link*
Full Link technology description
Fig. 179 Related video
The Full Link system provides a way of bring-
ing t
ogether t
echnol
ogies that allow commu-
nication between the Infotainment System
and mobile devices:
●
MirrorLink
®
●
Android Auto™
●
Apple CarPlay™
Interfaces
To access the Full Link system, press the Info-
tainment button
(Full Link) and then se-
l
ect the
Full Link cont
ext.
The connection to Full Link is made through a
USB interface.
WARNING
If a mobile terminal is not secured or is in-
correctly secured in the v
ehicle, it could
move around the passenger compartment
in the event of a sudden driving manoeuvre,
emergency stop or accident, resulting in in-
jury.
●
While driving, mobile terminals must be
securely fastened in position, outside the
airbag deployment zones, or safely stowed
away.
WARNING
Any applications that are not suitable or
execut
e incorrectly may cause damage to
the vehicle, accidents and serious injuries.
●
SEAT recommends the use of the Apps
that SEAT provides for this vehicle.
●
To make full use of SEAT Apps, you must
activate the option Setup, Data transfer
for SEAT apps.
»
163
Infotainment System
●
The interaction l
evel of the Apps on the
system must be: ALLOW.
●
Protect the mobile terminal with its appli-
cations from improper use.
●
Never make modifications to the applica-
tions.
●
Consult the instruction manual for the
mobile terminal.
WARNING
The use of applications while driving can
distr
act your attention fr
om the traffic. Dis-
tracting the driver in any way can lead to
an accident and cause injuries.
●
Always drive carefully and responsibly.
CAUTION
●
In areas where special r
egulations apply
or the use of mobile terminals is forbidden,
the mobile terminal must be switched off at
all times. The radiation produced by the
mobile terminal when switched on may in-
terfere with sensitive technical and medi-
cal equipment, possibly resulting in mal-
function or damage to the equipment.
●
SEAT cannot be held liable for any dam-
age caused to the vehicle as a result of the
use of applications that are of poor quality
or are defective, the inadequate program-
ming of the applications, the insufficient
coverage of the network, the loss of data
during transmission or the improper use of
mobile terminal
s.
Note
●
Use of Full Link t
echnology may r
esult in
high consumption of your 3G/4G data plan.
●
SEAT recommends having a high battery
charge on the device when connected to
Full Link.
●
SEAT recommends that to use Full Link,
the “Date and time” should be correctly
configured. Select Settings > Date and
Time.
●
SEAT applications are designed to com-
municate with the vehicle and interact with
it via the Full Link connection, therefore its
functionality is linked to the mobile device
being connected via USB.
●
You can find further information on the
technical requirements, compatible devi-
ces, suitable applications and availability
at www.seat.com or at SEAT dealers.
Is Full Link blocked?
Fig. 180
Message on Infotainment system
scr
een.
To unblock this feature, you must obtain the
accessory fr
om your SEAT deal
er
. Otherwise,
a message like this will appear on the screen
whenever you select the feature
›››
Fig. 180.
164
Connectivity
Requirements for Full Link
Fig. 181 Full Link Requirements
Full Link Activated: If you do not hav
e
Full Link in your v
ehicl
e you can acquire it
as an accessory at your Authorised Serv-
ice.
Compatible Phones. Go to the Mirror-
Link
®
, Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay™
1
2
websites to confirm whether your phone
is compatibl
e with the syst
em.
Mirr
or Link
–
Check smartphone compatibility:
www.mirrorlink.com/phones
–
MirrorLink
®
1.1 or higher
–
Some of the Apps certified by SEAT or
the CCC must be installed in the de-
vice.
Android Auto
–
Check smartphone compatibility. An-
droid Auto™: www.android.com/auto/
–
Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or higher
–
Install Android Auto™ app
Apple CarPlay
–
Check smartphone compatibility. Apple
CarPlay™:www.apple.com/ios/carplay
–
iPhone 5 or higher and iOS 7.1 or higher
–
Turn on the SIRI personal assistant (see
phone settings)
USB cable connecting car to phone:
use the USB cable approved and sup-
plied by the phone's official distributor.
3
165
Infotainment System
Activation of Full Link
Fig. 182
Full Link Setup
Fig. 183
Full Link menu
Data connection via Wi-Fi or SIM is not
necessary t
o est
ablish the connection be-
tw
een the smartphone and Full Link.
Data connection via Wi-Fi or SIM is neces-
sary to enable all of the app features
1)
.
Proceed as follows to use Full Link:
●
Switch on the Infotainment system
●
Connect the smartphone to the vehicle's
USB port using a USB cable
›››
page 195.
●
In the main menu for the Full Link setup, se-
lect Activate data transfer for SEAT
apps
›››
Fig. 182:
Finally, a message will appear stating that
data transfer will commence when the device
is connected. Please note that data is trans-
ferred over connections between your vehi-
cle and mobile device. Press OK. Once selec-
ted, the technology compatible with your de-
vice can be used.
Note
Depending on your smartphone, it may
have to be unl
ocked for the connection to
occur.
What should I do if it does not con-
nect?
Restart the mobile device
Check the USB cable visually.
Make sure that the USB cable is not damaged. Check
that both connections (USB/micro USB) are not dam-
aged or worn.
Visually check
that the USB ports
are pr
operly con-
nected.
Check that the ve-
hicle and device
USB connections
are not damaged
and/or worn.
Clean the USB ports (device
and vehicle).
T
ry another compatible mo-
bile device
.
Have the USB port replaced at
a SEAT Authorised Service.
Have the mobil
e device re-
paired or repl
ace it.
Try another compatible mobile device.
1)
Using the data connection to transfer the
smartphone apps to Full Link may invol
ve addi-
tional charges. Please check the charges with
your operator.
166
Connectivity
Pairing of portable devices sup-
por
ting the Mirr
orLink
®
, Andr
oid
Auto™ and/or Apple CarPlay™
technologies
Fig. 184
Full Link menu
Carousel
When you ent
er the Full Link cont
e
xt for the
first time, the technologies available for pair-
ing the portable device are displayed.
Once the device connects via USB, the sys-
tem will offer you the technologies available
for establishing a connection with your mo-
bile phone.
In the event of simultaneous connections be-
tween two devices with different operating
systems, a choice will be presented for which
one to make the connection with
›››
Fig. 184.
View of the device list
iPhone™ devices only support Apple Car-
Play™.
There are some Android devices that support
MirrorLink
®
and Android Auto™.
Bear in mind that once the device is connec-
ted it will not be available as an audio source.
Full Link setup
Function button: function
Activating data transfers for SEAT applications : allows
the exchange of inf
ormation between the vehicle and
applications authorised by SEAT.
Last Mode
If a session using one t
echnol
ogy ends with-
out the disconnection being made fr
om the
Infotainment system (simply by disconnect-
ing the cable) then when the device is next
connected to it, the session will start without
the user being required to take any action
1)
.
Information
Consult the mobile device manual.
Depends on each technology:
Availability in a country
Third party applications
For further information:
MirrorLink
®
:
www.mirrorlink
.com
Apple CarPlay™:
www.apple
.com/ios/carplay
Android Auto™:
www.android.com/aut
o
Note
●
In order to use Andr
oid Auto™ technology
it is necessary to download the Android
Auto™ application, located on Google
Play™.
●
Only compatible applications can be
used, in accordance with the technology
connected.
1.
2.
1)
Unless the device requires the screen to be un-
locked in or
der to establish the connection.
167
Infotainment System
MirrorLink
®
Fig. 185
Function buttons in the general view
of compatibl
e applications.
Fig. 186 Other MirrorLink function buttons.
MirrorLink
®
is a pr
ot
ocol which enabl
es com-
munication between a portable device and
the Infotainment system via USB.
Using it makes it possible to display and man-
age the content and functions displayed on
the portable device on the Infotainment sys-
tem screen.
To avoid distracting the driver while driving,
only specially adapted applications can be
used
›››
in Full Link technology descrip-
tion on page 163.
R
equir
ements
In or
der to use MirrorLink
®
, the following re-
quirements must be met:
●
The mobile device must be compatible with
MirrorLink
®
.
●
The mobile device must be connected to
the Infotainment system via USB.
●
Depending on the mobile device used, a
suitable application must be installed for the
use of MirrorLink
®
on the device.
Initiating the connection
●
In order to initiate the connection with the
mobile device, it is simply necessary to con-
nect it to the Infotainment system via the USB
connection.
●
A pop-up screen will appear, which will re-
quest that you accept the device.
Function buttons and possible messages
Function button: function
Full Link
To return to the Full Link main
menu.
Function button: function
CLOSE APPS
Press to close the open apps.
Then press the apps to be
cl
osed or the Close all
function
button to close all the open ap-
plications.
1 : 1
Press to change to the mobile
device screen.
SETTINGS To open the Full Link setup
›››
Fig. 186
1
Press to return to the MirrorLink
®
main menu.
›››
Fig. 186
2
Press to display all the function
buttons in the lo
wer or upper
right-hand margin of the screen.
›››
Fig. 186 /
Allows buttons
1
and
2
to be
hidden or shown.
››
›
Fig. 172
12
MirrorLink
®
set
up
Function button: function
Activate MirrorLink pop-up windows: Allows Mirror-
Link
®
pop-up windows in applications that support it.
168
Connectivity
Apple CarPlay™*
3 Valid for compatible iPhone™ mobile tele-
phones. Also
, iPhone™ mobile telephones only
support Apple CarPlay™
Apple CarPlay™ is a protocol which enables
communication between a mobile telephone
and the Infotainment system via USB.
This makes it possible to display and operate
the mobile telephone on the Infotainment
system screen.
Requirements
In order to use Apple CarPlay™, the following
requirements must be met:
●
Make sure that you do not have Apple
CarPlay™ restrict
ed on your device, at: Set-
tings > General > Restrictions >
CarPlay > ON.
●
The mobile device must be compatible with
Apple CarPlay™.
●
The mobile device must be connected to
the Infotainment system via USB.
Initiating the connection
In order to initiate the connection with the
mobile device, it is simply necessary to con-
nect it to the Infotainment system via the USB
connection.
●
A pop-up screen will appear, which will re-
quest that you accept the device.
●
If you start the session using Apple
CarPlay™ technology, it will not be possible
to pair another device via Bluetooth
®
. The fol-
lowing message will appear in the main
Phone menu:
Please disconnect Apple CarPlay
first, before you can connect an-
other mobile telephone.
Holding down the button will start the
Apple™ voice “engine”.
To return to the basic contents of the Infotain-
ment system, press the SEAT icon.
Android Auto™*
3 Valid for compatible Android mobile phones.
Andr
oid Auto™ is a protocol which enables
communication between a portable device
and the Infotainment system via USB.
This makes it possible to display and operate
the mobile telephone on the Infotainment
system screen.
Requirements
In order to use Android Auto™, the following
requirements must be met:
●
The mobile device must be compatible with
Android Auto™.
●
The mobil
e device must be connected to
the Infotainment system via USB.
●
The Android Auto™ application should al-
ready be downloaded and installed on the
mobile device.
Initiating the connection
In order to initiate the connection with the
mobile device, it is simply necessary to con-
nect it to the Infotainment system via the USB
connection, and to be sure to follow the in-
structions of the device being paired.
●
The first connection to Android Auto™ must
be done while the vehicle is stationary.
●
Once the first pop-up window about ac-
cepting data transfer between the car and
the device has been accepted, a message
will appear requesting that you check your
mobile device for the confirmations needed
to pair it with the Infotainment system.
●
If you are initiating the session using
Android Auto™ technology via USB, the mo-
bile telephone connects automatically via
Bluetooth
®
to the Infotainment system tele-
phone and it will not be possible to pair an-
other mobile telephone via Bluetooth
®
.
Holding down the button will start the
Android™ voice “engine”.
To return to the basic contents of the Infotain-
ment system, press the Return to SEAT
button.
»
169
Infotainment System
Note
Some mobile devices require a change in
the USB connection mode in order to use
Andr
oid Auto™.
●
Make sure that your mobile is in “Media
Transfer Protocol (MTP)” mode before it is
connected by USB to the Infotainment sys-
tem.
Note
Android Auto™ requires the use of Google™
services, as well as cert
ain basic applica-
tions of the Android system.
●
Make sure that you always have Google™
services updated in order to use this tech-
nology.
Frequently asked questions about
Full Link
What is the connection method?
USB Cable.
Will the USB cabl
e be supplied with the vehicle?
No. The USB cable supplied with the de
vice should
be used.
Is there a navigation option?
Navigation is possible in each one of the Full Link
technol
ogies if the technology is available in your
country and if you have the Navigation app.
What is the difference between using the Full Link
system navigator (via t
elephone) instead of an-
other navigator?
Benefits: Daily updates.
Issues: data consumption, reception problems.
Can I send voice messages?
With certified apps, you can answer but not send
v
oice messages.
What apps are visible while driving?
Depending on the technology:
– f
or MirrorLink
®
: SEAT-certified apps and CCC,
– for Android Auto™: Apps selected by Google™,
– for Apple CarPlay™: Apps selected by Apple™.
Where can I find compatible apps?
Compatible apps can be found on the following links:
www.mirrorlink.com/
www.android.com/auto/
www.apple.com/ios/carplay/
Where can I download apps?
On Google Play™ for Android Auto™/MirrorLink
®
and
on Apple Store™ for Apple CarPlay™.
If Full Link stops working, where can I have it re-
paired?
If the probl
em is in the car, you should go to the deal-
er. If the problem is in the mobile device, you should
see your mobile telephone vendor.
Will WhatsApp be certified?
This depends on the technology.
Is Mirr
orLink
®
availabl
e in my country?
Yes, MirrorLink
®
is available in all the countries and
regions where SEAT operates.
What are the differences between MirrorLink
®
,
Android Auto™ and Appl
e CarPlay™?
MirrorLink
®
is not compatible with Android Auto™ and
Apple CarPlay™, as they are different technologies.
They all coexist in Full Link, although Android Auto™ is
designed for mobile devices with the Android™ oper-
ating system, and Apple CarPlay™ for iPhone.
Can MirrorLink
®
be installed in a previous SEAT
model?
No, this is not possible.
Where can I find more information about Full
Link?
If you have any questions, please see our Inno
va-
tion/Connectivity sections on our website:
www.seat.es or www.seat.com or e-mail seat-re-
170
Operating modes
Operating modes
R
adio
R
el
ated video
Fig. 187 Radio mode
Radio main menu
Fig. 188 RADIO main menu.
Fig. 189 Radio mode: station list (FM).
Press the infotainment button
to open
the R
adio
main menu
›
››
Fig. 188.
Radio main menu function buttons
Function button: function
1
To change the group of memory but-
tons slide a finger ov
er the memory
buttons from left to right or vice-versa
BAND
Allows you to select the frequency
band.
STATION
LIST
Opens the list of currently receivable
r
adio from the activ
e frequency band.
MANUAL
Allows you to select the frequency
manually.
VIEW
Allows you to select the information
shown on the screen. Only av
ailable in
DAB mode.
SETTINGS
Opens the setup menu of the active
frequency band (FM, AM or DAB).
Function button: function
/
Selects the previous or next stored sta-
tion or of the station list. This setting
can be changed in the Radio settings
menu (FM, AM, D
AB).
1 to 18
a)
Memory buttons
›
›
›
page 172.
SCAN
Stops the scan function (only visible
when the function is under w
ay). It can
be activat
ed in the settings menu (FM,
AM and DAB).
a)
The Media System / Touch Colour model has 15
memories.
Inf
ormation and possibl
e icons
Display: Meaning
A
View the frequency or the name of the
station and, where applicabl
e, the radio
text. The name of the radio station and
the radio text will only be displayed if
equipped with RDS and if it is active.
RDS
Off
The RDS radio data service is deactiva-
ted.
TP
Tr
affic information can be retrieved: se-
lect Radio > Settings > Traffic
station.
No st
ations with traffic news are availa-
bl
e.
The r
adio station is stored on a memory
button.
»
171
Infotainment System
Display: Meaning
AF off
The tracking of alternative frequencies is
disabl
ed.
Note
●
The availabilit
y of AM and DAB bands de-
pends on the country and/or equipment. In
the event that the AM and DAB bands are
not available, the BAND function button
text will not be shown.
●
Bear in mind that being underground, in
tunnels, in areas with tall buildings or
mountains can interfere with radio signals.
●
Foil or metal-coated stickers attached to
the windows may affect reception on vehi-
cles with a window aerial.
Memory buttons
Fig. 190
Radio main menu.
In the R
adio main menu, you can store sta-
tions fr
om all av
ailable frequency wave-
lengths on the numbered function buttons.
These function buttons are called “memory
buttons”.
Functions of the memory buttons
Selecting the
st
ation fr
om
the memory
butt
ons
Press the memory button corre-
sponding to the desired st
ation.
The stored stations can only be
played by pressing the corr
e-
sponding memory button provided
it can be received at your current
location.
Change mem-
ory bank
Move your finger over the screen
from left t
o right or vice-versa.
OR: Press one of the function but-
tons
›
››
Fig. 190
A
The memory buttons are displayed
in three memory banks.
Storing the
st
ation on the
memory but-
tons
Keep and hold the desired memory
button until an audible signal is
heard, the station will be stored on
this memory button. You can also
store a station from a station list.
Functions of the memory buttons
Storing the
station logo on
the memory
buttons
A station logo can be assigned to
the stations stor
ed on the memory
buttons.
A logo is automatically assigned
from the database if the Advanced
radio settings option is enabled
a)
.
A logo can also be assigned man-
ually from an external data source
(USB/SD card).
a)
Not available for the Media System Touch/Colour
model.
Media
Intr
oduction
Fig. 191 Related video
“Media sour
ces
” ar
e audio sources contain-
ing audio files on various different data stor-
age devices (e.g. CD, memory card, external
MP3 player). These audio files can be played
172
Operating modes
by the Infotainment system via their corre-
sponding driv
es or audio input sock
ets (int
er-
nal CD drive, memory card slot, AUX-IN multi-
media socket etc.).
Copyright
Audio and video files on data storage devices
are usually protected by intellectual property
rights, as per the corresponding national and
international laws. Be aware of the current le-
gal provisions!
Note
●
Do not use memory card adapters.
●
SEAT assumes no liabilit
y for any deterio-
ration or loss of files on data storage devi-
ces.
Media main menu
Fig. 192
Media main menu.
Using the Media main menu, diff
er
ent media
sour
ces can be selected and played.
●
Press the infotainment button
to open
the R
adio
main menu
›
››
Fig. 192.
It will continue playing the last media source
selected from the same point.
The media source being played is indicated
on the dropdown list when pressing the
SOURCE
function button
›
›
›
Fig. 192.
If there is no available media source, the Me-
dia main menu is displayed.
Function buttons of the main Media menu
Function button: function
SOURCE
Indicates the media source being
played. Press t
o select another me-
dia source
›››
page 174.
CD
: Internal CD drive
›››
page 175.
SD CARD 1 , SD CARD 2 *: SD memory
card
››
›
page 175.
USB
: External data storage device
connected to the USB port
›››
page 175.
AUX
: External audio source connec-
ted to the AUX-IN multimedia sock
et
›››
page 176.
BT AUDIO
: Bluetooth
®
audio
›››
page 176.
Function button: function
SELECTION
Opens the track list. Depending on
the l
ev
el, track list, folders or source.
/
Changes track in Media mode or fast
forwar
d/rewind.
Playback stops. The function but-
ton changes to .
Playback is resumed. The func-
tion button changes to .
SETTINGS
Opens the Media Settings
menu.
REPEAT
Repeat all tracks.
Repeats all the tracks that are on the
same memory l
ev
el as the track be-
ing played at that moment. If in the
Media Settings menu the
Mix/Repeat including subfolders
op-
tion is enabled, it also includes the
subf
olders.
REPEAT
The current track will be repeated.
MIX
Random play.
Includes all the tracks that are on
the same memory lev
el as the track
being played at that moment. If in
the Media Settings menu the
Mix/Repeat including subfolders
op-
tion is enabled, it also includes the
subf
olders.
»
173
Infotainment System
Messages and symbols on the Media main
menu
Display: Meaning
A
Displays information about the artist
name, album name and song title (CD
t
ext , ID3 tag on compressed audio
files).
Audio CD: displays track information. If
no data is available, it only displays
Track and the number corresponding to
the position it occupies on the data stor-
age device.
B
Album cover display: If there are various
covers within the same f
older/album, the
system only displays one of them.
It prioritizes displaying the covers in the
following manner:
1. Cover embedded in the file(s).
2. Image in file folder.
3. Default icon of the connected device.
C
The playing time so far and time remain-
ing in minutes and seconds. In the case
of audio files with v
ariable bit rates (VBR)
the remaining time may vary.
TP
a)
The TP function is active and can be
used: sel
ect Radio > Settings >
Traffic programme (TP).
a)
Ther
e are no traffic stations available:
select Radio > Settings > Traf-
fic programme (TP).
a)
Depends on the market and unit in question.
Note
●
When the media source is insert
ed, play-
ing will not start automatically; it is neces-
sary for the user to select the source. Nor
will the media source change when it is
ejected.
Changing the Media source
Fig. 193
MEDIA mode: change media source.
●
From the Media main menu, pr
ess the
Infotainment button repeatedly to cycle
thr
ough the av
ail
able media sources.
●
OR: From the Media main menu, press the
SOURCE
function button
›
›
›
Fig. 193 and se-
lect the desired media source.
In the pop-up window, the Media sources not
selected are shown as deactivated (in grey).
When a Media source that has already been
played is selected again, playback is re-
sumed from the point at which it was stop-
ped.
Optional Media playback sources
Function button: media source
CD Internal CD drive
›››
page 175.
SD CARD 1
SD memory card
›››
page 175.
SD CARD 2
*
USB
External data storage device con-
nected to the USB port
›››
page 175.
AUX
External audio source connected
to the AUX-IN multimedia socket
›
››
page 176.
BT AUDIO
Bluetooth
®
audio
›››
page 176.
Note
The Media source can be changed in the
Track list
view: select Media > View.
174
Operating modes
Insert or eject a CD
3 Not available for model: Media System
Touch/Col
our
Fig. 194
Slots for data storage devices in the
gl
o
v
e compartment.
The driver should refrain from operating the
unit whil
e the v
ehicl
e is in motion. Insert or
change the data storage device before mov-
ing off!
The CD drive can play audio CDs and audio
data CDs.
Inserting a CD
●
Hold the CD with the printed side facing up.
●
Push the CD into the slot
›››
Fig. 194
3
to
the point wher
e it is dr
awn in aut
omatically.
Ejecting a CD
●
Press button
1
.
●
The CD in the driv
e will be e
ject
ed and
must be removed within approximately
10 seconds.
Insert or eject a memory card
Depending on the features and the country,
the vehicle may hav
e one or two slots for SD
cards.
Inserting a memory card
Insert the compatible memory card, bevelled
edge first and with the label face up (con-
tacts face down), into slot
›››
Fig. 194
2
or
›
›
›
Fig. 171
9
, until properly inserted.
If a memory car
d cannot be insert
ed, mak
e
sure it is positioned correctly and is compati-
ble with the unit.
Removing a memory card
The inserted memory cards must be pre-
pared for removal.
●
From the main Media menu, press the
SETTINGS
button to open the Media Set-
tings menu or pr
ess the inf
ot
ainment button
and then press Settings to open menu
System settings.
●
Press the R
emo
v
e safely
function button. A
dr
opdo
wn menu appears with the f
ollowing
options: SD1 Card, SD2 Card* and USB. After
correctly ejecting the memory card from the
system, the function button becomes inactive
(grey colour).
●
Press the inserted memory card. The mem-
ory card “jumps” to the eject position.
●
Remove the memory card.
Unreadable memory card
If a memory card is inserted and the data
cannot be read, the relevant warning ap-
pears.
External data storage device con-
nected to the USB port
Depending on the the features and the coun-
try, the v
ehicl
e may hav
e a USB connection
›››
page 195.
Audio files on an external data storage device
connected to the USB port can be played
and controlled via the Infotainment system.
Where this manual refers to external data
storage devices, this means USB mass stor-
age devices containing supported audio files,
such as MP3 players, iPods™ and USB sticks.
Only supported audio files are displayed and
played. Other files are ignored.
Instructions and restrictions
Compatibility with Apple™ devices and other
media players depends on the unit.
»
175
Infotainment System
The USB port supplies the usual USB v
olt
-
age of 5 v
olts for a USB connection.
External hard disks with a capacity greater
than 32 GB must be reformatted for the FAT32
file system in some circumstances. You will
find the necessary software and information
on the Internet.
Take into account all other instructions and
limitations regarding requirements for media
sources.
Disconnecting
Any connected data storage devices must
be prepared before their disconnection in or-
der to remove them.
●
From the main Media menu, press the
SETTINGS
button to open the Media Set-
tings menu or pr
ess the inf
ot
ainment button
and then press Settings to open menu
System settings.
●
Press the R
emo
v
e safely
function button. A
dr
opdo
wn menu appears with the f
ollowing
options: SD1 Card, SD2 Card* and USB. After
correctly ejecting the data storage device
from the system, the function button be-
comes inactive (grey colour).
●
Now the data storage device can be dis-
connected.
Note
●
Do not connect an external media pl
ayer
at the same time to play music via Blue-
tooth
®
and via the USB port with the In-
fotainment system, as this could cause
playback limitations.
●
If the external player is an Apple™ device,
it cannot be simultaneously connected by
USB and by Bluetooth
®
.
●
If a connected device is not recognised,
disconnect all the connected devices and
try connecting the device again.
●
Do not use memory card adaptors, USB
extension cords or USB hubs!
External audio source connected to
the AUX-IN multimedia sock
et
Depending on the equipment and country
ther
e may be an AUX-IN multimedia sock
et
›
››
page 195.
The connected external audio source is
played over the vehicle speakers and cannot
be controlled via the Infotainment system
controls.
The connection of an external audio source is
indicated by AUX on the screen.
Connecting an external audio source to
the AUX-IN multimedia socket
●
Lower the base volume on the Infotainment
system.
●
Connect the external audio source to the
AUX-IN multimedia socket.
●
Start playback on the external audio
source.
●
In the MEDIA main menu, press the SOURCE
function button and select AUX .
Connecting an external audio
sour
ce via Bluet
ooth
®
Bluetooth
®
Audio mode all
o
ws you t
o listen to
audio files being played on a Bluetooth
®
au-
dio source (e.g., a mobile telephone) connec-
ted via Bluetooth
®
(audio playback by Blue-
tooth
®
) over the vehicle speakers.
Conditions
●
The Bluetooth
®
audio source must support
the A2DP Bluetooth
®
profile.
●
In the Bluetooth Settings menu the
Bluetooth Audio (A2DP/AVRCP) function
must
be on. Sel
ect
Phone > Settings > Blue-
tooth.
1
76
Operating modes
Starting Bluetooth
®
audio tr
ansf
er
●
Activ
ate Bluetooth
®
visibility on the external
Bluetooth
®
audio source (e.g., mobile tele-
phone).
●
Lower the base volume on the Infotainment
system.
●
In the MEDIA main menu, press the SOURCE
function button and select B
T audio
.
●
Press Sear
ch f
or ne
w device
in order to con-
nect an e
xt
ernal Bluet
ooth
®
audio source for
the first time
›››
page 190.
●
OR: Select a Bluetooth
®
external audio
source from the list.
●
Please refer to the instructions on the
screen of the Infotainment system and on the
Bluetooth
®
audio source regarding the rest of
the procedure.
You may still need to manually start playback
on the Bluetooth
®
source.
When playback on the Bluetooth
®
audio
source is stopped, the Infotainment system
remains in Bluetooth
®
Audio mode.
Controlling playback
The extent to which the Bluetooth
®
audio
source can be controlled via the Infotainment
system depends on the connected Blue-
tooth
®
audio source.
The available functions will depend on the
Bluetooth
®
Audio profile that the connected
external player supports.
With media players that support the AVRCP
Bluetooth
®
profile, playback on the Blue-
tooth
®
audio source can be automatically
started or stopped when the unit is switched
to Bluetooth
®
Audio mode or to a different au-
dio source. In addition, it is possible to view or
change the track via the Infotainment system.
Note
●
Due to the lar
ge number of possible Blue-
tooth
®
audio sources, it is not possible to
guarantee fault-free operation of all de-
scribed functions.
●
Do not connect an external media player
to play music via Bluetooth
®
and via the
USB port
›››
page 175 at the same time
with the Infotainment system, as this could
cause playback limitations.
●
If the external player is an Apple™ device,
it cannot be simultaneously connected by
USB and by Bluetooth
®
.
Images
3 Valid for the model: Media System Plus/Navi
System
Fig. 195
Images main menu.
Using the Images menu, image fil
es can be
vie
w
ed (e.g. photos) individually or as a slide-
show.
The image files must be stored on a compati-
ble data storage device (e.g., a CD or an SD
card).
●
Press the Infotainment
button and
then sel
ect the
Images cont
ext.
●
Press the SOURCE
function button to select
the sour
ce wher
e the pict
ures in question are
located.
Function button: function
SOURCE Viewing and selecting the source.
SELECTION Opens a list of image files.
»
177
Infotainment System
Function button: function
The image viewed was obtained via
GPS localisation and upon pressing
this function butt
on, the navigator
menu opens to start a route to this
destination.
/
Rotate the view of the image to the
left or the right.
Reset the vie
w of the image.
To stop the playback of a slideshow.
The
function button changes to
.
To continue the playback of a slide-
show. The function button
changes to .
/
To change to the PREVIOUS or
NEXT image.
The same function can be per-
f
ormed by sliding your finger hori-
zontally across the screen.
SETTINGS Open the Image settings menu.
Enlarging or reducing the view
T
o enl
ar
ge or reduce the view of the image
displayed:
●
Turn the adjustment knob.
●
OR: Stretch or reduce the image on the
screen using 2 fingers.
Rotating the view/image
To rotate an image, in addition to the buttons
provided for this ( / ), you can also press
on the screen (e.g. with your thumb) and,
while continuing to press with your thumb,
slide another finger (e.g. your index finger)
around it like a compass either clockwise (to
rotate the image to the right) or anti-clock-
wise (to turn the image to the left). This will ro-
tate the image 90° with respect to its current
position.
Requirements for viewing images
Image files Maximum resolu-
tion
BMP 4MP
JPEG 4MP (Progressive Mode)
JPG 64MP
GIF 4MP
PNG 4MP
Navigation
1)
Intr
oduction
Fig. 196 Related video
General information
Using all the dat
a av
ail
able, the Infotainment
system calculates the optimum route to the
destination.
The destination is defined by entering an ad-
dress or a point of interest, e.g. a petrol sta-
tion or hotel. Traffic reports, if any, will also be
taken into account in the route calculation
(dynamic route guidance
›››
page 186).
Spoken instructions and visual guidance on
the navigation unit and on the instrument
panel will direct you to your destination.
CAUTION
The navigation announcements played
may be inaccurate (e
.g. due to out-of-date
navigation data).
1)
Only available for the model: Navi System
178
Operating modes
Instructions for navigation
When the Infotainment system is unable to re-
ceive any data fr
om GPS satellites (due to a
dense tree canopy, underground car park),
navigation can still continue using the vehicle
sensors.
Possible limitations in navigation
In areas that are not or are only partially digi-
tised on the data storage device, the Infotain-
ment system will still attempt to provide route
guidance.
Navigation area and updating navigation
data
Roads and streets are subject to constant
change (e.g. new roads, changes to street
names and building numbers). Therefore, if
the navigation data is not updated, then er-
rors or inaccuracies may occur during guid-
ance.
SEAT recommends updating navigation data
on a regular basis. Up to date navigation data
can be downloaded from www.seat.com or
acquired at a SEAT dealer.
Updating and using navigation da-
ta from an SD car
d
The Infotainment system always requires the
navigation data that is currently v
alid for this
unit in order to allow all functions to be used
in full. Using an old version may lead to errors
during navigation.
Updating navigation data
The current navigation data can be downloa-
ded in the internet at www.seat.com and stor-
ed in a SD card compatible with the unit.
Suitable SD Cards can be acquired at SEAT
dealerships.
The procedure is described on the internet at
www.seat.com.
Using navigation data
●
Insert the memory card
›››
page 175.
●
Do not remove the memory card while test-
ing. Wait for the testing icon to disappear.
If the inserted memory card contains valid
navigation data, the following message ap-
pears: “The source contains a valid
navigation database”. It is now possible to
navigate with the memory card data. When
the memory card is no longer needed by the
hardware, it will be prepared for removal
›››
page 175.
Note
●
The inserted memory car
d must be pre-
pared before it is ejected
›››
page 175.
●
Press the Infotainment button
; then
press Settings t
o open the System set-
tings menu.
●
Navigation is not possible without the SD
card.
●
Do not remove the memory card while
the navigation data is in use. This could
damage the memory card!
●
The navigation memory card may not be
used as memory for other files. The info-
tainment system will not recognise the files
saved.
●
SEAT recommends only using original
SEAT memory cards to use navigation data.
The use of other memory cards could limit
its operation.
179
Infotainment System
Navigation main menu
Fig. 197
Navigation main menu
The Navigation main menu all
o
ws you t
o se-
lect a new destination, call up a previously
used or stored destination and search for
points of interest.
Opening the main Navigation menu
●
Press the Infotainment system button
to open the last menu that was open in navi-
gation.
Function butt
ons and messages on the
main Navigation menu
Function button: function
A
The split screen is displayed
›››
page 185.
B
Messages and function buttons on the map
display
››
›
page 185.
Function button: function
NEW DESTINATION : To enter a new destination
›››
page 180.
ROUTE
: During route guidance
›››
page 182.
MY DESTS. : To activate or manage stored destina-
tions
›››
page 182.
POI
: Search for points of interest (car parks, fuel sta-
tions and restaur
ants) within a particular search area
›››
page 184.
VIEW
To modify or activate or deactivate the split
screen and show POI
›
››
Fig. 197
A
›››
page 184.
SETTINGS
Open the Navigation Settings
menu
›››
Fig. 197.
New destination (enter destina-
tion)
Fig. 198
Search screen.
●
In the Navigation main menu, pr
ess the
Ne
w destination function button.
●
Press the Options function button and se-
l
ect the r
equir
ed type of destination (Search,
Address, POI on the route or On map).
●
Using voice control*, if you say Town, street
and number, without pauses, and then the in-
struction “Start Route Guidance” a route to
the given destination will start.
Search
Search for addresses and Points of Interest
using the keypad to enter them
›››
Fig. 198.
For cities, post codes and points of interest,
the full details must be entered. You can also
search for points of interest by names or cat-
egories. When necessary, enter the name of
the city to refine the search.
›››
Fig. 198
A
Press to open the cursor buttons (, ),
which allow you t
o move within the text.
Address
Aft
er ent
ering a country and a t
own, you can
start navigating towards the centre of the se-
lected town.
When narrowing down the destination ad-
dress, please note that every entry restricts
the available range of subsequent selections.
For instance, if the street you are looking for is
180
Operating modes
not in the post
code ar
ea you hav
e selected
in a previous window, you will not be able to
find the street at the street selection stage.
Function button: function
Country : To select the desired country.
City : To enter the desired city or postcode.
Street : To enter the desired street name.
House number : To enter the desired house number.
Junction : To select the desired intersection.
Last destinations : Open the My destinations
menu
›››
page 182.
Start
: Start route guidance to the selected address.
Using the map
●
Select the destination on the map or enter
it using GPS coor
dinat
es and confirm with
OK .
Function button: function
Save : To save the selected point of interest in the
destination memory
›››
page 182.
Edit
: To edit a destination or to enter another desti-
nation.
Route options : To adjust route options, see Naviga-
tion Settings > Route options.
Start : Starts guided navigation to the selected point
of interest.
After starting route guidance
Fig. 199
Route calculation.
After starting route guidance, the route to the
first destination will be cal
cul
at
ed.
The calculation will be performed in accord-
ance with the data selected in the Route
options menu.
After starting route guidance, three alterna-
tive routes will be suggested depending on
the selected setup
›››
Fig. 199. These 3 routes
correspond to the selectable route options:
Economical, Fast and Short.
Route criteria: Meaning
Blue route: Economical route
, the route is calculated
by taking into consideration economic factors.
Red route: Fastest r
oute to the destination, even if it
is necessary to make a deviation.
Route criteria: Meaning
Orange route: Shortest rout
e to the destination,
even if it results in longer travelling time. The route
may have unconventional sections such as secon-
dary roads.
●
Select the desired route by pressing it.
Once the route has been cal
culated, the sys-
tem gives the first navigation announcement.
Before turning, up to 3 navigation announce-
ments will be heard.
●
Press the adjustment knob
›››
Fig. 172
7
to
list
en t
o the l
ast audible navigation instruc-
tion.
A navigation announcement informs you
when you have reached your “destination”.
A navigation announcement informing you
that you have reached the “destination area”
is given if the exact destination cannot be
reached because it is located in a non-digi-
tised area.
During dynamic route guidance, you re-
ceive information about reported traffic con-
gestion on the route. An additional navigation
announcement is given if the route is recalcu-
lated due to traffic congestion.
During a navigation announcement, you can
change its volume using the button
›››
Fig. 172
6
.
»
181
Infotainment System
For other adjustments to the navigation rec-
ommendations, sel
ect
Navigation > Set-
tings > Navigation announcements
settings.
Note
●
If you miss a turning during rout
e guid-
ance and are currently unable to turn back,
keep on driving until the navigation system
offers a new route.
●
The quality of the navigation recommen-
dations given by the Infotainment system
depends on the navigation data available
and any reported traffic problems.
Route
In the Navigation main menu, pr
ess the R
out
e
function button.
The R
out
e function button is only displayed
with r
out
e guidance activ
ated.
Function button: function
Stop route guidance : Aborts current route guidance.
Enter destination : To enter a new destination or a new
stopover
›››
page 180.
Congestion ahead : To exclude a section (of 0.2 to 10
km in length) from the curr
ent route, e.g. to avoid
congestion. To cancel the exclusion, press the Route
function button and then Cancel congestion .
Function button: function
Route details : View route information for current route.
My destinations (destination mem-
ory)
The stored destinations can be selected from
the My destinations menu.
●
Press the My destinations. function button in
the main Navigation menu.
●
Select the desired function button.
St
or
e position
, R
outes
, Destinations ,
L
ast destinations
or Home addr
ess
.
St
or
e position
●
By pr
essing the Store position
function but-
t
on, the v
ehicl
e's current position is stored as
a Flagged destination in the destination
memory.
●
Mark the Flagged destination in the
destination memory.
●
Press the Store
function button.
The name can be changed in the f
oll
o
wing
input window. Press the
function button to
st
or
e the destination.
R
outes
In the Route mode, you can define various
destinations (final destination and stopovers).
The starting point of a route is always the
current vehicle position determined by the In-
fotainment system. The destination is the
end point of a route. Stopover destinations
are driven to before the destination.
●
In the Navigation main menu, press the
My Destinations.
function button.
●
Press the R
out
es function button. The
r
out
es st
ored previously will appear.
If you have not stored any routes or want to
create a new route, press the New route
func-
tion butt
on and then f
oll
ow the instructions as
for a new destination, before pressing Store
.
Pr
essing on a st
or
ed route brings up the fol-
lowing function buttons:
Function button: function
Delete : To delete a stored route.
Edit : To edit and store a route.
Start : To start route guidance.
Function buttons and indications in the New
route or Edit route menu
Function button or message: function or meaning
Stopover.
182
Operating modes
Destination.
...
Estimated time of arrival at destina-
tion.
...
Calculated distance to destination.
...
Travelling time.
...
Distance to the next stopover.
Press on the destination to display the function
butt
ons.
Delet
e destination.
To start guidance direct to the selec-
ted destination. Destinations that
come befor
e the selected destination
are ignored.
To open the detailed view of the desti-
nation in question.
Available function buttons.
New dest. To add a new destination to the tour.
Destina-
tions
To add a new destination from My
destinations to the tour.
Storing To store the created tour in the tour
memory.
Start To start route guidance.
Calculate To update calculated distance and es-
timated arrival time.
a)
Stop To stop route guidance to the active
destination.
b)
To move a stopover or a destination to
another position on the list. Press and
drag t
o move the destination.
a)
This function button is only displayed with route
guidance activated and when a destination has been
added t
o the tour.
b)
This function button is only displayed with route
guidance activated.
Last destinations
View of destinations for which a route has al-
ready been started.
My destinations
●
Press the Options function button and se-
lect the desired function butt
on.
Function button: function
Destination memory : View of destinations stored man-
ually and from imported vCards
›››
page 187, Im-
porting vCards (electronic business cards).
Favourites : View of destinations stored as favourites.
Contacts : View of entries in the phonebook that have
a stored addr
ess (postal address).
Home address
Only one addr
ess or position can be st
or
ed
as the home address at any one time. The
stored home address can be edited or over-
written.
If a home address has already been stored,
route guidance will be started to the stored
home address.
If a home address has not yet been stored, an
address can be assigned as the home ad-
dress.
Assigning the home address for the first time:
Position : Press to store the vehicle's current posi-
tion as the home address.
Address : Press to enter the home address manual-
ly.
Editing the home address:
The home address can be edited in the Naviga-
tion settings > Manage memory menu.
183
Infotainment System
Points of interest (POI)
Fig. 200
Points of interest on the map.
The points of interest saved in the navigation
dat
a memory ar
e divided int
o different point
of interest categories. Each point of interest
category is assigned a symbol for display on
the map.
If a database of points of interest has been
imported into the Infotainment system,
›››
page 187, Importing Personal POI the
category Personal POI
is also shown.
In the Map settings menu, the cat
egories of
points of int
er
est to display on the map can
be configured. Up to 10 categories of points
of interest can be selected.
Selecting a point of interest on the map
Function button: function
1
There are several points of interest in the area.
Press this symbol to open a list of points of in-
t
erest.
2
The only point of interest in this zone. Press the
symbol to open the detailed view of the point of
interest.
Quick POI search
In the Navigation main menu, press the POI
function button and the three main catego-
ries will appear
. Alt
ernativ
ely, enter the name
of the point of interest to be searched using
the new destination keypad, or press
Search nearby
on the map
›
›
›
table on
page 185.
View
In the Navigation main menu, pr
ess the Vie
w
function button.
Function button: function
2D
Map display in two dimensions (con-
ventional).
Function button: function
3D
Map display in three dimensions (bird's
eye view).
Buildings ar
e also displayed in three
dimensions. The places of inter
est and
well-known buildings are shown in de-
tail and in colour.
a)
To display the destination on the map.
a)
To display the route on the map.
Auto /
Day / Night
To change between day and night for-
mat.
Split screen
Press to display the split screen
›››
page 185.
POI Display points of interest on the map.
a)
This function button is only displayed with route
guidance activ
at
ed.
184
Operating modes
Split screen
Fig. 201
Split screen displayed.
The split screen
›
›
›
Fig. 201
A
may display
any of the inf
ormation described bel
o
w:
●
Press on the name of the split screen to se-
lect a display option.
Function button: function
Audio : Indicates the selected audio source.
Compass : Displays a compass with the current trav-
elling direction and indicates the current position of
the vehicle (street name).
Manoeuvre : Displays a list of the next manoeuvres,
POIs or TMCs on the rout
e and pressing them brings
up additional information
Most frequent routes
a)
: Information on the user's most
fr
equent routes.
Function button: function
Position : current vehicle position in coordinates and
GPS status (sat
ellite reception).
a)
This function button is only shown when route guid-
ance is not active or when predictiv
e route guidance
is active.
Press the
function button to close the split
screen.
At any moment during navigation, pressing
inside the map will mak
e a pop-up menu ap-
pear with the following functions:
Function button: function
Street name or coordinates : shows the details of the
point selected on the map
.
Only when you press on an icon on the map:
POI
: name of the point of interest (when only one
appears on the map).
Group of POIs : more points of interest (when you
press on the map on various POIs gr
ouped to-
gether).
Favourite
: name of the favourite.
Home
: Home address.
Start route guidance : starts guidance directly.
Add stopover destination : only when you have an ac-
tive rout
e.
Search nearby
: enters in the search menu, but only
for the area ar
ound the point selected on the map.
Function button: function
Demo mode start (only when demo mode is active)
Map display
Fig. 202
Messages and function buttons on
the map displ
ay.
Function buttons and messages on the
map displ
ay.
T
o activ
ate function buttons and , press
function button .
Function button: function
To select automatic scaling. If the func-
tion is active, the symbol is displayed in
blue.
Current altitude indicator.
»
185
Infotainment System
Function button: function
View map scale. Turn the setup button or
move your fingers t
ogether/apart on the
touchscreen to change the scale of the
map.
It can mute or repeat the last announce-
ment, or can change the announcement
volume.
T
o change the orientation of the map
(north-facing or direction of tr
avel). This
function is only available in 2D mode.
To centre the vehicle position on the map.
To centre the destination on the map. This
function button is only displayed if either
Displ
ay destination on map or Display
route on the map is selected
›››
page 184.
Briefly zooms in on the map. After a few
seconds, it automatically returns to the
last selected scale.
Road signs: Depending on the vehicle's equip-
ment, the road signs stored in the navigation data are
displayed. Select Navigation > Settings >
Map > Show road signs.
Traffic reports and dynamic route
guidance t
o the destination (TRAF-
FIC)
Fig. 203
Traffic reports
The Infotainment system constantly receives
tr
affic r
eports (T
MC/TMCpro) in the back-
ground, provided a TMC traffic news station
can be received at the current location. The
station being listened to does not have to be
the traffic news station.
List of available traffic reports
●
Press the Infotainment button
›››
Fig. 172
12
and then press the TRAFFIC
function button.
Dynamic r
out
e guidance
In or
der for dynamic route guidance to func-
tion, Dynamic route must be activated in the
route options.
If during route guidance a traffic report is re-
ceived that affects the route being travelled,
an alternative route will be searched for if the
Infotainment system calculates that time can
be saved.
Traffic reports on map (selection)
Symbol: Meaning
: Slow tr
affic
: Traffic jam
: Accident
: Slippery road surface (ice or sno
w)
: Slippery road surface
: Danger
: R
oad works
: Str
ong wind
: Road closed to traffic
During route guidance, traffic congestion that
does not aff
ect the r
out
e calculated is dis-
played in grey.
186
Operating modes
Predictive navigation
Fig. 204
Predictive navigation
When you activate Predictive navigation, the
syst
em det
ects and st
ores in the background
routes that are frequently followed, without
them being active destination routes. This
function has no navigation announcements
unless the user requires them, getting them
by pressing the adjustment knob
›››
Fig. 172
7
.
●
On the main screen of the Navigation menu,
in the pop-up windo
w
, pr
ess the
Frequent routes
button. To display frequently
f
oll
o
wed routes press the Show on map
button
›
›
›
Fig. 204.
Importing vCards (electronic busi-
ness cards)
Importing vCards to the destination mem-
ory
●
Insert the data storage device with the stor-
ed vCards or connect it to the Inf
otainment
system
›››
page 172.
●
Press the SETTINGS
function button in the
main Navigation menu.
●
In the Navigation settings menu, press
the Import destinations
function button.
●
Select the data carrier with the vCards
sav
ed in the list.
●
Pr
ess Import all vCar
ds from this folder
.
●
Confirm the import notice with the OK
function button.
The sav
ed vCar
ds will no
w be in the destina-
tion memory
›››
page 182 and may be used
for navigation.
Note
Only one address per vCard can be impor-
ted. In the ev
ent any vCards have multiple
addresses, only the main address will be
imported.
Importing Personal POI
Importing the Personal POI to a points of
interest destination memory
●
Insert the dat
a storage device with the stor-
ed Personal POI or connect it to the Infotain-
ment system
›››
page 172.
●
Press the Infotainment button
and then
select Settings .
●
In the Settings menu, press the
Manage memory function button.
●
Press Updat
e my POIs and then press
Updat
e
and Ne
xt
to import the Personal
POIs.
●
Confirm the import notification with the OK
function button.
The st
or
ed P
ersonal POI are now in the points
of interest destination memory
›››
page 184
and can be used for navigation purposes.
The stored Personal POI can be deleted in
the Navigation Settings > Manage
Storage menu.
187
Infotainment System
Navigation with images
Fig. 205
Images main menu.
Selecting an image and starting route
guidance
Bear in mind the r
equir
ements and f
ormats of
the compatible images.
●
Insert the data storage device with the stor-
ed images or connect it to the Infotainment
system.
●
Press the Infotainment
button and
then sel
ect the
Images cont
ext.
●
Press the SOURCE
›
›
›
Fig. 205 function but-
ton and select the data storage device where
the images are stored.
●
Select the desired image.
●
If the image displayed was taken using GPS
localisation, the function button will appear.
Press to start guidance to a destination.
Route guidance in Demo mode
If demo mode is activated in the Navigation
Settings menu, an additional pop-up win-
dow opens when you start r
oute guidance.
●
Pressing the Demo mode
function button
starts a “virtual r
oute guidance” to the desti-
nation you have entered.
●
If you press the Normal
function button, a
“r
eal r
out
e guidance” starts.
Vehicle Menu
Introduction to using the Vehicle
menu
By pressing button
/ of the infotainment
syst
em you will access its main menu with the
f
oll
owing options:
●
VIEW
●
MINIPLAYER, in the top right corner (Radio
or Media function)
●
PREVIOUS-NEXT (to change screen)
●
SETTINGS
›››
page 24
With the function button View you can ac-
cess the following information:
Consumers
By pressing the Consumers button, informa-
tion on the status of the vehicle's main con-
sumption devices is obtained. It is shown via a
consumption indicator bar in l/h (gal/h)
1)
.
Driving data
The onboard computer is equipped with 3
memories that work automatically. In these
memories you can see the distance travelled,
average speed, time passed, average con-
sumption and autonomy of the vehicle.
Ecotrainer*
If the corresponding equipment is available,
the ECOTRAINER will provide information on
driving style. The information on driving style
is only evaluated and displayed when moving
forward.
1)
In the case of Gas (CNG) vehicles, the units are
in kg/h.
188
Operating modes
Vehicle status
Pr
ess the
Vehicle status butt
on to access
information on the Vehicle status mes-
sages and Start-Stop system. The Vehicle
status messages are displayed, in addition to
being specified on the corresponding button.
Telephone
General information
Fig. 206 Related video
The Telephone functions described below
can be used thr
ough the Inf
ot
ainment system
if there is a mobile telephone connected to it
via Bluetooth
®
›››
page 191.
In order for the mobile telephone to be able
to connect to the Infotainment system the tel-
ephone must be equipped with Bluetooth
®
.
If there is no mobile telephone connected to
the Infotainment system, the telephone man-
agement system will not be available.
The instructions shown on the screen for the
telephone menus will depend on the mobile
telephone used. There may be variations.
Only use compatible Bluetooth
®
devices. For
further information on compatible Bluetooth
®
products, ask your nearest SEAT dealer or
check on the internet.
Use the instruction manual of the mobile tele-
phone and of any accessories.
If you detect any operating issues between
your mobile telephone and the Infotainment
system, restart your mobile by switching it off
and on again.
WARNING
General, mandatory, legal and country-
specific instructions and laws for the use of
mobil
e phones inside the vehicle must al-
ways be considered.
WARNING
Speaking by telephone and using the mo-
bile tel
ephone management system whilst
driving can distract you from the road and
cause an accident.
●
Always drive carefully and responsibly.
●
Select volume settings that allow you to
easily hear signals from outside the vehicle
at all times (e.g. emergency services sirens
and horns).
●
In areas of little or no co
verage or, in
some cases, in a tunnel, garage or under-
pass, your call may be cut off and you may
not be able to make even emergency calls.
WARNING
If a mobile telephone is not secured or is in-
corr
ectly secured in the v
ehicle, it could
move around the passenger compartment
in the event of a sudden driving manoeuvre
or emergency stop, resulting in injury.
●
While the vehicle is in motion, always se-
cure the mobile telephone properly outside
the airbag deployment zone.
WARNING
Mobile telephones may interfere with and
alter the correct oper
ation of pacemakers
if they are carried directly over them.
●
Maintain a minimum distance of at least
20 centimetres between the aerials of the
mobile telephone and the pacemaker.
●
Do not carry your switched-on mobile
telephone in your breast pocket directly
over the pacemaker.
●
If you suspect interference, switch off the
mobile telephone immediately.
CAUTION
High speeds, poor weather or road condi-
tions and the quality of reception can all
»
189
Infotainment System
affect the audio quality of a telephone con-
versation in the vehicl
e.
Note
●
R
estrictions on the use of devices using
Bluet
ooth
®
technology may apply in some
countries. For further information, contact
the local authorities.
●
If you wish to connect a device to the tel-
ephone management system via Blue-
tooth
®
technology, consult the safety
warnings in its instruction manual. Only use
compatible Bluetooth
®
devices.
Places with special regulations
Switch off the mobile telephone and the mo-
bil
e
’
s Bluetooth
®
function in places with a risk
of explosion. In the majority of cases, these
places are signposted, but not always clearly
›››
in General information on page 189.
They include
, f
or e
xample:
●
the vicinity of chemical pipelines and tanks
●
The lower decks of boats and ferries.
●
In the proximity of vehicles that run on liquid
gas (such as propane or butane).
●
places where the air is laden with chemi-
cals or particles such as flour, dust or metal
powder.
●
all other places where the vehicle engine
must be switched off.
WARNING
Switch off the mobile phone in areas with a
risk of explosion! The mobil
e telephone can
automatically connect to the mobile tele-
phone network again if it loses the Blue-
tooth
®
connection to the telephone man-
agement system.
CAUTION
In areas where special regulations apply or
the use of mobile tel
ephones is prohibited,
both the telephone and the telephone
management system must be switched off.
The radiation produced by the mobile tele-
phone when switched on may interfere with
sensitive technical and medical equipment,
possibly resulting in a malfunction or dam-
age to the equipment.
Bluetooth
®
Bluetooth
®
t
echnol
ogy all
ows a mobile tele-
phone to be connected to your vehicle's tele-
phone management system. In order to use
the telephone management system with a
mobile telephone with Bluetooth
®
technolo-
gy, it is first necessary to pair them.
Some Bluetooth
®
mobile telephones detect
and automatically connect when turning on
the ignition if a connection has been previ-
ously established. For this to take place the
telephone must be switched on and its Blue-
tooth
®
function activated, and there must be
no active Bluetooth
®
connection with other
devices.
Bluetooth
®
connections are free.
Bluetooth
®
is a registered trademark of Blue-
tooth
®
SIG, Inc.
Bluetooth profiles
®
When a mobile phone is connected to the tel-
ephone management system, a data ex-
change takes place via one of the Bluetooth
®
profiles.
●
Hands-Free Profile (HFP): When connect-
ing a mobile telephone to the phone manag-
er through the HFP the calls can be managed
via the Infotainment system.
●
Audio profile (A2DP): This profile makes it
easier to transmit audio to the infotainment
system with stereo quality. This function may
require connecting additional profiles for
managing and controlling audio playback.
●
Phone book access profile (PBAP):
Serves to download phone book contacts
from the mobile telephone to the Infotainment
system.
190
Operating modes
●
Message pr
ofil
e (MAP):
1)
Serv
es the
download and synchronise short messages
(SMS) of the mobile telephone to the Infotain-
ment system.
Note
To prevent them from being heard through
the speakers, the button and mobil
e tele-
phone alert tones must be disconnected.
Where necessary, disconnect the headset
from the mobile telephone you wish to con-
nect to the system.
Pairing and connecting a mobile
t
el
ephone t
o the Infotainment sys-
tem
In order to manage a mobile telephone via
the Inf
ot
ainment syst
em, it is necessary to
pair both devices once.
For your safety, we recommend you make the
link when the vehicle is stationary. In some
countries it is not possible to perform the pair-
ing with the vehicle running.
Conditions
You must guarantee the following setup in the
mobile phone and the Infotainment system:
●
The ignition must be switched on.
●
The Bluetooth
®
function of the mobile tel-
ephone and the Infotainment system must be
active as well as visibility.
●
The keypad lock on the mobile telephone
must be deactivated.
Follow instructions in the manual for the mo-
bile telephone.
During the pairing process, it is necessary to
enter data via the mobile telephone's keypad.
Pairing a mobile telephone
●
Make sure the mobile device's Bluetooth
®
function is activated and visible.
●
Press the infotainment
button.
●
Press the Find t
el
ephone function button and
then R
esults
.
OR:
●
Press the infotainment
button.
●
Press the SETTINGS
function button.
●
Press the Sel
ect mobil
e phone function but-
t
on and then R
esults
.
OR:
●
Press the infotainment
button.
●
Press the SETTINGS function button.
●
Pr
ess the Bluet
ooth function button.
●
Press the Find de
vices
function button and
then R
esults
.
The name of the Bluet
ooth
®
function of your
Inf
ot
ainment system will be displayed on the
main Telephone screen and you can edit this
name via the Bluetooth settings
menu
The sear
ch pr
ocess can t
ake up to 1 minute.
On the screen, the system will dynamically
update the names of the Bluetooth
®
devices
found.
As soon as the search is completed, the
names of the Bluetooth
®
devices found are
displayed on-screen.
●
Select the Bluetooth
®
device you want to
connect on the infotainment system. In cer-
tain circumstances, it is possible that to finish
the connection between the two devices, you
must enter additional data in the mobile tele-
phone and Infotainment system.
●
Use your mobile telephone to enter and
confirm your PIN code, as indicated in the dis-
play of the infotainment system.
●
If more Bluetooth
®
profile pairing requests
are received on the mobile telephone, make
sure to reply to them.
»
1)
Not available for the Media System Touch/Col-
our model.
191
Infotainment System
OR:
●
Compare the PIN code shown on the dis-
pl
ay of the Inf
ot
ainment system with that
shown on the mobile telephone. If they
match, confirm on both devices.
When the pairing has been finalized correct-
ly, the Telephone main menu will appear. The
phone book, call list and SMS messages stor-
ed in the mobile phone will be loaded once
the requests have been accepted in the mo-
bile phone. The duration of the loading proc-
ess depends on the amount of data stored on
the mobile telephone. After downloading, the
data will be available on the Infotainment
system.
Pairing and connection of mobile tele-
phones
You can pair up to 20 mobile telephones to
the Infotainment system, but the number of si-
multaneous connections varies:
●
Media System Touch / Colour: a phone
connected to the hands-free profile and the
same or a different device connected to the
Bluetooth
®
audio profile.
●
Media System Plus / Navi System: two mo-
bile phones simultaneously connected to the
hands-free profile and one of them is also
connected Bluetooth
®
audio profile.
When the Infotainment system is switched on,
it automatically connects to the last connec-
ted mobile telephone. If it is not possible to
connect to this mobile telephone, the tele-
phone management system will try to auto-
matically connect to the next mobile tele-
phone on the list of paired devices.
The maximum range of the Bluetooth
®
con-
nection is approx. 10 meters. The active
Bluetooth
®
connection disconnects if this dis-
tance is exceeded. The connection is auto-
matically re-established as soon as the de-
vice is once again within Bluetooth
®
range.
WARNING
Do not perform the pairing and connection
process while driving. This may cause an
accident
!
Note
●
It may be necessary to confirm the phone
book data and SMS tr
ansfer request on the
mobile telephone.
●
Check that there are no requests pend-
ing acceptance in your mobile phone. If
there are, this could block some of the
functions in the Telephone menu.
Telephone main menu
Fig. 207
Phone main menu.
Assign a user profile
The dat
a fr
om the phonebook
, the call lists
and the stored speed dial buttons are as-
signed to a user profile and remain stored on
the telephone management system. This in-
formation will be available every time the mo-
bile telephone is connected to the telephone
management system.
After the first connection, it will take a few mi-
nutes for the data from the phonebook of the
linked mobile phone to be available in the In-
fotainment system. The next time that the
mobile telephone is connected (e.g. on the
next journey) the phonebook is updated au-
tomatically.
If any entries in the mobile phonebook have
been modified while connected, a manual
update of the phonebook data can be
192
Operating modes
initiated from the User profile settings
menu.
T
el
ephone management can st
ore a maxi-
mum of 4 user profiles for mobile telephones.
If you wish to link/connect another mobile
phone, the oldest user profile will automati-
cally be replaced.
Telephone management system function
buttons
●
Press the infotainment button
to open
the Phone main menu.
Function button: function
1
Name of connected mobile telephone.
Press the icon to the l
eft to connect or
pair with another mobile telephone.
2
Speed dial buttons, to which telephone
numbers from the phonebook may be
assigned respectively.
3
To change to another telephone con-
nected to the hands-fr
ee profile. This
button will only be visible when there
are two telephones connected as
hands-free. The active user profile cor-
responds to the telephone appearing
on the screen.
DIAL
NUMBER
To open the number pad and enter a
telephone number
›
››
page 194.
CONTACTS
To open the phonebook of the connec-
ted mobile telephone.
Function button: function
SMS
a)
To open the menu for SMS messages.
CALLS
To open call lists of the connected mo-
bile telephone
›››
page 194.
SETTINGS
To open the Telephone settings
menu.
a)
Not available for the Media System Touch/Colour
model.
Display and symbols of the tele-
phone management syst
em
Fig. 208
Active call.
Display: Meaning
›››
Fig. 208
A
Name of the mobile network operator (pro-
vider) to which the mobile t
elephone is con-
nected.
Display: Meaning
›››
Fig. 208
B
View of stored telephone number or name. If
the name stored in the phonebook has an
assigned phot
o, it can be displayed: select
Telephone > Settings > User
profile > Show pictures for
contacts*.
Press to accept a call.
Press t
o end a call
.
OR: Press t
o reject an incoming call.
Press t
o mute or to reactivate the ring tone
during an incoming call.
Press t
o mute the microphone during an ac-
tive call and to reactivate it.
This button keeps the call active. While the
call is on hold the listener will not hear the
conversation. To reactivate it, press the call
accept button . To reject it, press the reject
button .
Press to add a participant to the active call.
Charge status of a mobile telephone con-
nected via “Hands-free pr
ofile” (HFP) Blue-
tooth
®
.
Strength of coverage signal received by the
mobile tel
ephone.
193
Infotainment System
Enter telephone number menu
Fig. 209
Enter telephone number menu.
Open the Enter telephone number menu
Pr
ess the DIAL NUMBER
function button from
the PHONE main menu.
Possible functions
Enter telephone
number
Entering a phone number with
the keypad.
Press the function button to
make a call.
Select a con-
tact from the
list
Ent
er the first letters of the con-
tact to find using the k
eypad.
The available entries appear in
the phonebook.
Select the desired contact from
the phonebook to make the call
.
Possible functions
Enter the coun-
try code
To enter a country code, instead
of the first two digits (interna-
tional access code e
.g. “00”)
you can enter the character “+”.
Press the function button 0
for
approx. 2 seconds to add the +.
Breakdown
service call
Press the function button to ob-
tain help in the ev
ent of break-
down. For this the network of
SEAT dealerships is available to
you with their Mobility Service.
Information call
Press the function button to ob-
tain information on the SEAT
br
and and the additional serv-
ices contracted related to traffic
and travel.
Call mailbox
Press the Voice mail
function
button to mak
e the call.
OR: Press the
function button
for about 2 seconds to mak
e a
call.
If the number for the mailbox has
not yet been stored, enter it and
confirm with OK
.
Note
●
Breakdo
wn service and information calls
can incur an additional cost on your tele-
phone bill.
●
The Roadside Assistance and Information
services might not work properly, for exam-
ple, if the vehicle and the operator of the
connected mobile t
elephone are in differ-
ent countries. If you are not able to use
these services contact an authorised SEAT
workshop.
Call Menu (call lists)
Possible displays in the Calls menu
Display: Meaning
Missed calls : Displays the numbers of missed
and unanswer
ed calls.
Dialled numbers
: Indicates the numbers dialled
on the mobile tel
ephone and on the Infotain-
ment system telephone management system.
Received calls
: Indicates the numbers of the
calls received on the mobile telephone and on
the Infotainment system telephone manage-
ment system.
Note
The availability of the call lists will depend
on the mobile phone used.
194
Operating modes
Multimedia
USB/AUX-INP
or
t
Fig. 210 Centre console: USB/AUX-IN input.
Depending on the special characteristics and
the country, the v
ehicl
e may hav
e a
USB/AUX-IN port.
The USB/AUX-IN input is located above the
storage compartment in the front centre con-
sole
›››
Fig. 210.
The operating description is located in
›››
page 172.
195
Driving
Driving
St
ar
t and driving
St
arting and stopping the
engine
Introduction
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 20
WARNING
●
When moving with the engine swit
ched
off, the ignition key must always remain in
position
2
›››
Fig. 211
›››
page 197 (ignition
on). The control lamps will light up in this
position. Otherwise, the steering lock could
engage suddenly. Risk of accident!
●
Do not remove the key from the ignition
until the vehicle has come to a standstill
and is secure (e.g. the handbrake is engag-
ed). Otherwise, the steering lock could sud-
denly engage. Risk of accident!
●
Always take the ignition key with you
when you leave the vehicle. This is particu-
larly important if you leave children in the
vehicle. Children could, for example, start
the engine with the subsequent risk of acci-
dent.
●
Never l
eave the engine running in unven-
tilated or closed rooms. The exhaust gases
contain carbon monoxide, an odourless
and colourless poisonous gas. Risk of fatal
accidents! Carbon monoxide can cause
people to lose consciousness and can
cause death.
●
Never leave the vehicle unattended if the
engine is running.
●
Never switch the engine off until the vehi-
cle has come to a complete stop. Risk of
accident!
CAUTION
●
The start
er motor may only be used (key
position
3
›››
Fig. 211
›››
page 197 in the ig-
nition) if the engine is off. Using the starter
motor when the engine is running could
damage it.
●
Immediately release the ignition key
when the engine starts, otherwise damage
could be caused to the starter motor.
●
When the engine is cold, you should
avoid high engine speeds, driving at full
throttle and over-loading the engine before
it reaches operating temperature. Risk of
engine damage!
●
Do not tow-start the engine. Risk of en-
gine damage! In vehicles with a catalytic
converter, fuel that has not been burned
could reach the catalytic converter and
catch fire in it. This would lead to a fault in
the catalytic converter. You may use the
battery from another vehicle to help you
start your engine
›
››
page 54.
●
After prolonged and demanding opera-
tion of the engine, when the journey has
ended, do not stop the engine immediately.
Let the engine run at idle for about one
more minute. This will stop the engine from
overheating.
For the sake of the environment
Do not warm up the engine when the vehi-
cl
e is stationary. If possibl
e, move off im-
mediately after starting the engine. This
will help the engine reach operating tem-
perature more quickly, reducing the quanti-
ty of emissions.
Note
●
The engine can only be start
ed with the
original SEAT key.
●
Loud running noises may be heard briefly
after cold-starting the engine. This is nor-
mal and is no cause for concern.
●
After the engine has been stopped and
the ignition switched off, the radiator fan
may continue running for around 10 mi-
nutes.
●
If the engine still does not start after a
second attempt, the fuel pump fuse might
have blown. Check it and replace if neces-
sary
›››
page 83 or contact your Special-
ised Service.
196
Start and driving
●
You should al
ways engage the steering
lock when you exit the vehicle. This will hin-
der any attempts at theft.
Ignition lock
Fig. 211 Ignition key positions.
Petrol engines
1
– Ignition switched off, engine stopped,
st
eering can be l
ock
ed
2
– Ignition switched on
3
– Starting
Diesel engines
1
– Fuel supply stopped, ignition switched
off
, engine st
opped, st
eering can be locked
2
– Engine pre-heating, ignition switched on
3
– Starting
T
o engage the
St
eering lock without the key
in the ignition, turn the steering wheel slightly
until you hear it engage.
In vehicles with automatic gearbox, the igni-
tion key can only be removed when the se-
lector lever is in position P
1)
.
If the steering lock is engaged and it is diffi-
cult or impossible to turn the key to position
2
, release the lock by turning the steering
wheel slightly in both dir
ections.
St
ar
t-up lock security system
(electronic immobiliser)
There is an electronic chip in the key. The
el
ectr
onic immobiliser is deactiv
ated when
the key is inserted into the ignition. The elec-
tronic immobiliser is automatically activated
when the key is removed from the ignition.
The engine will not start if an unauthorised
key is used.
The informative display indicates:
Immobiliser active!
Starter button
Fig. 212
In the steering column: start-up push
butt
on f
or the K
eyless Access lock and start-up
system. The layout in right-hand drive vehicles
is symmetrical.
Fig. 213
Emergency ignition in vehicles with
K
eyl
ess Access.
»
1)
Depending upon country.
197
Driving
The start-up button may only be used if there
is a v
alid k
ey in the v
ehicle.
Opening the driver's door when exiting the
vehicle activates the electronic lock on the
steering column if the ignition is disabled.
Switching the ignition on/off
●
Briefly push the start-up button
›››
Fig. 212
without touching the brake or clutch ped-
al
›››
.
Emer
gency st
ar
ting function
If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle,
an emergency start-up will be required. The
relevant message will appear in the dash
panel display. This may happen when, for ex-
ample, the vehicle key battery is very low or
flat:
●
Immediately after pushing the start-up but-
ton, keep the vehicle key next to the steering
column
›››
Fig. 213.
●
The ignition connects and the engine starts
automatically.
Emergency disconnection
If the engine does not stop after briefly press-
ing the start-up button, an emergency dis-
connect will be required:
●
Press the starter button twice within 1 sec-
ond or press it once for more than 2 seconds
›››
.
●
The engine t
urns off aut
omatically.
Engine r
estart feature
If no valid key is detected inside the vehicle
after the engine stops, you will only have 5
seconds to restart it. A warning will display on
the dash panel screen.
After this interval, it will not be possible to
start the engine without a valid key inside the
vehicle.
WARNING
Any accidental movement of the vehicle
could result in serious injury.
●
When pr
essing the start-up button, do
not press the brake or clutch pedal, this
way the engine will start immediately.
WARNING
If vehicle keys are used negligently or with-
out due care, this may cause accidents and
serious injury.
●
Ne
ver leave any key inside the vehicle
when exiting. Otherwise, a child or unau-
thorised person could lock the vehicle,
start the engine or connect the ignition
and, in this way, operate electronic equip-
ment (e.g. the windows).
Note
●
In diesel vehicles with the K
eyless Access
system, there may be a delay in the engine
starting if it requires preheating.
●
If the vehicle is stationary for a long time
with the ignition on, the vehicle battery
might be discharged and it might not be
possible to start the engine.
Starting the engine
Vehicles with a diesel engine ar
e equipped
with a gl
o
w plug system. When you switch on
the ignition, the glow plug warning lamp
will light up. The engine can be started
straight away when the lamp switches off.
Do not connect electrical appliances dur-
ing preheating so as not the drain the vehi-
cle battery unnecessarily.
Starting the engine
●
Move the gearbox lever into neutral or
move the selector lever to position P or N and
pull firmly on the handbrake.
●
Press the clutch pedal all the way down
and start the engine
3
›
›
›
Fig. 211
›››
page 197, without pressing the accelera-
tor. Keep the clutch pedal pressed down until
the engine starts.
●
Release the ignition key as soon as the en-
gine starts. The key returns to position
2
.
198
Start and driving
●
If the engine does not st
art aft
er 10 sec-
onds, t
urn the key back to position
1
. Repeat
the action aft
er 30 seconds.
●
R
el
ease the handbrake before moving off.
Switching off the engine with the
key
Stop the engine by turning the ignition key to
position
1
›››
Fig. 211
›››
page 197.
Brakes and brake servo sys-
tems
Introduction
WARNING
●
The brake serv
o only works when the en-
gine is running. Braking when the engine is
switched off requires applying more
strength to the brake pedal. Risk of acci-
dent!
●
Press down on the clutch pedal when
stopping and braking with a manual gear-
box, petrol engine vehicle at low speed.
Otherwise, the brake servo might not work
properly. Risk of accident!
●
In the event of damage to the standard
front spoiler or where a different front
spoiler, wheel trims, etc. are subsequently
fitted, make sur
e the air vent to the brakes
on the front wheels is not blocked. Other-
wise, braking operations may be impaired.
Risk of accident!
●
Always fully release the handbrake. If it is
only partially released, this will cause
overheating of the rear brakes, which can
impair the function of the brake system.
Risk of accident!
●
Never leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle. They could release the handbrake
or move the gear lever. The vehicle could
start moving. Risk of accident!
●
Insufficient fuel can cause the engine to
run irregularly or to switch off. Brake assist
systems could be impaired. Risk of acci-
dent!
●
Always adjust your driving style to suit
visibility, the weather and road and traffic
conditions. The best vehicle safety offered
by brake assist systems must never encour-
age you to run greater risks. Risk of acci-
dent!
CAUTION
●
Observe the information concerning ne
w
brake pads
›››
page 210.
●
Where braking is not necessary, do not
wear down the brake pads by pressing
down gently on the brake pedal. This cau-
ses the brakes to overheat, increasing their
wear and increasing braking distances.
●
To ensure the br
ake assist systems work
properly, all wheels must be fitted with
tyres approved by the manufacturer.
Note
●
If you br
ake suddenly and the br
ake sys-
tem control unit regards the situation as
hazardous for the drivers behind you, the
brake lights will begin to flash automatical-
ly. After reducing speed to approximately
10 km/h (6 mph) or stopping the vehicle,
the brake lights will stop flashing and the
hazard warning lights will switch on. The
hazard warning lights are automatically
switched off when you accelerate or re-
start the vehicle.
●
On long, steep gradients, reduce your
speed and change to a lower gear (manual
gearbox) or move the selector lever to a
lower gear position (automatic gearbox).
This uses the force of the engine and the
brakes do not suffer as much. If you still
have to brake, do so intermittently, press-
ing down repeatedly on the brake pedal.
●
Vehicle modifications (e.g. to the engine,
brakes, frame or a combination of wheels
and tyres) could impair the brake assist
systems
›››
page 240, Accessories and
modifications to the vehicle.
●
In the event of a fault in the ABS system,
the ESC, TCS and EDL are switched off au-
tomatically. A fault in the ABS is indicated
by the
›››
page 202 warning lamp.
199
Driving
Control lamps
It lights up red
Brake fluid level too low
›››
page 250 or fault in the
brake system.
Do not carry on driving! Stop the vehicle, switch
off the engine and check the level of the brake fluid
›››
page 250.
The information display shows: Brake fluid In-
struction Manual!
It lights up red
Parking brake engaged
›››
page 200.
The warning lamp turns off when the handbrake is re-
leased.
It lights up yellow
Front brake pads worn.
WARNING
●
The follo
wing indications must be taken
into account when opening the engine
compartment to check the brake fluid
›››
page 244, Engine compartment.
●
If the warning lamp illuminates togeth-
er with the warning lamp
›››
page 202,
, stop the vehicle! Go to a technical serv-
ice.
●
A fault in the brake system or in the Anti-
lock brake system (ABS) can lead to longer
braking distances – Risk of accident!
Brakes
Wear
The rate of w
ear of the brake pads depends
on the driving style and on the way in which
the vehicle is used. The brake pads will wear
more quickly if you use your vehicle frequent-
ly in urban traffic and short trips or drive in a
sporty style. Under these demanding condi-
tions, visit your specialised service, even be-
fore the scheduled service date, so that the
thickness of the brake pads can be meas-
ured.
Wet roads or road salt
If brakes are wet or frozen, or if you are driving
on roads which have been gritted with salt,
braking power may set in later than normal.
Dry the brakes as soon as possible by braking
repeatedly.
Corrosion
Long periods of inactivity and little use can
lead to rust on the brake discs and dirt on the
brake pads. Where the brake system is sub-
jected to light stress or in the case of corro-
sion, clean the brake discs by braking fully
several times at a high speed.
Brake system fault
If you notice that the braking distance sud-
denly increases and the brake pedal can be
pressed down more fully, there may be a
fault in the brak
e system. Visit a specialised
service immediately and adjust your driving
style to the extent of the damage and to limit
the effect of the brakes.
Low brake fluid level
Insufficient brake fluid could cause faults in
the brake system. The brake fluid level is con-
trolled electronically
›››
page 200.
Brake servo
The brake servo supplements the pressure
you exert on the brake pedal. The brake servo
only works when the engine is running.
Handbrake
Fig. 214
Centre console: handbrake.
Applying the handbrake
–
Pull the handbrake lever up all the way.
200
Start and driving
Releasing the handbrake
–
Pull the handbrake lever up slightly and
pr
ess the unl
ock butt
on at the same time
›››
Fig. 214.
–
Keep the button pressed down and push
the lever all the way down.
Control lamp
The warning lamp lights up when the hand-
brake is applied with the ignition on .
Additionally, driving the vehicle at speeds ex-
ceeding 6 km/h (4 mph) for at least 3 sec-
onds produces an audible warning.
The informative display indicates:
Release the handbrake!
Braking and stability sys-
tems
Control lamps
It lights up
Fault in the ESC or disconnection caused by the sys-
tem.
As the ESC operat
es in conjunction with the ABS, the
ESC light will also come on if a fault should occur in
the ABS.
Flashes
ESC or ASR activated.
It lights up
ASR manually deactivated.
It lights up
ABS faulty or does not work.
The control lamps light up together when the
ignition is switched on and shoul
d turn off af-
ter approximately 2 seconds. This is the time
taken for the function check.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
The ESC system increases control of the ve-
hicl
e in emer
gency sit
uations, e.g. during a
sudden change in direction. Depending on
the driving conditions, it reduces the risk of
skidding and increases driving stability.
The system uses the steering wheel angle
and road speed to calculate the changes of
direction desired by the driver, and constant-
ly compares them with the actual behaviour
of the vehicle. When irregularities occur, for
example, if the vehicle begins to skid, the ESC
brakes the appropriate wheel automatically.
The warning lamp on the general instru-
ment panel starts flashing when the system is
working.
The stability (ESC) system includes the fol-
lowing systems:
●
Anti-lock brake system (ABS),
●
Traction control system (TCS),
●
Electronic differential lock (EDL),
●
Hydraulic brake assist system (HBA),
●
Hill hold control (HHC).
The ASR should be switched on at all times.
Only under certain circumstances should the
system be switched off, e.g.
●
driving with chains,
●
driving in deep snow or on very soft surfa-
ces,
●
During the “swinging movement” required
to remove a stuck vehicle
Switch the ASR back on as soon as possible.
Brake assist system (HBA)*
The HBA system is activated when you press
down on the brake pedal suddenly. It increa-
ses braking power, helping to reduce braking
distances. To reduce braking distance as
much as possible, keep the brake pedal
pressed down firmly until the vehicle comes
to a standstill.
»
201
Driving
With the help of this system, the ABS is activa-
t
ed mor
e quickly and mor
e efficiently.
The brake assist function is deactivated auto-
matically when the brake pedal is released.
Hill hold control (HHC)*
The HHC system makes it easier to start the
vehicle on hills. The system maintains the
brake pressure created by pressing down on
the brake pedal for 2 seconds after it has
been released. Your foot can be removed
from the brake pedal and you can use the
accelerator pedal and move away on a hill
without having to use the handbrake. The
brake pressure drops as the accelerator ped-
al is pressed. If the vehicle cannot be started,
it will start to move backwards after 2 sec-
onds.
The HHC is activated on gradients of over 5%,
if the driver door is closed. It only works for
starting on hills, moving both forward and in
reverse. It is not activated during start-up
down hill.
Control lamp
If the control lamp flashes, the ESC is
working.
If the warning lamp illuminates on ignition,
the ESC system may have switched off due to
technical reasons. Turn off the ignition and
turn it on again. Upon switching on the igni-
tion again, if the warning lamp has switched
off, this means the ESC is functioning correct-
ly again.
If the warning lamp is illuminated there is a
fault in the ESC.
The informative display indicates:
Fault: electronic stability con-
trol (ESC)
or
Fault: traction control system
(ASR)
Go to a technical service.
Note
If the battery is disconnected and connec-
ted again, the yello
w warning lamp
lights up when the ignition is switched on.
This warning lamp must switch off after
covering a short distance.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
The ABS system prevents the wheels locking
during br
aking. This helps the driv
er k
eep
control of the vehicle.
The driver is made aware of ABS assistance
by the pulsating of the brake pedal and a
characteristic noise.
Keep the brake pedal pressed down while the
ABS is working. The ABS will switch off when
the brake pedal is released. Never brake in-
termittently while the ABS is working!
Control lamp
If the warning lamp is illuminated, there is a
fault in the ABS.
The informative display indicates:
ABS fault
The brake system alone is operational in the
vehicle, without ABS.
Go to a technical service.
WARNING
●
If the warning lamp illuminat
es togeth-
er with the
›››
page 200 warning lamp,
, stop the vehicle! Go to a technical serv-
ice.
●
A fault in the Anti-lock brake system
(ABS) can lead to longer braking distances
– Risk of accident!
Anti-slip regulation of the driving
wheel
s (ASR)*
If the wheels start to slip, the TCS adapts the
engine speed t
o the driving conditions. P
ar
-
ticularly in unfavourable conditions, the TCS
helps starting, accelerating and hill starts.
202
Start and driving
If the control lamp fl
ashes, the ASR is w
ork
-
ing.
If the warning lamp illuminates on ignition,
the TCS system may have switched off due to
technical reasons. Turn off the ignition and
turn it on again. Upon switching on the igni-
tion again, if the warning lamp has switched
off, this means the TCS is functioning correct-
ly again.
If the warning lamp remains illuminated,
there is a fault in the TCS.
The informative display indicates:
Fault: traction control system
(ASR)
Go to a technical service.
Electronic differential lock
If one of the wheels starts to skid, the EDL
br
ak
es that wheel, tr
ansmitting the driving
force to the other wheels. This increases vehi-
cle stability and improves driving stability.
To prevent the disc brake of the braking
wheel from overheating, the EDL cuts out au-
tomatically if subjected to excessive loads.
The vehicle will continue to function normally
without EDL. The EDL will switch on again au-
tomatically when the brake has cooled down.
Manual gearbox
Changing gears
Fig. 215
Gear shift diagram of a 5- or 6-speed
manual gearbo
x
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 36
When changing gear, always depress the
clutch pedal fully and keep it pressed down
to avoid excessive clutch wear.
In order to drive at an optimum RPM, follow
the gear change indications
›››
page 208.
Engage reverse gear only when the vehicle is
stopped. On engaging reverse gear while the
engine is running, first wait a moment with the
clutch pedal pressed down fully to limit gear
shift noise.
The reverse lights switch on when the reverse
gear is selected and the ignition is on.
WARNING
Never engage reverse gear when moving
forwar
d. Risk of accident!
Note
Do not rest your hand on the gear lever
while driving. The pressur
e of your hand
could lead to premature wear of the gear
system.
Automatic gearbox
Basic inf
ormation
The gearbox changes up and down automat-
ically. The gearbo
x can be set t
o
Tiptronic
mode. The gears can be changed manually
in this mode
›››
page 206.
The engine can be started only in position P
or N. If the selector lever is not in these posi-
tions when locking the steering, switching the
ignition on or off or starting the engine, the in-
formation display will show ¡Move the se-
lector lever to the P/N! position, or on
the general instrument panel
P/N.
At temperatures below -10°C (14°F), the en-
gine can only be started in position P.
If you park your vehicle in a flat surface, move
the selector lever to position P. On a slop, first
»
203
Driving
engage the handbrake firmly and the move
the sel
ect
or l
ever to the parking position. This
reduces the load on the lock mechanism
while making it easier to move the selector
lever from position P.
If, while the vehicle is moving, the selector lev-
er is accidentally moved to position N, re-
lease the accelerator and wait for the engine
to idle before moving it back into position.
WARNING
●
Never pr
ess the accelerator when select-
ing the automatic gearbox operating mode
when the vehicle is stationary. Risk of acci-
dent!
●
Never move the selector lever to posi-
tions R or P when driving. Risk of accident!
●
If the vehicle is to be stopped with a gear
selected and the engine idling (e.g. waiting
or moving slowly at traffic lights), press
down on the brake pedal because the
transmission is not entirely interrupted
when the engine is idling and the vehicle
will tend to start moving.
●
Apply the handbrake firmly and put the
selector lever in position P before opening
the bonnet and working on the vehicle with
the engine running. Risk of accident! Strict-
ly follow the safety instructions
›››
page 244, Engine compartment.
●
When stopping on a slope (hill), try not to
stop the vehicle from moving by pressing
the “accelerator” with a gear selected.
This could overheat the clutch. If the clutch
risks being burnt due to this for
ce, it would
switch off and the vehicle could move
backwards. Risk of accident!
●
If you have to stop on a hill, press down
on the brake pedal to stop the vehicle from
moving.
●
The drive wheels could lose traction on a
slippery road surface when the kick-down
function is activated. Risk of sliding!
CAUTION
●
In DSG aut
omatic gearbox
es, the double
clutch is protected from overloads. If the
hill hold control is used, the clutches are
subjected to greater force if the vehicle is
at a standstill on a slope or suddenly ac-
celerating on a slope.
●
Should the clutches overheat, the
symbol is shown on the informative display
with a warning message Gear overheated.
Stop! Instruction Manual! An audible
warning is also heard. Stop the vehicle in
this case, stop the engine and wait until the
symbol has switched off. Danger of dam-
age to the gearbox! You can continue driv-
ing once the symbol is switched off.
Control lamps
It lights up green
The brake pedal is not engaged.
To select a range of gears, press the brake pedal.
Flashes green
The interlock button on the selector lever is not
pressed.
Mov
ement of the vehicle is prevented. Engage the se-
lector lever lock.
Starting and driving
Starting
–
Press and hold the brake pedal.
–
Press and hold the interlock button on the
sel
ect
or l
ever knob and move the selector
lever to position
›››
page 205 before re-
leasing the interlock button.
–
Release the brake and press the accelera-
tor.
Stopping
–
The selector lever does not have to be
moved to position N if the vehicle is stopped
for a short period, e.g. at intersections. It is
enough to step on the brake pedal. Howev-
er, the engine must remain idling.
204
Start and driving
Parking
–
Press the brake pedal.
–
Apply the handbrake.
–
Press the interlock button, move the selec-
t
or l
e
ver to position P and release the but-
ton.
Kick-down feature
The kick-down feature allows maximum ac-
celeration to be reached.
In any gear programme, press down fully on
the accelerator for the automatic gearbox to
activate the kick-down feature. This function
takes priority over the gear programmes
without taking into account the position of the
selector lever (D, S or Tiptronic) and is used
to reach maximum acceleration, using full en-
gine power. Depending on the road speed
and engine speed, the automatic gearbox
shifts down and the vehicle accelerates. It
only shifts up after the maximum engine
speed has been reached.
Selector lever positions
Fig. 216
Gear selector lever
Fig. 217
Information display: selector lever po-
sitions.
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 36
The current position of the selector lever is
shown on the general instrument panel dis-
play
1
›
›
›
Fig. 217.
P – Parking position
In this position, the driven wheels are me-
chanically locked.
The parking position can only be selected
when the vehicle is stationary.
If you want to move the selector lever from
this position, press the interlock button on the
selector lever knob while pressing down on
the brake pedal.
If the battery is drained, the selector lever
cannot be moved from position P.
R – Reverse gear
Reverse gear must be engaged only when
the vehicle is stationary and the engine is
idling.
To move the selector lever to position R from
positions P or N, press the interlock button on
the selector lever knob and press down on
the brake pedal.
The reverse lights come on when the selector
lever is in position R and the ignition is on.
N – Neutral (idling)
Neutral (idling) is engaged in this position.
To move the selector lever from position N (if
the lever has remained in this position for
more than 2 seconds) to position D or R at
speeds of less than 5 km/h (3 mph) and when
»
205
Driving
the vehicle is stationary, press down on the
br
ak
e pedal.
D/S – P
ermanent drive (forward) position
The selector lever in the D/S position enables
the gears to be controlled in normal mode
(D) or Sport (S) mode. To select Sport mode
(S), move the selector lever backwards. Mov-
ing the lever again will select normal mode
(D). The selected driving mode is shown on
the instrument panel display.
In normal mode (D), the gearbox automati-
cally selects the best gear ratio. This de-
pends on the engine load, the road speed
and the dynamic gear control programme
(DCP).
Sport mode (S) must be selected for a sporty
driving style. This setting makes use of the en-
gine's maximum power output. When accel-
erating the gear shifts will be noticeable.
Press the brake pedal to move the selector
lever from N to D/S when the vehicle is sta-
tionary or at speeds below 3 km/h (2 mph)
›››
in Basic information on page 204.
Under cert
ain cir
cumst
ances (e.g. when driv-
ing in mountains) it can be advantageous to
switch temporarily to tiptronic mode
›››
page 206, in order to manually select
gear ratios to suit the driving conditions.
Tiptronic gearbox
Fig. 218
Selector lever: Tiptronic.
The Tiptronic gearbox allows the driver to
change gears manually using the sel
ect
or
l
ever.
Activating the manual gearbox
–
From position D, push the selector lever to
the right. The selected position of the selec-
tor lever is shown on the general instrument
panel display together with the gear en-
gaged
1
›
›
›
Fig. 217.
Shifting up
–
Push the selector lever gently forwards
+
›››
Fig. 2
18
.
Shifting do
wn
–
Push the selector lever gently backwards
-
›
›
›
Fig. 218.
The manual gearbox can be activated when
the vehicle is either moving or stationary.
When accelerating, the gearbox automati-
cally shifts up shortly before the maximum
engine speed is reached.
On shifting up, the gear is only engaged
when there is no risk of engine damage.
When the accelerator pedal is pressed down
to the kick-down zone, the gearbox will shift
down in line with the road speed and engine
speed.
Note
The kick-down function is also available in
manual shift mode.
Selector lever lock
Automatic selector lever lock
The sel
ect
or l
ever is locked in the positions P
and N when the ignition is on. Press the brake
pedal to unlock it. Remember, if the selector
lever is in positions P and N, the warning lamp
will light up on the general instrument pan-
el.
When the selector lever merely moves
through position N (e.g. when moved from R
to D), the lever lock is not applied. This makes
it possible, for example, to rock a stuck vehi-
cle backwards and forwards. The lock is only
206
Start and driving
applied if the brake is not pressed and the se-
l
ect
or l
ever is moved to position N for more
than 2 seconds.
The selector lever only locks when the is vehi-
cle stationary or driving at a speed lower
than 5 km/h (3 mph). At a higher speed, it au-
tomatically disconnects in the N position.
Interlock button
The interlock button on the selector lever
knob prevents the driver from inadvertently
engaging a gear. Press the button to unlock
the selector lever.
Safety interlock for ignition key
1)
After switching the ignition off, the ignition key
can be removed only when the selector lever
is in position P. If the key is not in the ignition,
the selector lever is locked in position P.
Driving programmes
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronical-
ly-contr
oll
ed aut
omatic gearbox. Shifting up
or down depends on the programme selec-
ted.
For a calm driving style, the gearbox uses
the most economic programme. The gearbox
shifts up as quickly as possible and shifts
down as late as possible, thus increasing driv-
ing economy.
With a sporty driving style, characterised by
sudden acceleration, heavy acceleration,
speeds that often increase and decrease and
maximum speed, the gearbox adapts to this
driving style when the accelerator is pressed
down fully (kick-down) by shifting down as
quickly as possible and can even shift down
by several gears at once.
Selecting the best driving programmes is an
endless job. Regardless of this, the driver can
also make the gearbox switch to a more dy-
namic gear shift programme by pressing the
accelerator quickly. This makes the automat-
ic gearbox shift down into a lower gear than
the one that would normally apply to the cur-
rent speed, allowing for more rapid accelera-
tion (e.g. to overtake another vehicle) without
having to press the accelerator until the kick-
down position. On shifting up in a corre-
sponding driving style, the gearbox returns to
the original programme.
When driving along mountain roads, the
gearbox adapts to the gradients. This avoids
having to frequently change gears when driv-
ing uphill. In Tiptronic mode, it is possible to
shift down manually when driving downhill to
use the braking effect of the engine.
Emergency program
A back-up programme exists in case of faults.
In the event of a f
ault in the gearbox electron-
ics, it will continue to work in one of the corre-
sponding back-up programmes. All segments
of the screen are lit up or switched off.
The fault can be seen as follows:
●
The gearbox only engages certain gears
●
Reverse gear R cannot be engaged
●
The manual gearbox switches off in the
back-up progr
amme
Note
If the gearbox switches to the back-up pro-
gramme, visit an Authorised Service as
soon as possibl
e to solve the problem.
Gearbox malfunctions
Gearbox: Fault! Stop the vehicle
and place the lever in the posi-
tion P.
There is a f
ault in the gearbox. Stop the vehi-
cle in a safe place and do not continue driv-
ing. Seek specialist assistance.
»
1)
Valid only for certain countries.
207
Driving
Gearbox: System fault! You may
continue driving.
Hav
e the f
ault corrected by a specialised
workshop without delay.
Gearbox: System fault! You can
continue driving with restric-
tions. Reverse gear disabled
Take the vehicle to a specialised workshop
and have the fault repaired without delay.
Gearbox: System fault! You can
continue driving in D until
switching off the engine
Stop the vehicle in a safe place well away
from moving traffic. Seek specialist assis-
tance.
Gearbox: too hot. Adapt your
driving accordingly
Continue driving at moderate speeds. When
the warning lamp switches off, you can con-
tinue driving in a normal manner.
Gearbox: press the brake and en-
gage a gear again.
If the fault was caused by a gearbox with a
high temperature, this driver message will be
displayed when the gearbox has cooled
again.
Gear-change indicator
Choosing the ideal gear
Fig. 219
Instrument panel: gear-change indi-
cat
or (manual gearbo
x).
A gear change will be recommended if the
gear you ar
e in is not the most economical
choice
. If no gear
-change is recommended, it
means that you are already in the most eco-
nomical gear.
Vehicles with a manual gearbox
The following display symbols
›››
Fig. 219
mean:
●
Changing to a higher gear: the sugges-
t
ed gear appears to the right of the current
gear when a higher gear is recommended.
●
Changing to a lower gear: the sugges-
ted gear appears to the left of the current
gear when a lower gear is recommended.
The gear recommendation may occasionally
skip a gear (2nd 4th).
Vehicles with an aut
omatic gearbox*
The display is only visible in tiptronic mode
›››
page 206.
The following display symbols mean:
●
Shifting up a gear
●
Shifting down a gear
CAUTION
The gear-change indicator is intended to
help save fuel, but it is not intended t
o rec-
ommend the right gear for all driving situa-
tions. In certain situations, only the driver
can choose the correct gear (for instance
when overtaking, driving up a steep gradi-
ent or towing a trailer).
Note
The display disappears from the instrument
panel when you press the clutch pedal.
208
Start and driving
Steering
Inf
ormation r
el
ating to vehicle
steering
Electro-mechanical power steering assists
the driver when steering.
El
ectro-mechanical power steering adapts
electronically to the speed of the car, torque
and turning angle.
If the power steering should fail at any time or
the engine is switched off (for instance when
being towed), the car can still be steered, as
long as the key remains in the ignition. How-
ever, more effort than normal will be required
to turn the steering wheel.
WARNING
If the power steering does not work, you
will need much more strength t
o turn the
wheel. This has a considerable effect on
vehicle safety.
●
The power steering only works when the
engine is running.
●
Never allow the vehicle to move when the
engine is switched off.
●
Never remove the key from the ignition
while the vehicle is moving. The steering
lock could be engaged and vehicle steer-
ing would not work.
CAUTION
Turning the steering wheel fully in either di-
rection when the vehicl
e is stationary and
the engine is in gear puts the electrome-
chanical steering under great stress. This
could lead to noise. Never leave the steer-
ing wheel turned fully in either direction for
more than 15 seconds. Risk of damage to
the electromechanical steering system!
Note
The ignition of the vehicle being towed
must be switched on t
o prevent the steering
wheel from locking and also to allow the
use of the turn signals, horn, windscreen
wipers and washers.
Control lamp
It lights up red
The electromechanical steering is damaged.
Do not continue driving. Stop the vehicl
e safely and
as soon as possible.
Have the steering checked immediately by a special-
ised workshop.
It lights up yellow
The operation of the electromechanical steering is
limited.
See a specialised workshop immediat
ely and have
the steering checked.
If the yellow warning lamp does not light up again af-
ter the engine is restarted and the vehicle has travel-
led a short distance, you do not need to take it to a
specialised workshop.
Or: The 12-volt battery was disconnected and has
been connected again.
Driv
e for a short time at 15-20 km/h (9-12 mph).
It flashes yellow
The steering column is tight.
Turn the wheel a little t
o both sides.
Or: Not unlocked or blocked steering column.
Remo
ve the key from the ignition and then switch the
ignition back on. If necessary, check the messages
displayed on the instrument panel display.
Do not drive on if the steering column remains
locked after the ignition has been switched on. Seek
specialist assistance.
The control lamp should light up for a few
seconds when the ignition is s
wit
ched on. It
shoul
d go out once the engine is started.
WARNING
If the warning lamps and the corresponding
messages are ignored when they light up
,
the vehicle may stall in traffic. It could case
»
209
Driving
damage to the vehicle and cause acci-
dents and sever
e injuries.
●
Never ignore the warning lamps or mes-
sages.
●
Stop the vehicle at the next opportunity
and in a safe place.
Run-in and economical driv-
ing
The first 1,500 km
Over the first 1,500 kilometres the engine
must be run in.
Up t
o 1000 kil
ometr
es
–
Do not drive at more than 3/4 of the maxi-
mum speed corresponding to the engaged
gear, i.e. up to 3/4 of the maximum permit-
ted engine speed.
–
Do not drive at full speed.
–
Avoid high engine speeds.
–
Do not tow a trailer.
From 1000 to 1500 kilometres (600 to
900 miles)
–
Slowly increase the engine speed until
reaching the maximum permitted speed of
the engaged gear, i.e. the maximum permit-
ted engine speed.
During its first few hours of running, the inter-
nal friction in the engine is greater than later
on, when all the moving parts have bedded
in. How the vehicle is driven over approxi-
mately the first 1,500 kilometres (900 miles),
determines the success of the process of run-
ning in the engine.
Even after running in, the vehicle should not
be unnecessarily driven at high engine
speeds. The maximum permitted engine
speed is marked at the start of the red zone
on the rev counter dial. The gear must be
changed up when the red area is reached in
vehicles with a manual gearbox. Extremely
high engine speeds when accelerating are
automatically limited, however the engine is
not protected against high engine speeds
produced by incorrectly changing to a lower
gear, which could cause the engine to run at
revs above the maximum permitted amount,
and consequently result in damage to the
engine.
Additionally, vehicles with a manual gearbox
must also bear the following in mind: do not
drive at excessively low speeds. Change
down to a lower gear when the engine no
longer runs smoothly. Observe the recom-
mendations for changing gear
›››
page 208.
New tyres
New tyres must be submitted to “running in”,
given that initially their grip is not yet at the
maximum level. During the first 500 km (120
miles) drive very carefully.
New brake pads
New brake pads do not yet provide maximum
friction capacity. First they must be “run in”.
During the first 200 km (120 miles) drive very
carefully.
CAUTION
All the information for speed and engine
speed refers t
o an engine that operates at
operating temperature. Do not run the en-
gine at high engine speeds, neither when
stopped or while driving.
For the sake of the environment
Do not drive at unnecessarily high engine
speeds; changing to a higher gear sooner
contributes t
o saving fuel, reduces operat-
ing noise and protects the environment.
Environmental compatibility
Environmental protection is a top priority in
the design, choice of mat
erial
s and manuf
ac-
ture of your new SEAT.
210
Start and driving
Constructive measures to encourage re-
cycling
●
Joints and connections designed for easy
dismantling.
●
Modular construction to facilitate disman-
tling.
●
Increased use of single-grade materials.
●
Plastic parts and elastomers are marked in
accor
dance with ISO 1043, ISO 1
1469 and
ISO 1629.
Choice of mat
erials
●
Use of recycled materials.
●
Use of compatible plastics in the same part
if its components are not easily separated.
●
Use of recycled materials and/or materials
originating from renewable sources.
●
Reduction of volatile components, including
odour, in plastic materials.
●
Use of CFC-free coolants.
Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptions
dictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive
2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury,
hexavalent chromium.
Manufacturing methods
●
Reduction of the quantity of thinner in the
protective wax for cavities.
●
Use of plastic film as protection during vehi-
cle transport.
●
Use of solvent-free adhesives.
●
Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys-
tems.
●
Recycling and energy recovery from resi-
dues (RDF).
●
Improvement in the quality of waste water.
●
Use of systems for the recovery of residual
heat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels,
etc.).
●
The use of water-soluble paints.
Economical and environmentally-
friendly driving
Fuel consumption, environmental pollution
and w
ear t
o the engine
, brakes and tyres de-
pends in large part on your driving style. By
adopting an economical driving style and an-
ticipating the traffic situation ahead, you can
easily reduce fuel consumption by 10-15%.
Some tips on how to help you reduce pollu-
tion while saving money are listed below.
Drive anticipating the traffic situation
A vehicle uses most fuel when accelerating.
When you anticipate situations, you have to
brake less often and, thus, accelerate less. If it
is possible, let the vehicle roll with a gear en-
gaged, for example, if you see a red light
ahead. The braking effect achieved in this
way helps to reduce the wear of brakes and
tyres; emissions and fuel consumption are re-
duced to zero (disconnection due to inertia).
Change gear early to save energy
An effective way of saving fuel is to change
up quickly through the gears. Running the en-
gine at high rpm in the lower gears uses an
unnecessary amount of fuel.
Manual transmission: shift up from first to
second gear as soon as possible. We recom-
mend that, whenever possible, you change to
a higher gear upon reaching 2000 rpm. Fol-
low the “recommended gear” indication that
appears on the instrument panel
›››
page 208.
Avoid driving at high speed
We advise you not to drive at the top speed
permitted by the vehicle. Fuel consumption,
exhaust emissions and noise levels all in-
crease very rapidly at higher speeds. Driving
at moderate speeds will help to save fuel.
Avoid idling
It is worthwhile switching off the engine when
waiting in a traffic jam, at level crossings or at
traffic lights with a long red phase. The fuel
saved after only 30 - 40 seconds is greater
than the amount of fuel needed to restart the
engine.
The engine takes a long time to warm up
when it is idling. Mechanical wear and
»
211
Driving
pollutant emissions are also especially high
during this initial w
arm-up phase
. It is ther
e-
fore best to drive off immediately after start-
ing the engine. Avoid running the engine at
high speed.
Periodic maintenance
Periodic maintenance work guarantees that,
before beginning a journey, you will not con-
sume more than the required amount of fuel.
A well-serviced engine gives you the benefit
of improved fuel efficiency as well as maxi-
mum reliability and an enhanced resale val-
ue.
A badly serviced engine can consume up to
10% more fuel than necessary.
Avoid short journeys
To reduce the consumption and emission of
polluting exhaust gases, the engine and the
exhaust gas filtration systems should reach
the optimum operating temperature.
With the engine cold, fuel consumption is pro-
portionally higher. The engine does not warm
up and fuel consumption does not normalise
until having driven approximately four kilome-
tres (2.5 miles). This is why we recommend
avoiding short trips whenever possible.
Maintain the correct tyre pressures
Bear in mind that keeping the tyres at an ade-
quate pressure saves fuel. If the tyre pressure
is just one bar (14.5 psi/100 kPa) too low, fuel
consumption can increase by as much as 5%.
Due to the greater rolling resistance, under-
inflation also increases tyre wear wear and
impairs handling.
The tyre pressures should always be checked
when the tyres are cold.
Do not use winter tyres all year round as
they increase fuel consumption by up to 10%.
Avoid unnecessary weight
Given that every kilo of extra weight will in-
crease the fuel consumption, it is advisable to
always check the luggage compartment to
make sure that no unnecessary loads are be-
ing transported.
A roof rack is often left in place for the sake of
convenience, even when it is no longer nee-
ded. At a speed of 100 km/h (62 mph) and
120 km/h (75 mph) your vehicle will use about
12% more fuel as a result of the extra wind re-
sistance caused by the roof rack even when it
is not in use.
Save electricity
The engine activates the alternator, which
produces electricity. With the need for elec-
tricity, fuel consumption also increases. Be-
cause of this, always turn off electrical devi-
ces when you do not need them. Examples of
devices that use a lot of electricity are: the
fan at high speeds, the rear window heating
and the seat heaters*.
Note
●
If you vehicle has
Start-Stop, it is not rec-
ommended to switch this function off.
●
It is recommended that you close the
windows when driving at more than
60 km/h (37 mph).
●
Do not drive with your foot resting on the
clutch pedal,, as the pressure can make the
plate spin, more fuel will be used and it can
burn the clutch plate lining, causing a seri-
ous fault.
●
Do not hold the vehicle on a hill with the
clutch, use the foot brake or hand brake,
using the latter to start. The fuel consump-
tion will be lower and you will prevent the
clutch plate from being damaged.
●
On descents, use the engine brake,
changing to the gear that is more suitable
for the slope. Fuel consumption will be
“zero” and the brakes will not suffer.
212
Start and driving
Engine management and
emission contr
ol syst
em
Intr
oduction
WARNING
●
Because of the high temperat
ures which
can occur in the exhaust purification sys-
tem (catalytic converter or diesel particu-
late filter), do not park the vehicle where
the exhaust can come into contact with
flammable materials under the car (e.g. on
grass or at the forest edge). Fire hazard!
●
Do not apply wax underneath the vehicle
around the area of the exhaust system: Fire
hazard!
Control lamps
It lights up
Fault in the emission control system. (e.g. faulty
lambda sensor).
Reduce speed and driv
e carefully to the nearest spe-
cialised workshop to have the engine checked.
Flashes
Combustion fault which could damage the catalytic
converter
.
Reduce speed and drive carefully to the nearest spe-
cialised workshop to have the engine checked.
It lights up
Particulate filter blocked
›››
page 214.
It lights up
Fault in the management of the petrol engine.
Have the engine checked by a specialised w
orkshop
as soon as possible.
The warning lamp (Electronic P
ower Control)
lights up when the ignition is switched on while sys-
tem operation is being verified. It should go out once
the engine is started.
It lights up
Diesel engine glow plug system.
The engine glow plug syst
em has been activated.
The engine can be started straight away when the
lamp switches off.
Flashes
Fault in the management of the diesel engine.
Have the engine checked by a specialised w
orkshop
as soon as possible.
Note
While the control lamps are on , ,
or there might be faults in the engine
,
fuel consumption may go up and the en-
gine might lose power.
Catalytic converter
3 Applies to vehicles with petrol engine
To maint
ain the useful life of the catalytic
converter
●
Use only unleaded petrol with petrol en-
gines, as lead damages the catalytic con-
verter.
●
Do not let the fuel get too low in the tank.
●
For engine oil changes, do not replenish
with too much engine oil
›››
page 247.
●
Never tow the vehicle to start it, use jump
leads if necessary
››
›
page 54.
If you notice misfiring, uneven running or loss
of power when the vehicle is moving, reduce
speed immediately and have the vehicle in-
spected at the nearest specialised workshop.
In general, the exhaust warning lamp will light
up when any of the described symptoms oc-
cur
›››
page 213. If this happens, unburnt fuel
can enter the exhaust system and escape in-
to the environment. The catalytic converter
can also be damaged by overheating.
CAUTION
Never run the fuel tank completely dry be-
cause the irregularit
y of the fuel supply
may cause ignition problems. This allows
unburnt fuel to enter the exhaust system,
which could cause overheating and dam-
age the catalytic converter.
»
213
Driving
For the sake of the environment
Even when the emission control system is
working perfectly, ther
e may be a smell of
sulphur from the exhaust gas under some
conditions. This depends on the sulphur
content of the fuel used. Quite often the
problem can be solved by changing to an-
other brand of fuel.
Particulate filter
3 Applies to vehicl
es with diesel engine
The diesel engine particulate filter eliminates
most of the soot from the exhaust gas system.
Under normal driving conditions, the filter
cleans itself. The particulate filter is cleaned
automatically without need for indication by
the warning lamp . This may be noticed
because the engine idle speed increases and
an odour may be detected.
If automatic filter purification cannot be car-
ried out (because only short trips are taken,
for example), soot will accumulate on the fil-
ter and the particulate filter warning lamp will
switch on.
Facilitate the automatic filter cleaning proc-
ess by driving in the following manner:
●
Drive for approximately 15 minutes at a
minimum speed of 60 km/h (37 mph) in 4th or
5th gear (automatic gearbox: S gear r
ange).
●
Maintain the engine speed at approximate-
ly 2,000 rpm.
The rise in temperature causes the soot on
the filter to burn. On completion of the clean-
ing the warning lamp will switch off. If the
warning lamp does not switch off, go immedi-
ately to a specialised workshop to rectify the
problem.
CAUTION
While the warning lamp is lit up, the fuel
consumption is high, and in cert
ain condi-
tions, the engine power is reduced.
Note
●
In order for the par
ticulate filter to burn
off soot in a correct manner, avoid carrying
out frequent short journeys.
●
Using diesel fuel with a high sulphur
count can considerably reduce the useful
life of the particulate filter. The specialised
service provides information about the
countries where fuel with a high sulphur
content is used.
Driving tips
Driving thr
ough fl
ooded r
oads
Fig. 220
Driving through water.
To prevent the vehicle from being damaged
when driving thr
ough w
at
er (i.e. flooded
roads), please observe the following:
●
Determine the depth of the water before
entering. Water can reach a maximum height
of below the door sill
›››
Fig. 220.
●
Drive at a maximum pace of walking speed.
Driving at a higher speed can cause a wave
in front of the vehicle, which can cause water
to enter the engine air intake system or other
parts of the vehicle.
●
Never stop in the water, never reverse and
never stop the engine.
●
Before driving through water deactivate the
Start-Stop system
›››
page 215.
214
Driver assistance systems
WARNING
●
Driving through wat
er, dirt and mud can
reduce braking capability and prolong the
braking distance – Risk of accident!
●
Do not carry out any sudden or strong
braking manoeuvres after driving through
water.
●
Clean and dry the brakes as soon as pos-
sible after driving through water by break-
ing intermittently. Carry out braking in or-
der to dry the brakes and clean the brake
discs only if traffic so permits. Do not put
other drivers at risk.
CAUTION
●
In the event of driving thr
ough water,
parts of the vehicle can be seriously dam-
aged, such as the engine, gearbox, catalyt-
ic converter, suspension or the electrical
system.
●
Oncoming vehicles that drive through
water can cause waves that exceed your
vehicle's permitted level for driving through
water.
●
There may be pot-holes mud or rocks un-
der the water that can hinder or prevent
driving through water.
●
Do not drive through salt water. The salt
can cause rust. All components that are ex-
posed to salt water must be rinsed immedi-
ately with fresh water.
Note
After driving through water we recommend
that you contact a specialised service for
an inspection.
Preventing damage to the vehicle
In order to prevent damage to the vehicle,
take special car
e:
●
on roads that are in poor condition,
●
when mounting kerbs,
●
when approaching very steep ramps, etc.,
●
with the parts of the vehicle situated on the
low
er part of the vehicle, i.e. the spoiler, the
exhaust pipe.
This applies especially to vehicles with a very
low suspension (sport) and when the vehicle
is fully loaded.
Driver assistance systems
St
ar
t
-Stop system*
Control lamps
It lights up
The Start-Stop system is available, the automatic en-
gine shutdown is active.
It lights up
The Start-Stop system is not available.
Description and operation
Fig. 221 Instrument panel: Start-stop button.
The Start-Stop system helps save fuel and
r
educe harmful and CO
2
emissions.
»
2
15
Driving
The system is automatically switched on ev-
ery time the ignition is s
wit
ched on.
The syst
em automatically switches off the
engine when the vehicle is stationary, e.g.
waiting at traffic lights.
The current status of the Start-Stop system is
displayed on the general instrument panel
display.
Automatic engine shut down (Stop phase)
●
Stop the vehicle (if necessary using the
handbrake).
●
Shift to neutral.
●
Release the clutch pedal.
Automatic engine start up (Start phase)
●
Press the clutch.
Switching the Start-Stop system on and
off
The Start-Stop system can be switched on
and off by pressing the button
›››
Fig. 221.
The warning lamp in the button will light up
when the system is switched off.
If the vehicle is in Stop phase when the button
is pressed, the engine will start immediately.
The Start-Stop system works under complex
driving conditions that are difficult to detect
without specialist technology. The set of nec-
essary conditions for the correct operating of
the Start-Stop system are indicated below.
Conditions for automatic engine shut
down (Stop phase)
●
Selector lever in neutral.
●
Clutch pedal not pressed.
●
Driver with seat belt fastened.
●
Driver door closed.
●
The bonnet closed.
●
Vehicle stationary.
●
The factory-fitted towing bracket is not
electrically connected to a trailer.
●
Engine at operating temperature.
●
Vehicle's battery sufficiently charged.
●
Vehicle not on a very steep slope
●
Engine speed below 1,200 rpm.
●
Vehicle battery temperature is neither too
high nor too low.
●
Sufficient brake system pressure.
●
Difference between outside temperature
and set interior temperature not too great
●
Vehicle speed since the last time the engine
started was above 3 km/h (2 mph).
●
Particulate filter not being cleaned
›››
page 214.
●
Front wheels not overly turned (steering
wheel turned less than three quarters of a
turn)
Conditions for engine start up (Start
phase)
●
Clutch pedal pressed.
●
Max./min. temperature set.
●
Windscreen defrost function switched on.
●
High blower speed.
●
Start-Stop button pressed.
Conditions for automatic engine start up
without driver involvement
●
Vehicle moving at a speed of over 3 km/h (2
mph).
●
Difference between outside temperature
and interior temperature is too great
●
Vehicle's battery insufficiently charged.
●
Insufficient brake system pressure.
If the driver seat belt is unfastened for more
than 30 seconds in Stop phase, the engine
must be started using the ignition key. Please
observe the messages on the general instru-
ment panel display.
Warnings on the instrument panel display
(valid for vehicles not fitted with an infor-
mative display)
FAULT: Start-Stop Fault in the Start-Stop
system
START-STOP IMPOS-
SIBLE
Engine cannot be auto-
matically shut down
216
Driver assistance systems
START-STOP ACTIVE Automatic engine shut
down (Stop phase)
SWITCH OFF IGNI-
TION
S
witch the ignition off
START MANUALLY Start the engine manual-
ly
WARNING
●
If the engine is switched off
, neither the
brake servo nor the power steering will
work.
●
Do not move the vehicle when the engine
is switched off.
CAUTION
Switch off the Start-Stop system
›››
page 214 before driving through a pool
of water on the road.
Note
●
The battery temper
ature may reflect
changes in outside temperature after sev-
eral hours. If the vehicle has been stopped
outside at temperatures below zero or in di-
rect sunlight, for example, the battery tem-
perature may take several hours to reach
the values required for the correct operat-
ing of the Start-Stop system.
●
If the Climatronic system is operating au-
tomatically, this could impair automatic
engine shut down under certain conditions.
Cruise control (CCS)*
Contr
ol l
amp
It lights up green
The Cruise Control System (GRA) is switched on and
active.
Several warning and control lamps light up
for a fe
w seconds when the ignition is switch-
ed on, signalling that the function is being
verified. They will switch off after a few sec-
onds.
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
›››
in Con-
trol and warning l
amps on page 103.
Cruise control operation
Fig. 222
Turn signal and main beam headlight
l
e
v
er: cruise control buttons.
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 34
The cruise control system allows you to drive
at a constant speed of 30 km/h (19 mph) or
higher without having to press the accelera-
tor. However, the speed is only maintained
within the margin permitted by the engine
power and the braking effect of the engine.
Setting speed
●
Move knob
1
›
›
›
Fig. 222 to the position.
●
Briefly press rocker switch
2
in
position
when you hav
e reached the speed you wish
to set.
»
217
Driving
On releasing rocker switch
2
from , the
curr
ent speed is st
or
ed and will remain con-
stant without having to press the accelerator
pedal.
Increasing speed by pressing the acceler-
ator pedal
●
Press the accelerator to increase the speed
of the vehicle.
●
Release the accelerator and the previously
programmed speed will be resumed.
If, when pressing the accelerator, the vehicle
exceeds the programmed speed by more
than 10 km/h (6 mph) for more than 3 mi-
nutes, the set speed will be deleted. The
speed will have to be stored again.
Increasing speed by pressing switch
2
●
Press rocker switch
2
›
›
›
Fig. 222
›››
page 217 in position .
●
If the button is held down in the position,
the speed increases continuously. Release
the switch when the required speed is
reached. The speed is stored.
Setting a lower speed
●
The set speed can be reduced by pressing
switch
2
›
›
›
Fig. 222
›››
page 217 in .
●
If the button is held down in the position,
the speed decreases continuously. Release
the switch when the required speed is
reached. The speed is stored.
●
On releasing the switch at speeds of less
than 30 km/h (19 mph), no speed will be set
and the memory will be deleted. The vehicle
must be moving at a speed of over 30 km/h
(19 mph) and switch
2
pressed again to
f
or it t
o be set.
The speed can be r
educed by pressing the
brake pedal, which temporarily switches off
the cruise control.
Temporary deactivation of cruise control
Cruise control is switched off temporarily
by pressing switch
1
›
›
›
Fig. 222
›››
page 217 in or by pressing the brake
or clutch pedal.
The set speed is stored.
To recover the set speed, briefly press the
button
2
in
position once you hav
e r
e-
leased the brake pedal.
Turning off the cruise control system
●
Move knob
1
›
›
›
Fig. 222
›››
page 217 to
the position.
WARNING
●
For safet
y reasons the cruise control sys-
tem must not be used in dense traffic or
where roads conditions are poor (e.g. due
to ice, aquaplaning, loose grit, snow) - Risk
of accident!
●
The progr
ammed speed can only be re-
established if it is not too high for current
traffic conditions.
●
Always switch the cruise control system
off after using it in order to avoid involunta-
ry use.
CAUTION
●
The cruise contr
ol cannot maintain a
const
ant speed when the vehicle is moving
downhill. The vehicle tends to accelerate
under its own weight. Therefore, shift down
or use the brake pedal in good time to slow
the vehicle.
Note
●
In vehicles with an aut
omatic gearbox,
the cruise control system cannot be
switched on if the selector lever is in posi-
tion P, N or R.
●
In vehicles with a manual gearbox, the
cruise control cannot be switched on if first
gear or reverse gear is engaged.
218
Driver assistance systems
Emergency braking assis-
t
ance syst
em (Fr
ont Assist)*
Topic introduction
Fig. 223 On the instrument panel display: ad-
v
ance w
arning indications.
The objective of the emergency braking as-
sist
ance syst
em is t
o prevent head-on colli-
sions against objects that may be in the vehi-
cle’s path or minimise the consequences of
such impacts.
Within the limitations imposed by the environ-
mental conditions and by the system itself,
the function acts in staggered fashion, de-
pending on how critical the situation is. Initial-
ly it warns the driver, and if the driver’s reac-
tion does not occur or is insufficient, it acti-
vates an independent emergency braking.
The function is intended to prevent collisions
with parked vehicles or vehicles in the same
lane travelling in the same direction. It may
fail to activate in other danger situations.
The Front Assist function is active within a
range of speeds between 4 km/h (2.5 mph)
and 250 km/h (156 mph). Depending on
speed, traffic conditions and driver behaviour,
some of the sub-functions described below
are omitted in order to optimise the system’s
general behaviour.
The Front Assist is a driving assistance
function that can never replace the driv-
er’s attention.
Safety distance warning
If the system detects a situation of danger
because the vehicle is too close to the vehicle
ahead, it will warn the driver by means of an
indication on the instrument panel display
.
The timing of the warning varies depending
on driver behaviour and the traffic situation.
Advance warning
If the system detects a possible collision with
the vehicle in front, it may alert the driver by
means of an audible warning and an indica-
tion on the instrument panel display
›››
Fig. 223.
The warning moment varies depending on
the traffic situation and driver behaviour. At
the same time, the vehicle will prepare for a
possible emergency braking
›››
.
Critical w
arning
If the driv
er f
ails to react to the pre-warning
(advance warning), the system may actively
intervene in the brakes and generate a brief
jolt to warn the driver of the imminent danger
of a collision.
Automatic braking
If the driver also fails to react to the critical
warning, the system may initiate independent
emergency braking by progressively increas-
ing the braking effect in accordance with how
critical the situation is.
Driver emergency braking assistance sys-
tem
Faced with an imminent collision, the system
may detect that the driver is not braking hard
enough to avoid the collision. In this case, it
will automatically increase the braking effect.
Due to certain driving circumstances and the
limitations of its operation, there are some
cases in which the system cannot prevent a
collision, although it can significantly mini-
mise the consequences by reducing the
speed and the force of the impact.
»
219
Driving
WARNING
Observe the safety warnings
›››
in Con-
trol and warning l
amps on page 103.
WARNING
The Front Assist system cannot change the
laws of physics or repl
ace the driver in
terms of keeping control of the vehicle and
reacting to a possible emergency situation.
WARNING
Following a Front Assist emergency warn-
ing, pay immediate attention t
o the situa-
tion and try to avoid the collision by brak-
ing or by dodging the obstacle, as applica-
ble.
●
If the Front Assist does not work as de-
scribed in this chapter (e.g. it repeatedly
intervenes unnecessarily), switch it off.
●
Adapt your speed and safe distance to
the vehicle in front of you at all times to suit
visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
tions.
●
The Front Assist alone cannot avoid acci-
dents and serious injuries.
●
In complex driving situations, occasional-
ly the Front Assist may issue warnings and
intervene in braking unnecessarily, for ex-
ample at traffic islands.
●
If the operation of the Front Assist is im-
paired, for example, by dirt or because the
radar sensor has lost its settings, the sys-
tem may issue unnecessary warnings and
intervene inoppor
tunely in the braking.
●
The Front Assist does not react to animals
or vehicles crossing your path or ap-
proaching head-on down the same lane.
●
The Front Assist does not react to pedes-
trians walking in the same direction or ap-
proaching head-on down the same lane.
●
The driver must always be ready to take
over the control of the vehicle.
Note
●
When the Fr
ont Assist is connected, the
indications on the instrument panel scr
een
may be concealed by warnings from other
functions, such as an incoming call.
●
When the Front Assist causes a braking,
the brake pedal is “harder”.
●
Automatic interventions by the Front As-
sist on the brakes may be interrupted by
pressing the clutch, accelerator or moving
the wheel.
●
The Front Assist may brake the vehicle
until it stops completely. However, the
brake system does not halt the vehicle per-
manently. Use the foot brake!
●
If the Front Assist does not work as de-
scribed in this chapter (e.g. in intervenes
several times unnecessarily), switch it off.
Have the system checked by a specialised
workshop. SEAT recommends visiting a
SEAT dealership.
Radar sensor
Fig. 224
On the front bumper: radar sensor.
A radar sensor is installed on the front bump-
er t
o det
ermine the tr
affic situation
›››
Fig. 224
1
.
The r
adar sensor
's visibilit
y may be impaired
by dirt, mud or snow, or by environmental in-
fluences such as rain or mist. In this case, the
Front Assist does not work. The instrument
panel displays the following message: Front
Assist: No sensor vision! If necessary
clean the radar sensor
›››
.
When the r
adar sensor begins t
o oper
ate
properly again, the Front Assist will automati-
cally be available again. The message will
disappear from the instrument panel display.
Front Assist operation may be affected by a
strong radar reverse reflection. This may oc-
cur, for example, in a closed car park or due
220
Driver assistance systems
to the presence of metallic objects (e.g. rails
on the r
oad or sheets used in r
oad w
orks).
The area in front of and around the radar
sensor should not be covered with adhesives,
additional or similar headlights, as this may
negatively affect Front Assist operation.
If the front of the vehicle is not properly re-
paired or structural modifications are made
to it, for example if the suspension is lowered,
Front Assist operation may be affected. SEAT
recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for
this purpose.
CAUTION
If you have the sensation that the radar
sensor is damaged or has lost its settings,
disconnect the Front Assist. This will av
oid
possible dangerous situations caused by a
system malfunction. If this occurs have it
adjusted.
●
The sensor may become damaged or
lose its settings when knocked, for exam-
ple, during a parking manoeuvre. This may
compromise the system's efficacy or dis-
connect it.
●
Repairs to the radar sensor require spe-
cialist knowledge and special tools. SEAT
recommends visiting a SEAT dealership for
this purpose.
●
A registration plate or plate holder on the
front that is larger than the space for the
registration plate, or a registration plate
that is curved or warped can cause the ra-
dar to malfunction.
●
Clean aw
ay the snow with a brush and
the ice preferably with a solvent-free de-
icer spray.
Operating the Emergency braking
assistance system (Fr
ont Assist)
Fig. 225
On the screen of the instrument panel
Fr
ont Assist s
wit
ched off message.
The Front Assist is active whenever the igni-
tion is s
wit
ched on.
When the Fr
ont Assist is switched off, so too
are the advance warning function (pre warn-
ing) and the distance warning.
SEAT recommends leaving the Front Assist al-
ways switched on. Exceptions
›››
page 222,
Switching the Front Assist off temporarily
in the following situations.
Switching the Front Assist on and off
With the ignition switched on, the Front Assist
can be switched on and off as follows:
●
Select the corresponding menu option us-
ing the button for the driver assistance sys-
tems
›››
page 27.
●
OR: switch the system on and off in Easy
Connect using the
button SETTINGS but-
t
on and Driv
er assist
ance button
›››
page 2
4
.
When Fr
ont Assist is switched off, the instru-
ment panel will inform that it has been
switched off with the following indicator
›››
Fig. 225.
Activating or deactivating the pre-warning
(advance warning)
The pre-warning function (advance warning)
can be switched on or off in the Easy Con-
nect system with the
button and the
SETTINGS and Driv
er assistance
function but-
t
ons
›
›
›
page 24.
The system will store the setting for the next
time the ignition is switched on.
SEAT recommends keeping the pre-warning
function switched on at all times.
Depending on the infotainment system instal-
led in the vehicle, the advance warning func-
tion may be adjusted as follows:
●
Advance
»
221
Driving
●
Medium
●
Delayed
●
Deactivated
SEAT r
ecommends driving with the function in
“Medium” mode
.
S
witching distance warning on and off
If the safe distance with regard to the vehicle
in front is exceeded, the relevant warning will
appear on the instrument panel display
. In this case, increase the safe distance.
The distance warning can be switched on
and off in the Easy Connect system using the
button and the SETTINGS and
Driv
er assist
ance function buttons
›
›
›
page 24.
The system will store the setting for the next
time the ignition is switched on.
SEAT recommends keeping the distance
warning switched on at all times.
Switching the Front Assist off tem-
porarily in the following situations
In the following situations the Front Assist
shoul
d be deactiv
at
ed due to the system's
limitations:
●
When the vehicle is to be towed.
●
If the vehicle is on a test bed.
●
When the radar sensor is damaged.
●
If the radar sensor takes a heavy knock, for
example in a rear collision.
●
If it intervenes several times unnecessarily.
●
If the radar sensor is covered temporarily
with some kind of accessory, such as an ad-
ditional headlight or the like.
●
When the vehicle is to be loaded on a lorry,
ferry or train.
System limitations
The Front Assist has certain physical limita-
tions inher
ent t
o the syst
em. Thus, in certain
circumstances, some of the system's reac-
tions may be inopportune from the driver's
standpoint. So pay attention in order to inter-
vene if necessary.
The following conditions may cause the
Front Assist not to react or to do so too
late:
●
In the first few instants of driving after
switching on the ignition, due to the system’s
initial auto-calibration.
●
On taking tight bends or complex paths.
●
Pressing the accelerator all the way down.
●
If the Front Assist is switched off or dam-
aged.
●
If the ASR has been disconnected or the
ESC activated in Sport mode manually
›››
page 201.
●
If the ESC is controlling.
●
If several brake lights of the vehicle or elec-
trically connected trailer are damaged.
●
If the radar sensor is dirty or covered.
●
If there are metal objects, e.g. rails on the
road or sheets used in road works.
●
If the vehicle is reversing.
●
If the vehicle over-accelerates.
●
In case of snow or heavy rain.
●
In case of narrow vehicles, such as motor-
bikes.
●
Misaligned vehicles.
●
Vehicles crossing the other's path.
●
Vehicles approaching in the opposite direc-
tion.
●
Special loads and accessories of other ve-
hicles that jut out over the sides, backwards
or over the top.
Parking aid
General information
Assorted assistance systems – which vary
depending on the equipment fitt
ed in the car
– will help you when parking or manoeuvring.
222
Driver assistance systems
The r
ear parking aid is an audible assistant
that w
arns about obst
acles located behind
the vehicle
›››
page 224.
During parking, Parking System Plus assists
the driver by visually and audibly warning
them about obstacles detected in front and
behind the vehicle
›››
page 224.
WARNING
●
Always pay att
ention, also when looking
straight ahead, to traffic and the vehicle
surroundings. The assistance systems are
not a replacement for driver awareness.
When inserting or removing the vehicle
from a parking space, or when performing
similar manoeuvres the driver always as-
sumes the responsibility.
●
Adapt your speed and driving style at all
times to suit visibility, weather, road and
traffic conditions.
●
The ultrasound sensors have blind spots
in which obstacles and people are not reg-
istered. Pay special attention to children
and animals.
●
Always keep visual control of the sur-
roundings: use the mirrors for additional
help.
CAUTION
Parking Aid functions may be negatively af-
fected by diff
erent factors that may lead to
damage to the vehicle or its immediate sur-
rounds:
●
Under certain cir
cumstances, the system
does not detect or display certain objects:
–
Objects such as chains, trailer draw
bars, fences, posts and thin trees.
–
Objects that are located above the
sensors, such as protrusions in a wall.
–
Objects with certain surfaces or struc-
tures, such as wire mesh fences or pow-
der snow.
●
Certain surfaces of objects and gar-
ments do not reflect the ultrasound sen-
sors' signals. The system cannot detect, at
least correctly, these objects or people
wearing such clothes.
●
Ultrasound sensor signals may be affec-
ted by external sound sources. In certain
circumstances this may prevent them from
detecting people or objects.
●
Please note that low obstacles detected
by the system may no longer be registered
by the sensors as the car moves closer, so
the system will not give any further warn-
ing. In certain circumstances, objects such
as high kerbs that could damage the bot-
tom of the vehicle are not detected either.
●
If the first warning from the Parking Aid is
ignored, the vehicle could suffer considera-
ble damage.
●
The knocks or damage on the radiator
grille, bumper, wheel arch and vehicle un-
derbody can adjust the orientation of the
sensors. This can affect the parking aid
function. Have the function checked by a
specialised workshop.
Note
●
In cer
tain sit
uations, the system can give
a warning even though there is no obstacle
in the detected area, e.g:
–
with rough or cobbled floors or ground
with long grass;
–
with external ultrasound sources, such
as cleaning vehicles or other vehicles;
–
In downpours, intense snow or dense
exhaust gases;
–
if the registration plate (front or rear) is
not properly affixed to the bumper sur-
face;
–
or in locations such as the brow of a
hill.
●
In order to guarantee good system oper-
ation, keep the ultrasound sensors clean,
free of snow or ice, and do not cover them
with adhesives or other objects.
●
If you use high-pressure or vapour equip-
ment to clean the ultrasound sensors, ap-
ply it directly only very briefly and always
from a distance of more than 10 cm.
●
Retrofitting of accessories to the vehicle,
such as a bicycle rack, may interfere with
the operation of the Parking Aid.
●
In order to familiarise yourself with the
system, it is advised that you practice park-
ing in an area or car park that is free from
»
223
Driving
traffic. There must be good weather and
light conditions.
●
The volume and tone of the warnings can
be modified, in addition to the indications
››
›
page 227.
●
In vehicles without a driver information
system, these parameters can be modified
in a SEAT Official Service or in a special-
ised workshop.
●
Please observe information on towing a
trailer
›››
page 227.
●
The display on the Easy Connect screen
shows a slight time delay.
Rear parking aid*
The rear Parking Aid assists the driver in park-
ing by means of audibl
e w
arning sounds.
Description
Ther
e are sensors integrated in the rear
bumper. When the sensors detect an obsta-
cle, you are alerted by audible warnings.
Make particularly sure that the sensors are
not covered by adhesives, residues and the
like, as this could affect the system's opera-
tion. Cleaning instructions
›››
page 267.
The approximate measurement range of the
rear sensors is:
side area 0.90 m
central area 1.60 m
As you approach the obstacle, the time inter-
val between the audibl
e warnings will be re-
duced. When you reach around 0.30 m the
warning will be constant: Do not continue to
move forward (or backward)
›››
in General
information on page 223,
›
››
in General
information on page 223 !
If you maint
ain separation from the obstacle,
the volume of the warning begins to reduce
after four seconds (does not affect the tone
of the constant warning).
Activating/Deactivating
When engaging reverse gear, the parking aid
is automatically switched on. This is con-
firmed with a short warning.
On disengaging reverse gear, the Parking Aid
system is disconnected immediately.
Parking aid plus*
Fig. 226
Represented area.
Parking system plus assists you audibly and
visually when parking.
Ther
e ar
e sensors int
egrated in the front and
rear bumpers. When they detect an obstacle,
you are alerted by audible warnings and vis-
ually on the Easy Connect system.
In the event of danger of a frontal collision,
the audible warnings come from the front of
the vehicle, and in the event of the danger of
a rear-end collision they come from the rear.
Make particularly sure that the sensors are
not covered by adhesives, residues and the
like, as this could affect the system's opera-
tion. Cleaning instructions
›››
page 267.
The approximate measurement range of the
sensors is:
1.20 m
A
224
Driver assistance systems
0.90 m
1.
60 m
0.90 m
As you appr
oach the obst
acle, the time inter-
val between the audible warnings will be re-
duced. When you reach around 0.30 m the
warning will be constant: do not continue to
move forward (or backward)!
If you maintain separation from the obstacle,
the volume of the warning begins to reduce
after four seconds (does not affect the tone
of the constant warning).
Parking aid operation
Fig. 227
Centre console: parking aid button.
Manual connection of Parking Aid
●
Press the butt
on
once
.
B
C
D
Manual disconnection of Parking Aid
●
Press the butt
on
again
.
Manual disconnection of Parking Aid dis-
play (the audible sounds remain active)
●
Press a button on the main menu of the fac-
tory-assembled infotainment system.
●
OR press the BACK function button.
Automatic connection of Parking Aid
●
Engage reverse gear or turn the selector
lever to position R.
●
OR: If the vehicle approaches an obstacle
that is in its forwards path at a speed below
10 km/h (6 mph)
›››
page 225, Automatic
activation. The obstacle is detected from a
distance of approx. 95 cm if the automatic
connection is activated in the infotainment
system. A reduced display is shown.
Automatic disconnection of Parking Aid
●
Move the selector lever to position P.
●
OR: accelerate to approx. 10 km/h (6 mph)
or faster.
Temporary suppression of sound in Park-
ing Aid
●
Press the function button.
Change from reduced view to full view
●
Engage reverse gear or turn the selector
lever to position R.
●
OR: press the car icon in reduced view.
If necessary, switch to the rear-assist im-
age (Rear View Camera “RVC”)
●
Engage reverse gear or turn the selector
lever to position R.
●
OR press the RVC function button.
A short confirmation signal will be heard and
the button symbol will light up yellow when
the system is switched on.
Automatic activation
Fig. 228
Miniature indication of automatic ac-
tiv
ation.
When the Plus Parking Aid connects auto-
matically, a miniat
ur
e of the v
ehicle and the
»
225
Driving
segments will appear on the left of the dis-
pl
ay
›
›
›
Fig. 228.
Automatic activation occurs when slowly ap-
proaching an obstacle located in front of the
vehicle. It only operates every time the speed
is reduced below approximately 10 km/h (6
mph) for the first time.
If the parking aid is switched off using the
button, the following actions must be carried
out in order for it to automatically switch on:
●
Switch off the ignition and switch it on
again.
●
OR: accelerate above 10 km/h (6 mph) be-
fore reducing speed below this number again.
●
OR: place the selector lever in position P
and then move it from this position.
●
OR: switch on and off the automatic activa-
tion in the Easy Connect system menu.
The automatic activation with parking aid
miniature indication can be switched on and
off from the Easy Connect system menu
›››
page 24:
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
Select:
button > Settings > Parking
and manoeuvring.
●
Select the Automatic activation option.
When the function butt
on check bo
x is activ
a-
ted , the function is on.
If the system has been activated automati-
cally, an audible sound warning will only be
given when obstacles in front are at a dis-
tance of less than 50 cm.
CAUTION
The automatic connection of the Parking
Aid only works when you are driving sl
owly.
If driving style is not adapted to the circum-
stances, an accident and serious injury or
damage may be caused.
Segments of the visual indication
Fig. 229
Parking Aid display on the Easy Con-
nect syst
em scr
een.
The distance of separation from the obstacle
can be estimat
ed using the segments ar
ound
the v
ehicle.
The optical indication of the segments works
as follows:
a white segment is dis-
played when the obstacle is not within
the vehicle's trajectory or the direction of
travel is in the opposite direction to its lo-
cation.
obstacles located in the
vehicle's trajectory and which are more
than 30 cm away from the vehicle are
displayed in yellow.
obstacles that are less than
30 cm away from the vehicle are dis-
played in red.
Moreover, with the SEAT Media System
Plus/Navi System radios, a yellow trail indi-
cates the vehicle's expected journey based
on the steering wheel angle.
Whenever the obstacle is located in the vehi-
cle’s direction of travel, the corresponding
audible warning will sound.
As the vehicle approaches an obstacle, the
segments are displayed closer to the vehicle.
When the penultimate segment is displayed,
this means that the vehicle has reached the
collision zone. In the collision zone, the obsta-
cles are represented in red, including those
out of the path. Do not continue to move for-
ward (or backward)
›››
in General infor-
mation on page 223,
›
›
›
in General infor-
mation on page 223 !
White segments:
Yellow segments:
Red segments:
226
Driver assistance systems
Adjusting the display and audible
w
arnings
The settings for the display and audible
warnings are contr
olled via the Easy Con-
nect*.
Automatic activation
on – activates the Automatic activa-
tion option
›››
page 225.
off – deactivates the Automatic acti-
vation option
›››
page 225.
Front volume*
Volume in the front and rear area.
Front sound settings/sharpness*
Frequency (tone) of the sound in the front
area.
Rear volume*
Volume in the rear area.
Rear sound settings/sharpness*
Frequency (tone) of the sound in the rear
area.
Adjust volume
With the parking aid switched on, the active
audio/video source volume will be reduced to
the intensity of the selected setting.
Error messages
When the Parking Aid is activated or when it is
switched on, if a continuous w
arning can be
heard for several seconds (additionally, in the
case of Parking system Plus, the LED of the
button flashes), there is a fault in the sys-
tem.
Parking System Plus*
If there is a fault in a sensor, the symbol is
displayed on the Easy Connect display in
front of/behind the vehicle. If a rear sensor is
faulty, only the obstacles in the areas
A
and
B
are displayed
›
›
›
Fig. 226. If a front sensor
is faulty, only the obstacles in the areas
C
and
D
are displayed.
Hav
e the f
ault corr
ected by a specialised
workshop without delay.
Towing bracket
In vehicles equipped with a towing bracket
de
vice fr
om the f
actory, when the trailer is
connected electrically, the Parking Aid rear
sensors will not be activated when reverse
gear is engaged, when the selector lever is
turned to position R or when the button is
pressed.
Parking System Plus
The distance to possible obstacles at the rear
of the vehicle will not be displayed on the
screen and nor will it be indicated by means
of audible sound signals.
The Easy Connect system screen will only
display objects detected at the front, and the
vehicle's trajectory will be hidden.
Rear Assist “Rear View Cam-
era”*
Operating and safety warnings
WARNING
●
The Rear Assist does not make it possibl
e
to precisely calculate the distance from
obstacles (people, vehicles, etc.) and nor
can it overcome the system's own limits,
hence using it may cause serious accidents
and injuries if used negligently or without
due care. The driver should be aware of
his/her surroundings at all times to ensure
safe driving.
●
The camera lens expands and distorts
the field of vision and displays the objects
on the screen in a different, vague manner.
The perception of distances is also distor-
ted by this effect.
»
227
Driving
●
Due to the screen r
esolution or insuffi-
cient light conditions, some items may be
displayed in an unsatisfactory manner or
not at all. Take special care with thin posts,
fences, railings or trees that might not be
displayed on screen and could damage the
vehicle.
●
The rear assist has blind spots where it is
not possible to represent people or objects
(small children, animals and certain ob-
jects cannot be detected in its field of vi-
sion). Monitor the vehicle's surrounding
area at all times.
●
Keep the camera lens clean, free of ice
and snow, and do not cover it.
●
The system is not a replacement for driv-
er awareness. Supervise the parking oper-
ation at all times, as well as the vehicle's
surrounding area. Adapt your speed and
driving style at all times to suit visibility,
weather, road and traffic conditions.
●
Do not be distracted from the traffic by
looking at the screen.
●
The images on the rear assist screen are
only two-dimensional. Due to a lack of spa-
tial depth, protruding parts or holes in the
road, for example, are more difficult to de-
tect or may not be seen at all.
●
Vehicle load modifies the representation
of the orientation lines displayed. The
width represented by the lines diminishes
with vehicle load. Pay special attention to
the vehicle's surroundings when the inside
of the vehicle of the luggage compartment
is carrying a heavy load.
●
In the foll
owing situations, the objects or
other vehicles shown in the navigation sys-
tem display appear to be further away or
closer than they really are: Pay special at-
tention:
–
On moving from a horizontal plane to a
slope.
–
On moving from a slope to a horizontal
plane.
–
If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the
rear.
–
When the vehicle approaches objects
that are not on the ground surface or
are jutting out from it. These objects
may also be outside the camera's an-
gle of vision when reversing.
Note
●
It is important t
o take great care and pay
special attention if you are not yet familiar
with the system.
●
Rear assist will not be available if the ve-
hicle's rear lid is open.
Instructions for use
Fig. 230
On the rear bumper: location of the
r
ear assist camer
a.
A camera on the rear bumper aids the driver
during r
e
v
erse parking or manoeuvring
›››
Fig. 230. The camera image is viewed to-
gether with orientation lines projected by the
system on the Infotainment system screen.
The bottom of the screen displays part of the
bumper corresponding to the number plate
area that will be used as reference by the
driver.
Rear assist settings
Rear assist offers the user the possibility to
change the image's brightness, contrast and
colour settings.
To change these settings:
●
Park the vehicle in a safe place.
●
Apply the parking brake.
228
Driver assistance systems
●
S
wit
ch the ignition on.
●
If necessary, s
witch on the Infotainment
system.
●
Engage reverse gear or turn the selector
lever to position R.
●
Press the function button displayed on
the right of the image.
●
Make the desired adjustments on the menu
by pressing the –/+ function buttons or by
moving the corresponding scroll button.
Necessary conditions for parking and ma-
noeuvring with the rear assist
The system should not be used in the follow-
ing cases:
●
If the image displayed is not very reliable or
is distorted, for example low visibility or dirty
lens.
●
If the area behind the vehicle is not dis-
played very clearly or is incomplete.
●
If the vehicle is heavily loaded at the rear.
●
If the position and installation angle of the
camera have been changed, e.g. after a rear-
end collision. Have the system checked by a
specialised workshop.
Familiarising yourself with the system
To familiarise yourself with the system, the
orientation lines and their function, SEAT rec-
ommends practising parking and manoeu-
vring with the rear assist in a place without
too much traffic or in a car park when there
are good weather and visibility conditions.
Cleaning the camera lens
Keep the camera lens clean and clear of
snow and ice:
●
Moisten the lens using a normal alcohol-
based glass cleaning product and clean the
lens with a dry cloth.
●
Remove snow using a small brush.
●
Use de-icing spray to remove any ice.
CAUTION
●
Never use abr
asive cleaning products to
clean the camera lens.
●
Do not use hot or warm water to remove
ice or snow from the camera lens. Doing so
could damage the camera.
Parking and manoeuvring with the
r
ear assist
Fig. 231
Display on the Infotainment system
scr
een: guidance lines.
Switching the system on and off
●
The rear assist will switch on when the igni-
tion is on or the engine running, on engaging
r
e
v
erse gear (manual gearbox) or on chang-
ing the selector lever to the R position (auto-
matic gearbox).
●
The system switches off 8 seconds after
disengaging reverse gear (manual gearbox)
or removing the selector lever from the R po-
sition (automatic gearbox). The system will
also disconnect immediately after the ignition
is switched off.
In combination with the Parking System Plus
›››
page 222, the camera image will cease to
be transmitted immediately when reverse
gear is engaged or when the selector lever is
»
229
Driving
moved from the R position, and the optical in-
f
ormation pr
o
vided by the Parking Aid system
will be displayed.
Also in combination with the system, the rear
assist image can also be concealed:
●
By pressing one of the Infotainment system
buttons on the display.
●
OR: By pressing the miniature vehicle that
appears on the left of the screen (which
switches to the full-screen mode of the Park-
ing System Plus's optical system).
If you wish to display the rear assist image
again:
●
Disengage reverse, or change the selector
lever's position, engage reverse again or
move the selector lever to position R.
●
OR: Press the RVC function button
1)
Meaning of the orientation lines
›››
Fig. 231
Side lines: extension of the vehicle (the
approximate width of the vehicle plus the
rear view mirrors) on the road surface.
1
End of the side lines: the ar
ea mark
ed in
gr
een ends approximately 2 m behind the
vehicle on the road surface.
Mid line: indicates a distance of approxi-
mately 1 m behind the vehicle on the road
surface.
Horizontal red line: indicates a safe dis-
tance of approximately 40 cm at the rear
of the vehicle on the road surface.
Parking manoeuvre
●
Place the vehicle in front of the parking
space and engage reverse gear (manual
gearbox) or move the selector to the R posi-
tion (automatic gearbox).
●
Reverse slowly, and turn the steering wheel
so that the side orientation lines lead towards
the parking space.
●
Guide the vehicle into the parking space so
that the side orientation lines run parallel to it.
2
3
4
Fatigue detection (break
r
ecommendation)*
Intr
oduction
The Fatigue detection informs the driver when
their driving behaviour shows signs of fatigue
.
WARNING
Do not let the comfort afforded by the Fati-
gue detection system t
empt you into taking
any risks when driving. Take regular breaks,
sufficient in length when making long jour-
neys.
●
The driver always assumes the responsi-
bility of driving to their full capacity.
●
Never drive if you are tired.
●
The system does not detect the tiredness
of the driver in all circumstances. Consult
the information in the section
›››
page 231,
System limitations.
●
In some situations, the system may incor-
rectly interpret an intended driving ma-
noeuvre as driver tiredness.
●
No warning is given in the event of the ef-
fect called microsleep!
1)
WARNING: the RVC function button will only be
activat
ed and available when the reverse gear is
engaged or the selector lever is set to position R.
230
Driver assistance systems
●
Please observe the indications on the in-
strument panel and act as is necessary.
Note
●
F
atigue detection has been de
veloped
for driving on motorways and well paved
roads only.
●
If there is a fault in the system, have it
checked by a specialised workshop.
Function and operation
Fig. 232 On the screen of the instrument pan-
el
: f
atigue det
ection.
Fatigue detection determines the driving be-
haviour of the driv
er when st
arting a journey,
making a cal
culation of tiredness. This is con-
stantly compared with the current driving be-
haviour. If the system detects that the driver is
tired, an audible warning is given with a
sound and an optic warning is shown with a
symbol and complementary message on the
instrument panel display
›››
Fig. 232. The
message on the instrument panel display is
shown for approximately 5 seconds, and de-
pending on the case, is repeated. The system
stores the last message displayed.
The message on the instrument panel display
can be switched off by pressing the
button on the windscreen wiper lever or the
butt
on
on the multi function steering
wheel
›
›
›
page 27.
The message can be recalled to the instru-
ment panel display using the multifunction
display
›››
page 27.
Conditions of operation
Driving behaviour is only calculated on
speeds above about 65 km/h (40 mph) up to
around 200 km/h (125 mph).
Switching on and off
Fatigue detection can be activated or deacti-
vated in the Easy Connect system with the
button and the SETTINGS function button
›
›
›
page 24. A mark indicates that the ad-
justment has been activated.
System limitations
The Fatigue detection has certain limitations
inherent to the system. The following condi-
tions can limit the Fatigue detection or pre-
vent it from functioning.
●
At speeds below 65 km/h (40 mph)
●
At speeds above 200 km/h (125 mph)
●
When cornering
●
On roads in poor condition
●
In unfavourable weather conditions
●
When a sporty driving style is employed
●
In the event of a serious distraction to the
driver
Fatigue detection will be restored when the
vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes,
when the ignition is switched off or when the
driver has unbuckled their seat belt and
opened the door.
In the event of slow driving during a long peri-
od of time (below 65 km/h, 40 mph) the sys-
tem automatically re-establishes the tired-
ness calculation. When driving at a faster
speed the driving behaviour will be recalcula-
ted.
231
Driving
Towing bracket device
Driving with a tr
ail
er
T
echnical requirements
If your vehicle has a factory-fitted towing
bracket or is equipped with a sel
ection of
SEAT Original Accessories, it meets all the
relevant technical and legal requirements.
In vehicles with a towing bracket it is possible
to remove the ball joint, situated (together
with the special assembly instructions) in the
housing for the spare wheel in the vehicle
luggage compartment
›››
page 78, Vehicle
tool kit*.
Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pole power
socket for the electrical connection between
the trailer and the vehicle. If the trailer you are
going to use has a 7-pin connector, the cor-
responding adaptor, acquired from the SEAT
Original Accessories Catalogue, can be
used.
If a towing bracket is to be retro-fitted to the
car, it must be done according to the instruc-
tions of the towing bracket manufacturer.
Note
Any queries that may arise can be directed
to an authorised SEAT dealer
.
Trailer weight
Trailer weight
The combined vehicle and tr
ailer must be
balanced. To do so use the maximum permit-
ted towing bracket load. An insufficient
weight exerted by the trailer drawbar on the
ball joint of the towing bracket will have a
negative impact upon the response of the ve-
hicle-trailer assembly on the road.
Weight distribution
Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy
objects are as near to the axle as possible.
Ensure that the objects do not move.
If the towing vehicle is empty and the trailer
loaded then the load distribution is incorrect.
However, if these conditions cannot be avoi-
ded, drive very slowly.
Tyre pressure values
Correct the tyre pressure in your vehicle to
“total load”
›››
page 256, Service life of
tyres.
Trailer weight
Never exceed the authorised trailer weight
under any circumstances
›››
page 275,
Technical specifications.
The trailer weights listed are only applicable
for altitudes up to 1000 m above sea level.
Due to lower air density, engine power de-
creases depending on the increase in alti-
t
ude, this also reduces climbing ability, which
requires a reduction of the weight of the vehi-
cle with a trailer by 10% for every 1000 m in-
crease in altitude. The weight of the assembly
is calculated by adding the vehicle weight
(loaded) to the trailer weight (loaded). Al-
ways drive with special care when towing a
trailer.
The towed load and support load information
that is displayed on the towing bracket man-
ufacturers label are only values for the verifi-
cation of the device. The correct figures for
your specific vehicle, which are usually lower
than these figures, are given in the documen-
tation of your vehicle.
WARNING
●
Exceeding the maximum established l
oad
per axle and the maximum towing bracket
load in addition to the maximum permitted
load or the load of the vehicle + trailer as-
sembly can cause accidents and serious
injuries.
●
A sliding load can considerably affect
the stability and safety of the vehicle +
trailer assembly, resulting in accidents and
serious injuries.
232
Towing bracket device
Driving with a trailer
Exterior mirrors
Check whether you can see enough of the
road behind the trail
er with the standard rear
vision mirrors. If this is not the case, you
should have additional exterior mirrors fitted.
Observe the relevant statutory requirements
of the country you are in.
Headlights
The front part of the vehicle may be raised
when the trailer is connected and the light
may dazzle the rest of the traffic.
Adapt the height of the headlights using the
headlight range adjuster
›››
page 121
1)
.
Driving speed
For your own safety do not drive faster than
the maximum permitted speed indicated on
the trailer.
At all times, immediately reduce speed if you
detect the slightest swaying movement of the
trailer. Never try to “return the trailer to a
straight position” by accelerating.
Brakes
Brake in due course! If the tr
ailer has an over-
run brake, apply the brakes gently at first
and then, firmly. This will prevent the jerking
that can be caused by locking of trailer
wheels. Change to a lower gear in good time
before descending a slope in order to take
advantage of the engine brake.
The trailer is incorporated into the vehi-
cle's anti-theft alarm system:
●
When the vehicle has a factory-fitted anti-
theft alarm and a towing bracket.
●
When the trailer is electrically connected to
the vehicle via the towing bracket socket.
●
When the vehicle electrical device and the
towing bracket are operational.
●
When the vehicle is locked and the vehicle's
anti-theft alarm device is activated.
Once the electrical connection is interrupted
with the vehicle trailer locked, the alarm
sounds.
Always switch off the vehicle anti-theft alarm
device before connecting or disconnecting a
trailer. The vehicle anti-theft alarm device
could cause the alarm to sound
›››
page 116,
Anti-theft alarm*.
Engine overheating
In the event that the coolant temperature
gauge needle moves to the right section of
the scale or to the red area, immediately re-
duce speed. If the control lamp flashes on
the general instrument panel, stop the vehicle
and switch off the engine. Wait several mi-
nutes and check the coolant level in the tank
›››
page 249.
Please observe the following indications
›››
page 248.
The coolant temperature can be reduced by
switching on the heating.
WARNING
●
Adjust your speed to suit the road and
tr
affic conditions.
●
An electrical installation that is connec-
ted incorrectly or by non-specialised per-
sonnel can prevent the connection of the
current to the trailer and cause faults in the
operation of the electrical system through-
out the entire vehicle, leading to accidents
and serious injury.
●
All electrical work must be carried out
only by specialised services.
●
Never directly connect the trailer electri-
cal device to the electrical sockets of the
»
1)
This does not apply for vehicles with Full LED
xenon headlights.
233
Driving
reverse driving lights or other sources of
electrical current.
CAUTION
●
Av
oid corners, and sudden and sharp
braking.
●
Once the tr
ailing arm has been removed,
place the corresponding cover on the hole
of the fastening point. This prevents dirt
from entering the hole – see the trailer sys-
tem assembly manual.
Note
●
In the event of fr
equent journeys with a
trailer, we recommend also having the ve-
hicle inspected in between the service in-
tervals.
●
When connecting and disconnecting the
trailer, the handbrake must be applied.
●
For technical reasons, trailers with LED
reverse lights cannot be incorporated into
the vehicle anti-theft alarm system.
Towing bracket device
Intr
oduction
If the vehicle is equipped with a towing brack-
et de
vice fr
om the f
actory or is a genuine
SEAT accessory, it meets all national techni-
cal and legal requirements for towing.
Your vehicle is fitted with a 13-pin power sock-
et for the electrical connection between the
trailer and the vehicle. If the trailer is equip-
ped with a 7-pin connector, you can use the
corresponding adaptor, which is available as
a genuine SEAT accessory.
The towing device has a maximum vertical
load of 50 kg.
WARNING
●
Before driving with the ball
-headed bar
fitted, verify its correct assembly and
placement in the clamping bush.
●
Do not use the ball-headed bar if it is not
correctly placed and fixed in the clamping
bush.
●
Do not use the towing device for towing if
it is damaged or has missing parts.
●
Do not modify or adapt the towing device
connection.
●
Never disengage the ball-headed bar
with the trailer still hitched.
CAUTION
Be careful not to damage the paint on the
bumper when handling the ball-headed
bar.
Description
Fig. 233
Towing bracket device support for
hit
ching/ball
-headed bar
.
The ball-headed bar is detachable. It is loca-
t
ed in the spar
e wheel w
ell or in the spare
wheel compartment in the boot
›››
page 78,
Vehicle tool kit*.
Key to
›››
Fig. 233
13-pin socket
Safety flange
1
2
234
Towing bracket device
Clamping bush
Cl
amping bush cap
Ball head co
v
er
Ball-headed bar
Locking balls
Centred
Red marking on the manual regulator
Manual regulator
Key
Key slot cover
Red marking on the manual regulator
White marking on the ball-headed bar
Note
Contact an Authorised Service Partner if
you lose your key.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Placing in service position
Fig. 234
Placing in service position.
Fig. 235
Service position.
Before assembling, place the ball-headed
bar in service position.
–
Turn key
A
fully in the direction of arrow
1
›››
Fig. 234.
–
Hold the ball-headed bar with your left
hand.
–
Pull manual regulator
B
outward in the di-
r
ection of arr
o
w
2
and turn it fully in the di-
r
ection of arr
o
w
3
.
»
235
Driving
The manual regulator will remain in this posi-
tion.
Service position
›
›
›
Fig. 235
●
Key
C
is in an open position – the key ar-
r
o
w points t
o the “unlocked” symbol. The key
cannot be removed from the key slot.
●
The
D
locking balls may be fully inserted
int
o the body of the ball
-headed bar by ap-
plying some pr
essure.
●
The red
E
marking on the manual regula-
t
or points t
o
wards the white marking on the
ball-headed bar.
●
Between the manual regulator and the
body of the ball-headed bar there is a clearly
visible space of approximately 4 mm
F
.
Once the ball
-headed bar has been posi-
tioned lik
e this, it will be r
eady to be placed in
the clamping bush.
WARNING
Do not use the ball-headed bar if it cannot
be correctly placed in the service position.
CAUTION
The key cannot be removed from the man-
ual regulat
or key slot when it is in the serv-
ice position.
Assembly of the ball-headed bar
Fig. 236 Placing the ball-headed bar/locking
and r
emo
ving the k
ey.
Fig. 237 Placing the key slot cover.
–
Remove the cap from the clamping bush
4
›››
Fig. 233 by pulling do
wnw
ar
ds.
–
Place the ball-headed bar in the service
position
›››
page 235.
–
Hold the ball-headed bar from underneath
›››
Fig. 236 and push it into the clamping
bush as far as possible until you hear it click
into place
›››
.
The manual r
egul
at
or
A
aut
omatically
t
urns in the opposit
e direction, adjusting to
the ball-headed bar
›››
.
–
Switch off the manual regulator lock with
k
ey
B
by turning the key fully to the right in
the dir
ection of arr
o
w
1
– the arrow in the
k
ey displ
ays the “l
ocked” symbol.
–
Remove the key in the direction of arrow
2
.
–
Place cover
C
over the manual regulator
l
ock in the dir
ection of arr
ow
3
›
›
›
Fig. 237.
236
Towing bracket device
–
V
erify the corr
ect pl
acement of the ball-
headed bar
›››
page 237.
WARNING
●
Do not hold the manual regul
ator with
your hand when fitting the ball-headed bar
since you could sustain injuries to your fin-
gers.
●
When mounting the ball-headed bar, al-
ways lock it with a key and remove the key
from the slot.
●
The ball-headed bar must not be in the
service position with the key in the key slot.
●
If the ball-headed bar is not placed in the
service position you will not be able to
place it in the clamping bush.
CAUTION
When removing the key, always place the
cover o
ver the key slot of the manual regu-
lator to prevent dirt from entering.
Note
Once removed, place the clamping bush
cap in an appropriate l
ocation in the boot.
Verification of correct placement
Fig. 238
Correct placement of the ball-head-
ed bar
.
Before using the ball-headed bar, ensure it is
corr
ectly fitt
ed.
Ensur
e that:
●
The ball-headed bar does not come out of
the clamping bush in a “jerky” manner.
●
The red mark
A
›
›
›
Fig. 238 on the manual
regulator signals toward the white mark on
the ball-headed bar.
●
The manual regulator is adjusted to the
ball-headed bar, leaving no space between
them.
●
The regulator is locked and the key has
been removed.
●
Cover
B
has been placed over the manual
r
egul
at
or lock.
WARNING
Only use the towing bracket device when
the ball-headed bar is properly fitt
ed!
237
Driving
Disassembly of the ball-headed
bar
Fig. 239
Remove the key slot cover/unlock
with the k
ey.
Fig. 240 Unblock the ball-headed bar.
–
Remove cover
A
from over the regulator
k
ey sl
ot in the dir
ection of arrow
1
›››
Fig. 239.
–
Insert key
B
in the key slot.
–
Open the manual regulator lock by turning
k
ey
B
fully to the left in the direction of ar-
r
o
w
2
. The arrow on the key points to the
“unl
ock
ed” symbol.
–
Hol
d the ball-headed bar from underneath
›››
Fig. 240 and remove manual regulator
C
with your other hand in the direction of
arr
o
w
3
.
–
Turn the removed regulator fully in the di-
r
ection of arr
o
w
4
and hold it firmly in this
position.
–
Remove the ball-headed bar from the
cl
amping bush, pulling do
wnw
ard in the di-
rection of arrow
5
.
The ball-headed bar should be placed in the
service position so that it is r
eady t
o be inser
-
ted into the clamping bush
›››
.
–
Place the cover over the clamping bush
4
›››
Fig. 233.
WARNING
●
Never leave the ball-headed bar unse-
cured in the boot. It could be damaged in
the e
vent of sudden braking, putting the
safety of passengers at risk!
●
Never disassemble the ball-headed bar
with the trailer still hitched.
CAUTION
●
If you do not turn the manual regul
ator
fully, it will return to its original position
when the ball-headed bar is removed. The
manual regulator will be stuck to the ball-
headed bar and you will not be able to put
it in the service position. Therefore, before
you assemble it again, you must place the
ball-headed bar in this position.
●
After disassembly, place the cap on the
clamping bush’s orifice. This way you will
prevent dirt from entering the clamping
bush.
Note
●
Before disassembling the ball
-headed
bar, we recommend placing the cover on
the ball head.
238
Towing bracket device
●
Clean the ball-headed bar thor
oughly
before returning it to the on-board toolbox.
Use and maintenance
Cover the clamping bush with the cap to pre-
vent dirt from ent
ering.
Before hooking on the trailer, check the ball
head and, if necessary, lubricate it with ade-
quate lubricant.
Place the protective cover over the ball head
when storing the bar. This way, you will avoid
getting the boot dirty.
If it gets dirty, clean and dry the clamping
bush thoroughly with an appropriate product.
CAUTION
The top part of the clamping bush opening
is lubricated. Be careful not t
o remove this
lubrication.
239
Practical tips
Practical tips
Accessories and modifi-
cations t
o the v
ehicl
e
Accessories and modifica-
tions to the vehicle
Accessories, replacement parts
and repair work
If you wish to retrofit accessories in the vehi-
cl
e
, or if a part of the v
ehicle has been re-
placed by a new part or technical modifica-
tions are required, the following instructions
must be taken into account:
●
Before purchasing accessories or spare
parts and before making technical modifica-
tions, always request advice from an Author-
ised SEAT dealer
›››
.
●
In the event that technical modifications
ar
e carried out on the v
ehicl
e, the instructions
and regulations specified by the company,
SEAT, must be observed.
No damage will be caused to the vehicle if
the established procedures are respected,
which guarantees safe driving and operation.
After the modifications are carried out, the
vehicle will comply with the restrictions and
regulations of the highway code. More infor-
mation can be obtained at an Authorised
SEAT dealer, where all jobs required can be
carried out appropriately.
Vehicle improvements and modifications
The owner must keep the technical docu-
mentation regarding the modifications car-
ried out on the vehicle so it can be handed
over to those responsible for processing end-
of-life vehicles. This ensures end-of-life pro-
cessing of the vehicle, while protecting the
environment.
Work done on the electrical components and
software can cause disruption in operations.
Due to the interconnection of electronic com-
ponents, their malfunction can also impair
systems that are not directly affected. This
can adversely affect reliability of the vehicle,
and can produce excessive wear of the parts.
Damage caused by technical modifications
that are not made with the consent of SEAT
will be excluded from the warranty – see war-
ranty certificate.
WARNING
●
Jobs or modifications unduly carried out
on your vehicle can cause disruption t
o op-
erations - Risk of accident!
●
We recommend that you use only ex-
pressly authorised SEAT Accessories and
SEAT Original Spare Parts for your vehicle.
The reliability, safety and compatibility
with your vehicle of SEAT original spar
e
parts and accessories has been verified.
●
Despite the continuous observation of
the market, we cannot judge nor guarantee
the suitability of other products for your ve-
hicle, be they authorised products or prod-
ucts approved by a state testing facility.
Note
SEAT original spare parts and accessories
can be pur
chased at authorised SEAT deal-
ers wher
e the purchased parts can also be
fitted.
Modifications and effects of the
airbag syst
em
In the adjustment and modification, respect
the SEAT dir
ectiv
e
.
Modifications and corrections of the front
bumper, doors, front seats, roof or bodywork
must be carried out at authorised SEAT work-
shops. Components of the airbag system can
be found in these parts of the vehicle.
WARNING
●
Airbag modules must nev
er be repaired.
They must be replaced.
●
Never fit components of the airbag sys-
tem removed from old vehicles or those
240
Checking and refilling levels
originating from a recycling process in the
vehicle
.
●
The modification of the suspension of the
vehicle wheels, including the use of non-
permitted combinations of tyres and rims
can alter the operation of the airbag sys-
tem and increase the risk of serious or fatal
injuries in an accident.
●
During all jobs on the airbag system, in
addition to the removal and fitting of parts
of the system in the course of other repair
jobs, parts of the airbag system can be
damaged. Therefore in the event of an ac-
cident, this may cause the airbags to acti-
vate incorrectly or not activate at all.
Radio and aerial reception
In vehicles factory-fitted with an audio or
navigation syst
em, the aerial may be inst
al
-
led in different places:
●
inside the rear window next to the heating
elements,
●
on the roof of the vehicle.
Checking and refilling lev-
el
s
Fuel
R
efuelling
Fig. 241
Rear part of the vehicle, right side:
t
ank lid/t
ank lid with unscr
ewed cap.
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 41
The correct type of fuel for your vehicle is in-
dicated on a sticker on the inside of the fuel
tank flap, along with the tyre size and pres-
sure
›››
Fig. 241 .
Vehicles with a fuel cap with key
–
Press the flap in the direction of the arrow
1
›
›
›
Fig. 241.
–
Open the cover in the direction indicated
by the arrow
2
.
–
Hold onto the fuel tank cap with one hand
and unl
ock it using the ignition k
ey, t
urning it
anti-clockwise.
–
Unscrew the tank cap anti-clockwise and
place it on top of the tank flap
›››
Fig. 241
.
–
Insert the pump nozzle into the fuel feed
tube as far as it will go.
The fuel tank is full as soon as the automatic
filler nozzle cuts out
›››
.
–
Remove the pump nozzle from the fuel feed
t
ube and pl
ace it back on the pump
.
–
Screw the tank cap clockwise until it clicks
into place.
–
Hold onto the fuel tank cap with one hand
and lock it using the ignition key, turning it
clockwise.
–
Press the tank flap with your hand to close
it.
»
241
Practical tips
–
Check that the fuel fl
ap is corr
ectly cl
osed.
Vehicles with a keyless fuel cap (the side
flap will unlock using the central locking
system)
–
Once the vehicle has been unlocked using
the central locking button, press the fuel
flap in the direction of the arrow
1
›››
Fig. 2
41
.
–
Open the co
ver in the direction indicated
by the arrow
2
.
–
Unscrew the tank cap anti-clockwise and
pl
ace it on t
op of the t
ank flap
›››
Fig. 241
.
–
Insert the pump nozzle into the fuel feed
tube as far as it will go.
The fuel tank is full as soon as the automatic
filler nozzle cuts out
›››
.
–
Remove the pump nozzle from the fuel feed
t
ube and pl
ace it back on the pump
.
–
Screw the tank cap clockwise until it clicks
into place.
–
Close the tank flap. Make sure you hear it
click into place.
–
Check that the fuel flap is properly closed.
WARNING
Observe all relevant statutory regulations
on transporting spar
e fuel canisters. For
safety reasons, we do not recommend car-
rying a spare canister in the vehicle. The
canister could be damaged in an accident
and fuel may leak. Risk of fire!
CAUTION
●
Switch off the auxiliary heat
er (heater
and independent heater) before filling the
tank.
●
The fuel tank is full as soon as the auto-
matic filler nozzle cuts out. Do not continue
filling, as this will fill the expansion cham-
ber.
●
Never completely empty the tank! An ir-
regular fuel supply can cause ignition
faults, which can result in damage to a sub-
stantial amount of engine parts and the ex-
haust system.
●
If any fuel is spilt onto the paintwork of
the vehicle, it should be removed immedi-
ately. Risk of damage to paintwork!
Note
There is no emergency mechanism for the
manual release of the fuel t
ank flap. If nec-
essary, request assistance from special-
ised personnel.
Note
The fuel tank capacity is around 55 litres,
of which 7 litres are the r
eserve.
Identification of the fuel
1)
Fig. 242
Identification of fuels according to
Eur
opean Union (EU) Dir
ectiv
e 2014/94/
Fuels are identified with different symbols.
Depending on the fuel, the diff
er
ent symbol
s
are on the pump and the tank lid of your vehi-
cle. The identification serves to prevent con-
fusion when choosing the fuel.
Petrol with ethanol (“E” stands for Etha-
nol). The number indicates the percent-
age of ethanol in the petrol. “E5” means,
for example, an ethanol ratio of 5% max.
1
1)
Depending on country
242
Checking and refilling levels
Diesel with biodiesel (“B” st
ands f
or
Bio-
diesel). The number indicates the per-
centage of biodiesel in the diesel. “B7”
means, for example, a proportion of bio-
diesel of max. 7%.
Natural gas: “CNG” means Compressed
Natural Gas.
Type of petrol
3 Applies to vehicles: with petrol engine
The correct gr
ade of petrol is listed inside the
fuel tank flap.
The vehicle is equipped with a catalytic con-
verter and must only be run on unleaded
petrol. The petrol must comply with the
standard EN 228 and be sulphur-free. Fuels
with a 10% ethanol ratio can be refuelled
(E10)
1)
. The types of petrol are differentiated
by using the octane numbers (RON) or via
the anti-knock index (AKI).
The following pieces of text show the infor-
mation included in the corresponding stickers
on the tank lid (examples):
2
3
Super unleaded petrol 95 octane petrol or
normal 91 oct
ane petr
ol at l
east
We recommend refuelling with super 95 oc-
tane petrol (91 AKI). If not available: normal 91
octane petrol (87 AKI) (with a slight power
loss).
Super unleaded petrol, 95 octanes at
least
You should use super 95 octane petrol (91
AKI) at least.
If super is not available, if necessary, use nor-
mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case only
use moderate engine speeds and a light
throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi-
ble.
Unleaded super plus 98 octane petrol or
super 95 octane petrol at least
We recommend refuelling with super plus 98
octane petrol (93 AKI). If not available: super
95 octane petrol (91 AKI) (with a slight power
loss).
If super is not available, if necessary, use nor-
mal 91 octane petrol (87 AKI). In this case only
use moderate engine speeds and a light
throttle. Refuel with super as soon as possi-
ble.
CAUTION
●
Fuels high percent
age of ethanol, e.g.
E30 - E100 button must not be used. The
fuel system would be damaged. Exception:
vehicles with Totalflex engine
›››
page 244,
Ethanol fuel.
●
A single refuelling with leaded fuel or
other metal additives entails a permanent
deterioration of the effectiveness of the
catalytic converter.
●
Only use fuel additives that have been
approved by SEAT. The products that con-
tain substances to increase the octane rat-
ing or decrease knocking may contain met-
al additives that damage the engine and
catalytic converter. This type of products
must not be used.
●
Do not use fuels shown in the pump as
containing metals. LRP (lead replacement
petrol) fuels contain high concentrations of
metal additives. Risk of engine damage!
●
High engine speed and full throttle can
damage the engine when using petrol with
an octane rating lower than the correct
grade for the engine.
Note
●
Fuel with an octane rating higher than the
one r
equired by the engine can be used.
»
1)
Follow the regulations of the country you are
driving in.
243
Practical tips
●
In countries in which there is no sulphur-
fr
ee fuel, it is also allowed to use low sul-
phur content fuel.
Ethanol fuel
3 Applies to vehicles: with Totalflex engine
You can r
ecognise vehicles with Totalflex en-
gines
1)
by label on the fuel tank lid with with
the marking “Petrol/ethanol”.
Vehicles with Totalflex engine can run with
unleaded petrol (95 octane / 91 AKI) accord-
ing to ANP No. 57 and with fuels with any high
percentage of ethanol. The vehicle is refuel-
led in the same way as petrol refuelling.
Also consider that
›››
page 243, Type of pet-
rol
Note
SEAT recommends filling the tank exclu-
sively with petrol e
very 10,000 km to de-
crease impurities that using E100 ethanol
fuel might have left in the engine.
Diesel
3 Applies to vehicles: with diesel engine
Please not
e the information on the inside of
the fuel tank flap.
We recommend you use Diesel according to
standard EN 590.
The diesel can thicken at very low tempera-
tures, thus affecting the start or operation of
the engine. To ensure that you can continue
to use your vehicle as usual, the diesel sold in
gas stations is provided -depending on the
station- with fluidity when cold. Ask the em-
ployee of the petrol station whether their die-
sel is suitable for use in winter and if it is suited
for current and future temperatures.
Water in the fuel filter
2)
If your vehicle has a diesel engine and is
equipped with a fuel filter with a water sep-
arator, the instrument panel may display the
following warning:
Water in the fuel
filter. If this is the case, take the vehicle to
a specialised workshop so that they can
drain the fuel filter.
CAUTION
●
Never use of F
AME (biodiesel), petrol,
heating oil, other fuels or thinning agents
as they can cause severely damage the
fuel system and the engine.
●
If the wrong fuel has been filled, do not
start the engine under any circumstances.
Risk of damaging the fuel system and the
engine! Obtain technical assistance.
Engine compartment
W
orking in the engine compar
t
-
ment
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 13
Always be aware of the danger of injury
and scalding as well as the risk of acci-
dent or fire when working in the engine
compartment, e.g. when checking and re-
filling fluids. Therefore, always observe
the warnings and follow all general safety
precautions. The engine compartment is a
dangerous area.
1)
This motor is only available in some markets.
2)
Valid for the market: Algeria.
244
Checking and refilling levels
WARNING
●
Never open the bonnet if you see st
eam,
smoke or coolant escaping from the engine
compartment. Risk of scalding! Wait until
no steam or coolant can be seen before
opening the bonnet.
●
Switch off the engine and remove the key
from the ignition.
●
Engage neutral in vehicles with manual
gearbox and move the selector lever to po-
sition P in vehicles with automatic gearbox.
●
Apply the handbrake firmly.
●
Wait for the engine to cool down.
●
For safety reasons, the bonnet must al-
ways be closed when the vehicle is moving.
Therefore, after closing the bonnet always
check that it is properly secured.
●
Should you notice that the bonnet is not
safely secured when the vehicle is moving,
stop the vehicle immediately and close the
bonnet properly. Risk of accident!
●
Keep children away from the engine
compartment.
●
Do not touch hot engine parts. Risk of
burns!
●
Never spill fluids on hot engine compart-
ments. These fluids can cause a fire (e.g.
antifreeze in coolant)!
●
Take care not to cause short circuits in
the electrical system, especially when
working on the battery.
●
Never t
ouch the radiator fan when the en-
gine is hot. The fan may start running sud-
denly!
●
Never cover the engine with additional in-
sulating materials such as a blanket. Risk of
fire!
●
Do not unscrew the cap on the coolant
expansion tank when the engine is hot. The
cooling system is under pressure!
●
Protect face, hands and arms from any
hot steam or hot coolant released by cov-
ering the cap with a large, thick rag when
opening the expansion tank.
●
Do not leave any objects, such as cloths
or tools, in the engine compartment.
●
When working underneath the vehicle,
secure it so that it cannot roll away and
support it safely on suitable supports. The
hydraulic jack is not sufficient for this pur-
pose. Risk of injuries!
●
If any tests have to be performed with the
engine running, there is an extra safety risk
from rotating parts, such as the drive belt,
alternator and radiator fan, etc., and from
the high-voltage ignition system. You
should also note the following:
–
Never touch the electrical wiring of the
ignition system.
–
Keep away from moving engine parts
when wearing jewellery, loose clothing
or long hair. Risk of fatal injuries! All
jewellery must be removed, hair tied
back and close-fitting clothing worn.
●
Observe the foll
owing additional warn-
ings if work on the fuel system or the elec-
trical system is necessary.
–
Always disconnect the battery from the
on-board network.
–
Do not smoke.
–
Never work near naked flames.
–
Always keep an approved fire extin-
guisher immediately available.
CAUTION
●
When t
opping up fluids, make sur
e the
correct fluid is put into the correct filler
opening. Otherwise this can cause serious
malfunctions or engine damage!
●
Never open the bonnet using the release
catch. Risk of damage!
For the sake of the environment
Due to the environmentally-friendly dis-
posal of fluids, the equipment necessary
and the knowledge r
equired, let an author-
ised SEAT dealer change fluids during serv-
ice inspections of the vehicle.
Note
●
Please contact an authorised SEAT deal
-
er with any doubts regarding fluids.
●
Fluids of the correct specifications can
be acquired from the selection of SEAT
Original Accessories.
245
Practical tips
Checking levels
Fig. 243
Diagram for the location of the various el-
ements.
From time to time, the levels of the different
fluids in the v
ehicl
e must be check
ed. Never
fill with incorrect fluids, otherwise serious
damage to the engine may be caused.
Coolant expansion tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Window washer water tank . . . . . . . . . . 251
Engine oil filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Engine oil level dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Brake fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
The checking and replenishment of the serv-
ice fluids are carried out on the components
1
2
3
4
5
6
mentioned above. These operations are de-
scribed in the
›
›
›
page 244.
Overview
You will find further explanations, instructions
and restrictions on the technical specifica-
tions as of
›››
page 275.
Note
The layout of the engine compartment is
very similar t
o all petrol and diesel engines.
Radiator fan
The radiator is driven by an electric motor
and controlled accor
ding to the temperature
of the coolant.
After the engine has been stopped and the
ignition switched off, the radiator fan may
continue running for around 10 minutes.
246
Checking and refilling levels
Engine oil
Gener
al not
es
The engine comes with a special, multi-grade
oil that can be used all year round.
Because the use of high-quality oil is essen-
tial f
or the correct operation of the engine
and its long useful life, when topping up or
changing oil, use only those oils that comply
with VW standards.
We recommend that the oil change indicated
in the Maintenance Programme, be per-
formed by a technical service or specialised
workshop.
If the engine oil level is too low
You can get information about the correct en-
gine oil for your vehicle at your specialised
shop. If you have to change your engine oil,
use that oil.
If the recommended engine oil is not availa-
ble, in the event of an emergency you can
add oil once up to a maximum of 0.5 L of the
next oil until the next oil change:
●
Valid for vehicles with petrol engines:
standard VW 504 00, VW 502 00,
VW 508 00, ACEA C or API SN.
V
ehicles with diesel particulate filter*
Only VW 507 00 engine oil, with reduced ash
formation, may be used in diesel engines
equipped with particulate filter. Using other
types of oil will cause a higher soot concen-
tration and reduce the life of the DPF. There-
fore:
●
Avoid mixing this oil with other engine oils.
●
Only in exceptional circumstances, if the
engine oil level is too low
›››
page 248 and
you cannot obtain the oil specified for your
vehicle, you can use a small quantity of oil
(once) conforming to the specifications
VW 506 00, VW 506 01, VW 505 00,
VW 505 01 or ACEA B3/ACEA B4 (up to 0.5 l)
›››
page 42.
Note
Before a long trip, we recommend finding
an engine oil that conforms to the corr
e-
sponding VW specifications and recom-
mend keeping it in the vehicle. This way, the
correct engine oil will always be available
for a top-up if needed.
Warning lamp
Flashes red
The information display shows:
Oil pressure. Switch off the engine!
Instruction Manual!
Do not carry on driving! Switch off the engine
and check the engine oil level
›››
page 248
If the symbol flashes although the oil level is correct,
do not drive on. Do not e
ven run the engine at
idle speed! Go to a technical service.
It lights up yellow
The information display shows:
Check oil level!
Park the vehicl
e, stop the engine and check the en-
gine oil level
›››
page 248.
If the bonnet stays open for over 30 seconds, the
warning lamp switches off. If the engine oil is not refil-
led, the warning lamp illuminates again after 100 km
(62 miles).
It flashes yellow
The information display shows:
Oil sensor! Workshop
!If the engine oil lev
el sensor is faulty, The warning
lamp flashes various times after the ignition is
switched on and an audible warning is given. Go to a
technical service.
247
Practical tips
Checking engine oil level
Fig. 244
Engine oil dipsticks.
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 42
The dipstick shows the engine oil level.
›››
Fig. 244.
Checking oil level
–
Park the vehicle on a level surface and en-
sure the engine is at operating temperature.
–
Switch the ignition off.
–
Open the bonnet.
–
Wait a few minutes for the engine oil to flow
back to the sump and remove the dipstick.
–
Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth and in-
sert it again as far as it will go.
–
Then pull the dipstick out again and check
the oil level.
It is normal for the engine to consume a cer-
tain amount of oil. Depending on how you
drive and the conditions in which the vehicle
is used, oil consumption can be up to 0.5 li-
tres per 1,000 km. Oil consumption can also
be higher for the first 5,000 km (3000 miles).
You should therefore check the oil level at
regular intervals, ideally every time you fill the
tank or before setting off on a long trip.
CAUTION
●
The oil lev
el must never exceed area
A
.
Risk of damaging the exhaust system!
●
If the engine oil cannot be t
opped up un-
der the given conditions, do not drive on!
Stop the engine and seek the professional
assistance of an Official Service, as this
could cause serious damage to the engine.
Topping up engine oil
–
Check the engine oil level
›
›
›
page 248,
Checking engine oil level.
–
Unscrew the cap from the filler opening.
–
Put in the specified grade of oil 0.5 litres at
a time
›››
page 247.
–
Check the oil level
›››
page 248.
–
Replace the oil filler cap carefully and push
the dipstick all the way in.
Changing engine oil
Engine oil must be changed with the frequen-
cy indicated in the Maintenance Pr
ogramme
or according to the service interval indicator
›››
page 33.
CAUTION
Do not mix engine oil with additives. Risk of
damage to the engine! Damage caused by
these products is not co
vered by the war-
ranty.
Note
Wash your skin thoroughly if it comes into
contact with engine oil.
Coolant
Contr
ol l
amp
It lights up blue
The engine has not yet reached service tempera-
ture
a)
.
Av
oid high engine speeds, hard acceleration and
subjecting the engine to high loads.
a)
This does not apply to vehicles equipped with an in-
f
ormativ
e displ
ay.
248
Checking and refilling levels
It lights up or flashes red
The coolant temperature is too high or the coolant
lev
el too low.
Do not carry on driving! Switch off the engine
and check the coolant level
›››
page 249, and fill it if
necessary
›››
page 249.
The information display shows:
Check coolant! Instruction Manual!
If the coolant is situated in the prescribed
area, the high temper
ature may be due to a
fault in the cooling system fan. Check the ra-
diator fan fuse and replace it if necessary
›››
page 45.
If the warning lamp (red) remains lit up, de-
spite both the coolant level and the radiator
fan fuse being in correct condition, stop
the vehicle!
Go to a technical service.
WARNING
●
Take car
e when opening the coolant res-
ervoir. When the engine is warm or hot, the
system is pressurised – Danger of burns!
Wait for the engine to cool before opening
the cover.
●
Do not touch the fan. The fan can switch
on automatically regardless of whether the
ignition is switched on.
Checking coolant level
Fig. 245
Engine compartment: coolant tank.
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 43
The coolant expansion tank is located in the
engine compartment of the vehicle.
–
Switch the ignition off.
–
Open the bonnet
›››
page 244.
–
Read off the coolant level on coolant ex-
pansion tank
›››
Fig. 245. When the engine
is cold, the coolant should be between
marks
B
(min.) and
A
(max.). When the
engine is hot, it may be slightly abo
v
e mark
A
(max.).
If the cool
ant fluid l
e
vel in the reservoir is too
low, this will be indicated by the red warn-
ing lamp illuminating on the general dash
panel
›››
page 248. However, we recom-
mend checking the coolant level directly in
the tank.
Coolant fluid loss
Any loss of coolant normally indicates a leak.
It is not sufficient merely to top up the cool-
ant. The cooling system should be inspected
by an Official Service without delay.
CAUTION
●
In the event of a f
ault that causes the en-
gine to overheat, contact an authorised
SEAT dealer immediately, as this could
damage the engine.
●
Anti-freeze that does not correspond to
the correct specification may particularly
affect corrosion protection considerably.
●
Faults caused by corrosion may lead to
coolant leaks. Risk of serious engine faults!
Topping up the coolant level
–
Switch the ignition off.
–
Wait for the engine to cool down.
–
Cover the cap on the coolant expansion
t
ank
›
›
›
Fig. 245 with a cloth and carefully
unscrew the cap.
–
Refill the level of coolant.
–
Screw the cap on again until it clicks into
place.
Do not use a different type of additive if the
prescribed anti-freeze additive is not
»
249
Practical tips
available, in the event of an emergency. In
this case
, use only w
at
er and bring the cool-
ant concentration back up to the correct lev-
el as soon as possible at an Official Service.
Always top up with unused coolant.
Never fill the coolant tank above mark
A
(max.)
›
›
›
Fig. 245 ! Excess coolant is forced
out of the cooling system through the over-
pressure valve in the filler cap of the expan-
sion tank when the engine heats up.
WARNING
●
The anti-freez
e additive and, therefore,
the entire coolant, are a health hazard.
Avoid touching the coolant. Coolant fumes
are also a health hazard. For this reason,
always store the coolant additive in a safe
place out of the reach of children. Risk of
poisoning!
●
If splashed into eyes, rinse immediately
with clean water and seek immediate med-
ical attention.
●
Seek immediate medical attention if the
coolant is accidentally ingested.
CAUTION
If the coolant cannot be topped up under
the given conditions, do not driv
e on. We
recommend contacting an authorised SEAT
dealer, as this can damage the engine.
Brake fluid
Checking br
ak
e fluid l
evel
Fig. 246
Engine compartment: coolant tank.
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 43
The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en-
gine compartment of the vehicle.
–
Switch the ignition off.
–
Open the bonnet
›››
page 244.
–
Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir
›››
Fig. 246. It should be between the “MIN”
and “MAX” marks.
The fluid level drops slightly after a period of
time due to automatic compensation for
brake pad wear. This is quite normal.
However, if the level goes down noticeably in
a short time, or drops below the “MIN” mark,
there may be a leak in the brake system. If the
brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low, this
will be indicated by the warning lamp illumi-
nating on the instrument panel
›››
page 200, Control lamps.
WARNING
●
If the fluid lev
el has dropped below the
MIN mark, do not continue driving. Risk of
accident! Go to a technical service.
●
Heavy use of the brakes may cause a va-
pour lock if the brake fluid is left in the
brake system for too long. This would seri-
ously affect the efficiency of the brakes
and the safety of the vehicle.
Changing the brake fluid
Brake fluid absorbs moisture. Therefore, it
gr
adually absorbs moist
ur
e from the atmos-
phere. If the water content in the brake fluid is
too high, the brake system could corrode. The
water content also reduces the boiling point
of the brake fluid.
The brake fluid must comply with one of the
following standards or specifications:
●
VW 50114
●
FMVSS 116 DOT4
CAUTION
Brake fluid damages the vehicle paintwork.
250
Checking and refilling levels
Window washer system
T
opping up windscr
een w
asher flu-
id
Fig. 247
Engine compartment: windscreen
cl
eaning fluid t
ank
.
Read the additional information carefully
›
›
›
page 44
The container for the windscreen washer
contains the cleaning fluid for the windscreen
or rear window and the headlight washer
system. The container is located in the engine
compartment.
The capacity of the reservoir is approximate-
ly 3.5 litres; in vehicles with a headlight wash-
er system, it is approximately 5.4 litres
1)
.
Plain water on its own is not enough to clean
the glass and the headlights properly. We
therefore recommend using clean water with
a glass cleaning product to eliminate any
stubborn dirt (with an anti-freeze additive
in winter).
Although your vehicle has heated windscreen
washer jets, anti-freeze should always be
added to the water in winter.
Ethanol can be used where glass cleaner
with anti-freeze is unavailable. The concen-
tration of ethanol must be no greater than 15
%. However, remember that anti-freeze in this
proportion only protects down to -5°C
(+23°F).
CAUTION
●
Never mix the windscr
een washing water
with anti-freeze used for the cooling sys-
tem or other additives.
●
If the vehicle is equipped with a headlight
washer system, only mix in with the water a
detergent that does not damage polycar-
bonates.
Note
When topping up the fluid, do not move the
filter from the cont
ainer opening, as this
could contaminate the fluid hoses and lead
to a windscreen w
asher malfunction.
Battery
Introduction
Read the additional information carefully
›››
page 44.
Warning symbols on the battery
Always wear safety glasses!
Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Always
wear glo
ves and hearing protection!
Keep open flames, sparks, uncovered lights
and lit cigarettes aw
ay when working on the
battery!
A highly explosive mixture of gases is re-
leased when the battery is under char
ge!
Keep children away from the battery!
Incorrect handling of the vehicle battery
coul
d l
ead t
o damage. We therefore recom-
mend all work on the vehicle battery be per-
formed by an authorised SEAT dealer.
»
1)
Valid only for certain countries. 5.4 litres for
both versions.
251
Practical tips
Always be aware of the danger of injury and
scal
ding as w
ell as the risk of accident or fir
e
when working on the battery and the electri-
cal system. Therefore, always observe the
warnings and follow all general safety pre-
cautions.
WARNING
●
Battery acid is very corr
osive, therefore,
the battery must be handled with the ut-
most care. Wear protective gloves and pro-
tect your eyes and skin when handling bat-
teries. The corrosive fumes in the air irritate
and inflame the respiratory tract and cause
conjunctivitis. It corrodes tooth enamel.
Causes deep and difficult-to-heal wounds
when it comes in contact with the skin. Re-
peated contact with diluted acids causes
skin disease (inflammation, ulcers and fis-
sures). When in contact with water, acids
dilute and develop a great deal of heat.
●
Do not tilt the battery, as acid could leak
out of the vapour vents. Protect your eyes
with glasses or a protective helmet! Risk of
blindness! If acid should splash into the
eyes, rinse the affected eye immediately
for several minutes using clean water. Then
seek medical care immediately.
●
Neutralize any acid splashes on the skin
or clothing with soap solution as quickly as
possible and rinse off with plenty of water.
If acid is swallowed by mistake, consult a
doctor immediately.
●
Keep children away from the battery.
●
Hydrogen is rel
eased and a highly explo-
sive mixture of gases is generated when the
battery is under charge. Sparks when dis-
connecting or releasing cable terminals
with the ignition switched on could also
cause an explosion.
●
A short circuit is produced if the battery
terminals are bridged, e.g. using metal ob-
jects, cables, etc. Possible consequences
in the event of a short-circuit: melting of
lead plates, battery explosion and fire,
splashing acid.
●
The following is forbidden during work:
fire and open flames, smoking and activi-
ties that could produce sparks. Avoid caus-
ing sparks when handling cables or electri-
cal apparatus. Risk of injury in the event of
large sparks.
●
Before working on the electrical system,
you must switch off the engine, the ignition
and all electrical components and discon-
nect the cable from the negative terminal
(-) of the battery. To change a bulb, simply
switch off the corresponding light.
●
Never charge a frozen or thawed out bat-
tery. Risk of explosion and acid burns! Re-
place a frozen battery.
●
Never use the jump leads on batteries in
which the electrolyte level is too low. Risk
of explosion and acid burns!
●
Never use a damaged battery. Risk of ex-
plosion! Replace a damaged battery imme-
diately.
CAUTION
●
Never disconnect the batt
ery when the
ignition is switched on, as the electrical
system (electronic components) of the ve-
hicle could be damaged. When discon-
necting the battery from the vehicle elec-
trical system, disconnect its negative ter-
minal (-) first. Only then may the positive
terminal (+) be disconnected.
●
When connecting the battery, first con-
nect the positive terminal (+) and then the
negative terminal (-). The battery cables
must never be connected to the wrong bat-
tery terminals. Risk of burning the electrical
installation!
●
Make sure the battery acid does not
come into contact with the bodywork. Risk
of paintwork damage.
●
Do not expose the battery to direct sun-
light to protect it from ultraviolet radiation.
●
If the vehicle is not used for 3 or 4 weeks,
the battery could run flat. This is because
some components use electricity even in
standby mode (e.g. control units). Prevent
the battery from running flat by discon-
necting its negative terminal or leave it
charging at a low current.
●
If you frequently use the vehicle for short
trips, the battery may not fully charge and
could run flat.
252
Checking and refilling levels
For the sake of the environment
A flat battery is particularly harmful waste
for the environment. It must ther
efore be
disposed of according to current local law.
Note
Replace a battery once it is older than 5
years.
Warning lamp
It lights up
Alternator fault.
The control lamp lights up when the ignition is
s
wit
ched on. It shoul
d go out when the engine
has started running.
If the control lamp lights up while driving,
the alternator is no longer charging the bat-
tery. You should immediately drive to the
nearest specialised workshop.
You should avoid using electrical equipment
that is not absolutely necessary because this
will drain the battery.
CAUTION
Additionally, if the warning lamp lights
up while driving, the warning l
amp also
lights up (cooling system fault). Stop the
vehicle and switch off the engine – Risk of
engine damage!
Lifting the battery cover
Fig. 248 Battery: opening the cover.
The battery is located beneath a plastic cov-
er in the engine compartment.
–
Open the battery cover in the direction indi-
cat
ed by the arr
o
w
›››
Fig. 248.
–
The positive terminal (+) of the battery is
connected in reverse order.
Checking the battery electrolyte
level
Fig. 249
Battery: electrolyte level indicator.
We recommend you have the acid level regu-
l
arly check
ed at an official t
echnical service,
particularly in the following cases.
●
At high outside temperatures.
●
On long daily trips.
●
Whenever the vehicle is loaded
›››
page 254, Charging the battery.
In vehicles equipped with a battery with col-
our indicator, the so-called magic eye
›››
Fig. 249 changes colour to indicate the
acid level.
Air bubbles can influence the colour of the in-
dicator. Therefore, carefully knock the indica-
tor before checking the acid level.
●
Black – the acid level is correct.
»
253
Practical tips
●
Col
ourl
ess or light yell
ow – acid level too
low, battery must be changed.
Note
●
The battery acid le
vel is also regularly
checked during servicing at authorised
SEAT dealers.
●
The electrolyte level on “AGM” batteries
cannot be checked for technical reasons.
●
Vehicles equipped with the “Start-Stop”
system include a battery control unit to
control the battery level for repeated en-
gine starting.
Winter service
At low temperatures the battery provides only
a fr
action of the st
arting po
wer it has at nor-
mal temperatures.
A flat battery can also freeze at tempera-
tures slightly below 0°C (+32°F).
We therefore recommend you have the bat-
tery checked and, if necessary, charged at
an official SEAT technical service before the
start of winter.
Charging the battery
A fully-charged battery is essential for relia-
bl
e st
arting.
–
S
witch off the ignition and all electrical
equipment.
–
Only in the case of “fast charge”: discon-
nect both battery connection cables (first
the “negative” terminal and then the “posi-
tive”).
–
Connect the charger cables to the battery
terminals (red = “positive”, black = “nega-
tive”).
–
Plug in the battery charger and switch on.
–
At the end of the charging process: turn off
and unplug the charger.
–
Remove the charger cables.
–
If necessary, reconnect both battery ca-
bles to the battery (first the “positive” cable,
then the “negative” cable).
When charging with a low current (e.g. with a
small battery charger), the battery does not
normally have to be disconnected. The in-
structions of the battery charger manu-
facturer must be followed.
Use a current equivalent to or lower than 10%
of the battery capacity to fully charge the
battery.
Before “fast-charging” the battery however,
both battery cables must be disconnected.
“Fast-charging” a battery is dangerous and
requires a battery charger and special knowl-
edge. Fast charges should be performed by
an official technical service.
The battery caps should not be opened while
the battery is being charged.
CAUTION
In vehicles fitted with the “Start-Stop” sys-
tem, the charger cabl
e cannot be directly
connected to the negative terminal of the
vehicle battery but must be attached to the
engine ground point
›››
page 54.
Disconnecting and connecting the
batt
ery
The following functions will either be inopera-
tiv
e or will not w
ork pr
operly after discon-
necting and reconnecting the battery:
Function Installation
Setting the clock
›››
page 99
The multifunction display
data is deleted
›››
page 101
Note
We recommend having the vehicle checked
by an authorised SEAT dealer to guar
antee
the correct working order of all electrical
systems.
254
Wheels and tyres
Changing the battery
A replacement battery must have the same
capacity, volt
age, current rating and size as
the original. The appropriate types of battery
can be acquired from authorised SEAT deal-
ers.
We recommend having the battery changed
by an authorised SEAT dealer, where the new
battery will be correctly installed and the
original disposed of in line with regulations.
Automatic disconnection of elec-
trical equipment
When heavily-charging a battery, the pro-
gr
amme sel
ect
ed by the electrical system
control unit prevents the battery from auto-
matically discharging. This may result in the
following:
●
Increase in idling speed so that the alterna-
tor can supply more current to the electrical
system.
●
The performance of certain electrical com-
ponents could be limited or some may switch
off temporarily, e.g. the heated seats, the
heated rear window, the 12 V power socket.
Note
Despite any measures taken by the control
unit, the battery could dr
ain. e.g. with the
engine is switched off, the key is turned in
the ignition for a long period or the side
lights or parking lights ar
e switched on. The
switching off of certain electrical compo-
nents does not impair driving comfort and
often the driver will not even notice.
Wheels and tyres
T
yr
es
Intr
oduction
WARNING
●
During the first 500 km, new tyr
es do not
give maximum grip, therefore you should
drive carefully. Risk of accident!
●
Never drive with damaged tyres. Risk of
accident!
●
Only use wheels and tyres that been au-
thorised by SEAT or your vehicle model.
Failure to do so could impair road safety.
Risk of accident!
●
Never exceed the maximum speed per-
mitted for your tyres. Risk of accident due
to tyre damage and loss of vehicle control!
●
Under-inflated tyres are submitted to
greater rolling resistance. This means that
they can overheat at high speeds. This can
cause tread separation and even tyre
blow-out.
●
For driving safety, tyres should be re-
placed at least in pairs according to the
axle and not individually. The tyres with the
deepest tread should always be used on
the front wheels.
●
Never fit used tyres of an unknown age or
prior use.
»
255
Practical tips
●
Tyres must be immediat
ely changed at
the very latest when they have worn down
to the tread wear indicators.
●
Worn tyres reduce the necessary grip at
high speeds on damp surfaces. This could
lead to “aquaplaning” (uncontrolled vehi-
cle movement –“skidding” on damp surfa-
ces).
●
Damaged wheels and tyres must be re-
placed immediately.
●
Do not use summer or winter tyres that
are more than 6 or 4 years old respectively.
●
Wheel bolts should be clean and screw
easily. However, they must never be trea-
ted with grease or oil.
●
If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts
is too low, they could loosen while the vehi-
cle is moving. Risk of accident! If the tight-
ening torque of the wheel bolts is too high,
the bolts and threads could be damaged,
leading to the permanent deforming of the
rim support surfaces.
●
Incorrectly handled wheel bolts could
lead to a wheel coming loose while the ve-
hicle is moving. Risk of accident!
●
Observe the national legal requirements
regarding the use of snow tyres and chains.
CAUTION
●
Where a spare wheel that is not compati-
bl
e with the wheels fitted is used, follow the
instructions
›››
page 259.
●
The prescribed tightening t
orque for
wheel bolts on steel and alloy wheels is
120 Nm.
●
Protect your tyres from coming into con-
tact with oil, grease and fuel.
●
Replace any lost valve caps immediately.
For the sake of the environment
Under-inflated tyres increases fuel con-
sumption.
Note
●
We recommend having all w
ork on tyres
and wheels carried out by an authorised
SEAT dealer.
●
We recommend using wheels, tyres, hub
caps and snow chains from the SEAT Origi-
nal Accessories programme.
Service life of tyres
Fig. 250
Side view of tyres with tread wear in-
dicat
ors.
Fig. 251
Location of the tyre pressure sticker.
256
Wheels and tyres
Tread wear indicator
The base of the side of the original t
yr
es on
your v
ehicle show 1.6 mm high tread wear in-
dicators
›››
Fig. 250. The position of these in-
dicators is given on the tyre sidewalls by the
letters “TWI”, triangular symbols or other
symbols.
The useful life of the tyres depends pri-
marily on the following factors:
Tyre pressure values
Under-inflation or over-inflation will consider-
ably reduce the useful life of the tyres and im-
pair the vehicle's handling. Therefore, check
the tyre pressure, including the spare wheel,
at least once a month and before any long
journey.
Inflation pressures for summer tyres are lis-
ted on a sticker inside the fuel tank flap
›››
Fig. 251. The pressures for winter tyres are
0.2 bar (2.9 psi/20 kPa) above the summer
values.
Always check the pressure when the tyre is
cold. Do not reduce over-pressure in warm
tyres. The tyre pressures must be altered to
suit notable changes in the load being car-
ried.
Depending on the vehicle, tyre pressure can
be adjusted to medium load to improve driv-
ing comfort (“comfort” tyre pressure). When
driving with comfort tyre pressure fuel con-
sumption may increase slightly.
Driving style
Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard
braking all increase tyre wear.
Wheel balancing
The wheels on new vehicles are balanced.
Various factors encountered when driving
can cause them to become unbalanced,
which results in vibration of the steering
wheel.
The wheel must be rebalanced if a new tyre is
fitted or if a tyre is repaired.
Incorrect wheel alignment
Incorrect front or rear wheel alignment cau-
ses excessive tyre wear, frequently on one
side, and also impairs vehicle safety. If tyre
wear is very irregular, contact an Official
Service.
Tyre damage
To avoid damage to tyres and wheels, only
drive over kerbs or similar obstacles slowly
and at a right angle if possible.
Check tyres and wheels regularly for dam-
age (punctures, cracks, blisters, deformities,
etc.). Remove any foreign objects embedded
in outside of the treads.
Unusual vibration or the car pulling to one
side may indicate that one of the tyres is
damaged. Reduce speed immediately and
stop if you suspect that a wheel may have
been damaged! Check the tyres for damage
(blisters, cracks, etc.). If no external damage
is visible, drive slowly and carefully to the
nearest Official Service and have the vehicle
inspected.
Low profile tyres
Low profile tyres, compared to other rim and
tyre combinations, offer a broader tread and
a greater rim diameter along with a lower
height of the tyre sidewall. This results in a
more agile driving behaviour. However, on
roads that are in poor condition, this might af-
fect comfort and cause more noise.
Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick-
ly than standard tyres, for instance due to
strong knocks, potholes, manhole covers and
kerbs. Therefore, maintaining the correct tyre
pressure is particularly important
›››
page 257.
To avoid damage to tyres and wheels, drive
with special care when driving on roads in
poor condition.
Visually inspect your tyres every 3,000 km re-
garding damage, e.g. flattening/cracks on
the tyre sidewall or deformations/cracks on
the rims.
»
257
Practical tips
If the rims and tyres have received a heavy
impact or hav
e been damaged, hav
e them
check
ed and, if required, replaced at a speci-
alised workshop.
Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick-
ly than standard tyres.
Interchanging tyres
Fig. 252
Interchanging tyres.
Changing wheels around
If the w
ear is visibly gr
eat
er on the front tyres,
they should be exchanged for the rear tyres
as shown in the diagram
›››
Fig. 252. All the
tyres will then last for about the same time.
To ensure that the wear is equal on all tyres
and maintain their optimum useful life, they
should be changed around every 10
10,000 km.
Storing tyres
When you remove the tyres, mark them in or-
der to maintain the same direction of rotation
when they are installed again.
When removed, the wheels and/or tyres
should be stored in a cool, dry and preferably
dark location. Store tyres in a vertical posi-
tion, if they are not fitted on wheel rims.
New tyres or wheels
All four wheels must be fitted only with tyres
of the same t
ype
, siz
e and the same tread
pattern.
The correct tyre/wheel combinations speci-
fied for your vehicle are listed in its documen-
tation.
Understanding the tyre designations makes it
easier to choose the correct tyres. The tyre
designation is marked on the sidewall. For ex-
ample.
195/55 R 15 85 H
This contains the following information:
195 Tyre width in mm
55 Height/width ratio in %
R identifying tyre construction letter
– Radial
15 Rim diameter in inches
85 Load rating code
H Speed rating code letter
The tyres are subject to the following maxi-
mum speed limits:
Speed rating code
letter
Maximum speed lim-
it
Q 160 km/h (99 mph)
R 1
70 km/h (106 mph)
S 180 km/h (112 mph)
T 190 km/h (118 mph)
U 200 km/h (124 mph)
H 210 km/h (130 mph)
V 240 km/h (149 mph)
W 270 km/h (168 mph)
The manuf
act
uring dat
e is also indicated on
the tyre sidewall (possibly only on the outer
side of the wheel).
DOT … 27 16…
258
Wheels and tyres
means, for example, that the tyre was pro-
duced in the 27th w
eek of 2016.
F
oll
ow the instructions
›››
page 259 if you on-
ly have a temporary spare wheel.
Note
A SEAT Service Centre should be consulted
to find out whether wheels or t
yres of dif-
ferent sizes to those originally fitted by
SEAT can be fitted, and to find out about
the combinations allowed between the
front axle (axle 1) and the rear axle (axle 2).
Tyres with directional tread pattern
The direction of rotation is indicated by the
arr
o
ws on the t
yre sidewall. The direction of
rotation indicated must be respected. This
guarantees optimum grip and helps avoid ex-
cessive noise, wear and aquaplaning.
In the event of a flat tyre, a spare wheel with
an undetermined tread pattern or an oppo-
site tread pattern must be used and you must
drive carefully, as in these cases the tyres no
longer offer maximum performance.
Spare wheel
Spare wheel location*
Fig. 253
Boot: spare wheel.
The spare wheel is housed in a well under the
fl
oor panel in the luggage compartment and
is secur
ed by a special bolt
›
››
Fig. 253.
Take out the tool box before removing the
spare wheel.
The tyre pressure of the spare wheel must be
checked (preferably whenever the tyre pres-
sure is checked – see sticker on fuel tank flap
›››
page 256) to ensure the spare wheel re-
mains ready for use.
If the spare wheel is not the same size or de-
sign as the tyres that are mounted on the car
(for example if the car has winter tyres or
tyres with direction tread), only use the spare
tyre for a short period of time in the event of
breakdown and drive with the corresponding
care
›››
.
It must be r
epl
aced as soon as possibl
e for
a wheel with a normal size and finish.
Temporary spare wheel
If the vehicle is equipped with a temporary
spare wheel, there will be a warning sign on
the rim of the wheel.
Follow the instructions below when driving
with this wheel fitted.
●
After fitting the wheel, the warning sign
must not be covered.
●
Do not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph)
with the spare wheel and take great care
while driving. Avoid heavy acceleration, hard
braking and fast cornering.
●
The tyre pressure is the same as that of the
standard tyres.
●
Only use this spare wheel to reach the
nearest Official Service, as it is not designed
for permanent use.
WARNING
●
Under no circumstances must damaged
spar
e wheels be used.
●
If the spare wheel is different in size or
design to the tyres currently fitted, never
drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph). Avoid
heavy acceleration, hard braking and fast
cornering.
»
259
Practical tips
CAUTION
Follow the instructions given on the tempo-
rary spare wheel l
abel.
Note
The tyre pressure of the spare wheel must
always corr
espond to the highest pressure
prescribed for the model of vehicle in ques-
tion.
Tyre monitoring system
Contr
ol l
amp
It lights up
The tyre pressure of a wheel is much lower than the
value set by the driver
›
››
.
Flashes
Fault in the tyre pressure gauge. Contact a special-
ised service to have it fix
ed.
WARNING
●
If the warning lamp
lights up, slow
down immediately and avoid any severe
braking or steering manoeuvres. Stop and
check the tyres and their pressure as soon
as possible.
●
Under certain conditions (e
.g. sporty
driving style, driving on loose surfaces or in
winter) the warning lamp may take a
while to light up or may remain switched
off.
Note
If the battery is disconnected the warning
l
amp
lights up when the ignition is
switched on. This warning lamp must switch
off after covering a short distance.
Tyre pressure*
The tyre pressure monitoring system uses ABS
sensors t
o compar
e the r
evolutions and the
circumference of each wheel. Should the cir-
cumference of any wheel change, the warn-
ing lamp on the general instrument panel
will light up and an audible warning will be
heard.
Tyre circumference may change if:
●
Tyre pressure is too low
●
Tyre structure is damaged
●
Vehicle load not evenly distributed
●
wheels on one axle are subjected to great-
er load, (e.g. driving with trailer, uphill, down-
hill);
●
Snow chains are fitted
●
The temporary spare wheel is fitted
●
One wheel on the axle has been changed
Basic system settings
Should the tyre pressure change or if one or
more wheels are changed or the position of
the wheel on the vehicle is changed, e.g.
changing round the front and rear wheels, or
where a warning lamp lights up when driving,
the system must be adjusted as follows:
●
Inflate all tyres to the prescribed pressures
›››
page 256.
●
Switch the ignition on.
●
Store the new tyre pressure in the Easy
Connect system with the
button and the
SETTINGS function button
›
›
›
page 24.
●
In vehicles without a radio: press and hold
down the button , with the ignition on,
until an acoustic signal is heard.
WARNING
Despite the tyre pressure monitoring sys-
tem, the driver r
emains responsible for
maintaining the correct tyre pressure. You
must therefore check the tyre pressure of-
ten.
Note
●
The tyre pr
essure monitoring system is
not a replacement for regularly checking
the tyre pressure, as it is unable to recog-
nise an even drop in pressure.
260
Wheels and tyres
●
The tyre pr
essure monitoring system is
unable to warn of a sudden drop in tyre
pressure, e.g. a puncture. In this case, try to
stop the vehicle carefully with no severe
braking or steering manoeuvres.
●
To ensure the tyre pressure monitoring
system works correctly, the basic setting
must be performed every 10 000 km (6000
miles) or once a year.
Winter service
Winter tyr
es
Winter tyres will significantly improve han-
dling of the v
ehicl
e in wint
er road conditions.
The design of summer tyres (width, rubber
compound, tread pattern) gives less grip at
temperatures below +7°C (+45°F), on ice and
snow. This applies particularly to vehicles
equipped with wide section tyres or high
speed tyres (code letters H or V on the side-
wall).
In order to preserve the performance of the
vehicle as much as possible, winter tyres must
be fitted on all four wheels, the minimum
depth of the tread must be 4 mm and the
maximum age must be 4 years.
You can use winter tyres of a lower speed rat-
ing if the maximum speed limit of these tyres
will not be exceeded, even if the maximum
speed limit for the vehicle is higher.
For the sake of the environment
Summer tyres should be fitted again in
time, as they give bett
er handling on roads
free of snow and ice and at temperatures
over +7°C (+45°F). Summer tyres have a
shorter braking distance, produce less roll-
ing noise and do not wear as quickly. They
also reduce fuel consumption.
261
Maintenance
Maintenance
Service
Service int
erv
al
s
Servicing and Digital Maintenance
Plan
Log of services performed (“Digital Main-
tenance Plan”)
The SEAT deal
ership or a specialised work-
shop records Service receipts in a central
system. Thanks to this comprehensive docu-
mentation of the service history, it is possible
to reproduce the services performed any
time. SEAT recommends requesting a Service
receipt after every service carried out con-
taining all the services carried out on the sys-
tem.
Whenever there is a new service the receipt is
replaced with a current one.
The Digital Maintenance Plan is not avail-
able in some markets. In this case, your
SEAT dealer will inform you about the cur-
rent documentation of the work.
Service works
In the Digital Maintenance Pl
an, your SEAT
authorised service or specialised workshop
documents the following information:
●
When each one of the services was carried
out.
●
Whether a specific repair has been sugges-
ted, e.g. changing the brake pads in the near
future.
●
If you have expressed a special request for
the maintenance. Your Service Advisor will
write the work order.
●
The components or fluids that were
changed.
●
The date of the next service.
The Long Life Mobility Warranty is valid until
the next inspection. This information is docu-
mented in all checks performed.
The type and the volume of the service may
vary from one vehicle to another. A special-
ised workshop will be able to provide specific
information on the jobs for your vehicle.
WARNING
If the services are insufficient or not per-
formed and if the service interv
als are not
observed, the vehicle may be immobilised
in traffic cause an accident and severe in-
juries.
●
Make sure that any r
epairs are carried
out by a SEAT authorised service or speci-
alised workshop.
CAUTION
SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage
t
o the vehicl
e due to insufficient work or of
lack of availability of spare parts.
Note
Regular services on the vehicle not only
maintain its value
, but also its correct oper-
ation and road safety. For this reason, con-
duct the services in accordance with SEAT
guidelines.
Fixed Service or Flexible Service
Services are classified as oil change service
and inspection. The service int
erv
al displ
ay
on the instrument panel display serves as a
reminder of the next service.
Depending on the features, the engine and
the conditions of use of the car, either the
Fixed service or the Flexible service will be
applied for an oil change service..
How to know which type of service needs
to his vehicle
●
Check the tables below:
262
Service
Oil change service
a)
PR No.
Type of
service
Service interval
QI1
Fixed
Every 5000 km or after
1 year
b)
QI2
Every 7500 km or after
1 year
b)
QI3
Every
10000 km or after
1 year
b)
QI4
Every
15000 km or after
1 year
b)
QI6 Fle
xible
According to the service in-
t
erv
al displ
ay
a)
The data are based on normal conditions of use.
b)
Whatever happens first.
Inspection Service
a)
According to the service interval display
a)
The data are based on normal conditions of use.
Bear in mind the inf
ormation about the speci-
fications of the engine oil accor
ding t
o the
VW standard
›››
page 42.
Particular characteristics of the Flexible
Service
Regarding the Flexible Service, the oil
change service only has to be performed
when the vehicle needs it. To calculate when
you have to carry out this service, take into
account the individual conditions of use and
personal driving style. A major component of
the flexible service the use of LongLife oil in-
stead of conventional engine oil.
Bear in mind the information about the speci-
fications of the engine oil according to the
VW standard
›››
page 42.
If you do not want to the flexible service
you can select the fixed service However,
a fixed service may affect service costs
The Service Advisor will gladly advise you.
Service intervals display
At SEAT, the dates of the services are indica-
ted by the service interval display on the in-
strument panel
›››
page 33 or in the Ve-
hicle settings menu of the infotainment
system
›››
page 24. The service interval
display gives information for service dates
that involve an engine oil change or an in-
spection. When the time for the correspond-
ing service comes, additional work required,
such as the change of brake fluid and the
spark plugs, can be carried out.
Information on the conditions of
use
The service intervals and groups are usually
based on normal conditions of use.
If, on the other hand, the vehicle is under ad-
v
erse conditions of use
, some of the w
ork
must be carried out before the next service
period or even between service intervals.
Conditions of use adverse include:
●
The use of fuel with a high sulphur content.
●
Frequent short trips.
●
Letting the engine idle for a long period of
time, as in the case of taxis.
●
Using the vehicle in areas with thick dust.
●
Frequent driving with a trailer (depending
on equipment).
●
Using the vehicle mostly in situations with a
lot of traffic and stops (e.g. in a city).
●
Using the vehicle mostly in winter.
This applies especially for the following
parts (depending on equipment):
●
Dust and pollen filter
●
Air Care allergen filter
●
Air filter
●
Toothed chain
●
Particulate filter
●
Engine oil
The Service Advisor of your specialised
workshop will gladly inform you about the
need of performing service work between
»
263
Maintenance
normal service intervals, always considering
the conditions of use of your v
ehicl
e
.
WARNING
If the services are insufficient or not per-
formed and if the service interv
als are not
observed, the vehicle may be immobilised
in traffic and cause accidents and severe
injuries.
●
Have the services conducted at author-
ised SEAT services or specialised work-
shops.
CAUTION
SEAT cannot be held liable for any damage
to the vehicl
e due to insufficient work or of
lack of availability of spare parts.
Sets of services
Sets of services include all the maint
enance
w
orks
needed to ensure the safety and the
smooth running of the vehicle (depending on
the conditions of use and the features of
the vehicle, such as the engine, gearbox, or
operating fluids). Maintenance services are
divided into inspection and review services.
Consult the details of the jobs required for
your vehicle at:
●
Your SEAT authorised service
●
Your specialised workshop
Due to technical reasons (continuous devel-
opment of components) the sets of services
may vary. Your SEAT authorised service or
specialised workshop is always receiving up-
dates in time.
Additional service offers
Approved spare parts
Original SEAT Spare Parts have been con-
ceiv
ed f
or their v
ehicles and approved by
SEAT, with a special emphasis on safety.
These parts correspond exactly to the manu-
facturer's requirements in terms of design,
accuracy of the measurements and materi-
als. The original SEAT Spare Parts have been
conceived exclusively for your vehicle. For this
reason, we always recommend the use of
Original SEAT Spare Parts. SEAT cannot be
held liable for the safety and suitability of
parts from other manufacturers.
Approved spare parts
Approved spare parts, following the manu-
f
act
ur
er's requirements, are an additional
service to you, offering the possibility of re-
placing complete sets, such as: light engine,
gearboxes, heads, control units, electrical
components, etc.
These parts are, approved parts, and are the
same as the factory parts, which are also ap-
proved spare parts.
Original accessories
We recommend you only use SEAT Original
Accessories and SEAT approv
ed accessories
for your vehicle. The reliability, safety and
suitability of these accessories have been in-
spected specifically for this type of vehicle.
SEAT cannot be held liable for the safety and
suitability of parts from other manufacturers.
SEAT Service Mobility (SEAT
Service Mobility)
Since the moment you purchase your SEAT
v
ehicl
e you will be abl
e to enjoy the benefits
and coverage of the SEAT Mobility Service.
For the first two years after the purchase,
your new SEAT vehicle is automatically cov-
ered by the SEAT Mobility Service without ad-
ditional costs.
If you wish to enjoy this service after this peri-
od, you can extend SEAT Mobility as long as
you carry out the recommended Inspection
and Maintenance Services at a SEAT Author-
ised Service.
264
Vehicle maintenance
If your SEAT vehicle is immobilised due to a
f
ault or an accident, our assist
ance services
will help you k
eep moving.
Take into account that the SEAT Mobility
Service differs depending on the country in
which the vehicle was purchased. For further
information ask your SEAT dealership or the
SEAT website in your country.
Warranty
Fault-free operation warranty
SEAT Authorised Services ensure the perfect
condition of ne
w v
ehicl
es. Check the pur-
chase agreement or complementary addi-
tional documentation provided by your Tech-
nical Service to see the conditions and the
terms of the warranty. Consult further infor-
mation in this regard in your SEAT Official
Service.
Vehicle maintenance
Maint
enance and cl
eaning
Basic consider
ations
Regular and careful care helps to maintain
the value of your vehicl
e. In addition, it may
become a prerequisite to demand the war-
ranty in the event of corrosion damage and
deficiencies in the paint coat of the body-
work.
Specialised workshops have the necessary
care products. Please follow the instructions
for application on the packaging.
WARNING
●
Cleaning products and other mat
erials
used for car care can be damaging to your
health if misused.
●
Always keep care products in a safe
place, out of the reach of children. Danger
of poisoning!
For the sake of the environment
●
When purchasing car care pr
oducts,
chose products that are compatible with
the environment.
●
The waste from car-care products should
not be disposed of with ordinary household
waste.
Washing the vehicle
The longer you take to clean the tanks, e.g.
remains of insects, bird e
xcrements, tree resin
or anti frost salt adhered to your vehicle, the
more damage it can cause to the surface.
High temperatures, for instance strong sun-
light, further intensify the damage.
Before washing the car, soften the dirt using
plenty of water.
To remove encrusted dirt such as insects, bird
droppings or tree resin, use a lot of water and
a microfibre cloth.
Have the underside of the vehicle washed af-
ter the end of the anti frost salts in winter.
High pressure cleaners
When washing the vehicle with a high-pres-
sure cleaner, always follow the operating in-
structions for the equipment. This applies
particularly to the operating pressure and the
distance between the spraying water. Do not
aim the jet directly to the side window gas-
kets, doors, covers or the panoramic sun-
roof*; the same applies to tyres, rubber ho-
ses, soundproofing material, sensors* or
camera lenses*. Keep a distance of at least
40 cm.
Do not remove snow and ice with a high-
pressure cleaner.
»
265
Maintenance
Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water out
in a dir
ect str
eam or one that has a r
otating
jet for forcing off dirt.
The water temperature must not exceed
60°C.
Automatic car wash tunnels
Spray the vehicle before starting the car
wash.
Make sure that the windows and the panor-
amic sunroof* are closed and the windscreen
wipers are deactivated. Bear in mind the in-
structions of the car wash tunnel operator,
especially if your vehicle has detachable
parts.
Use of car washes without brushes if possible.
Washing by hand
Clean your vehicle from top to bottom with a
soft sponge or with a brush. Only use clean-
ing products that do not contain solvents.
Washing vehicles with a matte paint by
hand
To prevent damage to the vehicle when
washing it, first remove the thicker dust and
dirt. To remove traces of insects, grease and
fingerprints, it is best to use a special cleaner
for matte paint.
Apply the product with a microfibre cloth. To
avoid damaging the surface of the paint, do
not apply too much pressure.
Rinse with plenty of water. Then clean it with
a neutral cleaning product and a soft microfi-
bre cloth.
Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of water
and then leave it to dry. Remove traces of
water with a leather cloth.
WARNING
●
Only wash the vehicl
e with the ignition
switched off or according to the specifica-
tions of the car wash tunnel operator. Risk
of accident!
●
When cleaning the underbody or the in-
side of the wheel arches, protect yourself
from sharp or pointy metal parts. Risk of
cut!
●
After cleaning the brakes could act more
slowly due to moisture or, in winter, the ice
on the brake discs and pads. Risk of acci-
dent! In this case the brakes should be
dried by pressing the brake pedal several
times.
CAUTION
●
Before w
ashing the vehicle in an auto-
matic car wash, please make sure to re-
tract the exterior mirrors to prevent them
from being damaged. Electric exterior rear-
view mirrors must always be folded/de-
ployed electrically!
●
Do not w
ash the vehicle in direct sunlight.
Risk of damaging the paint job!
●
Do not use sponges, abrasive household
sponges or similar to clean insect remains.
Risk of damaging the surface!
●
Vehicle parts with matte paint:
–
Do not use polish or hard wax. Risk of
damaging the surface!
–
Never select washing programs that in-
clude the use of wax. This could dam-
age the appearance of matte paint.
–
Do not put stickers or magnets on parts
with matte paint, as removing them
may damage the paint.
For the sake of the environment
The car should only be washed in special
wash bays. These places ar
e prepared to
prevent oily water from getting into the
public drains.
Cleaning and maintenance instruc-
tions
The cleaning and maintenance of individual
components of the v
ehicl
e can be check
ed in
the following tables. The contents should be
understood merely as a recommendation. Go
to your specialised workshop if you have
266
Vehicle maintenance
special questions or parts that are not listed.
T
ak
e he gener
al considerations into account
›››
in Take special care with... on
page 270.
Exterior cleaning
Windscreen wipers
Problem Solution
Dirt Soft cloth with wipers
Headlights / Tail lights
Problem Solution
Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap
solution
a)
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litr
e of w
at
er
Sensors / Camera lenses
Problem Solution
Dirt
Sensors: soft cloth with clean-
ing pr
oduct which does not
contain solvents
Camera lenses - soft cloth with
cleaning product with no alco-
hol content
Snow/ice
Hand brush/Anti frost spray
with no solvents
Wheels
Problem Solution
Anti frost salt Water
Brake abrasion
dust
Acid-free special cleaning
product
End exhausts
Problem Solution
Anti frost salt Water, if a steel cleaning prod-
uct is required
Covers / Trims
Problem Solution
Dirt Neutral soap solution
a)
, if a
steel cleaning pr
oduct is re-
quired
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litr
e of w
at
er
Paint
Problem Solution
Flaws in the paint
Check the paint's colour code
in an authorised service and re-
stor
e with a touch-up pencil
Spilled fuel Immediately rinse with water
Environmental rust
tank
Apply rust remo
ver and then
apply hard wax. Go you your
specialised w
orkshop if you
have any queries
Problem Solution
Corrosion
Have your specialised work-
shop take car
e of this
The water does
not create dr
op-
lets on the clean
paint
Maintain with hard wax (at
least 2 times a year)
No shine de-
spite sober main-
tenance/paint
T
reat with suitable wax and ap-
ply paint preservativ
e after-
wards if the wax used does not
contain preservative ingredi-
ents
Tanks, e.g. insect
remains, bird
dr
oppings, tree
sap, road salt
Immediately soften with water
and remove with a microfibre
cloth
Fat-based dirt,
e.g. cosmetic
products or
sunscreen
Delete immediately with a neu-
tral soap solution
a)
and a soft
cloth
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litr
e of w
at
er
Carbon fibre parts
Problem Solution
Dirt Clean the same way as pain-
ted parts
››
›
page 265
»
267
Maintenance
Decoration slides
Problem Solution
Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soap
solution
a)
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litre of wat
er
Interior cleaning
Windows
Problem Solution
Dirt Apply windscreen cleaner and
then dry with a cloth
Covers / Trims
Problem Solution
Dirt Neutral soap solution
a)
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litr
e of w
at
er
Plastic parts
Problem Solution
Dirt Damp cloth
Encrusted dirt Neutral soap solution
a)
, if pos-
sible solvent-free plastic clean-
er
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litr
e of w
at
er
Displays/instrument panel
Problem Solution
Dirt Soft cloth with a liquid crystal
display cleaner
Control panels
Problem Solution
Dirt Soft brush, then soft cloth with
neutral soap solution
a)
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litre of wat
er
Seat belts
Problem Solution
Dirt Neutral soap solution
a)
, al-
lo
wed to dry before retracting
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litr
e of w
at
er
Fabrics, artificial, Alcantara leather
Problem Solution
Dirt particles ad-
hered to the sur
-
face
Vacuum cleaner
Water-based dirt,
e.g. coffee
, tea,
blood etc.
Absorbent cloth and neutral
soap solution
a)
Problem Solution
Grease-based
dirt, e.g. oil, mak
e-
up, etc.
Apply a neutral soap solution
a)
.
Absorb the dissolved grease
and paint particles drying with
an absorbent cloth, in case you
must treat it with water after-
wards
Special dirt, e.g.
pens, nail polish,
dispersion paint,
shoe cream etc.
Special st
ain remove: dry with
an absorbent cloth, if applica-
ble, apply neutral soap solution
afterwards
a)
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litr
e of w
at
er
Natural leather
Problem Solution
Recent dirt Cotton cloth with neutral soap
solution
a)
Water-based dirt,
e.g. coffee, tea,
blood etc.
Recent stains: absorbent cloth
Dry stains: leather cleaner
Grease-based
dirt, e.g. oil, mak
e-
up, etc.
Recent stains: absorbent cloth
and leather cleaner
Dry stains: grease dissolving
spray
Special dirt, e.g.
pens, nail polish,
dispersion paint,
shoe cream etc.
St
ain remover suitable for
leather
268
Vehicle maintenance
Problem Solution
Care Apply preservative cream regu-
larly to pr
otect from sunlight.
Use a colour preservative if re-
quired
a)
Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in
1 litre of wat
er
Carbon fibre parts
Problem Solution
Dirt Clean like plastic parts
Take special care with...
Headlights/tail lights
●
Do not clean the headlights/tail lights with
a dry cl
oth or sponge
.
●
Do not use cl
eaning products that contain
alcohol. Risk of cracks!
Wheels
●
Do not use for paint wax or other abrasive
products.
●
If the protective coating on the paint of the
rim has been damaged due to stone impacts,
scratches, etc., the damage should be re-
paired immediately.
Camera lenses
●
Do not use hot or warm water to remove ice
or snow from the camera lenses. Risk of
cracking the lens!
●
To clean the camera lens, never use abra-
sive cleaning products or products with alco-
hol. Risk of scratches and cracks!
Windows
●
Remove snow and ice from windows and
exterior mirrors with a plastic scraper only. To
avoid scratches, the scraper should only be
pushed in one direction and not moved to
and fro.
●
Never remove snow or ice from windows
and rearview mirrors with warm or hot water.
Risk of cracks on the windows!
●
To prevent damage to the heating of the
rear window, do not put stickers over the
heating elements.
Covers/trims
●
Do not use cleaning products or chrome
based cleaning agents.
Paint
●
The vehicle must be free from dirt and dust
before applying wax or care products. Risk of
scratches!
●
Do not apply wax or care products if the
vehicle is exposed to direct sunlight. Risk of
damaging the paint job!
●
The ambient rust deposits must not be re-
moved through friction. Risk of damaging the
paint job!
●
Remove cosmetic products and sunlight
immediately. Risk of damaging the paint job!
Displays/instrument panel
●
The screens, the instrument panel and the
trim around it must not be cleaned dry. Risk of
scratches!
●
Make sure that the instrument panel is
switched off and cooled down before clean-
ing.
●
Make sure that no liquid leaks between the
instrument panel and the trim. Risk of dam-
age!
Control panels
●
Make sure that no liquid leaks into the con-
trol panels. Risk of damage!
Seat belts
●
Do not remove the seat belts to clean them.
●
Seat belts and their components must nev-
er be cleaned with chemical products, nor
should they be allowed to come into contact
with corrosive liquids, solvents or sharp ob-
jects. Risk of damaging the fabric!
●
If you find any damage to the belt webbing,
belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle,
ask your specialised workshop to replace the
belt in question.
»
269
Maintenance
Fabrics/artificial leather/Alcantara leath-
er
●
Do not treat artificial leather/Alcantara
l
eather with l
eather cl
eaning products, sol-
vents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain removers
or similar products.
●
If the stain is very hard to remove, take the
vehicle to a specialised workshop to have it
removed there. This will prevent damage.
●
Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard
sponges, etc. to clean.
●
Do not turn on seat heating* to dry the
seats.
●
Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv-
ets or belts can damage the surface.
●
Open Velcro, e.g. on clothes can damage
the seat upholstery. Make sure that Velcro
fasteners are closed.
Natural leather
●
Never use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream,
spot removers or similar products on leather.
●
Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv-
ets or belts can damage the surface.
●
Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hard
sponges, etc. to clean.
●
Do not turn on seat heating* to dry the
seats.
●
Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlight for
long periods, otherwise it may tend to lose
some of its colour. If the car is left for a pro-
longed period in the bright sun, it is best to
cover the leather.
WARNING
Do not use water-repellent coatings on the
windscreen. In bad visibility conditions
such as humid w
eather, darkness or when
the sun is in its lowest point, visibility may
be impacted. Risk of accident! Such coat-
ings can also cause the windscreen wiper
blades to make noise.
Note
●
Remains of insects can be remo
ved much
more easily with previously treated paint.
●
Regular car care treatments can prevent
deposits of ambient rust.
Remove the vehicle from traffic
If you want to leave your vehicle stationary
f
or a l
ong period of time
, contact a qualified
workshop. They will gladly inform you about
the necessary measures, such as anti-corro-
sion protection, Service and storage.
Also take into account instructions regarding
the vehicle's battery
›››
page 251.
270
Information for the user
Information for the user
Inf
ormation f
or the user
Impor
tant information
Recycling of electrical or electron-
ic devices
All electrical or electronic devices (EED) that
are not permanently fitted in the v
ehicle must
be marked with the following symbol:
This symbol indicates that EED must not be
discarded as home waste but through selec-
tive waste collection.
Information about the EU Di-
rective 2014/53/EU
Simplified EU compliance decl
ara-
tion
Your vehicle has different radioelectrical devi-
ces. The manuf
act
ur
ers of these devices de-
clare that they comply with Directive
2014/53/EU when legally required.
The full text of the EU compliance declaration
is available online at the following address:
www.seat.com/generalinfo
Table of correspondences
The table of correspondences will help you to
associate the name of the device in the dec-
l
aration of compliance with the features of
the vehicle and the terminology used in the
on-board documentation.
Features of the
vehicle
Name of the de
vice
according to the dec-
laration of compli-
ance
Radiofrequency re-
mote control (v
ehicle)
FS09, FS12A, FS12P, FS1477,
FS94
Radio frequency re-
mote control (auxili-
ary heat
er)
Sender STH SEAT -
50000914
Telestart
Auxiliary heating 50000864 / D208L VW
Telestart
Bluetooth MIB2 Entry
MIB Standard 2
MIB2 Main-Unit
A580 / A270
Features of the
vehicle
Name of the de
vice
according to the dec-
laration of compli-
ance
Wireless hotspot MIB2 Main-Unit
A580 / A270
Keyless Access Sys-
tem
MQB-B B
Radar sensors f
or as-
sistance systems
ARS4-B
MRR
evo14F
BSD3.0
Central control unit 5WK50254
5WK50474
Infotainment system MIB2 Entry
MIB Standard 2
MIB2 Main-Unit
A580 / A270
Wireless charging WCH-183
WCH-185
5G0.980.611
Connection to the ex-
t
ernal antenna of the
car
UM
TS/GSM-MMC
UMTS/GSM-MMC-AG2
»
271
Information for the user
Features of the
vehicle
Name of the de
vice
according to the dec-
laration of compli-
ance
Instrument panel eNSF
Immobilizer integrated in
dashboard module
instrument clust
er
Antenna FM/AM Antenna Base
Antennas MQB27 Small/Big
family
Antennas KSA Small F
am III
5Q0.035.507 Roof Antenna
GNSS Antenna VAG
720166002
8S7.035.503.B
Ant
enna amplifiers 6F0.035.225
6F9.035.225
3V5.035.577.A
7N0.035.552.J
7N0.035.552.K
7N0.035.552.Q
5F4.035.225
5F4.035.225.A
5F4.035.225.B
5F9.035.225
5F9.035.225.A
5F9.035.225.B
575.035.225
575.035.225.A
575.035.225.B
Addresses of the manufacturers
According to the Directive 2014/53/EU, all
rele
vant components must include the ad-
dress of the manufacturer.
The address of the manufacturers of compo-
nents that, due to their size or nature, cannot
include a sticker are listed below, as long as it
is legally required:
Radioelectrical
equipment fitted
in the vehicl
e
Addresses of the
manufacturers
Radiofrequency remote
control key
Hell
a KGaA Hueck & Co.
Rixbecker Straße 75
59552 Lippst
adt,
GERMANY
Radio frequency re-
mote control (auxiliary
heat
er)
Digades gmbH
Äußere Weberstr
aße 20
02763 Zittau, GERMANY
Webasto Thermo &
Comfort SE
Friedrichshafener Str
. 9
82205 Gilching, GERMANY
Radar sensors for as-
sistance systems
ADC Aut
omotive Distance
Control Systems GmbH
P
eter-Dornier-Straße 10
88131 Lindau, GERMANY
Robert Bosch GmbH
Postfach 16 61
71226 Leonberg,
GERMANY
272
Information for the user
Frequency bands, station power
Radioelectrical equipment
a)
Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models
Radiofrequency remote control (vehicle)
433.05-434.78 MHz 10 mW (ERP)
All SEAT models
433.05-434.79 MHz 10 mW
868.0-868.6 MHz 25 mW
434.42 MHz 32 µW
Radio frequency remote control (auxiliary heater)
868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 0.24 mW, / –6.3 dBm e.r.p. Ateca
868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 3.1 mW, / 4.8 dBm e.r.p. Alhambra
Auxiliary heating
868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 23.5 mW, / 13.7 dBm e.r.p. Alhambra
868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 23.5 mW, / 13.7 dBm e.r.p. Ateca
Bluethooth
2402-2480 MHz 6 dBm
All SEAT models
2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm
Wireless hotspot 2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm Leon and Ateca
Connection to the external antenna of the car
GSM 900: 880-915 MHz 33 dBm
Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Alhambra
GSM 1800: 1710-1785 MHz 30 dBm
WCDMA FDD I: 1920-1980 MHz 24 dBm
WCDMA FDD lll: 1710-1785 MHz 24 dBm
Keyless Access 434.42 MHz 32 µW Ibiza, Toledo, Arona, Leon and Ateca
Radar sensors for assistance systems
76 GHz-77 GHz
28.2 dBm Toledo, Leon and Alhambra
35.0 dBm Ibiza, Arona and Ateca
24050-24250 MHz 20 dBm Arona, Ateca and Alhambra
Wireless charging 110-120 kHz 10 W Ibiza, Arona, Leon and Ateca
»
273
Information for the user
Radioelectrical equipment
a)
Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models
Instrument panel 125 kHz 40 dBµA/m All SEAT models
a)
The commissioning or authorisation of radioelectrical technology may be restricted in some European countries, forbidden or only allowed with additional requirements.
274
Technical specifications
Technical data
T
echnical specifications
Impor
t
ant information
Important
The information in the vehicle documentation
always t
akes precedence over the informa-
tion in this Instruction Manual.
All technical specifications provided in this
documentation are valid for the standard
model in Spain.
The figures may be different depending
whether additional equipment is fitted, for dif-
ferent models, for special vehicles and for
other countries.
Abbreviations used in the Technical Speci-
fications section
kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.
PS
Pferdestärke (horsepower), formerly
used to denote engine po
wer.
rpm Revolutions per minute - engine speed.
Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.
CZ
Cetane number, indication of the die-
sel combustion power
.
RON
Research octane number, indication of
the knock resistance of petr
ol.
Vehicle identification data
Fig. 254 Chassis number.
VIN in the Easy Connect
●
Select:
button > function button SET-
TINGS > Service > Chassis number.
Chassis number
The VIN is l
ocat
ed in the Easy Connect and
under the windscr
een, on the driver side
›››
Fig. 254. Additionally, the chassis number
is located in the engine compartment, on the
right-hand side. The number is engraved on
the top side rail, and is partially covered.
Type plate
The model plate is located at the bottom of
the B pillar, between the front and rear doors,
on the right-hand side.
The type plate indicates the following
weights:
●
Total permitted weight of the vehicle when
loaded
●
Maximum authorised weight of the vehicle
with a trailer, when the vehicle operates as a
tractor
●
Maximum permitted load of the front axle
●
Maximum permitted load of the rear axle
Weight in running order
The weight in running order only has one ap-
proximate value. This value corresponds to
the minimum operative weight of the vehicle
without additional equipment that increases
its weight, i.e. air conditioning, spare wheel,
towing bracket.
»
275
Technical data
The running order weight also includes 75 kg
of the w
eight of the driv
er and service fluids,
in addition t
o a fuel tank at 90% capacity.
From the difference between the total permit-
ted weight in running order the approximate
carrying capacity can be calculated
›››
.
The carrying capacit
y must include:
●
occupants,
●
all pieces of equipment and other w
eights,
●
r
oof loads including the roof rack,
●
equipment that is not included in the run-
ning order weight,
●
when using the towing bracket, the drawbar
load (max. 50 kg).
Calculating fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions according to the ECE regula-
tions and the EU specifications
Calculation of fuel consumption for urban
driving begins when cold-starting the engine.
Then, normal city driving is simulated.
In calculating extra-urban driving fuel con-
sumption, braking and acceleration is done in
all gears, as in daily use of the vehicle. Driving
speed varies within a range of 0 and 120
km/h (75 mph).
The consumption value in combined driving is
composed of 37% of the value of urban driv-
ing and 63% of the value of extra-urban driv-
ing.
WARNING
The maximum permitted weight values
must not be exceeded – Risk of an accident
and damage t
o the vehicle!
Note
●
If you wish to calcul
ate the exact weight
of your vehicle please contact a SEAT
dealer.
●
Depending on the volume of equipment,
driving style, road conditions, weather con-
ditions and the condition of the vehicle,
consumption values can differ from the
theoretical values stated here.
Information on fuel con-
sumption
Fuel consumption
Approved consumption values are derived
fr
om measur
ements perf
ormed or supervised
by certified EU laboratories, according to the
legislation in force at the time (for more infor-
mation, see the Publications Office of the Eu-
ropean Union on the EUR-Lex website: © Eu-
ropean Union, http://eur-lex.europa.eu/) and
apply to the specified vehicle characteristics.
The values relating to fuel consumption and
CO
2
emissions can be found in the documen-
tation provided to the purchaser of the vehi-
cle at the time of purchase.
Fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions de-
pend on the equipment/features of each indi-
vidual vehicle, as well as on the driving style,
road conditions, traffic conditions, environ-
mental conditions, load or number of passen-
gers.
Note
In practice, and considering all the factors
mentioned here, consumption v
alues can
differ from those calculated in the current
European regulations.
Weights
Kerb weight refers to the basic model with a
fuel t
ank fill
ed t
o 90% capacity and without
optional extras. The figure quoted includes 75
kg to allow for the weight of the driver.
Special versions, optional equipment fittings
or retro-fitting accessories will increase the
weight of the vehicle
›››
.
WARNING
●
Please note that the centr
e of gravity
may shift when transporting heavy objects;
this may affect vehicle handling and lead
to an accident. Always adjust your speed
276
Technical specifications
and driving style to suit road conditions
and requirements.
●
Ne
ver exceed the gross axle weight rat-
ing or the gross vehicle weight rating. If the
permissible axle load or the permissible to-
tal weight is exceeded, the driving charac-
teristics of the vehicle may change, which
could lead to accidents, injuries and dam-
age to the vehicle.
Driving with a trailer
Trail
er weights
Trailer weight
The tr
ail
er w
eights and drawbar loads ap-
proved are selected in intensive trials accord-
ing to precisely defined criteria. The ap-
proved trailer weights are valid for vehicles in
the EU for maximum speeds of 80 km/h (50
mph) (in certain circumstances up to 100
km/h (62 mph)). The figures may be different
in other countries. All data in the official vehi-
cle documentation takes precedence over
these data at all times
›››
.
Dr
awbar l
oads
The
maximum permitted drawbar load on the
ball coupling of the towing bracket must not
exceed 50 kg.
In the interest of road safety, we recommend
that you always tow approaching the maxi-
mum drawbar load. The response of the trail-
er on the road will be poor, if the drawbar
load is too small.
If the maximum permissible drawbar load
cannot be met (e.g. with small, empty and
light-weight single axle trailers or tandem
axle trailers with a wheelbase of less than 1
metre), a minimum of 4% of the actual trailer
weight is legally required for the drawbar
load.
WARNING
●
For safet
y reasons, you should not drive
at speeds above 80 km/h (50 mph) when
towing a trailer. This also applies in coun-
tries where higher speeds are permitted.
●
Never exceed the maximum trailer
weights or the drawbar load. If the permis-
sible axle load or the permissible total
weight is exceeded, the driving character-
istics of the vehicle may change, leading to
accidents, injuries and damage to the vehi-
cle.
Wheels
T
yr
e pr
essure, snow chains and
wheel bolts
Tyre pressure
The sticker with the tyr
e pressure values can
be found on the inside of the fuel tank flap.
The tyre pressure values given there are for
cold tyres. Do not reduce the slightly raised
pressures of warm tyres
›››
.
The pressure f
or winter tyres is 0.2 bar
(2.9 psi / 20 kPa) higher than that of summer
tyres.
Snow chains
Snow chains may be fitted only to the front
wheels.
Consult the section “wheels” of this manual.
Wheel bolts
After the wheels have been changed, the
tightening torque of the wheel bolts should
be checked as soon as possible with a torque
wrench
›››
. The tightening torque for steel
and all
oy wheel
s is
120 Nm.
WARNING
●
Check the tyre pr
essure at least once per
month. Checking the tyre pressure is very
important. If the tyre pressure is too high or
»
277
Technical data
too low, there is an increased danger of ac-
cidents - particularly at high speeds.
●
If the tight
ening torque of the wheel bolts
is too low, they could loosen while the vehi-
cle is in motion. Risk of accident! If the
tightening torque is too high, the wheel
bolts and threads can be damaged.
Note
We recommend that you ask your Techni-
cal Service f
or information about appr
opri-
ate wheel, tyre and snow chain size.
278
Technical specifications
Engine data
P
etr
ol engines
1.0 TSI Start-Stop
Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 70 (95)/5,000-5,500 81 (110)/5,000-5,500
Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 160/1,500-3,500 200/2,000-3,500
No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) 3/999 3/999
Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ
Gearbox manual manual DSG
Top speed (km/h) 189 (4) 204 (5) 206 (6)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 7.3 6.7 6.8
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 11.1 9.9 10.2
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,630 1,650 1,675
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,170 1,190 1,215
Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg)
a) a) a)
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg)
a) a) a)
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 580 590 600
Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,100 1,200 1,100
Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,000 1,100 1,000
a)
Data not available as this edition goes to print.
279
Technical data
Petrol engines
1.4 TSI Start-Stop 1.4 TSI Ecomotive 1.6 MPI
Power output in kW (PS) at 1/min 92 (125)/5,000-6,000 92 (125)/5,000-6,000 81 (110)/5,800
Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 200/1,400-4,000 200/1,400-4,000 155/3,800-4,000
No. of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) 4/1,395 4/1,395 4/1,598
Fuel Super 95 / Normal 91 (with a slight power loss) ROZ
Gearbox DSG DSG manual automatic
Top speed (km/h) 208 (6) 208 (6) 191 (5) 191 (6)
Acceleration from 0-80 km/h (seconds) 6.3 6.4 6.7 7.7
Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) 9 9 10.3 11.5
Maximum authorised weight (kg) 1,696 1,687 1,635 1,675
Weight in running order (with driver) (kg) 1,236 1,227 1,175 1,215
Maximum authorised weight on front axle (kg) 880 880 820 860
Maximum authorised weight on rear axle (kg) 830 830 840 840
Maximum trailer weight without brakes (kg) 600 610 580 600
Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 8% (kg) 1,200 1,200 1,100 1,100
Weight of trailer with brakes on gradients up to 12% (kg) 1,200 1,200 1,000 1,000
280
Technical specifications
Vehicle data
Dimensions
Fig. 255 Dimensions.
TOLEDO
A/B Front and rear projection (mm) 876/1,004
C Wheelbase (mm) 2,602
D Length (mm) 4,482
E/F Front/rear
a)
track width (mm) 1,463/1,500
G Width (mm) 1,7
15
H Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,466
Turning radius (m) 10.2
a)
This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim.
281
Index
Index
A
ABS
contr
ol l
amp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
202
see also Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . 201, 202
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138, 240
Adjust
CAR menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Adjusting
front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Adjusting the head restraints
front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Adjustment
front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Airbag covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 68
activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
deactivation of front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72, 73
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 70
functioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 71
side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 71
Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 38
air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
economic use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Alarm system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Alcantara leather: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Alternator
warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Ambient lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Anchoring
the front tow line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Android Auto™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167, 169
Anti-block system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Anti-freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Anti-puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 79
Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47, 79
check after 10 minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Anti-slip regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow
protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Anti-theft security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Anti-theft system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Anti-tow protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Apple CarPlay™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167, 169
Armrests
front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Ashtrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Aspects to note before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
ASR
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
see also Traction control system . . . . . 201, 202
Assistance systems
ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
cruise speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
EDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
emergency braking assistance (Front As-
sist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
fatigue detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222, 224
Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
tyre monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Audible warning signal
control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
unfastened safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Automatic air conditioning
climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Automatic car wash tunnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Automatic dipped beam control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Automatic gearbox
driving programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
emergency program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
kick-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
manual release of the selector lever . . . . . . . 36
parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
selector lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
tiptronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203, 206
Automatic transmission
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
external audio source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
283
Index
B
Back seat
f
ol
ding do
wn and raising the back seat
backrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Ball coupling
disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Before setting off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Belt tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Biodiesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Bluetooth®
connect audio source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244, 246
opening the bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Brake assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Brakes
brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Braking
brake assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Bulb failure
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
C
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
CCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 217
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
anti-theft alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
central locking button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
individualised settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
locking manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Central locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Cetane number (diesel fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 78
subsequent work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
daytime driving light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
dipped beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
double headlight bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
main beam headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
side light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
turn signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Changing bulbs on the number plate . . . . . . . . . 94
removing the bulb holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Changing bulbs on the side panel . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
fitting the rear light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
removing the bulb holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
removing the rear light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Changing lights on the side panel . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Changing rear lights on the rear lid
changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
fitting the bulb-holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
removing the bulb holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Checking levels
engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Child-proof locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Child seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 76
Child seats
categorisation into groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 75
securing with the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Cleaning
Alcantara leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
carbon fibre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267, 269
control panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
decorative sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
exhaust tail pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
fabrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
headlights / tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
sensors/camera lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
special care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
the radio screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
trims/covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267, 268
washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
284
Index
Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
adjusting the t
emper
at
ure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
automatic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
blower selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
windscreen defrost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Closing
central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
vehicle with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Coat hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Coming Home and Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Coming Home and Leaving Home Function . . 124
Communication between the Infotainment
system and mobile devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 103
ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
ABS anti-blocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201, 202
audible warning signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
blocking of the steering column . . . . . . . . . . . 209
brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
break recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
coolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
deactivating the airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
depress the brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
diesel preheating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
disabling airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
EDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
emission control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
gearbox malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
windscreen washer fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Controls and displays
general instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Controls for the windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 119
Controls on the steering wheel
without voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
with voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Coolant level
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Coolant temperature
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Cooling
coolant temperature gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Cooling system
checking coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
topping up coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Correct position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Correct sitting position
driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
rear seat passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 217
control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
temporary deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
turning off the cruise control system . . . . . . . 218
D
Damage to the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Data transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Deactivating the front passenger front airbag . 17
Deactivation of front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72, 73
Defective bulbs
changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Defrosting rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Diesel
engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Diesel fuel
particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Direction of rotation
tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98, 99
Disposal
belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
285
Index
Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Doors
chil
d-pr
oof l
ocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Drink holder
centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
rear seat armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Driver
see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 58, 59, 60
Driver information system
operation through the windscreen wiper
lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Driving
driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
economical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Driving abroad
headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Driving data
data summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Driving through water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232, 277
Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
E
E10
see Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Easy Connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
EDL
see Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . 201, 203
Efficiency program
saving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 119
Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201, 203
Electronic immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
automatic gearbox emergency program . . 207
bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 78
emergency towing of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 52
hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
replacing a blown fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Emergency
fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Emergency braking assistance system
indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
switching off temporarily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Emergency operation
front passenger door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Emission control system
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Emissions data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Engine
assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
run-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Start-Stop System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
switching off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Engine and ignition
starting the engine with Keyless Access . . . 197
Engine breakdown
Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244, 246
battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247, 248
opening the bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
safety notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
windscreen washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
checking level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
G12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
G13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Engine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Engine identification letter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Engine management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42, 247
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247, 248
checking oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Engine oil pressure
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
286
Index
Environment
ecol
ogical driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
11
environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Environmental tips
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138, 240
ESC
electronic stability control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Ethanol (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Exhaust filtering system
catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Extending
the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Exterior lighting
changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Exterior mirrors
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7, 8
External aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
F
Fabrics: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Fatigue detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Filling up the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
First-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Fluid level control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Fog
lights with cornering light function . . . . . . . . . 124
Fog light bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Fog lights with cornering light function . . . . . . . 124
Frequency band
AM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
DAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 70
Front Assist
indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Front passenger front airbag
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
manual adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41, 241
diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
fuel level gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Fuel consumption
engine cut-off due to inertia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Why does fuel consumption increase? . . . . 213
Fuel tank flap
opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Full-LED Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Full Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
identifying blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
identifying by colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
in the dash panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
in the engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
in the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
preparation before replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
G
Gauge
fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Gear-change indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Gearbox lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
engaging the gears (manual gearbox) . . . . 203
manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
manual gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Gear engaged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Gear recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
General instrument panel
control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
GRA
see Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
H
Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199, 200
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 125
HBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Head-on collisions and their laws of physics . 65
287
Index
Head-protection airbags
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18
saf
et
y instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Headlights
driving abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Headlight washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
front head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
rear head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Heated rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
rear window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Heating and fresh air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
HHC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Hill hold control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
How to jump start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
I
Identification of the fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 196, 197
Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 196, 197
Immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Incorrect position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
indications on the display
driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
assistance systems submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
distance travelled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
doors, bonnet and rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
driving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
ECO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Emergency braking assistance system
(Front Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
identifying letters of the engine . . . . . . . . . . . 100
recommended gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
second speed display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
selector lever position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100, 205
service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
speed warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Start-Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
warning and information messages . . . . . . . . 32
Indications on the screen
Outside temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Infotainment knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Infotainment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
CD player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
function buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
general instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
general panel of the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
input mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
on-screen keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
text input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
update navigation data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Bluetooth® audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
changing the volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
general panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Images main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
infotainment knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
initial configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Media mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
memory buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
proximity sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Radio mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
rotary knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
scroll knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
scroll (display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
search in lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
station logos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
switch on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Telephone mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
touchscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Vehicle menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
verification boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247, 262
Inspection service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98, 99
instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
service interval indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Interference from a mobile telephone . . . . . . . . 158
Interior
lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
288
Index
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Int
erior vie
w
l
eft-hand drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
steering wheel on the right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
J
Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 78
mounting points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Journey data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
K
Key-operated switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Keyless Access
go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
keyless-Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
keyless-Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Keyless-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
unlocking and locking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 113
Keyless Access lock and ignition system:
see Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Keys
remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
L
Lever
main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Lifting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Lighting of the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21, 120
AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
coming home and Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . 124
control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
dipped beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
headlight flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 127
lighting of the controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
lighting of the instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
main beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
parking lights on both sides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
rear fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
rear interior light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
turn signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Loading the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Locking
central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Locking and unlocking
in the door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
with the central locking button . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Locking the front passenger door manually . . . 12
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
automatic locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
category N1 vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
manual release mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
retaining elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
retaining nets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
M
Maintenance
see Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Malfunction
catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
emergency braking assistance system
(Front Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Manual air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Manual gearbox
gear lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
289
Index
Manual release mechanism
r
ear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12
Media
changing the Media sour
ce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
messages and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
playback sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
playing modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Memory card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Mirror
vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
MirrorLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Mobile telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Model plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Multi-function display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Multi-function steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Multimedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Multimedia compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
N
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
change view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
entering the destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
importing vCards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
messages and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
my destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
navigation announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Navigation with images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
points of interest (POI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
predictive navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
select the destination on the map . . . . . . . . . . 181
split screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
traffic reports (TRAFFIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Navigation announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
O
Octane rating (petrol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98, 101
reset button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Oil properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
On-board computer
see Driver information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Open and close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
vehicle, with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
in the door cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
with the central locking button . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Original SEAT Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Outside temperature
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
P
Paint
code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
adjusting the display and audible warn-
ings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
automatic activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
parking aid plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
rear parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
sensors and camera: cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
surrounds warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
towing bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
visual indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Parking aid system
see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222, 224
Parking distance warning system
see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222, 224
ParkPilot
see Parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222, 224
Particulate filter
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Passenger
see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 58, 59, 60
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Petrol
Petrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Positioning seat belts
during pregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Power socket, 12 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Power socket, 5 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
290
Index
Preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Pr
eheating syst
em
contr
ol lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Products for vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Puncture
action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
R
Radar sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Radiator fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Radio
changing frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
information and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
memorise station logos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
memory buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Radio DISPLAY: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Raising the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Rear
headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Rear Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Rear Assist system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Rear fog light
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 117
see also Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Rear seat passengers
see Correct sitting position . . . . . . . . . 58, 59, 60
Rear View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Rear view mirror
adjusting the exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
anti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
interior anti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Rear window wiper blades
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
refuelling
Petrol additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
opening the fuel tank flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
synchronisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Repair work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Replacement
parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Replacement parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Replacing the battery
of the vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Reset the trip recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Reverse gear (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . 205
Revolution counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98, 99
Rims
changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Roll-back function
windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
attachment points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
roof load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Rotary knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Run-in
new engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
the first 1,500 km . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Running in
brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
the tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
S
Safe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Safety
child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
deactivating the front passenger airbag . . . . 17
safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Safety instructions
belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
use of seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
using child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 75
Saving tips (efficiency program) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Seat belt position
for pregnant women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 66
seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 66
Seat belt release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 66
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
height adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
protective function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
unfastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 67
Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
SEAT Service Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Selector lever
positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
291
Index
Selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Sel
ect
or l
ever (automatic gearbox)
malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
manual release mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Service
conditions of use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
digital maintenance plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
fixed service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
flexible service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
oil change service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Service proof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
servicing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
sets of services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Service interval indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Service intervals display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Service warning: check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Side airbags
description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
see also Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 277
Spanner symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Special features
Lowering the volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Speed warning device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Start-Stop
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Start-Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Start-Stop System
driver instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Starter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196, 198
Starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Steering
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Steering wheel
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16, 59
Storage compartment
passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Storage compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
glasses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
in front door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
in the centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
in the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
reflective vest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Switch
hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Switch-off delay (Infotainment system) . . . . . . 158
Switching off the engine
with the key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Switching off the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Switching on the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Switching the ignition on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Switch on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
T
Tailgate locking time extension
see Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Technical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Telephone
Bluetooth® profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
call lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
display and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
enter telephone number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
general information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
pairing a mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
places with special regulations . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Temperature selection
heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Tightening torque of wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
lap times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Tiptronic (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . 203, 206
Top speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Top Tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Tow-starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Tow-starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Towing bracket device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Towing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52, 81
Towline anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Traction control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
ball coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
correct placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
towing device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
trailer weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
use and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Trailer weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
292
Index
Transporting
luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
2
T
ransporting children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Transporting items
carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Trip recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Tyre Mobility Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
inflating a tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
sealing a tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Tyre Mobility System
see Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Tyre monitoring system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Tyre pressure monitoring
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Tyre Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Tyre repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Tyre repair kit
see Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Tyres
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
interchanging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
service life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
with compulsory direction of rotation . . . . . . . 51
with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Tyre tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Tyre wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
U
Unfasten the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Unlocking
central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Unlocking and locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
with Keyless Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
with the central locking button . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
connecting an external data storage de-
vice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
USB/AUX-IN Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
V
Vehicle
chassis number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
identification data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
raising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
unlocking and locking with Keyless Access . 113
Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44, 251
assisted starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
automatic disconnection of electrical
equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
checking electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
connecting and disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
disconnect and connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
lifting the cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
winter conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
winter service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Vehicle care
windscreen wipers service position . . . . . . . . . 56
Vehicle data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow sys-
tem
Vehicle interior monitoring and anti-tow
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Vehicle paint
maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Vehicle seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 78
Ventilation slits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
W
Warning symbols
see Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Washing the vehicle
external vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
high pressure cleaners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
loosening and tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Wheel cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255, 277
anti-theft wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48, 51, 78
new wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
spare wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
wheel cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
293
Index
Wheel trim
r
emo
ving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
49
Windows
electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 119
Window wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Headlight washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Windscreen washer fluid
checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Windscreen washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
jets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Windscreen washer water
checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Windscreen wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 128
cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
lifting the wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
replacing the wiper blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
windscreen washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Winter conditions
battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Winter service
battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
disconnecting and connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Wipe interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
294
SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand,
that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no
right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.
All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or
omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.
Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.
SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.
All rights on changes are reserved.
❀
This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.
© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.18
Vehicle identification data
Model:
Vehicle Registration:
Vehicle identification
number:
Date of vehicle registration
or vehicle delivery:
SEAT Official Service:
Service advisor:
Telephone:
Confirmation of receipt of documentation
and vehicle keys
The following items were delivered
with the vehicle:
YES NO
On-board documentation
First key
Second key
Correct working order of all keys was
checked
Location:
Date:
Signature of owner:
Owner’s manual
SEAT Toledo
6JA012720BL
Inglés
6JA012720BL (11.18)
SEAT Toledo Inglés (11.18)
